HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 7362 RADIANT NEIGHBORHOOD PARKADDENDUM No. 1
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Description of BID 7362: Radiant Neighborhood Park
OPENING DATE: 3:00 PM (Our Clock) April 16, 2012
To all prospective bidders under the specifications and contract documents described
above, the following changes/additions are hereby made and detailed in the following
sections of this addendum:
1. Date Changes:
The Opening Date has been changed to 3:00 PM (our clock), April 16, 2012
The Deadline for Questions has been changed to April 6, 2012
2. Revisions to the drawings and specifications:
Exhibit 1 – Revised Specifications
Exhibit 2 – Revised Drawings
Please contact John Stephen, CPPO, LEED AP, Senior Buyer, Buyer at (970) 221-6777
with any questions regarding this addendum.
RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED BY A WRITTEN
STATEMENT ENCLOSED WITH THE BID/QUOTE STATING THAT THIS
ADDENDUM HAS BEEN RECEIVED.
Financial Services
Purchasing Division
215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor
PO Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522
970.221.6775
970.221.6707
fcgov.com/purchasing
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 1 of 13
EXHIBIT 1 – REVISED SPECIFICATIONS
1. SECTION 01714 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND REMOVAL,
PART 1, 1.01 REQUIREMENTS, D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
delete numbers 1,2,4,5 and 6.
2. SECTION 01714 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND REMOVAL,
PART 1, 1.03 SUBMITTALS, H. Delete the word “LEED” and substitute the word
“SITES”
3. SECTION 01714 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND REMOVAL,
PART 3 EXECUTION, 3.01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
IMPLEMENTATION, Delete section J. in entirety.
4. SECTION 01714 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND REMOVAL,
PART 3 EXECUTION, 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE AND RECYCLED
MATERIALS, A. Delete: “as specified in Section 0170.”
5. Section 01714 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND REMOVAL,
PART 1, 1.01 REQUIREMENTS, D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
delete numbers 1,2,4,5 and 6.
6. SECTION 01732 DEMOLITION, PART 1, 1.02 SUMMARY, A., 2., Add “Refer to
Section 01714 for Construction Waste Management and Removal.”
7. SECTION 01015, LEED REQUIREMENTS, replaced in total with SECTION 01015
SITES REQUIREMENTS
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 2 of 13
SECTION 01015
SITES REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall follow the general requirements and procedures for compliance with
certain SITES Sustainable Initiative Version 2009, prerequisites and credits needed for
the Project to obtain SITES certification.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
2. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for SITES design
and performance criteria.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following SITES reference standards are included in the SITES Sustainable
Initiative, as they pertain to specific SITES credit items. Obtain and maintain a file
copy of those reference standards that affect the work of this Section. They are
incorporated into this Section by reference:
1. Sustainable Sites, Prerequisite 1, Erosion and Sedimentation Control: U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency 2003 Construction General Permit,
Stormwater Management for Construction Activities, Chapter 3.
a. Applicable development standards of the City of Fort Collins or other
local jurisdiction.
2. Sustainable Sites, Credit 6.2, Stormwater Treatment: U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of
Nonpoint Pollution in Coastal Waters, January 1993 (Document No. EPA-840-B-
92-002) Best Management Practices, Chapter 4, Part 2, Urban Runoff.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Regionally Manufactured, Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Materials that
are manufactured or assembled within a the following radiuses of the Project location:
a. Soils: Extraction, harvest or recovery and manufacture must occur within 50 miles
b. Aggregate: Extraction, harvest or recovery and manufacture must occur within 50
miles
c. Plants: All growing facilities for the plant must be located within 250 miles
d. All other Materials: Extraction, harvest or recovery and manufacture must occur
within 500 miles
B. Recycled Content: Percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or
otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing
process (pre-consumer), or after consumer use (post-consumer).
C. Certified Wood: Wood-based materials and products which are certified in accordance
with the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Principles and Criteria for sustainably
harvested and processed wood building components.
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 3 of 13
D. Certificates of Chain-of-Custody: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that
wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited
certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria". Certificates shall
include evidence that mill is certified for chain-of-custody by an FSC-accredited
certification body.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: SITES Submittals are required in addition to other submittals specified in Section
01340 and Specific Sections of these Specifications. Submit one (1) submittal for each
SITES required product data submittal.
1. SITES submittals shall be submitted with the SITES Credit number shown on the
cover sheet of the submittal and the subject line of the email.
2. Provide a record electronic copy of the SITES submittals as part of project
closeout.
B. Project Materials Cost Data: Contractor shall be responsible for tracking material costs,
and provide statement indicating the types and total cost of building materials used for the
Project, exclusive of labor for installation.
C. SITES Documentation Submittals: SITES Submittal log showing all Prerequisite and Credits
cross-referenced with Specification Section.
1. Prerequisite 7.1: Control and retain construction pollutants: provide
documentation of compliance with erosion control plan
2. Prerequisite 7.2 Restore soils disturbed during construction (for all sections listed
below a minimum of 2 tests with at least 1 test per 4000sf of disturbed soil area):
b. provide soils test results prior to start of project showing, texture,
bulk density, organic matter, infiltration results, soil biological
function and chemical characteristics.
c. Provide all soil preparation and amendment receipts
d. Provide soils test results after soil preparation showing organic
matter at a minimum of 3% within top 12 inches of soil prior to
planting
e. provide test results for compaction or infiltration to meet SITES
specification within vegetative areas
f. provide test results for soil biological function or soil chemical
characteristics to meet SITES specification in vegetative areas.
3. Credit 7.4 Divert construction and demolition materials from disposal
a. provide narrative of construction waste management plan
b. provide general description of each type of construction and
demolition material generated
c. provide location of receiving agent
d. provide quantity of waste diverted in tons or cubic yards
4. Credit 7.5 Reuse or Recycle vegetation, rocks and soil generated during
construction
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 4 of 13
a. provide estimate of vegetation, soils, rock waste to be generated in
tons or cubic yards
b. provide location of receiving agent
c. provide quantity of materials received by receiving agent in tons or
cubic yards
d. provide documentation (receipts/photographs) to verify land-clearing
materials are retained according to SITES requirements
e. provide letter with owner’s signature verifying no land-clearing
materials were disposed in a landfill
5. Credit 5.5 Use recycled content materials
a. Provide total cost or replacement value of project materials
b. Provide a tabulation of each material used on the project that is
being tracked for recycle content
c. The tabulation need to include
6. Credit 5.7 Use Regional Materials
a. Provide a list of all materials, plants and soils transported to the site,
including the following information for each:
b. cost or replacement value
c. name of manufacturer or grower
d. distance between site and the manufacturer/grower
e. distance between the site and the extraction location for each raw
material contained within each product (or growing location for
plants)
f. For materials with a fraction of extracted/harvested/recovered and
manufactured with specified distance, indicate the percentage of
product by weight that meets criteria
D. SITES Submittal Log: Maintain a SITES Submittal Log, organized by specification section
and SITES credit. Submit preliminary SITES Submittal Log to the Owner for review.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
A. Credit 5.5 Use recycled content materials
1. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled
content plus ½ of the pre-consumer content constitutes at least 40% of the total
value of the materials in the project.
2.02 REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Credit 5.7 Use Regional Materials
1. Soils: Extraction, harvest or recovery and manufacture must occur within 50 miles
2. Aggregate: Extraction, harvest or recovery and manufacture must occur within 50
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 5 of 13
miles
3. Plants: All growing facilities for the plant must be located within 250 miles
4. All other Materials: Extraction, harvest or recovery and manufacture must occur
within 500 miles
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITES CONSTRUCTION COORDINATOR
A. Contractor shall assign a SITES Construction Coordinator to be responsible for
monitoring SITES submittals and requirements, preparing Templates, and coordinating
with Owner.
END OF SECTION
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 6 of 13
EXHIBIT 2 – REVISED DRAWINGS
1. Sheets L-4, L-5, L-9, L-10, L11 – replaced with revised drawings.
2. Changes to L4 and L5 include but not limited to change of width on Tot Lot
border and HC ramp along plazas, revised walk in southeast corner of site,
labeling of boulder supply and type
3. Changes to L9-L11 include but not limited to change of tree species, change of
turf around walk changes from L4 and L5, and additional sand in teen adventure
area
4. Addition of drawing C-X which shows only existing and proposed grades for
clarity
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 7 of 13
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 8 of 13
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 9 of 13
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 10 of 13
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 11 of 13
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 12 of 13
Addendum 1
7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Page 13 of 13
Financial Services
Purchasing Division
215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor
PO Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522
970.221.6775
970.221.6707
fcgov.com/purchasing
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
RADIANT NEIGHBORHOOD PARK
BID NO. 7362
PURCHASING DIVISION
215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS
APRIL 12, 2012 – 3:00 P.M. (OUR CLOCK)
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Pages
BID INFORMATION
00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00020-1 - 00020-2
00100 Instruction to Bidders 00100-1 - 00100-9
00300 Bid Form 00300-1 - 00300-3
00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00400-1
00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 - 00410-2
00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00420-1 - 00420-3
00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors 00430-1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
00500 Agreement Forms 00500-1
00510 Notice of Award 00510-0
00520 Agreement 00520-1 - 00520-6
00530 Notice to Proceed 00530-1
00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1
00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 - 00610-2
00615 Payment Bond 00615-1 - 00615-2
00630 Certificate of Insurance 00630-1
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00635-1
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00640-1
00650 Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) 00650-1 - 00650-2
00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 00670-1 - 00670-2
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700 General Conditions 00700-1 - 00700-34
Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2
00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 - 00800-2
00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00900-1
00950 Contract Change Order 00950-1 - 00950-2
00960 Application for Payment 00960-1 - 00960-4
SPECIFICATIONS
SOILS REPORT
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
Date: March 21, 2012
Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as
OWNER), at the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on April 12,
2012, for the Radiant Neighborhood Park; BID NO. 7362. If delivered, they are to be
delivered to 215 North Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If
mailed, the mailing address is P. O. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580.
At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received
will be publicly opened and read aloud.
The Contract Documents provide for the construction of Bid 7362 Radiant
Neighborhood Park, which is located at 3651 Kechter Road, Fort Collins. The Work
earthwork grading; regulated stormwater drainage improvements; installation of water,
sewer and electrical utilities; restroom; picnic shelter; plazas (including concrete walls,
sandstone boulder walls, concrete ramp and concrete bridge crossing); playground
(including concrete edger, sandstone boulders, sand, safety surfacing and underdrain
system); soil preparation and fine grading; irrigation; landscaping, landscape boulders,
site furnishings and miscellaneous items of work. The site is approximately 8 acres in
size of which approximately 6 acres will be disturbed and constructed upon.
All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with the City of Fort
Collins, 215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524.
A prebid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will
be held at 1:00 PM, on April 2, 2012, in the Community Room at 215 N Mason
Street, Fort Collins. A job site walkthrough will follow at 3651 Kechter Road.
Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at
this meeting.
The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at:
City of Fort Collins BuySpeed: https://www.fcgov.com/eprocurement
Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents.
The Work is expected to be commenced within the time as required by Section 2.3 of
General Conditions. Substantial Completion of the Work is required as specified in the
Agreement.
The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment
Bond guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations
arising from the performance of the Contract.
No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of forty-five (45) days after the date fixed for
opening Bids.
The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities
and irregularities therein.
Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid
in the form specified in the Instructions to Bidders.
Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council,
shall have a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property,
equipment, material, supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises
directly or indirectly any decision-making authority concerning such sale or any
supervisory authority over the services to be rendered. This rule also applies to
subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift, gratuity favor, entertainment,
kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has or is seeking to do
business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited.
City of Fort Collins
James B. O'Neill, II, CPPO, FNIGP
Purchasing & Risk Management Director
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.0 DEFINED TERMS
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard
General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the
meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means
one who submits a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a
Bid to Bidder. The terms "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified,
responsible and responsive Bidder to whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's
evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding
Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to
Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all
Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the
Invitation to Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be
examined at the locations identified in the Invitation to Bid.
2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither
OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and
00430 fully executed.
2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on
the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do
not confer a license or grant for any other use.
3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit
at the time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including
financial data, a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and
evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is
located. Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business
in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification
prior to award of the contract. The Statement of Qualifications shall be prepared
on the form provided in Section 00420.
3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in
determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered:
(1) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide
the services required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide
the service promptly and within the time specified without delay or interference,
(3) the character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the
bidder, (4) the quality of the bidder's performance of previous contracts or
services, (5) the previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws and
ordinances relating to the contract or service, (6) the sufficiency of the financial
resources and ability of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the service,
(7) the quality, availability and adaptability of the materials and services to the
particular use required, (8) the ability of the bidder to provide future maintenance
and service for the use of the subject of the contract, and
(9) any other circumstances which will affect the bidder's performance of the
contract.
3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former Work so
that no just claims are pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from
a Bidder who is engaged on any other Work which would impair his ability to
perform or finance this Work.
3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with
the City or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City.
4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine
the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with
local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of
the Work, (c) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or
performance of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations
with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of:
Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-4.2.
4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by
Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that
without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work
required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by
the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope
and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for
performance and furnishing of the Work.
5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA.
5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to
be submitted in writing to the Engineer and the OWNER. Interpretation or
clarifications considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued
only by Addenda. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for
opening of the Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal
written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will
be without legal effect.
5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project should be directed to the
Engineer. Questions regarding submittal of bids should be directed to the City of
Fort Collins' Purchasing Division.
5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed
advisable by OWNER or Engineer.
5.4. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER
as having received the Bidding documents.
6.0 BID SECURITY
6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in
the amount stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the
form of a certified or bank cashier's check payable to OWNER or a Bid Bond on
the form enclosed herewith. The Bid Bond must be executed by a surety meeting
the requirements of the General Conditions for surety bonds.
6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder
has executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security,
whereupon Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute
and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required contract security within 15
days of the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid
Security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom
OWNER believes to have reasonable chance receiving the award may be
retained by OWNER until the earlier of the seventh day after the effective date of
the Agreement or the thirty-first day after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid
Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid Security with Bids which
are not competitive will be returned within seven days after the Bid opening.
7.0 CONTRACT TIME.
The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to be
substantially complete and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the
Contract Times) are set forth in the Agreement.
8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.
Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement.
9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment
described on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without
consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated
on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal"
item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if
acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered
by Engineer until after the "effective date of the Agreement". The procedure for
submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by
Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which may be supplemented in
the General Requirements.
10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal
subcontractors he proposes to use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430
contained within these Documents.
10.2. If OWNER or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to
any proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given,
request the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute
without an increase in Bid price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to
make any substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest
responsive and responsible Bidder that proposes to use acceptable
subcontractors. Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or organization listed
and to whom OWNER or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the
giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and
ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of
the Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier
or other persons or organizations against whom he has reasonable objection.
The use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by OWNER prior to
the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work.
11.0 BID FORM.
11.1. A copy of the Bid Form is bound in the Contract Documents which may be
retained by the Bidder. A separate unbound copy is enclosed for submission with
the Bid.
11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the
form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take
precedence. Unit prices shall govern over extensions of sums.
11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the
president or a vice-president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by
evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested
by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of
incorporation shall be shown below the corporate name.
11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed
by a partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of
the partnership must be shown below the signature.
11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture
or by an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or
company interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form.
11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the
numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form).
11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures,
interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is
signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to
identify any alteration so initialed.
11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid
shall be shown.
12.0 BID PRICING.
Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules.
13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS.
13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to
Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project
title, Bid No., and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid
Security, Bid Form, Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule
of Subcontractors as required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail
or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate
envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date
for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made
by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be
returned unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at
the location designated for receipt of Bids.
13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not
receive consideration.
13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different
names will not be accepted from one firm or association.
14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS.
14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly
executed (in a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place
where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
14.2. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an
authorized representative provided he can prove his identity and authority at any
time prior to the opening of Bids.
14.3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the
receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these
Instructions to Bidders.
15.0 OPENINGS OF BIDS.
Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly as
indicated in the Invitation to Bid. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and
major alternates (if any) will be made available after the opening of Bids.
16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE.
All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid
Opening, but OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the
Bid Security prior to that date.
17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT.
17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all
informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate
contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all
nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER
reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would
not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether
because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established
by OWNER. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures
and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders,
whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such
alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or
prior to the Notice of Award.
17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of
the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons
and organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may
consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and
guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation
in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of
Award.
17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to
assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors,
Suppliers and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive
and responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that
the award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the
evaluated lowest base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the
lowest Bid total for the Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for
sum of all schedules. Only one contract will be awarded.
17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a
Notice of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening.
18.0 CONTRACT SECURITY.
The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's
requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder
delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the
required Contract Security.
19.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT.
When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be
accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement
with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days
thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign and deliver the required number of
counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER with the
required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER hall deliver one fully
signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by
a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.
20.0 TAXES.
OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the
Contract Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary
Conditions.
21.0 RETAINAGE.
Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement.
22.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS.
Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the
Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the
resolutions is available for review in the Purchasing and Risk Management
Division or the City Clerk's office.
A. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires
that suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement
to certify that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn
hazardous waste as a fuel.
23.0 COLLUSIVE OR SHAM BIDS.
Any Bid deemed by the City in its sole discretion to be a collusive or sham Bid
will be rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of
this Bid assures that such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid.
24.0 BID RESULTS.
For information regarding results for individual Bids send a self-addressed, self-
stamped envelope and a Bid tally will be mailed to you. Bid results will be posted
in the Purchasing office seven (7) days after the Bid Opening.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
PROJECT: 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
Place:
Date:
1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to all
conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company,
Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the
State of Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the
Contract Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on
the following Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules.
2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is
made in good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or
persons Bidding for the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and
subject to all the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to
Bidders, the Agreement, the detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining
to the Work to be done, all of which have been examined by the undersigned.
3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in
the sum of
($ ) in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and Instructions to
Bidders.
4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance
Bond and a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen
(15) calendar days from the date when the written notice of the award of the
contract is delivered to him at the address given on this Bid. The name and
address of the corporate surety with which the Bidder proposes to furnish the
specified performance and payment Bonds is as follows:
.
5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their
individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by
implication or appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR
under one of the items listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is
named in said list.
6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid
Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents.
7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No.
through .
8. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid)
SECTION 00300 – BID SCHEDULE
Provide materials and labor associated with installation, maintenance, start-up and
Owner training, as indicated on the drawings and in the Specifications, for each of the
following bid items. Owner is responsible for payment of Building Permit application
fees.
Bid Item #1 Demolition & Traffic Control
To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following:
Demolition, Disposal, Protection of Items to Remain, Tree Protection, Traffic Control, as
indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
Bid Item #2. Landscape & Irrigation
To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following:
Landscaping, Fine Grading, Soil Testing and Amendments, Tree Planting and Backfill,
Irrigation System, Seed, Sod and Mulch,) as indicated on the Drawings and in the
Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In
Writing_______________________________________________________________
Bid Item #3. Park Architecture
To include all materials complete, in place (such as, but not limited to the following:
(Excluding Custom Picnic Shelter), Restroom w/attached shelter, Foundation, LED
lighting on Restroom face, Solar Panels and Utilities located within the structures and
within a distance of five feet (5’) from their foundations), as indicated on the Drawings,
and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
Bid Item #4. Custom Picnic Shelter
To include all materials complete, in place: Custom Picnic Shelter, Central Stone and
Boulders, as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing_____________________________________________________________
Bid Item #5. Earthwork and Utilities
To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Site
Clearing, Water Control, Earthwork, Erosion Control, Water Utilities, Sanitary Sewer,
Rip Rap, Storm Sewer, Sub-drains, Power Distribution and Controls), as indicated on
the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing_____________________________________________________________
Bid Item #6. Playground Area
To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Sand
Surfacing, Poured in Place Surfacing, Equipment), as indicated on the Drawings, and in
the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing_____________________________________________________________
Bid Item #7. Bridges
To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: 85’
Bridge w/cable railings and LED lighting, 73’ Bridge with cable railings), as indicated on
the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
Bid Item #8. Hardscape
To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Site
Preparation, Base Materials, Sidewalks, Plazas, Shelter Pad, Ramps, Playground
Sidewalk w/Thickened Edge, Varying Height Concrete Walls, and Art Shelter
foundations), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
Bid Item #9. Site Furnishings
To include all materials complete, in place (such as, but not limited to the following:
Picnic Tables, Manufactured Benches, Bicycle Rack, Drinking Fountain, and Trash
cans), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
Bid Item #10. Boulders
To include all materials complete, in place (such as, but not limited to the following:
Landscape Boulders in playgrounds, Earth Plaza Retaining Wall boulders, Wind Plaza
Seat Wall Boulders, Boulder steps to Water Plaza, Boulders in center of Water Plaza,
Boulder seats, and (does not include Boulders in center of Custom Picnic Shelter)), as
indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
TOTAL BASE BID (Bid Items #1 thru #10)
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
ADDITIONS / DELETIONS
Add or subtract the following amounts for the items listed below.
Alternate Bid Item #1. Pre-Fabricated Picnic Shelter
To include all materials complete, in place, Delete Custom Picnic Shelter (Bid item #4)
and Add Pre-Fabricated Picnic Shelter (Coverworx Model: GA-1530-SW) as indicated
on the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
Alternate Bid Item #2. Stainless Steel Wrap on Building Columns and Replace
Galvanized Metal
To include all materials complete, in place, including but not limited to, wrap large steel
pipe columns with furring strips and rolled stainless steel sheets, replace galvanized
metal panels, soffits, ceilings, fascias and trims with stainless steel, replace small tube
steel columns on Custom Picnic Shelter (Bid item #4) with stainless steel tubes as
indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications.
Lump Sum Price $______________________________
In Writing______________________________________________________________
UNIT PRICES
For additions and deletions to the Contract, the following unit prices shall be applicable
for the specific items listed. Unit Prices shall be complete, in place including required
labor, materials, permits, equipment, implements, testing, parts and supplies necessary
for, and incidental to proper installation, as indicated on the Drawings, and in the
Specifications.
A. The Contractor agrees that for requested and/or required changes in the scope of
work, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted in accordance with the following unit
prices, where the Owner elects to use this method of determining costs.
B. The Contractor is advised that the unit prices will enter into the determination of the
successful bidder. Unreasonable prices may result in rejection of the entire bid
proposal.
C. Unit prices for irrigation shall include pipe, fittings, valves, concrete thrust block
and stabilizers and any other items shown on the Drawings, as described in the
Specifications or recommended by the manufacturer as part of the installation.
D. The unit prices quoted by the Contractor shall be those unit prices that will be
charged or credited for labor and materials to be provided regardless of the total
number of units and/or amount of labor required for added or deleted items of
work.
DEMOLITION
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Demo – Existing Curb and Gutter $__________________LF
Demo – Existing Concrete Sidewalk $__________________SF
Demo – Asphalt Saw Cutting $__________________LF
EARTHWORK AND UTILITIES
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Imported Topsoil $__________________CY
Imported Fill $__________________CY
Earthwork - Cut and Stockpiling $__________________CY
Earthwork – Fill $__________________CY
Imported Structural Fill $__________________CY
Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling $__________________CY
Topsoil Spreading and Placement $__________________CY
Vehicle Tracking Pad Removal $__________________SF
Temporary Stream Crossing Removal $__________________SF
Rip Rap- Type M $________________TON
Rip Rap- Type L $________________TON
Waterline Service Pipe – 2” $______________ ___LF
Waterline Service Pipe – ¾” $__________________EA
Waterline Thrust Block $__________________EA
Waterline Tapping Saddle $__________________EA
Waterline Swivel Tee $__________________EA
Waterline Bends $__________________EA
Waterline Joint Restraint $__________________EA
2” Water Service blowout assembly $__________________EA
2” Water Meter and Meter Pit $__________________EA
2” Water Service - curb stop $__________________EA
Sanitary Sewer Pipe – 4” PVC $__________________LF
Sanitary Sewer Pipe – 8” PVC $__________________LF
Sanitary Sewer - Cleanout $__________________EA
Storm Sewer – 18” RCP $__________________LF
Storm Sewer – 15” RCP $__________________LF
Storm Sewer – 12” RCP $__________________LF
Storm Sewer – 18” Flared End Section $__________________EA
Storm Sewer – 12” Flared End Section $__________________EA
Storm Sewer – Type C Inlet $__________________EA
Storm Sewer – Area Inlet $__________________EA
Playground Under-drain – 15” ADS Smooth Wall $__________________LF
24” ADS Drain Basin $__________________EA
Erosion Control – Earthen Berm $__________________LF
Erosion Control – Inlet Protection $__________________EA
Erosion Control – Wattle Protection $__________________EA
10” Diameter – EZ Flow with 4” Pipe Under-drain $__________________LF
4” Perforated Landscape Drain Pipe $__________________LF
Solar Panel $__________________EA
FOUNDATION
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Overruns and underruns of 12” diameter drilled pier $__________________LF
Overruns and underruns of 18” diameter drilled pier $__________________LF
HARDSCAPE
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” thick) $__________________SF
Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” thick) - Tot Lot Thickened Edge
$__________________SF
Integral Color Concrete Pavement (5” thick) $__________________SF
Glasscrete Pavement (5” thick) $__________________SF
Pavers on Sand $__________________SF
Porous Stone Pavement $__________________SF
Concrete Edger $__________________LF
Concrete Curb and Gutter $__________________LF
Wall #1 – 8” Concrete Wall Varying Height $__________________LF
Wall #2 – Sandstone Boulder Wall $__________________LF
Wall #3 – Abutment Wall for 85’ Bridge $__________________LF
Wall #4 – Play Climbing Wall $__________________LF
Standard Grey Concrete Base Pavement for P.I.P. Surfacing (4” thick)
$__________________SF
Artwork Shelter Foundation $__________________EA
PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Loose-Fill Surface (Sand) $________________TON
Poured in Place Surfacing $__________________SF
IRRIGATION
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Master Valve- 3” $__________________EA
Flow Sensor- 4” $__________________EA
Air Relief Valve- 2” $__________________EA
Irrigation for turf (seed or sod) areas less than 10 feet in width
$__________________SF
Irrigation for turf (seed or sod) areas greater than10 feet in width
$__________________SF
Pop-Up Spray Sprinkler with Toro Precision nozzle $__________________EA
Pop-Up Spray Sprinkler with MP Rotator nozzle $__________________EA
Pop-Up Rotor Sprinkler with nozzle – Rain Bird 8005’s $__________________EA
Drip Irrigation – per Shrub, Perennial or Grass in planting bed
$__________________EA
Drip Irrigation – per Shrub or Tree in seeded area $__________________EA
Sleeve Pipe- 2” Class 200 PVC $__________________LF
Sleeve Pipe- 3” Class 200 PVC $__________________LF
Sleeve Pipe- 4” Class 200 PVC $__________________LF
Sleeve Pipe- 6” Class 200 PVC $__________________LF
Sleeve Pipe- 8” Class 200 PVC $__________________LF
Isolation Gate Valve Assembly – 3” $__________________EA
Isolation Gate Valve Assembly – 4” $__________________EA
Quick Coupling Valve Assembly $__________________EA
Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 1”
$__________________EA
Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 1.5”
$__________________EA
Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 2”
$__________________EA
Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 3”
$__________________EA
Remote Control Valve Assembly for Drip Laterals – 1” $__________________EA
Flush Cap Assembly $__________________EA
Mainline Pipe – 3” $__________________LF
Mainline Pipe – 4” $__________________LF
Lateral Pipe – 1” $__________________LF
Lateral Pipe – 1.25” $__________________LF
Lateral Pipe – 1.5” $__________________LF
Lateral Pipe – 2” $__________________LF
Lateral Pipe – 2 1/2” $__________________LF
Lateral Pipe – 3” $__________________LF
Lateral Pipe – 4” $__________________LF
LANDSCAPE
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Finish Grading $__________________SF
Organic Amendment $__________________CY
Irrigated Fescue Mix Turf Seeding $__________________SF
Dryland Turf Seeding $__________________SF
Irrigated Blue Gramma Turf Seeding $__________________SF
Irrigated Buffalo Sod $__________________SF
Evergreen Tree – 8’ height $__________________EA
Deciduous Tree – 3” caliper $__________________EA
Deciduous Tree – 2” caliper $__________________EA
Deciduous Shrub – 5 gal $__________________EA
Evergreen Shrub – 5 gal $__________________EA
Perennial – 1 gal $__________________EA
Ornamental Grass – 5 gal $__________________EA
Weed Barrier $__________________SF
City Supplied Mulch – Installation Only $__________________SF
Sandstone Landscape Boulder 4’ $__________________EA
Sandstone Landscape Boulder 3’ $__________________EA
Sandstone Landscape Boulder 2’ $__________________EA
City Supplied Landscape Log – Installation Only $__________________LF
SITE FURNISHINGS
ITEM UNIT PRICE
Site Bench $__________________EA
Bike Rack $__________________EA
Picnic Table $__________________EA
Trash Can $__________________EA
Drinking Fountain $__________________EA
LED Rope Lighting $__________________LF
LED Spot Lighting $__________________EA
9. PRICES
The foregoing prices shall include all labor, materials, transportation, shoring, removal,
dewatering, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the complete Work in place of the
several kinds called for.
Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to delete items in the Bid or change
quantities at his sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so
long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total
Agreement Price.
RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED:
CONTRACTOR
BY:
Printed Date
Title
License Number (If Applicable)
(Seal - if Bid is by corporation) Attest:
Address
Telephone
Email
SECTION 00400
SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS
00410 Bid Bond
00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications
00430 Schedule of Subcontractors
SECTION 00410
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned
as Principal, and as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort
Collins, Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $ for the payment of which, well and truly
to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors, and assigns.
THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to
the City of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof
to enter into a Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, 7362
Radiant Neighborhood Park.
NOW THEREFORE,
(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or
(b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a
Contract in the form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in
accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance
of said Contract, and for payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing
materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the
Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be
void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly
understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims
hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as
herein stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said
Surety and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the
time within which the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive
notice of any such extension.
Surety Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the
State of Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands
and seals this day of , 20__, and such of them as are corporations have
caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by
their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.
PRINCIPAL SURETY
Name:
Address:
By: By:
Title: Title:
ATTEST:
By:
(SEAL) (SEAL)
SECTION 00420
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive.
This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on
separate attached sheets. Please see section 01010 Part 1.02 for additional bidder
qualifications.
1. Name of Bidder:
2. Permanent main office address:
3. When organized:
4. If a corporation, where incorporated:
5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your
present firm or trade name?
6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and
the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.)
7. General character of Work performed by your company:
8. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you?
If so, where and why?
9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract?
If so, where and why?
10. Are you debarred by any government agency?
If yes list agency name.
11. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the
approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type
of construction.
12. List your major equipment available for this contract.
13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project:
14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization,
including officers:
15. Credit available: $
16. Bank Reference:
17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other
information that may be required by the OWNER?
18. Are you licensed as a General Contractor?
If yes, in what city, county and state?
What class, license and numbers?
19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract?
If yes, what percent of total contract?
And to whom?
20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time?
IF yes, DETAIL
21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL
What company?
22. What are your company's bonding limitations?
23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation
to furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital
comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications.
Dated at ________________ this ______ day of __________________, 20__.
Name of Bidder
By:
Title:
State of
County of
being duly sworn deposes and says that he
is of and that
(name of organization)
the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true
and correct.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ day of____________, 20__.
(Seal)
Notary Public
My commission expires: .
SECTION 00430
SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS
List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing
over 10% of the contract.
ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT FORMS
00510 Notice of Award
00520 Agreement
00530 Notice to Proceed
SECTION 00510
NOTICE OF AWARD
DATE:
TO:
PROJECT: 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER")
You are hereby notified that your Bid dated , 20 for the above project has
been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an
Agreement for 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park.
The Price of your Agreement is ($ ).
Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings)
accompany this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered
separately or otherwise made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the
date of this Notice of Award, that is by , 20 .
1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the
Agreement including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must
bear your signature on the cover of the page.
2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as
specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and
Supplementary Conditions.
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to
consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid
Security forfeited.
Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you
one (1) fully-signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents
attached.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
James B. O’Neill, II, CPPO, FNIGP
Director of Purchasing & Risk Management
SECTION 00520
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of in the year of 20 and
shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City.
The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and
(hereinafter called CONTRACTOR)
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set
forth, agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1. WORK
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may
be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 7362 Radiant
Neighborhood Park and is generally described in Section 01010.
ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER
The Project has been designed by City of Fort Collins Park Planning, who is
hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities
and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract
Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES
3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete by November 1, 2012 as provided
in the General Conditions and completed and ready for Final Payment and
Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions by December 1, 2012.
3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of
the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the
Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1. above, plus
any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General
Conditions.
They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a
legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed
on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and
CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated damages for delay (but not as penalty)
CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter.
1) Substantial Completion:
Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) for each calendar day or fraction
thereof that expires after the November 1, 2012 deadline for
Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is Substantially
Complete.
2) Final Acceptance:
After Substantial Completion, One Hundred Fifty Dollars ($150.00)
for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the
December 1, 2012 deadline for Final Payment and Acceptance until
the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance.
ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE
4.1. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows:
Dollars ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and incorporated
herein by this reference.
ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article
14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by
ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions.
5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on
account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for
Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction
as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of
the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.6 of the
General Conditions and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of
units completed, and in accordance with the General Requirements concerning
Unit Price Work.
5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as
contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each
case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts
as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with
paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole discretion of Owner, on
recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines that the character and progress
of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may
determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain
satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work
completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial
Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of
materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably
stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided
in paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the application
Section 00520 Page 3 for payment.
5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount
sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of
the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or
OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General
Conditions or as provided by law.
5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in
accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay
the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided
in said paragraph 14.13.
ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes
the following representations:
6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the
Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and Laws
and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or
furnishing of the Work.
6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of
subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in
the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General
Conditions.
6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes
responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to
supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the
subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may
affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the
Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the
other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the
provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar
information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes.
6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown
or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate
location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data
in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by
CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price,
within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3.
of the General Conditions.
6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations,
examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.
6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written
resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the definition of
“Contract Documents” in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions, and such other
items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are incorporated herein by
this reference.
7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions
in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and
incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the
following:
7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion
7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance
7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases
7.2.4 Consent of Surety
7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate
7.2.6 Application for Payment
7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows:
SHEET NO. DESCRIPTION OF SHEETS
L-1 Cover Sheet
L-2 General Notes
L-3 Existing Conditions & Demolition Plan
L-4 Site Plan
L-5 Core Area Site Plan
L-6 Site Details
L-7 Site Details
L-8 Site Details
L-9 Landscape Plan
L-10 Landscape Plan
L-11 Core Area Landscape Plan
L-12 Landscape Details
IR-1 Irrigation Cover Sheet
IR-2 Irrigation Plan
IR-3 Irrigation Plan
IR-4 Irrigation Plan
IR-5 Irrigation Details
IR-6 Irrigation Details
IR-7 Irrigation Details
C-1 Utility Plan
C-2 Utility Plan
C-3 Grading Plan
C-4 Grading Plan
C-5 Core Area Grading Plan
C-6 Core Area Grading Plan Details
C-7 Core Area Underdrain Plan
C-8 Storm Sewer Plan & Profiles
C-9 Erosion Control Plan
C-10 Bridge Crossing Plan and Profile
C-11 Construction Details
C-12 Construction Details
C-13 Construction Details
C-14 Construction Details
SS-1 85 Foot Bridge
SS-2 73 Foot Bridge
SS-3 Details and Notes
SS-4 Deck Framing Plan
A-1 First Floor Plan
A-2 Roof Plan
A-3 Reflective Ceiling Plan
A-4 Building Elevations
A-5 Building Sections
A-6 Typical Details
A-7 Door/Window Details
S-0.1 Structural General Notes
S-1.1 Foundation Plan
S-2.1 Framing Plan
S-3.1 Details
S-3.2 Details
M-1 HVAC & Plumbing Plan
M-2 Schedules, Legend and Details
E-1 Electrical Site Plan
E-2 Electrical Plans
E-3 Electrical One Line & Schedules
E-4 Electrical Details
The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and dated.
Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated.
7.4. Addenda Numbers to , inclusive.
7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other
documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents
pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions.
7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated by
reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be amended,
modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General
Conditions.
ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS
8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the
General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the
Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written
consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without
limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be
assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this
restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in
any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge
that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Document.
8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors,
assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners,
successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants,
Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document.
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR:
By: By:
DARIN ATTEBERRY, CITY MANAGER
By:
JAMES B. O’NEILL II, CPPO, FNIGP PRINTED
DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING
AND RISK MANAGEMENT
Title: Title:
Date: Date:
Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL)
City Clerk
Address for giving notices:
P. O. Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522 Attest:
Approved as to Form Address for giving notices:
Assistant City Attorney
License No.:
SECTION 00530
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Description of Work: 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
To:
This notice is to advise you:
That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the
CONTRACTOR and the OWNER.
That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been
received by the OWNER.
That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents.
Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby
authorized and directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as
required by the Agreement.
Dated this day of , 20 .
The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20_
and , 20__, respectively.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
Title:
ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of
, 20__.
CONTRACTOR:
By:
Title:
SECTION 00600
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
00610 Performance Bond
00615 Payment Bond
00630 Certificate of Insurance
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance
00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR)
00660 Consent of Surety
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate
SECTION 00610
PERFORMANCE BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300
Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as
the "OWNER", in the penal sum of ____________
in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made,
we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the day of , 20 , a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
Project, 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the
undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the
original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or
without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall
satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and
save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure
to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER
may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in
full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of
which shall be deemed an original, this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement.
If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00615
PAYMENT BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins,
300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to
as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of
in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made,
we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the day of , 20 , a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
project, 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors,
and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work
provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including
all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools,
consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance
premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or
otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts,
each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement.
If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00630
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance.
SECTION 00635
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER)
DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: 7362 Radiant
Neighborhood Park
PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado
INCLUDE:
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT DATE:
The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized
representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or
specified part of the project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially
completed on the above date.
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may
not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and
agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated.
CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially
complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project
at 12:01 a.m., on . The responsibility for heat, utilities,
security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under
"Remarks" below.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By:
OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
REMARKS:
SECTION 00640
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
, 20__
TO:
Gentlemen:
You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of
Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by for the City of Fort
Collins project, 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park.
A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final
Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are
dated , 20 .
In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and
guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date:____________
__, 20__.
Sincerely,
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Title:
SECTION 00650
LIEN WAIVER RELEASE
(CONTRACTOR)
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER)
FROM: (CONTRACTOR)
PROJECT: 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from
the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by
the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design,
improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project.
2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the
receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR
voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's
liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor
and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have,
claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or
performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the
above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or
assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the
project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved
by the project.
3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or
performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair
of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its
agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various
Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further
affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or
possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in
the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or
its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project.
4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if
any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the
CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or
assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or
assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable
attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims.
5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes
and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver
Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the
benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any
labor and material bonds for the project.
Signed this day of , 20__.
CONTRACTOR:
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Secretary
STATE OF COLORADO )
)ss.
COUNTY OF LARIMER )
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20__, by
.
Witness my hand and official seal.
My Commission Expires: Notary Public
SECTION 00660
CONSENT OF SURETY
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER")
CONTRACTOR:
PROJECT: 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
CONTRACT DATE:
In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the
CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for
(Surety)
on bond of
hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final
Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its
obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this
day of , 20____ .
(Surety Company)
By:
ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact.
DR 0172 (12/98)
COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE
DENVER CO 80261
(303) 232-2416
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS SPACE
The exemption certificate for which you are applying must be used only for the purpose of purchasing construction and building materials
for the exempt project described below. This exemption does not include or apply to the purchase or rental of equipment, supplies, and
materials which are purchased, rented, or consumed by the contractor and which do not become part of the structure, highway, road,
street, or other public works owned and used by the exempt organization.
Any unauthorized use of the exemption certificate will result in revocation of your exemption certificate and other penalties provided by
law.
A separate certificate is required for each contract.
Subcontractors will not be issued Certificates of Exemption by the Department of Revenue. It is the responsibility of the prime contractor
to issue certificates to each of the subcontractors. (See reverse side).
FAILURE TO ACCURATELY COMPLETE ALL BOXES WILL CAUSE THE APPLICATION TO BE DENIED.
Registration/Account No. (to be assigned by DOR)
89 -
Period 0170-750 (999) $0.00
CONTRACTOR INFORMATION
Trade name/DBA: Owner, partner, or corporate name:
Mailing address (City, State, Zip): Contact Person
E-Mail address: Federal Employer’s Identification Number: Bid amount for your contract:
$
Fax Number:
( )
Business telephone number:
( )
Colorado withholding tax account number:
EXEMPTION INFORMATION Copies of contract or agreement pages (1) identifying the contracting parties
and (2) containing signatures of contracting parties must be attached.
Name of exempt organization (as shown on contract):
Exempt organization’s number:
98 -
Address of exempt organization (City, State, Zip):
Principal contact at exempt organization: Principal contact’s telephone number:
Physical location of project site (give actual address when applicable and Cities and/or County (ies) where project is located)
Scheduled
construction start date:
Month Day Year Estimated
completion date:
Month Day Year
I declare under penalty of perjury in the second degree that the statements made in this application are
true and complete to the best of my knowledge.
Signature of owner, partner or corporate officer: Title of corporate officer: Date:
DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE
CONTRACTOR APPLICATION
FOR
EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
Pursuant to Statute
Section 39-26.114(1)(a)(XIX)
6
Special Notice
Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following
changes in procedure:
The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to
subcontractors. Only prime contractors will receive a Contractor’s Exemption Certificate
on exempt projects.
Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each
subcontractor involved in the project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor’s
name and address and signing it.
The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all
Certificates that the prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the
prime contractor’s place of business for a minimum of three years and be available for
inspection in the event of an audit.
Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it
for any applications submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent
number. For instance, if you were assigned 89-12345-0001, every application
submitted thereafter should contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeeding
numbers will be issued by the Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you
believe to be the next in sequence as this may delay processing of your application.
SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Conditions of the Contract
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of
Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated
below.
SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions:
A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions.
4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface
conditions at the site of the Work:
Geotechnical Investigation of Staley/Radiant Park, Fort Collins,
prepared by CTL Thompson, Project No. FC05729-125, dated January 9,
2012.
Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in
the geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data,
interpretations or opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of
any information in the report.
B. 4.2.1.2.1 No drawing of physical conditions in or relating to existing
surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred
to in Paragraph 4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site have been
utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, except
the following:
Storm Drainage Report, dated February 8, 2012, by Interwest
Consulting Group.
SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability
A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8.
The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph
numbers of the General Conditions listed below are as follows:
5.4.1 and 5.4.2
Coverage A - Statutory Limits
Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000
5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have
limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy
will include coverage for Explosion, Collapse, and
Underground coverage unless waived by the Owner.
5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits
(CSL).
5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations
coverage/product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000
combined single limits (CSL).
SECTION 00900
ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT
00950 Contract Change Order
00960 Application for Payment
SECTION 00950
CHANGE ORDER NO.
PROJECT TITLE: 7362 Radiant Neighborhood Park
CONTRACTOR:
PROJECT NUMBER:
DESCRIPTION:
1. Reason for change:
2. Description of Change:
3. Change in Contract Cost:
4. Change in Contract Time:
ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ .00
TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER 0.00
TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER 0.00
TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER 0.00
TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER
TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT
ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ 0.00
(Assuming all change orders approved)
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Contractor's Representative
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Project Manager
REVIEWED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
cc: City Clerk Contractor
Project File Architect
Engineer Purchasing
Section 00960
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 4
OWNER: City of Fort Collins PROJECT: APPLICATION NUMBER:
APPLICATION DATE:
PERIOD BEGINNING:
ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: PERIOD ENDING:
PROJECT NUMBER:
CHANGE ORDERS Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with Contract
NUMBER DATE AMOUNT
The present status of the account for this Contract is as
follows:
1
2 Original Contract Amount:
3 Net Change by Change Order:
Current contract Amount: $0.00
Total Completed and Stored to Date:
Less Previous Applications:
Amount Due this Application - Before Retainage: $0.00
Less Retainage:
Net Change by Change Order $0.00 AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION: $0.00
CERTIFICATION:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with
the Work have been satisfied as required in Paragraph 14.3. of the General Conditions of the Contract.
The above Amount Due This Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is recommended by the ENGINEER.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER.
Date: By:
CONTRACT AMOUNTS
APPLICATION FOR
PAYMENT PAGE 2 OF 4
Work
Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period To Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
CHANGE ORDERS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 3 OF 4
Work Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period
To
Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS CHANGE ORDERS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
PROJECT TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
STORED MATERIALS
SUMMARY PAGE 4 OF 4
On Hand Received Installed On Hand
Item Invoice Previous This This This
Number Number Description Application Period Period Application
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
Radiant Neighborhood Park TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1 of 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01000 Project Summary
01010 Summary of Work
01015 LEED Requirements
01160 Site Conditions
01200 Measurement and Payment
01270 Unit Prices
01300 Coordination and Project Meetings
01310 Construction Schedule
01330 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
01340 Survey Data
01400 Quality Control and Testing
01500 Temporary Controls
01510 Temporary Utilities
01570 Traffic Control
01600 Materials and Equipment
01700 Contract Closeout
01714 Construction Waste Management
01732 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02111 Site Preparation
02225 Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting - arch
02229 Site Clearing
02231 Tree Protection
02235 Topsoil
02301 Earthwork and Grading
02321 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction
02507 PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings
02620 EZ Flow-Subdrain
02719 Playground Safety Surfacing
02750 Concrete Paving
02780 Unit Pavers & Specialty Pavement
02810 Irrigation Systems
02861 Playground Equipment
02870 Site Furnishings
02950 Planting, Soil Preparation, Finish Grading
02970 Planting Maintenance
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcing
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
Radiant Neighborhood Park TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2 of 3
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout
04220 Concrete Unit Masonry
04430 Simulated Stone Masonry
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 Structural Steel
05300 Metal Decking
05999 Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry
06200 Finish Carpentry
06650 Solid Polymer Countertop Fabrications
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07180 Water Repellent Sealers
07190 Vapor Retarders and Barriers
07210 Thermal Building Insulation
07215 Foundation Insulation
07270 Air Infiltration Barrier
07621 Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim
07900 Sealants and Joint Fillers
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Standard Steel Doors and Frames
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
08700 Finish Hardware
08800 Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09110 Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing
09310 Ceramic Tile
09900 Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10430 Exterior Signage
10520 Fire Protection Specialties
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15010 Mechanical Special Conditions
15050 Materials and Methods
15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation
15440 Plumbing
15850 Heating and Ventilating
15950 Automatic Temperature Control
15990 Balancing
Radiant Neighborhood Park TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3 of 3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000 General Electrical Requirements
16100 Basic Materials and Methods
16410 Electric Service
16450 Grounding and Bonding
16500 Lighting
APPENDIX A
Geotechnical Engineering Report – CTL Thompson: Dated 01/09/2012
APPENDIX B
Stormwater Management Plan for Radiant Park – Interwest Consulting Group: Dated 02/08/2012
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01000 – PROJECT SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
A. This section contains general requirements that are applicable to this project.
1.02 Description of Work
A. The Contractor shall provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to perform the work items
called for on the drawings and bid schedule.
1.03 City Furnished Materials
A. None.
1.04 Conditions of Work
A. Area of Work: The Contractor shall confine his operations to the immediate work area. Material
storage shall be confined to areas shown on the Drawings or designated by the City.
B. Regulations: The Contractor shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local regulations
pertaining to safety, traffic control, fire prevention, erosion control and environmental protection.
C. Working Hours: The Contractor's working hours shall be between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., with no
work on weekends and Federal holidays, unless otherwise approved by the City.
D. Material Storage: The Contractor's material and equipment storage site shall be limited to the area of
the project site. The area shall be kept orderly and free of litter. The location of staging and material
storage areas shall be approved by the Owner’s representative.
E. Construction Fencing: The Contractor may construct a fence around the project limits to prevent
pedestrian and automotive access to the construction site, and to prohibit access to protected areas.
Fence height and materials shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. Construction fences shall
be maintained in good condition throughout the duration of the construction process.
1.05 Project Cleanup
A. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the construction site in a clean and orderly condition from the
start of the project to completion. Daily cleanups are required.
1. The City may require Contractor to perform cleanup within 100 feet of the progress of the work
and perform cleanup of the site daily prior to work stoppage.
B. Store volatile wastes in covered containers and dispose off-site.
1. Provide on-site covered containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
2. Neatly store construction materials, such as concrete forms, when not in use.
C. Wastes shall not be buried or burned on the site or disposed of into storm drains, sanitary sewers,
streams or waterways.
D. At project completion the Contractor shall remove equipment, materials, and debris from the site
including toilets and dumpsters. Areas around work sites shall be cleaned, with dirt and grass surfaces
raked clean of any slag from the Contractor's operations. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces.
Remaining dirt and fill material shall be removed, or may be scattered, with the approval of the City.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 3
1.06 Trash Removal
A. Non-salvageable items and trash shall be hauled off the site and disposed of in accordance with
applicable state and local regulations. Items shall be transported in tarp-covered or closed vehicles.
Materials dropped or blown off vehicles shall be picked up immediately by Contractor. Contractor to
recycle appropriate materials.
1.07 Verification of Dimensions
A. The Contractor shall he responsible for the coordination and proper relation of the work. He shall field
verify dimensions and advise the City of any discrepancies prior to proceeding with that phase of the
work.
1.08 Fire Hydrants
A. Fire Hydrant Connections: City’s or District’s permission is required for connection to fire hydrants.
Only compatible adapters shall be utilized for hydrant connections. A gate valve shall be provided and
installed by the Contractor between the hydrant and supply hoses to control flow. Connection shall
include backflow protection. Temporary connections to fire hydrants shall be disconnected at the end
of each working day. No quick closing valves such as plug or butterfly valves will be used.
1.09 Outages
A. Utility outages necessitated by the work shall be requested in writing at least fifteen (15) working days
prior to the proposed outage. The request shall be directed to the City and shall stipulate the specific
utility system(s) and circuits to be affected, the location of the work, the time at which the shutdown
will occur, and the duration of the outage for each system. Outages shall be kept to a minimum both in
number and in duration. Where multiple outages are required, as many outages as can be accurately
scheduled shall he submitted as a group.
1.10 Fill Material
A. Excess fill material (unless approved to remain on site) including rock, gravel, sod, broken concrete,
asphalt, plaster, etc., shall be hauled off the site and disposed of in accordance with applicable State
and local regulations.
B. Additional fill material, if required, shall be hauled to the site from off the site as a necessary part of
the work. Material composition shall be subject to the requirements of the specifications.
1.11 Parking
A. Parking of the Contractor's vehicles shall be restricted to an area designated by the City.
1.12 Telephone
A. Business Telephone: At the beginning of construction, the Contractor shall provide the City with a
telephone number at which the Contractor or his representative may be contacted at any time during
regular working hours. The Contractor shall also provide a phone number for after-duty hours contact.
1.13 Sanitary Provisions
A. The Contractor shall provide temporary toilets for the use of construction personnel. Location, type,
proposed maintenance, etc., shall be approved by the City prior to placing toilets. Temporary toilets
shall be removed at the completion of construction and the adjacent area restored to the condition
existing prior to the start of construction or as indicated on the plans.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 3 of 3
1.14 Pollution Abatement
A. Transporting materials to or from the site shall be accomplished in a manner preventing materials or
particles from becoming airborne. Earth materials shall be covered, wetted or otherwise protected.
Gravel, sand and concrete shall be contained within vehicles to prevent spillage.
B. Prevent the deposit of dirt, mud or debris on improved streets and roads, and remove debris should
such deposition occur.
C. Burning of material on site is prohibited.
D. Stream beds, lakes, ponds, drainage ways, sanitary and storm sewers, etc., shall not be polluted by
fuels, oils, bitumen, acids, or other harmful materials. Surface drainage from the construction site,
which contains harmful amounts of sediment, shall not be allowed to drain onto adjacent areas.
Grading shall be accomplished to allow sedimentation to settle out prior to flowing onto adjacent areas.
E. Flushing of concrete trucks is allowed only at the project site or the designated contractor storage area,
with the responsibility of control and cleanup resting with the Contractor.
F. Toxic, corrosive and flammable materials for construction other than specified shall not be used
without prior approval of the City of Fort Collins. When approved, disposal of these materials or their
containers will be off site and conform to state and federal regulations.
1.15 Protection of Property
A. Initiate, maintain and supervise necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
1. The Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the project, whether in storage on or
off the site: and
2. Property at the site or adjacent thereto, including fences, patios, driveways, sidewalks, pavement,
trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, structures, utilities and underground facilities not designated for
removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
B. Maintain, protect, and support existing utilities and other appurtenances against damage by shoring,
bracing, or other means.
C. Do not stockpile excavated material against existing appurtenances.
1.16 Survey Requirements
A. Contractor shall perform surveying necessary to complete the work.
1.17 Construction Superintendent
A. The construction superintendent shall be at the job site any time work is being accomplished by any of
the trades.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 2
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description of Work
A. The City of Fort Collins Registry Neighborhood Park improvements include, but are not limited to,
construction/installation of the following: erosion control, soft and hard paths, plazas, site lighting,
basketball and tennis courts, walls, storm drainage, shelter, restroom, irrigation booster pump and
controls, irrigation distribution system, landscaping, utilities, and site furnishings.
B. Protection and Restoration.
1. Replace to equal or better conditions items removed and replaced or damaged during construction.
Restore areas disturbed to match surrounding surface conditions.
1.02 Contractor Qualifications
Required Documents
To be a qualified Contractor, the Prime Contractor shall submit with their bid the following written
documentation for the Owner’s review. The statement of qualifications shall be provided inside the
bound and sealed bid envelope, but as a separate document from the bid proposal.
A. Cover Letter. A letter on the company letterhead with following information:
1. The letter must be signed be the Owner of the Company or a Company Officer and dated; and
2. A statement declaring at least (5) complete years of experience in the active performance of similar
work (similar work is considered to include, but not limited to, the acquisition and installation of
park projects, athletic facilities, buildings of similar nature to the proposed buildings, irrigation
systems, landscaping) with its own forces and organization as opposed to the sole use of
subcontractors.
3. A statement declaring that the company will perform a minimum of 20% of the work; not
including purchasing of materials, with its own forces and organization, and a list of services that
the prime contractor will provide; and
B. Company Experience. On a separate sheet, list a project history of the company’s experience as a
General Contractor for the five (5) years declared in item A.2. above, including the following
information:
1. Project name and a brief description of the work performed; and
2. Beginning and ending date of project; and
3. Location of the project (city, state); and
4. Monetary amount of project construction budget; and
5. Owner of project, contact person, valid phone number with area code; and
6. If applicable, name of Prime Contractor (Client) that the work was performed for / phone number;
and
7. Superintendent must have worked for the Prime Contractor for minimum of one year and
preferably on one of the like projects.
C. Resumes. The company shall include up-to-date resumes for the Superintendent(s) and other key
personnel that will actually be doing the work which shall include at a minimum a list of similar
projects that each person has been involved with, and their role, in the last 3 (three) years; and
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 2
D. References. On a separate sheet, provide References for a total of 3 municipalities and/or Landscape
Architect/Engineer. Reference information shall include:
1. Project name and brief description of work performance; and
2. Location of project (city and state)
1.03 Notices to Private Owners and Authorities
A. Notify private owners of adjacent property, utilities, affected governmental agencies, and school
district when execution of the work may affect them.
B. Give notification 48 hours in advance to enable affected persons to provide for their needs when it is
necessary to temporarily deny access or services.
C. Contact utilities at least 48 hours prior to excavating near underground utilities.
D. Contact agencies at least 72 hours prior to start of construction. Notify agencies of the proposed scope
of work, schedule and items that would affect their daily operation.
E. Names and telephone numbers of affected agencies and utilities in the area are listed below for
Contractor's convenience.
Water – Fort Collins/Loveland Water District 226-3104
Storm Sewer - City of Fort Collins, Colorado 212-2900
Sanitary Sewer – South Fort Collins Sanitation District 226-3104
Electrical - City of Fort Collins, Colorado 212-2900
Gas – Xcel Energy 800-481-4700
Telephone - Qwest 800-222-0400
Roads - City of Ft. Collins, Colorado 221-6588, inspections only 221-6609
Cable Television – Comcast 800-824-4010
Utility Locates - One-call System 1-800-922-1987
Safety - Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 844-3061
Fire - Poudre Fire Authority Non-Emergency 221-6570/ Emergency 911
Police - City of Fort Collins Police Department Non-Emergency 221-6540 / Emergency 911
Larimer County Sheriff's Department - Non-Emergency 416-1985
Postmaster - United States Postal Service 800-275-8777
Ambulance - Poudre Valley Hospital Non-Emergency 484-1227 / Emergency 911
Public Transportation - TransFort 221-6620
Traffic Control - Traffic Engineering 221-6815
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS
PART 1 - SITE INVESTIGATIONS AND REPRESENTATION
1.01 General Investigations
A. The Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the
general and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon access to the site; handling, storage, and
disposal of materials; availability of water, electricity and roads; uncertainties of weather, or similar
physical conditions at the site; the conformation and conditions of the ground; the equipment and
facilities needed preliminary to and during the execution of the work; and all other matters which can
in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under this Contract.
1.02 Soil Conditions
A. The Contractor further acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the character, quality and
quantity of surface and subsurface materials to be encountered from his inspection of the site and from
reviewing any available records of exploratory work furnished by the Owner or included in these
Documents. Failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with the physical conditions of the site and
all the available information will not relieve him from responsibility for properly estimating the
difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work.
1.03 Contractor Representation
A. The Contractor warrants that as a result of his examination and investigation of all the aforesaid data
that he can perform the work in a good and workmanlike manner and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
The Owner assumes no responsibility for representations made by its officers or agents during or prior
to the execution of this Contract, unless (1) such representations are expressly stated in the Contract,
and (2) the Contract expressly provides that the responsibility therefore is assumed by the Owner.
PART 2 - INFORMATION ON SITE CONDITIONS
2.01 General
Information obtained by the Engineer regarding site conditions, subsurface information, groundwater
elevations, existing construction of site facilities, and similar data will be available for inspection, as
applicable, at the office of the Engineer upon request. Such information is offered as supplementary
information only. Neither the Engineer nor the Owner assumes responsibility for the completeness or
interpretation of such supplementary information.
A. Differing Subsurface Conditions:
1. In the event that the subsurface or latent physical conditions are found materially different from
those indicated in these Documents, and differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and
generally recognized as inherent in the character of work covered in these Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, notify the Owner in
writing of such changed conditions.
2. The Engineer will investigate such conditions promptly and following this investigation, the
Contractor shall proceed with the work, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. If the
Engineer finds that such conditions do so materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the
cost of or in the time required for performing the work, the Engineer will recommend to the Owner
the amount of adjustment in cost and time he considers reasonable. The Owner will make the final
decision on Change Orders to the Contract regarding adjustments in cost or time for completion.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS
Page 2 of 3
B. Underground Utilities:
1. Known utilities and structures adjacent to or encountered in the work are shown on the Drawings.
The locations shown are taken from existing records and the best information available from
existing utility plans, however, it is expected that there may be some discrepancies and omissions
in the locations and quantities of utilities and structures shown. Those shown are for the
convenience of the Contractor only, and no responsibility is assumed by either the Owner or the
Engineer for their accuracy or completeness.
PART 3 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTIES AND SERVICE
3.01 General
A. Where the Contractor's operations could cause damage or inconvenience to railway, telegraph,
telephone, television, oil, gas, electricity, water, sewer, or irrigation systems, the operations shall be
suspended until arrangements necessary for the protection of these utilities and services have been
made by the Contractor.
B. Notify utility offices which are affected by the construction operation at least 48 hours in advance.
Under no circumstances expose any utility without first obtaining permission from the appropriate
agency. Once permission has been granted, locate, expose, and provide temporary support for existing
underground utilities.
C. The Contractor shall protect utility poles from damage. If interference of power poles, telephone poles,
guy wires, or anchors are encountered, notify the Owner’s Representative and the appropriate utility
company at least 48 hours in advance of construction operations to permit the necessary arrangements
for protection or relocation of the interfering structure.
D. The Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible to the Owner and operators of such properties
for damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits, actions, or claims of any character
brought because of injuries or damage which may result from the construction operations under this
Contract.
E. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the Contractor for damages as a
result of the Contractor's failure to protect utilities encountered in the work.
F. If the Contractor while performing the Contract discovers utility facilities not identified in the
Drawings or Specifications, he shall immediately notify the Owners and the utility in writing.
G. In the event of interruption to domestic water, sewer, storm drain, or other utility services as a result of
accidental breakage due to construction operations, promptly notify the proper authority. Cooperate
with said authority in the restoration of service as promptly as possible and bear all costs of repair. In
no case shall interruption of water or utility service be allowed to exist outside working hours unless
prior approval is granted.
H. The Contractor shall replace, at his own expense, existing utilities or structures removed or damaged
during construction, unless otherwise provided for in these Contract Documents or ordered by the
Engineer.
3.02 Interfering Structures
A. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing structures whether on the surface,
aboveground, or underground. An attempt has been made to show major structures on the Drawings.
The completeness and accuracy cannot be guaranteed, and it is presented simply as a guide to avoid
known possible difficulties.
3.03 Field Relocation
A. During the progress of construction, it is expected that minor relocations of the work will be necessary.
Such relocations shall be made only by direction of the Owner’s Representative. If existing structures
are encountered that prevent the construction, and that are not properly shown on the drawings, notify
the Owner’s Representative before continuing with the construction in order that the Owner’s
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS
Page 3 of 3
Representative may make such field revision as necessary to avoid conflict with the existing structures.
If the Contractor shall fail to so notify the Owner’s Representative when an existing structure is
encountered, and shall proceed with the construction despite the interference, he shall do so at his own
risk.
3.04 Easements
A. Easements and permits will be obtained by the Owner where portions of the work are located on public
or private property. Easements will provide for the use of the property for construction purposes to the
extent indicated on the easements. Copies of these easements and permits are available upon request to
the Owner. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the adequacy of the easement
obtained in every case and to abide by requirements and provisions of the easement. The Contractor
shall confine his construction operations to within the easement limits or make special arrangements
with the property owners or appropriate public agency for the additional area required. Damage to
property, either inside or outside the limits of the easements provided by the Owner, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor as specified herein. The Contractor shall remove, protect, and replace
fences or other items encountered on public or private property. Before final payment will be
authorized by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor will be required to furnish the Owner with
written releases from property owners or public agencies where side agreements or special easements
have been made by the Contractor or where the Contractor's operations, for any reason, have not been
kept within the construction right-of-way obtained by the Owner.
B. It is anticipated that the required easements and permission will be obtained before construction is
started. However, should the procurement of any easement or permission be delayed, the Contractor
shall schedule and perform the work around these areas until such a time as the easement or permission
has been secured.
3.05 Land Monuments
A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative of existing Federal, State, Town, County, and
private land monuments encountered. Private monuments shall be preserved, or replaced by a licensed
surveyor at the Contractor's expense. When Government monuments are encountered, the Contractor
shall notify the Owner’s Representative at least two (2) weeks in advance of the proposed construction
in order that the Owner’s Representative will have ample opportunity to notify the proper authority and
reference these monuments for later replacement.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01200 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Page 1 of 1
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01200 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. This section covers the methods employed in determining the payment due for work completed under
this contract.
B. The bid price should cover all work required by this contract based upon the quantities outlined in the
bid form.
C. Where actual quantities differ from those outlined in the bid form; unit prices as stipulated in the bid
form shall be utilized to compute payment.
D. Where unit prices are not set forth for specific work, that work shall be considered a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor.
E. Quantities given in the bid form are estimates for the purpose of evaluating bids consequently some
difference may arise in actual and bid quantities.
1.02 Lump Sum Prices
A. Where lump sum (LS) prices are given for an item in the bid schedule or for items added during
construction by change order, the price will include materials, labor, overhead and other cost incurred
to complete the construction of the item in accordance with the plans and specifications.
1.03 Unit Prices
A. Unit prices for each item shall include its pro rata share of profits, taxes, and overhead, and are for the
items installed in place, maintained and guaranteed. Including these factors, unit prices must
accurately reflect actual costs. Unit prices are to be valid for the life of the contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01300 – COORDINATION AND PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 1 of 1
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01300 – COORDINATION AND PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General
A. In order to provide for an orderly progression of work, parties involved in the construction will meet at
various times during the project to discuss pertinent items regarding the work.
B. Coordinate operations under contract in a manner that will facilitate progress of the work.
C. Conform to the requirements of public utilities and concerned public agencies in respect to the timing
and manner of performance of operations that affect the service of such utilities, agencies, or public
safety.
1.02 Conferences
A. The pre-construction conference will be held at a time to be determined by the Owner, after the award
of the contract and prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The meeting will involve the Owner,
the Engineer, the Contractor and representatives of the owners of utilities and other properties that will
be directly affected by the work. Among the Contractor’s representative on the site. The Contractor
will have a complete construction schedule ready for review at the time of the pre-construction
conference.
B. Hold conferences for coordination of the Work when necessary.
C. The City may hold coordination conferences to be attended by all involved when Contractor's
operations affects, or is affected by, the work of others.
1.03 Progress Meetings
A. Contractor and the City shall schedule and hold regular progress meetings at least weekly and at other
times as requested by the City or required by the progress of the Work.
B. Attendance shall include:
1. Contractor and Superintendent
2. Owners Representative
3. Landscape Architect
4. Others as may be requested by contractor, Landscape Architect or Owner
C. Minimum Agenda shall include:
1. Review of work progress since last meeting
2. Identification and discussion of problems affecting progress
3. Review of any pending change orders
4. Revisions of Construction Schedule as appropriate
D. Meeting Minutes shall be prepared and distributed by the Contractor.
1.04 Job Site Administration
A. Contract administration and construction observation services will be provided by the Owner. The
Owner will make decisions regarding changes in the work and adjustments in contract quantities and/or
unit prices.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Page 1 of 4
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01310 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General
A. It is the intent of the Owner to begin construction on approximately April 2010. The signing of the
contract and issuance of a Notice to Proceed will be completed promptly to accomplish that objective.
The Notice to Proceed will authorize the Contractor to begin project administration and construction
work on the site. Construction work shall not begin on site prior to the pre-construction conference.
B. The Contractor shall complete all work, including cleanup of the site by October 2010 specified in the
Agreement, subject to the "Liquidated Damages" provision described under "Instructions to Bidders."
C. Delays during project contract period outside control of the Contractor are subject to time extension
consideration but not financial compensation unless such delay is significant enough to reasonably
require Owner initiated work suspension (demobilization) as determined in the field by the Owner at
the time of occurrence. See Paragraph 1.04 for requirements for modifying the Contract Time due to
weather delays.
D. Contractor shall plan and schedule his own work effort (personnel, equipment and material) to
complete the project satisfactorily within the project time limits. Such schedule shall be in general
conformance with the schedule submitted at the pre-construction conference. This includes the
requirement that the Contractor conduct his operations to enable a shift of work effort from one part of
the project to another to reasonably accommodate unexpected delays, and to conduct his daily
operations so as to not create a public nuisance including but not limited to access or traffic
obstruction, dust and mud generation, work outside of construction limits, noise, unsatisfactory cleanup
or site restoration, unacceptable equipment/materials staging, flooding, etc. No work is to begin at the
site until City's acceptance of the Construction Schedule.
E. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule. The schedule shall show
all work completed within the contract time and shall cover the time from the date of Notice to Proceed
to the completion date. Contractor shall use Microsoft Project 2000 or approved equivalent to develop
and manage the CPM schedule.
F. Schedule shall include milestones that demonstrate the Contractor’s approach to completing the project
within project time limits. Milestones shall be of sufficient number to indicate regular progress of
work and shall identify major components of the work. Milestones are subject to Owner approval prior
to work beginning at the site. If Contractor fails to meet a milestone, contractor shall submit an
updated schedule subject to Owner approval and demonstrate how the remaining milestones will be
met. The Owner may order work shut down or suspended for nonconformance with the approved
schedule (See Paragraph G. below)
G. Milestones (minimum required items) The following items shall be indicated on the schedule with
completion dates:
(1) Demolition and Protection
(2) Earthwork
(3) Utilities
(4) Restroom and shelter structures
(5) Playground walls and tennis / movie wall
(6) Concrete paving in core area
(7) Irrigation booster pump / controls and distribution system
(8) Landscape
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Page 2 of 4
(9) Playground engineered wood fiber safety surfacing
H. The Contractor may voluntarily shut down or suspend work due to conditions beyond his control
provided a minimum of 24 hours notice is provided to the Owner together with the reasons for subject
suspension of work. The Contractor shall leave the project conditions in such a way so as not to cause
a public nuisance or a threat to public safety. Neither remobilization costs nor additional time will be
allowed for such suspension unless agreed to in writing in advance.
I. The Owner or Engineer may order work shut down or suspended for such nonconformance issues as
unsafe conditions, nonconformance with schedule, cause of public nuisance, unnecessary private
property disturbance, materials and labor unsuited to the task, nonconformance to technical
specifications, failure to comply with permits, etc. The Owner or Engineer will give a written warning
to the Contractor with a specified deadline during which time the Contractor shall remedy the cause(s)
described on the warning. Failure to do so shall justify the Owner or Engineer to order work shut down
or suspended. Such shutdown will not be compensated by cost reimbursement or time schedule
adjustment.
J. Failure to promptly execute the approved schedule in the judgment of the Owner will result in a written
warning submitted to the Contractor explaining the specific compliance needed. Failure of the
Contractor to remedy the noted items may be considered a breach of contract possibly leading to work
shutdown for cause or contract termination.
1.02 Format and Submissions
A. Prepare Construction and Procurement schedules in a graphic format suitable for displaying schedule
and actual progress.
B. Submit two copies of each schedule to owner for review. Owner will return one copy to contractor with
revisions suggested or necessary for coordination of the Work with the needs of Owner or others.
1.03 Progress Revisions
A. A schedule update shall be submitted to the Owner at each weekly progress meeting that will reflect
work performed in the previous week and the upcoming two-(2) weeks. Schedule updates shall not
change any Contract times.
B. A complete schedule update shall be submitted with each application for progress payment.
C. Show changes occurring since previous submission.
1. Actual progress of each item to date.
2. Revised projections of progress and completion.
D. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Anticipated problems, recommended actions, and their effects on the schedule.
2. The effect of changes on schedules of other work.
1.04 Modifications to Time of Completion in the Approved Schedule
A. The date of beginning and the times for completion of the work are essential conditions of the Contract
Documents and the work embraced shall be commenced on a date specified in the Notice to Proceed.
The Contractor will proceed with the work at such rate of progress to ensure full completion within the
contract time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner
that the contract time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into
consideration the climatic and other factors prevailing in the locality of the work.
Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to complete the project within the "Contract Time" shown
in the proposal. The "Contract Time" anticipates a “Normal” weather and climate condition in and
around the vicinity of the Project site during the times of year that the construction will be carried out.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Page 3 of 4
Extensions of time based upon weather conditions shall be granted only if the Contractor demonstrates
clearly that such conditions were "unusually severe," would not have been reasonably anticipated, and
that such conditions adversely affected the Contractor’s work and thus required additional time to
complete the work.
B. The following specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe
weather. The listing below defines the anticipated number of calendar days lost to adverse weather for
each month and is based upon National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar
data for the geographic location of the project.
Monthly Anticipated Calendar Days Lost to Adverse Weather Conditions
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
(7) (4) (4) (4) (6) (3) (4) (2) (3) (3) (2) (5)
The above schedule of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line for monthly (or portion
thereof) weather time evaluations. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed and continuing
throughout the contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days and the impact of adverse
weather days that delay the work will be recorded on a day-to-day basis. It is assumed that the work
will be carried out Mondays through Fridays (holidays excepted) unless an approved construction
schedule or written authorization from the Owner indicates otherwise. The number of days of delayed
work due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will then be compared to the monthly adverse
weather schedule above.
An actual adverse weather day must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the Contractor’s workday,
delay work critical to the timely completion of the project, and be documented by the Contractor. The
City Representative observing the construction shall determine on a daily basis whether or not work
can proceed or if work is delayed due to adverse weather or the effects thereof. The Contractor shall
notify the Construction Coordinator in writing of any disagreement as to whether or not work can
proceed on a given date, within 2 calendar days of that date. The Owner will use the above written
notification in determining the number of working days for which work was delayed during each
month.
C. At the end of each month, if the number of working days for which work was delayed due to adverse
weather exceeds that shown in the above schedule, a Change Order will be executed which increases
the Contract Time. The number of workdays delayed due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will
then be converted to Calendar Days based on the contract completion day and date. This conversion
assumes a 5-day work week, Mondays through Fridays, holidays excepted; should the Contractor have
authorization to work weekends and/or holidays, then the method of conversion of workdays to
calendar days would take this into consideration. The contract time period will then be increased by the
number of calendar days calculated above and a new contract completion day and date will be set.
D. The Contractor’s schedule must reflect the above-anticipated adverse weather delays on all weather-
dependent activities.
E. While extensions of time shall be granted for "unusually severe" weather or climate conditions, the
Owner shall make no monetary compensation for any costs to the Contractor arising out of such delays.
The Contractor shall comply with the portions of the Contract Documents relating to his project
schedule and amendments thereto which result from the "unusually severe" weather condition.
F. Breakdowns in equipment or lack of performance by the Contractor will not be considered justification
for an extension of time. Liquidated damages will be assessed as delineated elsewhere.
G. The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the delay in
completion of the work is due to the following, and the Contractor has promptly given written notice of
such delay to the Owner or Engineer.
1. To any preference, priority, or allocation order duly issued by the Owner.
2. To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor,
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Page 4 of 4
including but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of
another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics,
quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and abnormal and unforeseeable weather as
provided above; and
3. To any delays of Subcontractors occasioned by any of the causes specified in paragraphs 1 and 2,
above.
1.05 City's Responsibility
A. City's review is only for the purpose of checking conformity with the Contract Documents and
assisting Contractor in coordinating the Work with the needs of the Project.
B. It is not to be construed as relieving Contractor from any responsibility to determine the means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction as provided in the General Conditions.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Shop Drawings
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy
standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific
reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,
templates, and similar drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
6. Sheet Size: Submit all shop drawings on Shareware, any exceptions approved by Owner’s
Representative to be in the following format: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size
Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36
inches.
7. Submittal: Scan shop submittal information and post on Shareware site hosted by the City. Shop
Submittal logs and shop submittal data to be posted and updated by the Contractor. Stamped
responses will be posted by Owner’s Representative and log updated also on the Shareware system
8. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
1.02 Product Data
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data
includes printed information, such as manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard
color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes
information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable
information. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer’s printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with trade association standards.
c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation coordination requirements.
2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has
been confirmed.
3. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of
options is required.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
Page 2 of 3
4. Submittals: Scan submittal information and post on Shareware site hosted by the City. Submittal
logs and submittal data to be posted and updated by the Contractor. Stamped reponses will be
posted by Owner’s Representative and log updated on the Shareware system.
5. Distribution: Furnish copies and/or access to viewing of Shareware documents of final submittal to
installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for
performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer’s possession.
b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.
1.03 Samples
A. Submit full-size, full-fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with
the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and
pattern.
1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the
following:
a. Specification Section number and reference.
b. Generic description of the Sample.
c. Sample source.
d. Product name or name of the manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
f. Availability and delivery time.
2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final
check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics
between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a. Where variation in color, pattern, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product
represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar
construction characteristics.
c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the
Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicated special
requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.
d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner’s property, are
the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial
Completion.
3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. The Owner will
review and return preliminary submittals with the Owner’s notation, indicating selection and other
action.
4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,
connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Owner will return one set
marked with the action taken.
5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the
course of construction.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
Page 3 of 3
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the final submittal.
b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each
set.
B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers,
fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution
on transmittal forms.
1.04 Quality Assurance Submittals
A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions,
manufacturer’s field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of
the Specifications.
B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material,
or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the
manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.
1. Signature: an officer of the manufacturer or other authorized individual shall sign Certification
documents.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from
independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Sections “Quality Control” and “Testing,” and
in the applicable technical specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01330
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01340 – SURVEY DATA
Page 1 of 1
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01340 - SURVEY DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Survey Requirements
A. Contractor is responsible for the layout of the Work. The City will not provide surveying.
B. Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on established control points. Verify established
control points at site prior to laying out the work.
C. Perform layout of the Work with qualified personnel.
1. Stake pipes, sleeves and conduits at the following minimum locations:
a. Storm Drainage Systems: in addition to laser, as a minimum stake manholes and the following
stations upgrade of each manhole, +25, +50, and the midpoint station to the nearest 50 feet.
b. Irrigation/Utility Sleeves: Stake sleeves at end points and changes in horizontal alignment.
c. Electrical Conduit: Stake conduit at end points and changes in horizontal alignment.
d. Offset staking shall be for both alignment and grade.
e. Contractor shall stake the piping and verify piping both for grade and alignment at each of the
above locations. Keep field measurements in a field book to be turned in to Owner. Keeping
of field book is a requirement for progress payment.
2. As a minimum, stake plazas, courts and pathways at grade changes, changes in horizontal
alignment, and at 25 foot stations along sidewalk centerline.
3. As a minimum, stake drainage channel and swale alignments at changes in horizontal alignment
and at 25 foot stations along center of channel/swale and at the top of bank on both sides of the
channel.
4. As a minimum, stake buildings/structures at corners and at column locations.
5. As a minimum, stake open areas/landscape areas at changes in vertical slope, and using 25 foot
grid in smaller areas and at 100 foot grid in larger areas.
6. As a minimum, stake the top and bottom of berms and depressions at changes in horizontal
alignment, and at 25 foot stations along the top and bottom of the slope around the perimeter of the
berm or depression.
7. Refer to Drawings for earthwork requirements.
D. Field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing surveys required by the
Work will be available to City for examination throughout the construction period.
1.02 Submittals
A. Submit to City survey data with other documentation required for final acceptance.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
Page 1 of 2
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General
A. Provide such equipment and facilities as the City may require for conducting field tests and for
collecting and forwarding samples. Do not use materials or equipment represented by samples until
tests, if required, have been made and the materials or equipment are found to be acceptable. A product
that becomes unfit for use after approval hereof shall not be incorporated into the work.
B. Materials or equipment proposed to be used may be tested at any time during their preparation or use.
Furnish the required samples without charge and give sufficient notice of the placing of orders to
permit the testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after being received at the site
of the work.
C. Tests shall be made by an accredited independent testing laboratory selected by the Contractor. Except
as otherwise provided, sampling and testing of materials and the laboratory methods and testing
equipment shall be in accordance with the latest standards and tentative methods of the American
Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
D. Where additional or specified information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc., is required,
such information is included under the applicable sections of the Specifications. Modification of, or
elaboration on, these test procedures which may be included for specific materials under their
respective sections in the Specifications shall take precedence over these procedures.
1.02 Transmittal of Test Reports
A. Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished by Contractor for Engineer’s review of
materials and equipment proposed to be used in the work shall be submitted as specified for Shop
Drawings.
B. The testing laboratory retained by the Owner will furnish three (4) copies of a written report of each
test performed by laboratory personnel in the field or laboratory. Two (2) copies of each test report
will be transmitted to the Engineer and one (1) copy to the Contractor and (1) copy to the owner within
seven (7) days after each test is completed.
1.03 City's Responsibilities
A. The City shall be responsible for and shall pay the costs in connection with the following testing:
1. Soil Compaction Tests.
2. Trench Backfill.
3. Pipe Bedding and Structural Bedding.
4. Tests not called for by the Specifications
5. Concrete, mortar and grout tests.
1.04 Contractor’s Responsibilities
A. In addition to those inspections and tests called for in the General Conditions, Contractor shall also be
responsible for and shall pay the costs associated with testing required for the following:
1. Performance and field testing specifically called for by the specifications.
2. Re-testing for Work or materials found defective or unsatisfactory, including tests covered under
1.03 above.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
Page 2 of 2
3. Testing of pipe (if required).
4. Vacuum testing of manholes (if required).
5. Concrete materials and mix designs.
6. Gradation tests for embedment, fill and backfill materials.
7. Material Substitution - tests for basic material or fabrication of equipment offered as a substitution
for a specified item on which a test may be required in order to prove it compliance with the
specifications.
Nothing contained herein is intended to imply that the Contractor does not have the right to have
tests performed on any material at any time for his/her own information and job control so long as
the Owner does not assume responsibility for the cost or for giving them consideration when
appraising quality materials.
1.05 Contractor's Quality Control System
A. General: The Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and
tests of items of work, including that of his subcontractors, to ensure conformance to the functional
performance of this project. This control shall be established for construction except where the
Contract Documents provide for specific compliance tests by testing laboratories or engineers
employed by the City. Contractor's control system shall specifically include testing required by the
various sections of the Specifications.
B. Contractor's quality control system is the means by which he assures himself that his construction
complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover the
construction operations and should be keyed to the proposed construction schedule.
C. Records: maintain correct records on an appropriate form for inspections and tests performed,
instructions received from the City and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These records
shall include evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and
number of inspections or test, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed
remedial action, and corrective action taken. Document inspections and tests as required by each
section of the Specifications. Provide copies to City in a reasonable time.
D. Pipe alignment and grade is to be maintained through the use of suitable surveying instruments or laser
equipment operated continuously during construction. Horizontal tolerances of + 0.3 feet and vertical
tolerances of + 0.1 feet maximum deviation from plan and construction staking are to be maintained,
except that visible “snaking” of the horizontal alignment and changes in directions of slope will not be
permitted.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01500 – TEMPORARY CONTROLS
Page 1 of 1
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY CONTROLS
1.01 Noise Control
A. Take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise when construction activities are being performed
in populated areas.
B. Construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound muffling devices, and
operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the work.
C. Cease operation of all machinery and vehicles between the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m.
1.02 Dust Control
A. Dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered to prevent blowing.
B. Earth and road surfaces subject to dusting due to construction activities and detouring of traffic shall be
kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust suppressant.
1. Chemical dust suppressant shall not be injurious to existing or future vegetation.
1.03 Pollution Control
A. Prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, concrete, sediment, debris and
other substances resulting from construction activities.
1. Retain spent oils, hydraulic fluids and other petroleum fluids in containers for disposal off the site.
2. Prevent sediment, debris or other substances from entering sanitary sewers, storm drains and
culverts.
1.04 Erosion Control
A. Take such measures as are necessary to prevent erosion of soil that might result from construction
activities.
1. Measures in general will include:
a. Control of runoff.
b. Trapping of sediment.
c. Minimizing area and duration of soil exposure.
d. Temporary materials such as hay bales, sandbags, plastic sheets, riprap or culverts to prevent
the erosion of banks and beds of watercourses or drainage swales where runoff will be
increased due to construction activities.
B. Preserve natural vegetation to the greatest extent possible, except where otherwise noted.
C. Locate temporary storage and route construction traffic so as to preserve vegetation and minimize
erosion.
D. Comply with the City of Fort Collins' Storm Drainage Erosion Control Manual.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Page 1 of 1
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Utilities
A. Furnish utilities necessary for construction including, but not limited to temporary electric power and
pay cost associated with utilities during and used for the contract period. Temporary utilities
installation shall meet the construction safety requirements of OSHA, State and local governing
agencies.
1.02 Water
A. Contractor is responsible for obtaining water for construction and shall pay costs associated with
establishing a temporary meter used during construction.
1.03 Sanitary Facilities
A. Furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site in the vicinity of the construction for the needs of
construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services on the Project.
B. Properly maintain sanitary facilities of reasonable capacity throughout construction periods.
C. Enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site.
D. Obscure sanitary facilities from public view to the greatest extent practical.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01570 - TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 1 of 2
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01570 - TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General
A. Traffic Control necessary to complete the project will be provided by the Contractor and will not be
paid for separately.
B. The Contractor must submit traffic control plans and coordinate traffic control with the City's Traffic
Control Coordinator. The traffic control plans must he submitted and approved 72 hours prior to
starting construction and before making each modification.
C. Conformance: City of Fort Collins Work Area Traffic Control Handbook, Manual of Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (U.S. Dept. of Transportation), or applicable statutory requirements of authority
having jurisdiction.
D. Limited closures may be permitted for short periods up to three days to allow installation of concrete
pavement. Closures must be requested and approved 72 hours prior to anticipated closure.
E. Limited alternating one-way traffic operation may be permitted during the hours from 9:00 A.M. to
3:30 P.M. One-way traffic operation must be requested and approved 72 hours prior to anticipated
operation.
F. At all times, Contractor must maintain two-way traffic with a minimum of one lane of traffic in each
direction. Limited closures may be allowed.
G. The Contractor must coordinate with adjacent residents to provide and maintain them sufficient access
during the duration of the project. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and
communicate with the residents during construction.
H. Keep traffic areas free of excavated material, construction equipment, pipe, and other materials and
equipment.
I. Keep fire hydrants and utility control devices free from obstruction and available for use.
J. Conduct operations in a manner to avoid unnecessary interference with public and private roads and
drives.
K. Provide and maintain temporary approaches or crossings at streets, businesses, and residences.
L. Keep roads open and in acceptable condition, unless closure or detour has been approved by City's
Traffic Control Coordinator 72 hours prior to closure or detour.
M. Post signs around the perimeter of the construction site to restrict public access.
1.02 Traffic Control Plan
A. Submit a detailed traffic control plan to Traffic Control Coordinator for review and acceptance. Plan
must be accepted 72 hours prior to work commencing at the site. Maintain the accepted plan
throughout all phases of construction. Provide copy to Owner prior to submittal.
1. Notify police, sheriff, ambulance services, and fire authorities of traffic control plan and the
schedule of it. Distribute copies if requested.
1.03 Flagmen
A. Required where necessary to provide for public safety, or the regulation of traffic, or by jurisdictional
authorities.
B. Shall be properly equipped and licensed.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01570 - TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 2 of 2
1.04 Warning Signs and Lights
A. Provide suitable barricades and warning signs for:
1. Open trenches and other excavations.
2. Obstructions, such as material piles, equipment, piled embankment.
B. Illuminate by means of warning lights all barricades and obstructions from sunset to sunrise.
C. Protect roads and driveways by effective barricades on which are placed acceptable warning signs.
1.05 Parking
A. Provide suitable parking areas for the use of construction workers and others performing work or
furnishing services in connection with the Project so as to avoid interference with private property,
public traffic, City's operations, or construction activities. Such parking shall occur on the project site
or another suitable location, approved by the City.
1.06 Roadway Usage between Operations
A. When Work is not actually in progress, Contractor shall make passable and shall open to traffic such
portions of the Project and temporary roadways or portions thereof as may be agreed upon between
Contractor and City and authorities having jurisdiction over any properties involved.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Related Documents
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 Summary
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor’s selection
of products for use in the Project.
1.03 Definitions
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the
Contract Documents, such as “specialties,” “systems,” “structure,” “finishes,” “accessories,” and
similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction
industry.
1. “Products” are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project
or taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms “material,”
“equipment,” “systems,” and terms of similar intent.
2. “Materials” are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise
fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3. “Equipment” is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that
requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.
1.04 Submittals
A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the Owner.
Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer’s name and proprietary product
names for each item listed.
1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor’s Construction Schedule and the Schedule of
Submittals.
2. Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the following column
headings:
a. Related Specifications Section number.
b. Generic name used in Contract Documents.
c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d. Manufacturer’s name and address.
e. Supplier’s name and address.
f. Installer’s name and address.
g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days of date commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial
product list. Provide a written explanation of omissions of data and for known variations from
Contract requirements.
4. Complete List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the
completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known
variations from Contract requirements.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Page 2 of 3
5. Owner’s Action: The Owner will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the
completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed
manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products
comply with Contract Documents. The Owner’s response will include a list of unacceptable
product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action.
1.05 Quality Assurance
A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single
source.
B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of seeking between 2 or more
products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
C. Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of the following conditions provide domestic
products, not foreign products, for inclusion in the Work:
1. Not available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents.
2. Domestic products that comply with the Contract Documents are available only at prices or terms
substantially higher than foreign products that comply with the Contract Documents.
1.06 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Delivery, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, using means
and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Delivery products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer’s original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure
that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or
counting of units.
6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the
supporting construction.
7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weather-tight
enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Product Selection
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.
B. Product Selection procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product
selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following:
1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or
manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Page 3 of 3
2. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or
manufacturers or where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied
by the term “or equal” or “or approved equivalent,” provide one of the products listed or comply
with the Contract Document provisions concerning “substitutions” or obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
3. Nonproprietary Specification Requirements: When Specifications list products or manufacturers
that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use
these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract
requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning “substitutions” to obtain
approval for use of an unnamed product.
4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or name, provide
a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract
requirements.
5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require
compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the
standards, codes, or regulations specified.
6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Owner’s
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase “… as selected from
manufacturer’s standard colors, patterns, textures…” or a similar phrase, select a product and
manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Owner will select the color,
pattern, and texture from the product line selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Products
A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the
applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with
other Work.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 1 of 6
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 Related Documents
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including general and supplementary conditions and
other Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.02 Summary
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
8. Final cleaning.
9. As-built drawings
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in
Divisions 2 through 16.
1.03 Substantial Completion
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial
Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as
substantially complete.
2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and
similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement
surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner’s
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner’s operation and maintenance
personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 2 of 6
11. Seed establishment shall be deemed substantially in compliance with the specifications and one
mowing of the seed shall be provided by contractor.
B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Owner will either proceed with
inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Owner will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
1. If the Owner’s Representative determines that the work is not substantially complete at the time of
review or that deficiencies remain at time of compliance review, the Contractor shall pay
additional costs for the additional review(s) by Owner’s Representative and Consultants.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.04 Final Acceptance
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and
final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations
where required.
2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.
3. Submit a certified copy of the Owner’s final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected,
endorsed and dated by the Owner. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Owner.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the
date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility
for corresponding elements of the Work.
5. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
12. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
13. Submit as-built drawings and an as-built site survey with a 1 foot contour interval, high points, low
points, ridges, and horizontal and vertical utility locations including invert elevations.
14. Submit as-built drawings of the stormwater improvements, prepared by a licensed survey.
15. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
B. Re-inspection Procedure: The Owner will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work,
including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose
completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Owner.
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Owner will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the
Work is incomplete, the Owner will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of
obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. The cost of additional inspections shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.05 Record Document Submittals
A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from
deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the
Owner’s reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 3 of 6
substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing
conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the
corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that
would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in
separate categories of the Work.
2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or
Shop Drawings.
3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable.
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets;
print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.
5. Prior to Contract Closeout, obtain from the Owner a digital copy of the AutoCAD bid documents.
Using AutoCAD v. 2004 (or later version), the Contractor shall transpose information contained
on the Record Drawings maintained on site to the AutoCAD drawings.
6. The contractor shall the provide a reproducible mylar copy of the Record Drawings and a copy of
the digital files to the Owner’s Representative.
Label each sheet “Record Drawing.” On the first sheet, the Contractor or resident
Superintendent shall execute the following statement:
Having reviewed this document and all attachments, I affirm that, to the best of my knowledge, the
information presented here is true and accurate.
Signed: Date:
Position:
C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include
with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and
modifications issued in printed form during construction.
1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison
with the text of the Specifications and modifications.
2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed
construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.
4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Owner.
D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders
and markup of record drawings and Specifications.
1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with
information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the
manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be
readily discerned later by direct observation.
3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Owner.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 4 of 6
E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of
miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of Work.
Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and
place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use
and reference. Submit to the Owner.
F. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size.
Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders,
with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of
each binder. Include the following types of information:
1. Emergency instructions.
2. Spare parts list.
3. Copies of warranties.
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Recommended “turn-around” cycles.
6. Inspection procedures.
7. Shop Drawings and Product Data.
8. Fixture lamping schedule.
1.06 Warranties and Bonds
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. Maintain copies of Contractor’s submittals and assemble
documents executed by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide table of contents and
assemble in binder with durable plastic cover.
B. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For items of Work delayed materially beyond
date of substantial completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date
of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.07 Final Payment
A. The Contractor shall submit written certification that Contract Documents Work has been reviewed and
that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Owner Representative’s
review.
B. In addition to submittals required by the conditions of the Contract provide submittals required by
governing authorities, and submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum,
previous payments and sum remaining due.
C. Owner’s Representative will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract
Sum not previously made by Change Order.
D. Retainage will be held until advertisement for liens and encumbrances is completed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 Closeout Procedures
A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular
maintenance to meet with the Owner’s personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and
maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer’s representatives if installers are not experienced in
operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items:
1. Maintenance manuals.
2. Record documents.
3. Spare parts and materials.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 5 of 6
4. Tools.
5. Lubricants.
6. Fuels.
7. Identification systems.
8. Control sequences.
9. Hazards.
10. Cleaning.
11. Warranties and bonds.
12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
1. Startup.
2. Shutdown.
3. Emergency operations.
4. Noise and vibration adjustments.
5. Safety procedures.
6. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7. Effective energy utilization.
3.02 Final Cleaning
A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning
is included in Division 1.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface
or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion.
C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work
during construction.
1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains,
films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
Leave concrete floors broom clean.
4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other
substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
5. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign
substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.
D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for
cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner’s
property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove
waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.
1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the
Owner’s property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
01015 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 01015
LEED REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall follow the general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain
U.S. Green Building Council LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major
Renovations (LEED-NC), Version 2009, prerequisites and credits needed for the Project to
obtain LEED certification. The intent is not to achieve certification but for tracking purposes.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work: LEED and sustainability goals.
2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal requirements.
3. Section 01400, Quality Control: Requirements for Contractor’s environmental
manager.
4. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
5. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
6. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for LEED design and
performance criteria.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following LEED reference standards are included in the LEED Green Building Rating System
for New Construction and Major Renovations (LEED-NC), as they pertain to specific LEED credit
items. Obtain and maintain a file copy of those reference standards that affect the work of this
Section. They are incorporated into this Section by reference:
1. Sustainable Sites, Prerequisite 1, Erosion and Sedimentation Control: U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency 2003 Construction General Permit, Stormwater
Management for Construction Activities, Chapter 3.
a. Applicable development standards of the City of Fort Collins or other local
jurisdiction.
2. Sustainable Sites, Credit 6.2, Stormwater Treatment: U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of Nonpoint Pollution in
Coastal Waters, January 1993 (Document No. EPA-840-B-92-002) Best Management
Practices, Chapter 4, Part 2, Urban Runoff.
3. Indoor Environmental Quality, Prerequisite 1: Minimum IAQ Performance: ASHRAE
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality 62.1-2007, with errata but without
addenda using the ventilation rate procedure or the applicable local code, whichever is
more stringent.
4. Indoor Environmental Quality, Credit 1, Carbon Dioxide Monitoring: ASHRAE 62.1-2007,
with errata but without addenda.
5. Indoor Environmental Quality, Credit 2, Ventilation Effectiveness: ASHRAE 62.1-2007,
with errata but without addenda.
6. Indoor Environmental Quality, Credit 3.1, Construction IAQ Management Plan, During
Construction: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractor’s Association
(SMACNA), IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2007,
ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008, Chapter 3 and ASHRAE 52.2-1999, Minimum Efficiency
Reporting Value (MERV) for air filtration media.
7. Indoor Environmental Quality, Credit 3.2, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Compendium of methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air.
8. Indoor Environmental Quality, Credit 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials, Adhesives and
Sealants: South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168, and
amendment dated January 7, 2005.
9. Indoor Environmental Quality, Credit 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials, Paints and Coatings:
Green Seal Standard GS-11 for architectural paints and coatings, GC-03 for Anti-
01015 - 2
Radiant Park
Corrosive Paints, South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1113 for
clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers and shellacs.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. LEED Version 3.0 (2009), "Green Building
Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations" (LEED-NC).
B. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured or assembled within a
radius of 500 miles from the Project location.
C. Regionally Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Materials that are extracted,
harvested, or recovered and manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project site.
D. Recycled Content: Percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or
otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-
consumer), or after consumer use (post-consumer).
E. Certified Wood: Wood-based materials and products which are certified in accordance with
the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Principles and Criteria for sustainably harvested and
processed wood building components.
F. Certificates of Chain-of-Custody: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood
used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification
body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria". Certificates shall include evidence that
mill is certified for chain-of-custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: LEED Submittals are required in addition to other submittals specified in Section
01340 and Specific Sections of these Specifications. Submit one (1) electronic submittal for
each LEED required product data submittal.
1. LEED submittals shall be submitted with the LEED Credit number shown on the cover
sheet of the submittal and the subject line of the email.
2. Submittal requirements in individual Specification Sections are minimum requirements.
The U.S. Green Building Council reviewers may require the Contractor to submit
additional data to prove compliance with LEED requirements.
3. Provide a record electronic copy of the LEED submittals as part of project closeout.
B. Project Materials Cost Data: Contractor shall be responsible for tracking material costs, and
provide statement indicating the types and total cost of building materials used for the
Project, exclusive of labor for installation.
C. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established for
commencement of the Work indicating how the following requirements will be met.
1. Credit Prerequisite SS1: Erosion and sedimentation control plan complying with criteria
set within the Construction Documents.
2. Credit SS 5.1: Strategy/plan to minimize the disturbance of the existing site and
restore areas to their natural state.
3. Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2: Waste management plan complying with Section 01714,
Construction Waste Management.
4. Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2: List of proposed materials with recycled content, indicating
cost, pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content for each material.
5. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2 and ID 1.4: List of proposed regionally manufactured/ assembled
materials and regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials, indicating cost
and source for each material.
6. Credit MR 7.0: List of each product containing certified wood, indicating cost and
source for each material.
7. Credit EQ 3.1 and 3.2: Construction IAQ Management plan complying with LEED criteria
outlining strategies for compliance.
D. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Progress Payment, submit reports
comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans.
E. LEED Documentation Submittals: LEED Submittal log showing all Prerequisite and Credits cross-
referenced with Specification Section.
01015 - 3
Radiant Park
1. Prerequisite SS 1: Digital photograph of each erosion and sedimentation control
measure in place, functioning properly. Photographs shall be taken over the course of
the site work activities and show date stamps.
2. Credit SS 4.2: Product data for bike racks.
3. Credit SS 7.1: Product data for paving materials indicating Solar Reflectance Index
(SRI) per ASTM E1980 is greater than 29.
4. Credit SS 7.2: Product data for roofing materials indicating Solar Reflectance Index
(SRI) per ASTM E1980 is greater than 78 for roof slopes less than or equal to 2 on 12,
and greater than 29 for roof slopes greater than 2 on 12.
5. Credit WE 3.1 and 3.2: Product data for plumbing fixtures indicating water
consumption for flush valves, urinals, lavatory faucets, shower heads and kitchen
faucets do not exceed the maximum flow and flush rates indicated in mechanical
construction documents.
6. Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2: Comply with Section 01714, Construction Waste Management.
7. Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2: Product data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. Exclude mechanical, electrical
and plumbing materials. After submittal review, input the cost and product data into
the electronic LEED Template MR 4.
8. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. Exclude mechanical,
electrical and plumbing materials. After submittal review, input the cost and product
data into the electronic LEED Template MR 5.
9. Credit EQ 3.1: Submit a Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management plan
meeting SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2007,
Chapter 3, including:
a. Description of control measures for HVAC Protection, Source Control, Pathway
Interruption, Housekeeping and Scheduling.
b. Confirmation if permanently installed air handling equipment will be used
during construction. If HVAC equipment is operated during construction,
provide product data for temporary filtration media with a minimum MERV
rating of 8 at each return grille or duct opening.
c. Product data for filtration media installed during system operation and/or
immediately prior to occupancy.
d. A minimum of six (6) photographs at five different occasions during
construction along with a brief description of each of the five SMACNA
approach employed, documenting implementation of each of the of the
SMACNA IAQ management measures.
e. Narrative of any special circumstances or non-standard approaches taken.
f. Complete the electronic LEED Template EQ 3.1.
10. Credit EQ 3.2: Proof of implementation of the Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)
Management plan, including:
a. Confirmation regarding the approach taken by the Project (pre-occupancy
flush-out or flush-out with early occupancy), dates when flush-out was begun
and completed and statement that filtration media was inspected and replaced
if needed after flush-out.
b. Product Data for filtration media used during flush-out and during occupancy.
c. Graphic bar chart from building automation system documenting the quantity
(in cubic feet) of outside air moved through the building each day during the
flush-out period.
d. Confirmation that temperature levels inside the building were kept above 60
degrees F during the flushout.
e. Complete the electronic LEED template EQ 3.2.
01015 - 4
Radiant Park
11. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed
the limits listed in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual
specification sections. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24). After submittal review, input the product data into the
electronic LEED Template EQ 4.1.
12. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for interior paints and coatings used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each
product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the
requirements of individual specification sections. Indicate VOC content in g/L
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). After submittal review,
input the product data into the electronic LEED Template EQ 4.2.
13. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for composite wood products containing composite wood
or agrifiber products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain any added urea-
formaldehyde in resins. After submittal review, input the product data into the
electronic LEED Template EQ 4.4.
F. LEED Submittal Log: Maintain a LEED Submittal Log, organized by specification section and
LEED credit. Submit preliminary LEED Submittal Log to the LEED consultant for review.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
A. Credits MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-
consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a
minimum of 20 percent of the cost of materials used for the Project.
1. The cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing
the weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by the total weight of the
item and multiplying by the cost of the item.
2. The cost of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled
content of an item shall be determined by dividing the weight of post-consumer
recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by the
total weight of the item and multiplying by the cost of the item.
3. Do not include mechanical, plumbing or electrical components in the calculation.
4. Recycled content shall be defined according to the Federal Trade Commission's "Guide
for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims", 16 CFR 260.7 (e).
5. Do not include labor cost for installation of the material.
2.02 REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Credit MR 5.1: Provide 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regionally
manufactured or assembled materials.
B. Credit MR 5.2: Of the regionally manufactured materials required by Paragraph "Credit MR 5.1"
above, provide at least 50 percent (by cost) that are regionally extracted, harvested, or
recovered materials.
C. Credit MR 5.1 and MR 5.2: Provide 30% of building materials (by cost) that are regionally
extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured or assembled.
1. If only a fraction of a product or material is extracted/harvested/recovered and
manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the
regional value.
2. Do not include labor cost for installation of the material.
3. Do not include mechanical, plumbing or electrical components in the calculation.
2.03 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A. Credit EQ 4.1: For interior applications use adhesives and sealants that comply with the
following limits for VOC content:
01015 - 5
Radiant Park
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet and Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. VCT, Asphalt Tile, and Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8. Gypsum Wallboard and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
10. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
11. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
12. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
13. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
14. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
15. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
16. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
17. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
18. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
19. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
20. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
21. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
22. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
23. Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
24. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
25. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. Credit EQ 4.2: For interior applications use paints and coatings that comply with the following
limits for VOC content and the following chemical restrictions per Green Seal Standard GS-11
and GS-03:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Non-Flat Paints, Primers and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4. Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
6. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
7. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
9. Waterproofing Sealers: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
10. Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealers: VOC not more than 400 g/L.
11. Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 275 g/L.
12. All Other Sealers: VOC not more than 200 g/L.
13. Clear Shellac: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
14. Pigmented Shellac: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
15. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight total aromatic compounds.
16. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein, acrylonitrile,
antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-
n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate,
dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone,
lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride,
naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, or vinyl chloride.
D. Credit EQ 4.4: Do not use composite wood and agrifiber products that contain added urea-
formaldehyde resin.
01015 - 6
Radiant Park
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LEED CONSTRUCTION COORDINATOR
A. Contractor shall assign a LEED Construction Coordinator to be responsible for monitoring LEED
submittals and requirements, preparing Letter Templates, and coordinating with Owner's LEED
Consultant. The Construction LEED Coordinator shall have demonstrated experience with LEED
submittals and procedures. The Contractor shall bear the cost of training the LEED
Construction Coordinator if the Owner’s LEED Consultant determines the Construction
Coordinator’s knowledge is not adequate.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
A. Credit EQ 3.1: Develop and implement an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan that
complies with the "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995,
Chapter 3". Include the following:
1. SMACNA standard control measures for HVAC protection, source control, pathway
interruption, housekeeping and scheduling.
2. List of all filtration media including manufacturer, model number, MERV rating and
location.
3. Method of protecting stored onsite or installed absorptive materials from moisture
damage.
4. Statement clarifying if permanently installed air handling equipment will be used
during construction. If so, include requirement to install filtration media of MERV 8
according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return air inlet for the air handling system used
during construction. Replace all air filters immediately prior to building occupancy.
Replacement air filters shall have a minimum MERV 13 rating according to ASHRAE
52.2.
B. Credit EQ 3.2: Develop and implement an IAQ Plan for the pre-occupancy phase by conducting
one of the two procedures:
1. After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed,
perform a building flush-out by supplying a total volume of 14,000 cu. ft. of outdoor air
per square foot of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°
F and a relative humidity no higher than 60%, or
2. If occupancy is desired prior to flush-out completion, the space may be occupied
following delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cu. Ft. of outdoor air per square foot of floor
area to the space. Once a space is occupied, it shall be ventilated at a minimum rate
of 0.30 cfm per square foot of outside air or the design minimum outside air rate
determined in EQ Prerequisite 1, whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-
out period, ventilation shall begin a minimum of three (3) hours prior to occupancy and
continue during occupancy. These conditions shall be maintained until a total of
14,000 cu. ft. per square foot of outside air has been delivered to the space while
maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60° F and a relative humidity no higher
than 60%.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 1 of 13
DIVISION 1
SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 Summary
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances.
1.03 Definitions
A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for
materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated
quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.04 Procedures
A. Unit prices includes acquisition of necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation (per the drawings and
specifications), insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of
unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of
established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor
acceptable to Contractor.
D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule
contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 2 – MATERIALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 List of Unit Prices
Demolition
Unit Price Item: Demolition Existing of Curb and Gutter
1. Description: Demolition, removal, and disposal of curb and gutter, including all efforts and materials required
for complete removal.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 2 of 13
Unit Price Item: Demolition of Existing Concrete Sidewalk
1. Description: Demolition, removal, and dispose of concrete sidewalk including all incidental efforts and
materials required to complete the demolition.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Asphalt Saw Cutting
1. Description: Saw Cutting including all efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Earthwork and Utilities
Unit Price Item: Import Topsoil
1. Description: Import Topsoil including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Unit Price Item: Imported Fill
1. Description: Acquisition, import, distribution and compaction of fill including all incidental efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Unit Price Item: Earthwork-Cut and Stockpiling
1. Description: Cut and stockpiling of earthwork including all incidental efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Unit Price Item: Earthwork- Fill
1. Description: distribution and compaction of fill including all incidental efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Unit Price Item: Imported Structural Fill
1. Description: Acquisition, import, distribution and compaction of structural fill including all incidental
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Unit Price Item: Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling
1. Description: Cut and stockpiling of topsoil including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Unit Price Item: Topsoil Spreading and Placement
1. Description: Spreading and placement of topsoil including all incidental efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 3 of 13
Unit Price Item: Vehicle Tracking Pad Removal
1. Description: Maintenance and removal of vehicular tracking pad including all incidental efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Temporary Stream Crossing Removal
1. Description: Maintenance and removal of temporary stream crossing including all incidental efforts and
materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Rip Rap – Type M
3. Description: Installation of Type M Rip Rap located adjacent to the Basketball and Tennis Courts including all
incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item.
4. Unit of Measurement: Ton
Unit Price Item: Rip Rap – Type L
1. Description: Installation of type L Rip Rap including all incidental efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Ton
Unit Price Item: Waterline Pipe – 2” Copper
1. Description: Two inch copper water line pipe with fittings, installation per drawings, including all efforts and
materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Waterline Pipe – ¾” Copper
1. Description: ¾” copper water line pipe installation with fittings, installation per drawings, including all efforts
and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Waterline Thrust Block
1. Description: Waterline thrust block installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Waterline Tapping Saddle
1. Description: Waterline Tapping Saddle installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Waterline Swivel Tee
1. Description: Waterline Swivel Tee installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Waterline Bends
1. Description: Waterline Bends installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 4 of 13
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Waterline Joint Restraint
1. Description: Waterline joint restraint installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: 2” Water Service Blowout Assembly
1. Description: 2” water service blowout assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: 2” Water Meter and Meter Pit
1. Description: 2” water meter and meter pit installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required
for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: 2” Water Service Curb Stop
1. Description: 2” water service curb stop installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Sanitary Sewer Pipe – 4” PVC
1. Description: Four inch PVC sewer pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Sanitary Sewer Pipe – 8” PVC
1. Description: eight inch PVC sewer pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for
a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Sanitary Sewer - Cleanout
1. Description: Sanitary sewer cleanout installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – 18” RCP
1. Description: Eighteen inch RCP storm sewer installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – 15” RCP
1. Description: Fifteen inch RCP storm sewer installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required
for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 5 of 13
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – 12” RCP
1. Description: Twelve inch RCP storm sewer installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required
for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer- 18” Flared End Section
1. Description: Eighteen inch Flared End Section Storm Sewer installation per drawings including all efforts and
materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer- 12” Flared End Section
1. Description: Twelve inch Flared End Section Storm Sewer installation per drawings including all efforts and
materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – Type C Inlet
1. Description: Type C Inlet installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – Area Inlet
1. Description: Area Inlet installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – 24” ADS Drain Basin
1. Description: 24” ADS drain basin installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Erosion Control – Earthen Berm
1. Description: Earthen Berm installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Erosion Control – Inlet Protection
1. Description: Inlet Protection installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Erosion Control – Wattle Protection
1. Description: Wattle Protection installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: 10” Diameter – EZ Flow with 4” Pipe Under-drain
1. Description: 10” diameter – EZ Flow with 4” pipe under drain for playground area per drawings including all
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 6 of 13
Unit Price Item: 4” Perforated Landscape Drain Pipe
1. Description: 4” Perforated Pipe Sub-drain installation including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Solar Panel
3. Description: 235 Watt solar panel for installation on roof of restroom building including all efforts and materials
required for complete installation.
4. Unit of Measurement: Each
Hardscape
Unit Price Item: Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” Thick)
1. Description: Installation of Concrete including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and
incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” Thick) – Tot Lot Thickened Edge
1. Description: Installation of Concrete including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and
incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Integral Color Concrete Pavement (5” Thick)
1. Description: Installation of Concrete including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and
incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Glasscrete Pavement (5” thick)
1. Description: Installation of Concrete and glass aggregate including excavation, formwork, coordination with
artist, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished
product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Pavers on Sand
1. Description: Installation of Concrete pavers including excavation, transportation, installation in place, and
incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Porous Stone Pavement
1. Description: Installation of Porous Stone pavement including excavation, formwork, coordination with artist,
transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 7 of 13
Unit Price Item: Concrete Edger
3. Description: Installation of Concrete Edger including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place,
and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
4. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Concrete Curb and Gutter
1. Description: Installation of curb and gutter including excavation, formwork, and transportation, installation in
place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Wall #1 – 8” Concrete wall varying height
1. Description: 8” width concrete wall cast-in-place concrete retaining wall varying height per drawings including
all excavation, formwork, concrete, reinforcing, and other materials, backfill, transportation of materials, and
incidental efforts required for a complete finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Wall #2 - Sandstone Boulder Wall
1. Description: Varying height retaining wall including all excavation, and other materials, backfill, transportation
of materials, and incidental efforts required for a complete finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Ton
Unit Price Item: Wall #3 – Abutment Wall for 85’ Bridge
3. Description: Modular Block retaining wall including all excavation, and other materials, backfill, transportation
of materials, and incidental efforts required for a complete finished product.
4. Unit of Measurement: Ton
Unit Price Item: Wall #4 – Play Climbing Wall
1. Description: Modular Block retaining wall including all coordination with playground equipment installer,
excavation, and other materials, backfill, transportation of materials, and incidental efforts required for a
complete finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Face
Unit Price Item: Standard Grey Concrete Base Pavement for P.I.P. Surfacing (4” thick)
1. Description: Installation of concrete subgrade for Poured-In-Place (P.I.P.) safety surfacing including excavation,
formwork, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed
finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Artwork Shelter Foundation
3. Description: Cast-in-place concrete foundation varying height per drawings including all excavation, formwork,
concrete, reinforcing, and other materials, backfill, transportation of materials, and incidental efforts required for
a complete finished product.
4. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Face
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 8 of 13
Playground Safety Surfacing
Unit Price Item: In-organic Loose-Fill Surface (Sand)
1. Description: Installation of sand surface including excavation, transportation, installation in place, and
incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
2. Unit of Measurement: Ton
Unit Price Item: Poured in Place Surfacing
3. Description: Installation of poured in place surface including excavation, transportation, installation in place,
and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product.
4. Unit of Measurement: Ton
Irrigation
Unit Price Item: Irrigation for Turf (seed or sod) areas less than 10 feet in width
1. Description: Turf Seed or Sod Irrigation system for areas less 10 feet in width, installation per drawings
including all efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Irrigation for Turf (seed or sod) areas greater than 10 feet in width
1. Description: Turf Seed or Sod Irrigation system for areas greater than 10 feet in width, installation per drawings
including all efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Pop up spray sprinkler with nozzle
1. Description: Pop up spray sprinkler with nozzle installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Pop up Rotor sprinkler with nozzle – Hunter I-20’s
1. Description: Pop up gear driven rotor spray sprinkler with nozzle installation per drawings including all
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Pop up Rotor sprinkler with nozzle – Hunter I-40’s
1. Description: Pop up gear driven rotor spray sprinkler with nozzle installation per drawings including all
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Drip Irrigation – per shrub, perennial or grass in planting bed
1. Description: Drip irrigation installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Drip Irrigation – per one tree in turf
1. Description: Drip irrigation installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 9 of 13
Unit Price Item: Sleeve Pipe
1. Description: PVC sleeve pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Isolation gate valve assembly-2”
1. Description: 3” isolation gate valve assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Quick coupling valve assembly
1. Description: Quick coupling valve assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required
for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Manual drain valve assembly
1. Description: Manual drain valve assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required
for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals-1”
1. Description: 1” remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals installation per drawings including all
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals-1.5”
1. Description: 1.5” remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals installation per drawings including all
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals-2”
1. Description: 2” remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals installation per drawings including all
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Remote control valve assembly for drip laterals-1”
1. Description: 1” remote control valve assembly for drip lateral drip zones installation per drawings including all
efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Flush Cap Assembly
1. Description: Flush cap assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Mainline Pipe-2”
1. Description: 2” mainline pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 10 of 13
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Lateral Pipe-1”
1. Description: 1” lateral pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Lateral Pipe-1.25”
1. Description: 1.25” lateral pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Lateral Pipe-1.5”
1. Description: 1.5” lateral pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Unit Price Item: Lateral Pipe-2”
1. Description: 2” lateral pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot
Landscape
Unit Price Item: Finish Grading
1. Description: Finish grading per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Organic Amendment
1. Description: Class 2 Organic amendment including acquisition, incorporation into soil and all efforts and
materials required for a complete item.
2. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard
Unit Price Item: Irrigated Fescue Mix Turf Seeding
1. Description: Irrigated turf fescue seed mix as described in the specs including transportation, excavation, and
incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. Does not include irrigation.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Dryland Turf Seeding
1 Description: Dryland turf seed mix as described in the specs including transportation, excavation, and incidental
efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. Does not include irrigation.
2 Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Blue Gramma Turf Seeding
1. Description: Blue Gramma turf seed mix as described in the specs including transportation, excavation, and
incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. Does not include irrigation.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 11 of 13
Unit Price Item: Buffalo Grass Sod
3. Description: Buffalo Grass Sod as described in the specs including transportation, excavation, and incidental
efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. Does not include irrigation.
4. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Evergreen Tree- 8’ Height
1. Description: 8’ evergreen tree, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil amendments, fertilizer,
mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials required for complete finished
installation. Does not include irrigation system work.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Deciduous Canopy Tree- 3” Caliper
1. Description: 3” inch caliper deciduous canopy tree, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil
amendments, fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials
required for complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Deciduous Canopy Tree- 2” Caliper
3. Description: 2” inch caliper deciduous canopy tree, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil
amendments, fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials
required for complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work.
4. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Deciduous Shrub- 5 Gallon Container
1. Description: Five gallon container deciduous shrub, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil
amendments, fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials
required for complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Evergreen Shrub- 5 Gallon Container
1. Description: Five gallon container evergreen shrub, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil
amendments, fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials
required for complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Perennial- 1 Gallon Container
1. Description: One gallon perennial, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil amendments, fertilizer,
mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials required for complete finished
installation. Does not include irrigation system work.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Ornamental Grass- 5 Gallon Container
1. Description: Five gallon ornamental grass, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil amendments,
fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials required for
complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Weed Barrier
1. Description: Weed barrier installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete
item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 12 of 13
Unit Price Item: City Supplied Mulch – Installation Only
1. Description: City Supplied mulch installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot
Unit Price Item: Sandstone Landscape Boulder – 4’
1. Description: 4’x4’x4’ Sandstone Boulder installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Sandstone Landscape Boulder – 3’
3. Description: 3’x3’x3’ Sandstone Boulder installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
4. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Sandstone Boulder 2’x2’x2’
1. Description: 2’x2’x2’ Sandstone Landscape Boulder installation per drawings including all efforts and
materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: City Supplied Landscape Log – Installation Only
1. Description: City Supplied Landscape Log installation per drawings including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Site Furnishings
Unit Price Item: Site Bench
1. Description: Bench installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials required for a
complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Bike Rack
1. Description: Bicycle rack installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials required
for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Picnic Table
1. Description: Oval picnic table installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: Drinking Fountain
1. Description: Drinking fountain installation per drawings and specifications
including all efforts and materials required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES
Page 13 of 13
Unit Price Item: LED Rope Lighting
1. Description: Rope Lighting installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
2. Unit of Measurement: Each
Unit Price Item: LED Spot Lighting
3. Description: LED Spot lighting installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials
required for a complete item.
4. Unit of Measurement: Each
END OF SECTION
01714 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 01714
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND REMOVAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. The City of Fort Collins has established that this project shall generate less waste and will
recycle or salvage at least 75% by volume/by weight of construction, demolition and land
clearing waste. The Contractor shall develop and implement a Construction Waste
Management (CWM) plan that identifies proposed deconstruction and salvage opportunities,
reduces waste in ordering, storing and installation, recommends recycling activities, identifies
licensed haulers and processors of recycled materials, names materials subject to salvage and
identify organizations that accept salvaged materials. The Contractor shall estimate costs for
recycling, salvage and reuse on site and train all site workers on the CWM plan process and
requirements.
B. Administrative and procedural requirements for recycling non-hazardous demolition,
construction waste and packaging materials.
C. Furnish, maintain and service dumpsters and/or roll-offs for handling recycled materials, and
disposing of non-hazardous demolition and construction waste.
D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work: LEED and sustainability goals.
2. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
3. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal requirements.
4. Section 02050, Building Demolition: Salvage and recycling requirements.
5. Section 02070, Selective Demolition: Salvage and recycling requirements.
6. Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal.
7. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for construction waste
management.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging materials.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal offsite of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Waste Management Plan: Submit one (1) electronic plan in PDF or Microsoft Word
format within 14 days of date established for commencement of the work.
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit one
(1) electronic copy of report, including the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Total quantity of waste in tons or cubic yards.
3. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged, reused or recycled) in tons or cubic yards.
4. Total quantity of waste recovered as a percentage of total waste.
01714 - 2
Radiant Park
C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit one (1)
electronic copy of calculated end-of-project rates for salvage, recycling and disposal as a
percentage of total waste generated by the work.
D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable or reusable waste
donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts and invoices.
F. Landfill Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills facilities
licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices.
G. Final Report: Contractor shall submit a final report after all waste materials have been
removed or reused on site and final cleaning has taken place. The report shall include
information from the Waste Reduction Progress Reports and shall result in a total waste
recovered (salvaged, reused or recycled) matching the goal established above.
H. LEED Submittal: Spreadsheet, updated monthly, tabulating total waste material, quantities
diverted and means by which it is diverted. Individual hauling tickets must be kept by the
Contractor in case of LEED audit, but they are not required to be submitted to the design team
LEED Consultant.
1.04 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Construction Waste Management Plan: Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall develop
and implement a draft Construction Waste Management (CWM) plan to the Architect and Owner
for review. The CWM plan shall contain the following required information:
1. Name of Contractor's personnel responsible for managing the CWM plan.
2. Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated, including types and
approximate quantities or percentages. Offer options to reduce the waste generated,
including ordering procedures, reducing damage to material during storage on site and
during installation, and reducing packaging waste. Also offer options to reduce waste
that must be disposed of in a hazardous waste facility.
3. Landfill Options: Name of the landfill(s) where trash will be disposed of, the
applicable landfill tipping fees, and the projected cost of disposing of all construction
waste in the landfill(s).
4. Alternatives to Landfilling: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused or
recycled during the course of the Project and the estimated net cost savings or
additional costs resulting from separating and recycling, reusing or salvaging (versus
landfilling) each material. "Net" means that the following have been subtracted from
the cost of separation and recycling:
a. Revenue from the sale of recycled or salvaged materials, and
b. Landfill tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials from the landfill. The
list of these materials shall include, at a minimum, the following materials:
1) Cardboard.
2) Concrete.
3) Asphalt.
4) Wood, including dimensional, unpainted wood, plywood, OSB and
particleboard.
5) Ferrous materials.
6) Non-ferrous metals, including copper, brass and aluminum.
7) Glass, including glass bottles from beverages.
8) HDPE and PET plastics, including beverage containers.
9) Brick.
10) Concrete masonry units (CMU).
11) Gypsum wallboard products.
12) Carpet and pad materials.
13) Polystyrene.
14) Newspaper.
15) Office and other white paper.
16) Drawings, engineering copies and blueprints.
01714 - 3
Radiant Park
17) Packaging materials, including:
a) Paper.
b) Cardboard boxes.
c) Wood pallets and crates.
d) Plastic sheet and film.
e) Polystyrene packaging.
f) Glass.
g) HPDE and PET plastics, including beverage containers.
h) Plastic pails.
5. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing
waste management plan. Include the following:
a. Total quantity of waste.
b. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and
cost of collection containers for each type of waste.
c. Revenue from salvaged materials.
d. Revenue from recycled materials.
e. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
f. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
g. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for
each type of waste.
h. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
6. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which any materials identified
above will be protected from contamination and describe the means to be employed in
recycling the materials (separation requirements, containers, etc.)
7. Transportation: Describe the means of transportation of the recyclable materials, such
as whether materials will be site-separated by the Contractor, hauled by the
Contractor or specialty recycling firm, or collected by the designated facility.
8. Site Disposal: Burial or other disposal of material on site is prohibited.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to the Contractor.
C. Contractor shall submit copies of the CWM plan for review by the Architect and Owner's
Representative. Allow for at least two weeks for review. Contractor shall make requested
revisions and complete the approved CWM plan.
1. Quantity of Draft Plan: Three (3) (one (1) electronic copy), unless other quantity is
specified in Section 01340.
1.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT CONFERENCE
A. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination". Meeting shall include contractors affected by the Waste
Management Plan. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste
Management Coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.06 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct disposal operations in compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and
anti-pollution laws.
B. Disposal of waste materials, debris and rubbish shall be at a commercially-operated recycling
01714 - 4
Radiant Park
center, legal dumpsite or landfill.
1. Contractor shall be responsible for all dump fees and expenses associated with hauling
materials to the landfill.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RECYCLED MATERIALS CONTAINERS
A. Furnish and maintain recycling containers, dumpsters and/or roll-off dumpsters for the sorting
and collection of non-hazardous recyclable construction waste materials.
B. Individual recycling containers shall be maintained for paper, corrugated cardboard, and co-
mingled containers for glass, plastic, aluminum and steel, or as required to meet the
Contractor's Construction Waste Management plan. General contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring proper separation of recycled materials and delivery to acceptable recycling centers.
2.02 WASTE REMOVAL CONTAINERS
A. Furnish and maintain trash and waste removal dumpsters and/or roll-off dumpsters for the
collection of non-hazardous construction waste materials, debris and rubbish, in quantities
sufficient for the Work.
1. Dumpsters shall be provided with tightly fitted covers to prevent debris from being
blown out.
2. Roll-offs shall not be required to be covered, but shall be serviced frequently enough
to prevent debris from accumulating and being blown out.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Distribution: Contractor shall distribute copies of the approved CWM plan to the
Superintendent, each Subcontractor, the Architect and the Owner. One copy shall be posted at
the jobsite at all times.
B. General: Contractor shall implement the CWM plan as approved by the Owner and Architect.
Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation and other items as required to
implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Project.
C. Waste Management Coordinator: Contractor shall provide a waste management coordinator to
be responsible for implementing, monitoring and reporting status of waste management work
plan.
D. Training: Train and supervise workers, subcontractors and suppliers on proper waste
management procedures, as appropriate for the project.
1. Distribute the CWM plan to everyone concerned within three (3) days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute the CWM plan to entities when they first begin work on site. Review plan
procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling and disposal.
3. Instruction: Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation,
handling and recycling, salvage, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties at
the appropriate stages of the work
E. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities. Also refer to Sections 01046 and 01560.
1. Designate and label specific areas on site necessary for separating materials that are to
be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated and sold.
F. Separation Facilities: Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separations
of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse and return, to be determined at the Pre-
Construction Conference. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and
clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.
01714 - 5
Radiant Park
G. Hazardous Wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored and disposed of according to
local regulations. Refer to Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal.
H. Application for Progress Payments: Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress
Payment a summary of waste generated by the Project. The summary shall contain the
following information.
1. Amount (in cubic yards) of material landfilled from the Project, the identity of the
landfill, the total amount of tipping fees paid and the total disposal cost.
2. Amount (in cubic yards) of each material recycled, reused on the jobsite, salvaged or
returned. Include the transportation cost, the amount of money paid or received for
the recycled or salvaged material and the net total cost or savings of recycled or
salvaged materials.
I. Final Report: Contractor shall submit a final report when all waste material has been removed
or reused on site and final cleaning has taken place. The report shall state what percentage by
volume/by weight of construction, demolition and land clearing waste has been diverted from
landfill disposal. Salvage may include donation of the material to charitable organizations if
acceptable to the Owner.
1. Minimum required construction waste diversion rate is 75% by volume/by weight of
construction, demolition and land clearing debris.
J. LEED Template: Contractor shall fill in the LEED electronic template for credit MR 2, using
data from the final spreadsheet. The spreadsheet shall be uploaded to the LEED Online Credit
MR 2 as a supporting document.
3.02 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. General Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable
materials at each container and bin.
2. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if
found.
3. Stockpile processed materials on-site away from construction area, without intermixing
with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover
to prevent windblown dust.
B. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 3" size.
1. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.
C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 3" size.
3.03 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a
dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
C. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees at landfill facility (onsite).
1. Comply with requirements in Division 2 landscaping sections for use of chipped organic
waste as organic mulch.
D. Wood Materials:
2. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
3. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
01714 - 6
Radiant Park
E. Gypsum Wallboard: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper
or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE AND RECYCLED MATERIALS
A. Cleaning: Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free
from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from
construction operations, as specified in Section 01710.
1. Maintain parking areas, access drives and city streets clean from mud and other debris.
B. Recycling: Remove non-hazardous materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused to
appropriate recycling centers, recycling processors, architectural salvage sites or other
locations as specified in the approved CWM plan or other Sections of these Specifications.
C. Except for materials to be salvaged, recycled or otherwise reused, remove non-hazardous
construction waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at
legal commercial dump sites or landfills away from the site.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01732 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Page 1 of 4
DIVISION 2
SECTION 01732 - DEMOLITION
PART-1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of premises.
2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and
environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
3. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated
to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Surrender: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall
them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Historic items, relics, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during
selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a
manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.
1. Coordinate with Owner's archaeologist, or historical adviser, who will establish special procedures
for removal and salvage.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For [demolition firm] [professional engineer] [refrigerant recovery technician].
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity. Ensure uninterrupted access to elementary school.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01732 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Page 2 of 4
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.
C. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective
demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit
before Work begins.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar
in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with
selective demolition.
D. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately
notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and
salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function
or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit
a written report to Architect.
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs
and/or preconstruction videotapes.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01732 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Page 3 of 4
3.02 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with
selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition
and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades, signs and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.
2. Comply with requirements for dust control.,
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to
preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain,
and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction
and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing
regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut ends, openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or
small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly and recycle items as possible.
3. Use of explosives is prohibited.
B. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to
match new equipment.
2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make
item functional for use indicated.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Owner’s Representative, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 01732 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Page 4 of 4
3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut full depth at junctures with construction to remain, using power-
driven saw, and then break up and remove concrete between saw cuts. Concrete removed to be
recycled.
B. Fences: remove above grade and below grade fence materials.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3, Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
B. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose or recycle them.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02111 – SITE PREPARATION
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02111 – SITE PREPARATION AND CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included
A. The contract work to be performed under this section consists of furnishing the required labor,
materials, equipment, implements, parts and supplies, reconditioning, compaction, wetting or
drying, and finish grading, as shown on the plans necessary for, or appurtenant to the site
preparation beneath interior and exterior slabs, pavements, grass pave, play courts, and beneath the
skate park in accordance with these specifications.
1.02 Related Sections
A. Section 02235 - Topsoil
B. Section 02750 – Concrete Paving
C. Geotechnical Engineering Report prepared by CTL Thompson 01/09/12
1.03 Submittals
A. Submit soils analysis of imported fill materials, if imported materials required.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 Subgrade Materials
A. Strip and remove existing vegetation, debris, and other deleterious materials from proposed
building, court areas and pavement areas. Exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and
depressions, which could prevent uniform compaction.
B. Stripped materials consisting of vegetation and organic materials should be wasted from the site,
or used to revegetate landscaped areas or exposed slopes after the completion of grading
operations. If it is necessary to dispose of organic materials on-site, they should be placed in non-
structural areas and in fill sections not exceeding 5 feet in height.
2.04 Fill Materials
A. Clean on-site soils or approved imported materials may be used as fill material.
B. Approved imported materials may be used as fill material and are suitable for use as compacted fill
beneath interior or exterior floor slabs. Imported soils (if required) should conform to the
following:
Percent finer by weight
Gradation (ASTM C136)
3" 100
No. 4 Sieve 50-100
No. 200 Sieve 35 (max)
Liquid Limit 30 (max)
Plasticity Index 15 (max)
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02111 – SITE PREPARATION
Page 2 of 3
Group Index 10 (max)
2.04 Basketball and Tennis Court Fine Grade Material
A. Fine grade base material shall be an approved compactable, free draining base material (sand, fine
gravel, etc.).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Site Clearing
A. Where present, trees, bushes, and a minimum of topsoil will be removed from the site. The area
will be graded to the required depth to accommodate the base and concrete or asphalt thickness
and provide a uniform slope at plus or minus one tenth of a foot (+.1').
3.02 Site Preparation
A. Strip and remove existing debris or other deleterious materials from proposed building areas.
Exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions that could prevent uniform
compaction.
B. If unstable conditions develop, workability may be improved by scarifying and drying. Over
excavation of wet zones and replacement with granular materials may be necessary.
C. Temporary dewatering will be required for excavations approaching or in the groundwater. Use of
lime, fly ash, kiln dust, cement or geotextiles may be used as a stabilization technique. Laboratory
evaluation is recommended to determine the effect of chemical stabilization on subgrade soils prior
to construction. Lightweight excavation equipment may be required to reduce subgrade pumping.
3.03 Subgrade Preparation
A. Subgrade preparation beneath interior and exterior slabs, and beneath other improvements shall
comply with the recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineering Report.
B. Required moisture content and compaction of subgrade soils shall be maintained until construction
of the related improvement.
C. The contractor shall alert the owner of soft spots or structures that could affect the stability of the
slab.
D. Subgrade compaction and moisture tests shall be performed by a qualified professional prior to
installation of the related improvement. Defective work shall be corrected as directed by the
Owner’s Representative.
3.04 Soil Stabilization
A. Refer to the recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineering Report for recommended soil
stabilization techniques, if required.
3.05 Placement of Fill Material
A. Placement of fill material shall comply with the Geotechnical Engineering Report.
B. After required over excavation is performed, the site should be initially graded to create a
relatively level surface to receive fill, and to provide for a relatively uniform thickness of fill
beneath proposed structures.
C. Exposed areas, which will receive fill, once properly cleared and benched where necessary, should
be scarified to a minimum depth of 12-inches, conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and
compacted.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02111 – SITE PREPARATION
Page 3 of 3
D. Engineered fill should be placed and compacted in horizontal lifts, using equipment and
procedures that will produce recommended moisture contents and densities throughout the lift. Fill
material placed on the site shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of Standard Proctor Density
ASTM D698.
1. On-site clay soils shall be compacted within a moisture content range of 1 percent below, to 3
percent above optimum.
2. Imported granular soils should be compacted within a moisture range of 3 percent below to 3
percent above optimum unless modified by the project geotechnical engineer.
E. Fills shall be placed in six inch (6") layers. In areas where proposed structures, courts and paving
are proposed fill materials shall be compacted to ninety five percent (95%) standard density at
optimum moisture. In areas where landscaping is proposed fill materials shall be compacted to
ninety percent (90%) standard density at optimum moisture.
3.05 Fine Grade
A. Elevation of base material for Basketball Courts shall be controlled using automatic laser-regulated
equipment capable of providing a true accurate to plus or minus one-quarter inch (+1/4").
END OF SECTION
02225 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 02225
STRUCTURAL EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of site work related to building structures.
B. Prepare subgrade for building slabs, sidewalks, site pavements and other improvements.
C. Shore and brace excavations as required.
D. Dewater excavations as necessary.
E. Furnish and install materials for passive and/or mechanical underslab ventilation system,
unless arranged for otherwise.
F. Finish grading and place topsoil adjacent to structures and other areas of the site disturbed by
construction activities, unless arranged for otherwise.
G. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Applicable Division 2 Landscaping Sections.
3. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical Specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
B. Soil Compaction Tests:
1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99: Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of
Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12 inch drop.
a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and judgment
of the testing laboratory.
b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed.
c. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material
encountered or utilized.
d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity.
2. ASTM D2049: Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils.
C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine
compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source of
supplier.
1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance with the
following reference standards.
a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99.
b. ASTM D2049.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by CTL
Thompson dated January 9, 2012, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or
continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect.
The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom.
1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for
himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally
considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be
encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional expenses resulting from such
conditions.
02225 - 2
Radiant Park
C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.
D. Underground Obstructions:
1. Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings.
However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not known to
Architect/Engineer may be encountered.
2. Notify each utility owner and request that utilities be field located by surface
reference using flags at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation.
3. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other
obstructions where conflicts might exist sufficiently in advance to permit changes in
the event of conflict.
a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict.
b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the
Architect/Engineer.
4. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing utilities and
appurtenances.
5. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following conditions shall
apply:
a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials.
b. Restore to original conditions or better.
6. Clean drainage culverts so they are free of sediment after construction.
E. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation
includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed
in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition
thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and
vehicular traffic.
B. Protect existing trees to remain as specified or shown on the Drawings. Take all necessary care
to prevent compaction of existing soil within the drip line of existing trees to remain.
C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance
with requirements of Sections 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all utilities which are to
remain.
D. Protect excavations by shoring or bracing as required to maintain banks of excavation in safe
and stable condition and to protect adjacent existing and new construction.
E. Provide suitable protection against bodily injury in accordance with applicable codes and
governing authorities.
F. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost.
G. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work in the
area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work.
1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING
A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of
formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the Architect/Engineer prior
to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall be at least 48 hours prior to
proceeding with the next phase of work.
B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory
submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner. Testing fees shall be
paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions.
1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper
performance of the work.
C. Soils Engineer shall make an open-hole inspection of the excavation for each building prior to
the placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Soils Engineer shall
also inspect structural backfill for building foundations prior to forming of footings or grade
beams, if not supported on undisturbed soil.
02225 - 3
Radiant Park
D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to
perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been
verified.
E. Compaction Tests:
1. Concrete Flatwork: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of
one (1) test for each 5,000 sq. ft., or portion thereof, of surface area for interior or
exterior concrete slabs-on-grade, sidewalks, aprons, or other flatwork, unless
otherwise modified by the Soils Report.
2. Foundation Walls: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of
one (1) test for each 50 lin. ft., or portion thereof, of building perimeter for
compaction adjacent to building foundation walls, unless otherwise modified by the
Soils Report.
3. Isolated Pad Footings: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate
of one (1) test under each group of four (4) pad footings, but not to exceed an area of
1,000 sq. ft.
4. Utility Trenches: Refer to Drawings.
F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Maintain and repair backfill, fill compaction and embankment settlement and make necessary
repairs to pavement, sidewalks or other structures which may be damaged as a result of
settlement for a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion and acceptance of the
work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SELECTED FILL MATERIALS
A. General: Use onsite or imported soil approved by the Soils Engineer for rough fill and for
backfill against the outside of foundation walls except as specified below. Material shall be
clean, compactable earth, free of frozen material, debris, deleterious or organic substances or
large rocks.
B. Structural Fill: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris or imported granular materials approved
by the Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted as specified below and extended to original
undisturbed soil. Use under floor slabs and exterior concrete where approved on-site material
is available or where shown on the Drawings.
1. Material shall be uniformly graded of low permeability and a swell potential of less
than 1%.
C. Coarse Granular Fill: Clean, crushed, non-porous rock, crushed or uncrushed gravel graded
from 3/8" to 1-1/2".
D. Fine Granular Fill: Natural or manufactured sand and pea gravel, clean and free of organic
debris graded from 3/8" to No. 100 sieve.
E. Topsoil: Refer to landscaping sections of Division 2. Topsoil stripped and stockpiled on-site
may be used if it meets the requirements of these Sections. Topsoil shall consist of selectively
excavated, loose, friable loam reasonably free of admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, roots,
rocks, brush, weeds or other material which would be detrimental to the proper development
of vegetative growth.
F. Unsuitable Materials: All material removed in stripping and all material containing perishable
matter such as roots, sod, grass, decayed vegetable matter, debris or materials having
unsatisfactory compaction characteristics shall be classified as unsuitable for use in the work.
All excavation of unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the
Contractor.
1. Materials which are temporarily unusable due to excessive moisture or improper
gradation will not be classified as unsuitable unless such material cannot be
satisfactorily reclaimed by screening, manipulation, aerating or blending with other
02225 - 4
Radiant Park
materials as determined by the Soils Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Classification of Excavation: The following definitions shall only apply when additional
excavation is authorized by the Architect/Engineer and/or rock excavation is encountered. Do
not proceed with the work until the material has been cross-sectioned and classified.
1. Earth Excavation: Removal and disposal of on-site soils and other materials indicated
on the Drawings, and all other material as indicated by the subsurface soil data and not
classified as rock excavation.
2. Rock Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials that cannot be excavated without
drilling, blasting or ripping, or boulders larger than 1/2 cu. yd. in volume.
B. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
1. Ensure that modifications to the existing site irrigation system have been completed, or
lines shut off or capped within the area of construction, prior to beginning work.
C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and straw bales or other required
accessory erosion control materials where indicated on the Drainage and Erosion Control Plan,
or as required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in
place until such authority permits its removal. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and
Sedimentation Control.
D. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil for subgrades for areas within
construction boundaries as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect/Engineer. The
stripped topsoil shall be stored for later use in the site finish grading. Also refer to Section
02115.
1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the Drawings, or as
directed by the Architect/Engineer. Topsoil shall not be stripped or existing vegetative
cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
E. Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to ensure the safety of all workers and
the public in and around excavations, including shoring, bracing and barricades.
F. Brace and properly support all structural elements, including foundation walls, grade beams,
and pier caps prior to beginning and continuously during backfilling and compacting operations.
G. Soils Engineer: The Soils Engineer shall inspect the natural soil at the bottom of excavations
for structures, prior to forming or placing foundations. Provide Engineer with 48 hours notice
(exclusive of weekends and holidays) when the areas are expected to be ready for such
inspections.
1. Do not prepare subgrade or place concrete until such inspection has taken place (or
waived by Engineer) and resulting recommendations of Engineer have been carried out.
3.02 ROUGH GRADING
A. Rough grade site to required levels, profiles, contours and elevations ready for finish grading
and surface treatment. Maintain the following:
1. Planting Areas: 6" below finished grade elevation.
2. Concrete Sidewalks: 4" below finished grade elevation, unless granular backfill is
specified below walks.
3. Building Slabs: As required by the Soils Report for the slab thickness and thickness of
granular backfill specified.
B. Prior to placing fill material over undisturbed subsoil, scarify surface to depth of 6", bring to 2%
wet of optimum moisture and compact as follows:
1. Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density at 2% wet
of optimum moisture content ASTM D698-78.
02225 - 5
Radiant Park
2. Pavement Areas: 95% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78.
3. Planting Areas: 90% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78.
C. Place fill in lifts of 6" to 8" maximum loose layers, bring to 2% wet of OMC and compact each
layer as specified above.
D. Stockpile existing topsoil and fill materials removed from excavation for reuse in final grading.
E. Contractor shall take special care in rough grading and filling of site areas which can lead to
non-uniform settling and compaction.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when
establishing grade elevations.
1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect/Engineer.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect/Engineer,
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
2. Under footings, foundation walls, grade beams, retaining walls or other structural
elements, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of
the footing or base to the excavation bottom without altering required top elevation.
3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified in paragraph
3.02.C.
B. Blasting: No blasting will be permitted as a part this Project without written authorization
from the Owner's principal representative.
C. Stability of Excavation:
1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace
where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material
excavated.
2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
3. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed
soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending
from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as
specified in paragraph 3.06.
D. Sheeting and Shoring:
1. Sheet, shore or brace banks and trenches not cut back to a stable slope as necessary to
prevent sliding or caving to protect workmen and the work.
2. Design and build sheeting and shoring to withstand loads which might be caused by
earth movement and pressure and to be rigid, maintaining its shape and position.
3. Support sheeting in excavation in a manner so as not to concentrate loads or horizontal
thrusts on piping. Do not brace sheeting against the pipe.
E. Dewatering:
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from flowing into excavations and
from flooding project site and surrounding area.
2. Conduct dewatering operations in addition to good, positive drainage and eliminate
standing water. Dewater excavations for concrete structures extending below ground
water level by lowering and maintaining the water level beneath such excavations
minimum 24".
3. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening
of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability
of subgrades and adjacent foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points,
sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary
to convey water away from excavations.
4. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run-off areas.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary
drainage ditches.
5. Keep excavations dry during subgrade preparation and continuously thereafter until the
structure is built to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation or
02225 - 6
Radiant Park
other cause will result.
F. Material Storage:
1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials and topsoil until required for backfilling.
Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
3. Stockpile materials away from sidewalks, streets, alleys and other public areas that are
to remain accessible during construction. Maintain site access as required for workers
and the Owner. Refer to Section 01046 for required site access.
4. Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as specified in paragraph 3.09.
G. Weather Protection:
1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than
35° F.
2. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather.
3. Do not place backfill on frozen surfaces.
4. Do not place frozen materials, snow or ice in backfill, fill or embankment.
5. Do not deposit, stamp, roll or otherwise mechanically compact backfill in water.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of +/- 0.10' and extending a
sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete
formwork, installation of services, other construction and inspection.
B. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to
required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete.
C. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed soil. If
it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending from original
undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as specified in paragraph
3.06.
D. Do not interfere with normal 45° bearing splay of any foundation.
E. Under building slabs, remove minimum 8" of existing material below finished slab elevation.
Refer to paragraph 3.05 below for overexcavation of soils below slabs-on-grade.
F. Bottom of perimeter drain shall be sloped uniformly at 0.5% minimum to sump pump or gravity
discharge, as shown on the Drawings.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A. Do not start backfilling until services and dampproofing or waterproofing systems have been
inspected.
B. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground
surfaces are not in a frozen condition.
C. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy.
D. Compact existing subgrade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for backfill
materials.
E. Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade, backfill with subsoil and compact to required density.
F. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations. Backfill systematically and as early as
possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction.
G. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8" loose depth. Use a
method so as not to disturb or damage building drainage system.
H. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs are
placed, erect necessary shoring to counteract imbalance and leave in place until their removal
is approved by Architect/Engineer.
H. Maintain 2% wet of OMC of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
I. Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls to equalize soil pressures.
J. Building Slab Backfill: Verify removal of existing material below slabs-on-grade, as specified in
paragraph 3.02 above.
K. Subsoil Treatment: Scarify the upper 6" of subgrade below and treat with 6 pounds of hydrated
lime per sq. yd., only if required by the Soils Report.
02225 - 7
Radiant Park
1. Wet treated soil 2% wet of OMC and compact to 95% of SPD per ASTM D698-78.
2. After scarification and compaction of the subgrade, place approved backfill materials
in uniform 6" to 8" lifts compacted 2% wet of OMC to at least 95% of SPD per ASTM
D698-78.
3.06 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION
A. Structural Backfill below Footings and Foundations: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris, or
imported, non-expansive granular materials approved by Soils Engineer, mechanically
compacted to a minimum of 98% of SPD.
B. Building Slabs: On-site natural soils or select granular non-expansive materials approved by the
Soils Engineer to underside of stabilizing base course, mechanically compacted to a minimum
of 95% of SPD.
C. Backfill Around Structures: Mechanically compact to a minimum of 95% of SPD.
D. Sidewalks: Subsoil or approved fill to underside of stabilizing base course. Compact each layer
of fill material at 2% wet of OMC to a minimum 95% of SPD per ASTM D698-78.
E. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: Subsoil to top of subgrade elevation, compacted to 90% of SPD.
F. Compaction Equipment: Use compaction equipment suitable for the types of soils and
materials being compacted.
1. Sheepfoot Roller: If used provide with cleaner bars attached as to prevent the
accumulation of materials between the tamper feet.
2. Rollers: Use rollers so designed that the effective weight can be increased as required
to obtain specified compaction.
3. Vibrating plate compactors.
G. Ponding or flooding is not allowed for any compaction.
3.07 FINISH GRADING
A. Rough grade subsoil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and
compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones,
etc. in excess of 3" in size. Remove subsoil which has been contaminated with petroleum
products.
B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually and
blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required subgrade, except
under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1/2" of required elevation.
C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 5% for the first 10', unless indicated otherwise
on the Drawings.
D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as specified.
Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement.
E. Place and shape subgrade for landscape berms and other artificially created earthen features
as shown on the Drawings.
3.08 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. General: Spreading of topsoil shall be the responsibility of this Section, unless provided by
Section 02100, Site Preparation, or arranged for otherwise.
B. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, on-site material,
supplemented with imported material as required.
C. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.
D. Fine grade topsoil to within 1" of finish contours unless otherwise required for areas receiving
sod, mulch or other landscape treatment, eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive
drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new work into existing.
E. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading.
F. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and damage
which may be caused by grading equipment.
G. Do not change elevation of finish grade around existing trees to remain more than 6" without
specific approval of the Architect.
02225 - 8
Radiant Park
H. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping
specified in other Sections of Division 2.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Compaction Control: Field tests shall be conducted to determine compliance of
compaction methods with specified density in accordance with:
1. ASTM D2922 (AASHTO T238): Tests for Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by
Nuclear Methods, or,
2. ASTM D1556 (AASHTO T191): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone
Method.
3. ASTM D2167 (AASHTO T205): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by Rubber-Balloon
Method.
B. Compaction shall be to the minimum densities specified in paragraph 3.06 above.
C. Moisture Content: Compact soils within +/- 2% of optimum moisture. Add water, harrow, disc,
blade or otherwise work material as required to insure uniform moisture content and adequate
protection.
3.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified
tolerances until Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work of this Section by the
Owner.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been compacted
in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior
to further construction.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Excess Fill: Remove and waste excess materials on site, as shown on the Drawings or directed
by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02229 – SITE CLEARING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing trees to remain.
2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, plants and grasses.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary
construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities.
2. Division 1 Section "Site Conditions" for verifying utility locations and for recording field
measurements.
3. Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming" for protecting trees remaining on-site that
are affected by site operations.
4. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during
construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of
trees, unless otherwise indicated.
1.04 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,
adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
site clearing.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or
used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING
Page 2 of 3
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where indicated.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site
clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.02 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to sediment and erosion control Drawings
B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until
permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.03 UTILITIES
A. Arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site
clearing, when requested by Contractor.
1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.
B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
E. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING
Page 3 of 3
3.04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where
such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches
(450 mm) below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless
further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
3.05 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Optional: Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-
recyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport
them to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02231 – TREE TRIMMING AND PROTECTION
Page 1 of 4
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02231 – TREE PROTECTION
PART-1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the protection and trimming of existing trees that interfere with, or are affected
by, execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limits placed on Contractor's use of the site.
2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary tree protection.
3. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for removal limits of trees, shrubs, and other plantings affected
by new construction.
4. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for building and utility trench excavation, backfilling, compacting
and grading requirements, and soil materials.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to remain during
construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of
trees, unless otherwise indicated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule from arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees
to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.
C. Qualification Data: For tree service firm and arborist.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed
tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an
experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of tree protection and trimming.
C. Tree Pruning: Contact the City Foresters Office (970) 221-6660 if tree pruning is required. City
Forester shall review the contractors request for tree pruning and provide direction.
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Before tree protection operations begin, meet with representatives of authorities having
jurisdiction, Owner, City Forester, Artist, consultants, and other concerned entities to review tree
protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02231 – TREE TRIMMING AND PROTECTION
Page 2 of 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed, ASTM D 448, Size 24,
with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a 3/4-inch
sieve.
B. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay
particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil;
reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1.5 inch in diameter; and
free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other non-soil materials.
1. Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches deep or more; do not obtain
from bogs or marshes.
C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard, nonwoven, pervious, geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon,
or polyester fibers.
D. Temporary Fencing: Orange Snow Fence; a minimum of 48 inches high; with ‘T’ posts; with tie wires,
and other accessories for a complete fence system.
E. Organic Mulch: Shredded Cedar, free of deleterious materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing around tree protection zones to protect remaining trees
and vegetation from construction damage. Maintain temporary fence and remove when construction is
complete.
B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing,
placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive
wetting caused by dewatering operations.
C. Mulch areas inside tree protection zones and other areas indicated.
1. Apply 4-inch average thickness of owner supplied mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of
tree trunks.
D. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material inside tree protection zones. Do not
permit vehicles or foot traffic within tree protection zones; prevent soil compaction over root systems.
E. Maintain tree protection zones free of weeds and trash.
F. Do not allow fires within tree protection zones.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Install shoring or other protective support systems to minimize sloping or benching of excavations.
B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and
excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks and comb soil to expose
roots.
1. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose
roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If
encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical,
cut roots approximately 3 inches back from new construction.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02231 – TREE TRIMMING AND PROTECTION
Page 3 of 4
2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth
cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition.
Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and
covered with soil.
D. Where utility trenches are required within tree protection zones, tunnel under or around roots by
drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand.
1. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
2. The installation of utilities, irrigation lines or any underground fixture requiring excavation deeper
than six (6) inches shall be accomplished by boring under the root system of protected existing
trees at a minimum depth of twenty-four (24) inches. The auger distance is established from the
face of the tree (outer bark) and is scaled from tree diameter and breast height as described in the
chart below.
Tree Diameter at Breast Height (inches) Auger Distance From Face of Tree (feet)
0-2 1
3-4 2
5-9 5
10-14 10
15-19 12
Over 19 15
3.03 REGRADING
A. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade
beyond tree protection zones. Maintain existing grades within tree protection zones.
B. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil.
Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations.
C. Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches but less than 12 inches below elevation of
finish grade, place drainage fill, filter fabric, and topsoil on existing grade as follows:
1. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches above elevation of finish
grade and extend not less than 18 inches from tree trunk on all sides. For balance of area within
drip-line perimeter, place drainage fill up to 6 inches below elevation of grade.
2. Place filter fabric with edges overlapping 6 inches minimum.
3. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or topsoil. Hand grade to
required finish elevations.
3.04 TREE PRUNING
A. Prune trees to remain that are affected by temporary and permanent construction.
B. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide
subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist.
C. Pruning Standards: Contact City Forester at (970) 221-6660 prior to any pruning work. Prune trees
according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) as follows:
1. Type of Pruning: Cleaning, Thinning and Raising.
D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
E. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02231 – TREE TRIMMING AND PROTECTION
Page 4 of 4
3.05 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Violation of these specifications will lead to penalties based on the type of violation and/or the
resulting damages, and may be grounds for the termination of this contract.
1. Penalties will be assessed based on the amount of damage done and the total value of that tree, or
group of trees, prior to the damage. Penalties for damage would be based on the total value of the
tree as determined by the City Forestry Division staff and the severity of the damage as a
proportion of the total value of that tree. This could include up to the full value of the tree.
B. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks,
limbs, and roots according to City Forester’s instructions.
B. Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that die or are damaged during construction operations
that City Forester determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.
1. Where practical, provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced; plant and
maintain as specified in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants."
2. Provide new trees of 6-inch caliper size and of a species selected by Architect when damaged trees
more than 6 inches in caliper size, measured 12 inches above grade, are required to be replaced.
Number of replacement trees required to mitigate loss of larger trees will comply with City Code.
Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants."
C. Aerate surface soil, compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36
inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches o.c.
Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning is not permitted.
B. Disposal: Unless otherwise agreed to, remove excess excavated material and displaced trees from
Owner's property,.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02235 – TOPSOIL
Page 1 of 2
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02235 - TOPSOIL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included
A. This work consists of stripping, salvaging and stockpiling topsoil, and excavating/redistributing
topsoil from stockpiles to place on designated landscape areas. It shall include the placing of
topsoil upon constructed cut and fill slopes after grading operations are completed.
1.02 Related Sections and Documents
A. Section 02111 - Site Preparation and Conditioning
B. Section 02301 – Earthwork and Grading
C. Section 02950 – Planting, Soil Preparation and Finish Grading
D. Geotechnical Engineering Report prepared by CTL Thompson dated 01/09/12
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil shall consist of loose friable loam free of subsoil, refuse, stumps, roots, rocks, brush,
weeds, heavy clay, hard clods, toxic substances, or other material which would be detrimental to
its use on the project. Topsoil shall consist of natural on-site ground cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Generally, the top four inches (4”) of topsoil, within the limits of the project, shall be salvaged
prior to beginning hauling, excavating, or fill operations by excavating and stockpiling the material
at designated locations in a manner that will minimize sediment damage, and not obstruct natural
drainage. Topsoil may be less than four inches (4”) deep. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are
encountered, or a maximum of four inches (4”), in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and
other waste materials.
C. Soil stockpiles
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 10 feet.
2. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
3. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.
4. Stockpiles shall be protected from sediment transport by surface roughening, watering, and
perimeter silt fencing.
4. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
5. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
6. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for re-spreading deeper topsoil.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02235 – TOPSOIL
Page 2 of 2
7. Weeds shall be controlled on soil stockpiles remaining after 30 days.
C. Topsoil shall be placed directly upon completed cut and fill slopes and other disturbed areas to be
landscaped whenever conditions and the progress of construction will permit.
D. Topsoil shall be placed to a minimum 4 inch thickness in turf areas and a minimum 4 inch
thickness in non-turf areas. Topsoil shall be keyed to the underlying material by the use of
harrows, rollers, or other suitable equipment.
E. Water shall be applied to the topsoil as required in a fine spray by nozzles or spray bars so the
topsoil areas will not be washed or eroded.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
Page 1 of 7
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 Summary
A. Provide earthwork as shown and as specified. This work shall consist of excavation, embankment
fill, disposal of excess material, shaping, and compaction of all material encountered within the
limits of work, including excavation and backfill for structures. The excavation shall include, but
is not limited to, the native soils which must be excavated for the project work. All work shall be
completed in accordance with these Specifications and the lines and grades on the Drawings. All
excavation will be classified, "unclassified excavation", or "muck excavation" or "rock
excavation", as hereafter described. All embankment will be classified "embankment material" as
hereafter described.
1.02 Related Sections
A. Section 02230 – Site Clearing
B. Section 02225 – Structural Excavation, Backfill, and Compacting
1.03 Definitions
A. Unclassified Excavation shall consist of the excavation of all materials on site to final grades.
Excavation of unsuitable material will only be paid for if it is found to be unsuitable in its original
state.
B. Muck Excavation shall consist of the removal and disposal of mixtures of soils and organic matter
not suitable for foundation material and replacement with approved material. Material damaged
due to rain or weather will not be paid for as Muck excavation and is entirely the responsibility of
the CONTRACTOR.
C. Rock Excavation shall consist of igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary rock which cannot be
excavated without the use of rippers, and all boulders or other detached stones each having a
volume of 1/2 cubic yard or more, as determined by physical or visual measurement. It shall also
include replacement with approved material as required.
D. Embankment (Complete in Place): shall consist of placing all excavated material, except material
being hauled and disposed, as embankment and compacted to final grades as specified in the
Contract Documents and on the Drawings.
1.04 Submittals
A. Test Reports: Submit reports for laboratory and field tests required under "Testing" article. Test
reports for footing, slab, and pavement subgrades shall be submitted prior to placing concrete or
paving materials. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330.
1.05 Testing
A. Contractor will arrange and owner shall pay for soil sampling and testing. Contractor shall extend
full cooperation to Owner and testing agency in obtaining samples and performing tests. Where
soil materials do not conform to type or density specified, soil shall be replaced or reworked to
conform. The cost of the initial test will be paid by the owner, while all additional tests for
replaced or reworked areas shall be paid for by the Contractor.
1.06 Protection
A. Protect existing improvements, utilities, trees and shrubs, and reference marks in accordance with
Section 02321.
1.07 Blasting
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
Page 2 of 7
A. Use of explosives is not permitted.
PART 2 – MATERIALS
2.01 Soil Materials, General
A. Soil materials shall be free of organic matter, debris, frozen soils, ice, and other objectionable
materials. Rock particles larger than maximum size specified shall be removed prior to placement
of soil.
B. Select existing material from required excavations may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
specified material requirements. If necessary, furnish additional approved material from suitable
off-site sources.
C. Muck excavation shall also include the replacement of excavated muck with uniformly graded
rock, riprap, on-site or imported soils, or other material whichever is most suitable for the specific
situation encountered. The ENGINEER will determine which type of aggregate or other material
which shall be used after observing the specific site conditions.
2.02 Granular Fill, Bedding, and Backfill
A. Select soils complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW (well-graded gravel), GP
(poorly-graded gravel), SW (well-graded sand), or SP (poorly-graded sand). Aggregate shall pass
a 3/4-inch sieve and not more than 35% shall be retained on a No. 10 sieve. Maximum 5% by
weight shall pass a No. 200 sieve.
2.03 Fill and Backfill
A. Previously excavated soils, free of aggregate larger than 3 inches, and suitable for intended
purpose
PART 3 – EXEVUTION
3.01 Preparation
A. Prepare site for work in accordance with Section 02110. Layout and stake work to be performed.
3.02 General Excavation
A. The excavation and embankment for the project work shall be finished to reasonably smooth and
uniform surfaces. Variation from the subgrade plane shall not be more than .08 feet in soil or
more than .08 feet above or .50 below in rock. Where bituminous or concrete surfacing materials
are to be placed directly on the subgrade, the subgrade plane shall not vary more than 0.04 feet.
Materials shall not be wasted without permission of the ENGINEER. Excavation operations shall
be conducted so that material outside of the limits of slopes will not be disturbed. Prior to
beginning grading operations in any area, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall
have been performed in accordance with Section 02110 of these Specifications.
When the CONTRACTOR’s excavating operations encounter remains of pre-historic people’s
dwelling sites or artifacts of historical or archaeological significance, the operations, shall be
temporarily discontinued. The ENGINEER will contact archaeological authorities to determine
the disposition thereof. When directed, the CONTRACTOR shall excavate the site in such a
manner as to preserve the artifacts encountered and shall remove them for delivery to the custody
of the proper state authorities. Such excavation will be considered and paid for as extra work.
B. For footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate to final
grade just before concrete is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid,
undisturbed base to receive granular fill, base course, or concrete as shown.
3.03 Excavation for Embankments
A. Unclassified: All excess suitable material excavated from the project site and not used for
embankment shall be removed from the project site and become the property of the
CONTRACTOR. Where material encountered within the limit of the work is considered
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
Page 3 of 7
unsuitable for embankment (fills) on any portion of this project work, such material shall be
excavated as directed by the ENGINEER and replaced with suitable fill material. All unsuitable
excavated material from excavation consisting of any type of debris (surface or buried), excavated
rock, bedrock or rocks larger than 6 inches in diameter and boulders shall be hauled from the
project site and disposed of. Debris is defined as "anything that is not earth which exists at the
job site".
B. Muck: Where excavation to the finished grade section results in a subgrade or slopes of
unsuitable soil, the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to remove the unsuitable
materials and backfill to the finished graded section with approved material. Disposal of the
material shall be at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
Good surface drainage shall be provided around all permanent cuts to direct surface runoff away
from the cut face.
C. Rock: Unless otherwise specified, rock shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 0.5 feet below
subgrade within the limits of the channel area, and the excavation shall be backfilled with material
shown on the Drawings or as designated by the ENGINEER. Disposal of material and replacement
with suitable approved material shall be at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
3.04 Embankment Construction
A. Embankment construction shall consist of constructing all fill areas, including preparation of the
areas upon which they are to be placed, and the placing and compacting of embankment material
in holes, pits and other depressions within the project area. Only approved materials shall be used
in the construction of embankments and backfills.
Approved materials shall consist of clean on-site cohesive soils or approved imported soils. On-
site cohesive soils are suitable for use as compacted fill provided the following recommendations
are met:
Excavation and Embankment will only be paid when a significant change in grade is required, as
determined by the ENGINEER. Minor cuts and fills will be considered incidental to the work,
and will not be paid for separately under this section.
Percent Finer by Weight
Gradation (ASTM C136)
1/2-Inch 100
3/8-Inch 70 – 100
No. 4 Sieve 50 – 100
No. 200 Sieve 60 (min
Liquid Limit
Plasticity Index
In-Situ Coefficient of Permeability
30 (min
15 (min)
1x10-6cm/sec (max)
On-site cohesive soils or imported soils should be placed and compacted in thin, horizontal lifts,
not to exceed 8 inches in thickness (measured prior to compaction), using equipment and
procedures that will produce recommended moisture contents and densities throughout the lift and
embankment height. On-site or imported cohesive soils should be compacted within a moisture
content range of optimum to 3% above optimum moisture content and compacted to 95% of the
Maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698).
When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment is to be
compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built 1/2 width at a time, the
slopes that are steeper than 4:1 when measured longitudinally or at right angles to the adjacent
ground shall be continuously benched over those areas where it is required as the work is brought
up in layers. Benching shall be well keyed and where practical a minimum of 8 feet. Each
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
Page 4 of 7
horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the original ground and the vertical sides of the
previous cuts. Material thus cut out shall be recompacted along with the new embankment
material at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
The ground surface underlying all fills shall be carefully prepared by removing all organic matter,
scarification to a depth of 8 inches and recompacting to 95% of the Maximum Standard Proctor
Density (ASTM D698) at optimum moisture content + or - 2% prior to fill placement.
Embankment material shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches (loose
measurement) and shall be compacted to 95% of the Maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM
D698) at optimum moisture content + or - 2%. Effective spreading equipment shall be used on
each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As the compaction of each layer
progresses, continuous leveling and manipulating will be required to assure uniform density.
A moisture density determination shall be made for each soil type encountered. Unless directed
by the geotechnical engineer, the standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698) shall
apply.
For embankments which serve as berms, the downstream portion shall be "keyed" into the
subsurface soils a minimum of 3 feet to enhance the stability of the slope.
Materials which are removed from excavations beneath the water table may be over the
acceptable moisture content range and will require that they be dried out prior to reusing them.
Cross hauling or other action as appropriate will be ordered when necessary to insure that the best
available material is placed in critical areas of embankments, including the top 2 feet of all
embankments. No additional payment will be made for cross hauling ordered by the ENGINEER.
Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankments and embankments shall not be
constructed on frozen materials.
During the construction of the channels, the channel bottom shall be maintained in such condition
that it will be well drained at all times.
Excavation or Embankment (Fill), and Structural Backfill work either completed or in a stage of
completion that is either eroded or washed away or becomes unstable due to either rains, snow,
snow melt, channel flows or lack of proper water control shall be either removed and replaced,
recompacted or reshaped as directed by the ENGINEER and in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications at the CONTRACTOR’s sole expense. Removed unsuitable materials shall be
hauled away and disposed of at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. Placing of replacement materials
for removed unsuitable materials shall be purchased, placed and compacted at the
CONTRACTOR’ expense.
B. Proofrolling with a heavy rubber tired roller will be required, if designated on the Drawings or
when ordered by the ENGINEER. Proof rolling shall be done after specified compaction has
been obtained. Areas found to be weak and those areas which failed shall be ripped, scarified,
wetted if necessary, and recompacted to the requirements for density and moisture at the
CONTRACTOR’s expense.
Proof rolling shall be done with equipment and in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. Proof
rolling as shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the ENGINEER shall not be measured and
paid for separately, but shall be included in the unit prices bid for the work.
3.05 Excavation and Backfill for Structures
A. Poor foundation material for any of the work shall be removed, by the CONTRACTOR, as
directed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR will be compensated for removal and
replacement of such materials in accordance with Muck Excavation.
The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that construction equipment may cause the natural soils to
pump or deform while performing excavation work inside and on footings, structural floor slabs,
or other structure foundation areas.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
Page 5 of 7
Foundation materials which are: a) saturated by either surface or subsurface flows due to the lack
of adequate water control or dewatering work by the CONTRACTOR; b) frozen for any reason;
or, c) that are disturbed by the CONTRACTOR’s work or caused to become unacceptable for
foundation material purposes by means of the CONTRACTOR’s equipment, manpower, or
methods of work shall be removed and replaced by the CONTRACTOR at his expense.
Dewatering should not be conducted by pumping from inside footing, structural floor slab, or
other structure foundation limits. This may decrease the supporting capacity of the soils.
Care should be taken when excavating the foundations to avoid disturbing the supporting
materials. Excavation by either hand or careful backhoe soil removal, may be required in
excavating the last few inches of material to obtain the subgrade of any item of the concrete work.
Any over-excavated subgrades that are due to the CONTRACTOR’s actions, shall be brought
back to subgrade elevations by the CONTRACTOR and at his expense in the following manner:
1. For over-excavations of 2 inches or less, either: Backfill and compact with an approved
granular materials; backfill with 1/2 inch crushed rock; or fill within concrete at the time of
the appurtenant structure concrete pour.
2. For over-excavations greater than 2 inches, backfill and compact with an approved granular
material.
All granular footings, structural floor slabs, or other structure areas shall be compacted with a
vibratory plate compactor prior to placement of concrete, reinforcing, or bedding materials.
B. Backfill, and fill within 3 feet adjacent to all structures and for full height of the walls, shall be
selected non-swelling material. It shall be granular, well graded, and free from stones larger than
2 inches. Material may be job excavated, but selectivity will be required as determined by the
ENGINEER. Refer to the Plans for job specific requirements. Stockpiled material, other than
topsoil from the excavation shall be used for backfilling unless an impervious structural backfill is
specified. The backfill material shall consist of either clean on-site granular materials free of
stones larger than 2 inches in diameter with no more than 20% passing the No. 200 sieve, or
equivalent imported materials. All backfill around the structures shall be consolidated by
mechanical tamping. The material shall be placed in 6-inch loose lifts within a range of 2% above
to 2% below the optimum moisture content and compacted to 95% of Maximum Standard Proctor
Density (ASTM D698) for sand soils, or to 75% relative density as determined by the relative
density of cohesionless soils test, ASTM D4253.
When specified on the Drawings or as required by the ENGINEER, Class I structural backfill
shall meet the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
% by Weight Passing
Square Mesh Sieves
2-Inch 100
No. 4 30 – 100
No. 50 10 – 60
No. 200 5 – 20
In addition, this material shall have a liquid limit not exceeding 35 and a plasticity index of not
over 6.
Impervious structural backfill, where shown or specified, shall consist of material having 100%
finer than 2 inches in diameter and a minimum of 30% passing a No. 200 U.S. Standard Sieve.
The material shall be placed in 6-inch loose lifts within a range of 2% above to 2% below the
optimum moisture content and compacted to 95% of Maximum Standard Proctor Density for
cohesive soils as determined by ASTM D698.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
Page 6 of 7
3.06 Trenching
A. Prepare Excavate trenches so that pipe can be laid safely and accurately to required line and grade.
Hand excavate for bells, fittings and projections to allow for proper jointing and to insure that
pipe rests evenly along barrel and is not resting on bell.
B. In sand and gravel soils, bottom of trench may be shaped to fit bottom 1/3 of pipe. In silt or clay
soils, bottom of trench shall be 4 in. below pipe barrel and 3 in. below bell. Under foundations
and footings, bottom of trench shall be 8 in. below pipe. Bedding will be uniformly graded
material conforming to CDOT #67 granular bedding unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or as
approved by the Engineer.
3.07 Unauthorized Excavation
A. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated elevations or side
dimensions without specific direction of Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work, shall be at Contractor's expense. Notify Owner if unauthorized excavations are made.
B. Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same
classification, unless otherwise directed.
3.08 Stability of Excavations
A. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. Slope
sides of excavations to angle of repose of material excavated; otherwise, shore and brace where
sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.
Comply with applicable codes and ordinances.
3.09 Dewatering
A. Perform earthwork in a manner to prevent surface water and ground water from flowing into
excavations. Promptly remove water from excavations using pumps, sumps, and dewatering
system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. If underground springs
are encountered, notify Owner before proceeding.
3.10 Stockpiling
A. Stockpile excavated materials meeting the requirements for fill and backfill where directed until
required for the work. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate stockpiles a
sufficient distance from edge of excavations to prevent such material from falling or sliding into
excavations and to prevent cave-ins.
3.11 Cold Weather Protection
A. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35F by
covering with dry insulating materials of sufficient depth to prevent frost penetration.
3.12 Grading
A. Grade area within project limits by cutting and/or filling as necessary to achieve lines and grades
shown. Grade areas adjacent to structure lines to drain away from structure to prevent ponding.
Finish surface to be reasonably smooth and free from irregular surface changes. Tolerance for
areas to receive topsoil shall be 0.3 ft above or below established grade, less allowance for
topsoil. Tolerance for areas to be paved shall be 0.1 ft above or below established pavement
subgrade. Tolerance for turf areas shall be 0.025 as per Owner.
3.13 Disposal of Excess and Waste Materials
A. Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris, and other waste materials and legally dispose of
them off-site.
3.14 Field Quality Control
A. Moisture and density tests are required and are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be
performed by a private Geotechnical Consultant. Contractor is responsible for all coordination of
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02301 – EARTHWORK AND GRADING
Page 7 of 7
testing. Owner will pay for first test while additional testing shall be paid for by contractor. The
following minimum tests should be expected to be performed.
1. Embankment subgrade – 1 per 500 lineal feet.
2. Embankment fill – 1 per 500 lineal feet of embankment alternating leftand right of centerline
or as directed by the geotechnical engineering, ENGINEER, or OWNER.
3. Compaction tests, as specified above, shall be performed for each vertical foot of compacted
embankment.
B. Field tests will be conducted to determine compliance of moisture/density testing methods with
specified density in accordance with ASTM D2922.
C. Test results shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor or the Geotechnical Consultant
for approval by the Owner prior to acceptance of the pipeline and shall be made available on the
day of the test.
D. All failed test areas shall be recompacted and retested at Contractor’s expense.
E. All compacted material shall be within 2% (+/-) of the optimum moisture content of the soil as
determined by ASTM D698. Water shall be added to the material, or the material shall be
harrowed, disced, bladed, or otherwise worked to ensure a uniform moisture content as specified.
F. Sect Final topography and/or cross-sections will be surveyed of areas that are to finished grade
and compared to the design section for accuracy. Final grade shall match design grades within the
tolerances discussed in PART 3 EXECUTION.
PART 4 – SCHEDULES
4.01 Compaction Schedule (unless otherwise stated on the drawings or Other
Specifications
Location
Lift
Thickness(1)
Compaction(2)
Below foundations, slabs, pavements, walks, and other
designated areas
6" 95%
Unpaved areas 15 feet or less outside structure line 8" 95%
Embankments and berming 8" 95%
Unpaved areas more than 15 feet outside structure line 12" 90%
(1)Place manually compacted materials in maximum 4-inch layers.
(2) Percent of maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor test).
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 1 of 9
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes
A. General cleaning and grubbing, excavation, bedding construction, filling, grading and surface
restoration associated with installing subsurface pipes of various types.
1.02 Related Work
A. Section 02111 – Site Preparation
B. Section 02230 – Site Clearing
C. Section 02507 – PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings
1.03 Notification of Utility Companies
A. The Contractor shall notify all affected utility companies of his construction operations to
coordinate his work regarding poles, wires, valve boxes, and other surface obstructions and to
determine the location of gas, watermain, power, light, cable television, telephone or telegraph
conduit or service connection thereto or any other subsurface structure that crosses or passes
through the space occupied by any of the proposed improvements. The Contractor shall make
arrangements with the utility companies for any relocation of interfering utilities. Owner has
already made arrangements for relocation of known utility conflicts. Contractor shall be
responsible for utility coordination after issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall
coordinate work with the Construction Coordinator when scheduling activities related to utility
relocations.
1.04 Protection
A. Sheeting and Shoring:
The CONTRACTOR shall protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or
other methods required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench which may
be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe or appurtenances being installed, or to existing
facilities or structures. The latest requirements of OSHA shall be complied with at all times
including trenching and confined space entry requirements.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for underpinning adjacent structures which may be
damaged by excavation work, including service utilities and pipe chases.
B. Weather and Frost:
The CONTRACTOR shall protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath
foundations from frost.
1. Do not place backfill, fill, or embankment on frozen surfaces.
2. Do not place frozen materials, snow, or ice in backfill, fill, or embankments.
3. Do not deposit, tamp, roll, or otherwise mechanically compact backfill in water.
C. Drainage and Groundwater:
The excavation shall be graded to prevent surface water run-off into trench or excavation.
1. Maintain excavations and trench free from water during construction.
2. Remove water encountered in the trench to the extent necessary to provide a firm subgrade,
to permit joints to be made in the dry, and to prevent the entrance of water into the pipeline.
3. Divert surface runoff and use sumps, gravel blankets, well points, drain lines, or other means
necessary to accomplish the above.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 2 of 9
4. Maintain the excavation or trench free from water until the structure, or pipe to be installed
therein, is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or
other cause will result.
5. Water shall be prevented from entering into previously constructed pipe.
6. The pipe under construction shall not be used for dewatering.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 Concrete
A. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03300.
2.02 Mortar
A. Mixture of mason sand, water, Portland cement and masonry cement as follows:
Portland cement - ASTM C150, Type I, IS or II
Masonry cement - ASTM C91, Type II
Water - Free of oil, acid, excess alkalinity, organic matter, and salts
Sand - 100% passing No. 8, 15 to 35% passing No. 50, and 2 to 10% passing No. 100
2.03 Granular Bedding
A. Pipe shall be bedded in a uniformly graded material conforming to CDOT #67 granular bedding
unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
Well-Graded Sand
Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight
3/8 inch 100
No. 4 95 – 100
No. 8 80 – 100
No. 16 50 – 85
No. 30 25 – 60
No. 50 10 – 30
No. 100 2 – 10
Squeegee Sand
Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight
3/8 Inch 100
No. 200 0 – 5
CDOT #67
Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight
1 Inch 100
3/4 Inch 90 – 100
3/8 Inch 20 – 55
No. 4 0 – 10
No. 8 0 – 5
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 3 of 9
Cement Sand
Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight
3/8 Inch 100
No. 4 90 – 100
No. 108 70 – 100
No. 20 50 – 85
No. 50 25 – 50
No. 100 8 – 30
No. 140 0 – 15
No. 200 0 – 5
2.04 Replacement Material (Stabilization Material)
A. Material used as stabilization in locations where the CONTRACTOR has been directed to muck
excavate shall conform to the following "Foundation Material" gradation(s). The material shall
be uniformly graded ¾" or 1 ½" rock.
CDOT #467
Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight
2-1/2 Inch ---
2 Inch 100
1-1/2 Inch 90 – 100
1 Inch ---
3/4 Inch 35 – 70
3/8 Inch 10 – 30
No. 4 0 – 5
CDOT #67
Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight
1 Inch 100
3/4 Inch 90 – 100
3/8 Inch 20 – 55
No. 4 0 – 10
No. 8 0 – 5
2.05 Flowable Fill
A. The approved mixture for flowable fill is shown below:
Ingredients: Pounds/Cubic Yard
Cement 42 (.047 sack)
Water 235 (39 gallons as needed)
Coarse Aggregate (No. 57) 1700
Sand (ASTM C-33) 1845
The desired 28-day strength is 60 psi. The combination of material listed above or an approved
equivalent may be used to obtain the desired flowable fill.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 4 of 9
2.06 Backfill
A. Backfill shall meet the following requirements:
Use only backfill for trenches which is free from rocks, large roots, other vegetation or organic
matter, and frozen material. No rocks greater than 3 inches in diameter shall be allowed. Backfill
material shall be suitable for future pavement construction over all trenches.
B. Cut-Off Walls:
1. Controlled Low Strength Material Backfill (Flo-Fill -- See Section 02321).
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 Surface Obstructions
A. Structures, sidewalk, driveways, curb and gutter, trees, shrubs, lawns, signs, fences, utilities,
survey monuments, pavements, lawns, culverts, and other appurtenances which are adjacent to the
right of way or work easements, shall be carefully protected against damage. In the event of
damage or inadvertent injury or removal of these surface features by failure of the Contractor to
exercise reasonable precautions or proper construction techniques, he shall bear the full cost and
responsibility for resulting damages and shall replace or repair such damage as early as possible.
No allowance for extra payment or time lost will be allowed for such interferences that the
Contractor could have suspected or anticipated during site inspection and interpretation of the
Contract Documents.
B. Clearing, grubbing, and removal of all pavements, sidewalks, curbs, signs, poles, fences, etc., shall
be done only as necessary for the completion of the work. Brush, trees, shrubs, concrete, rubble,
and other removals which are not intended to be replaced shall be disposed of by the Contractor
off the site of work. Burning of trees and brush is not permitted.
C. Obstructions which are intended to be replaced shall be stored and protected by the Contractor.
Fences, signs, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, and similar features requiring removal, shall be restored to
their original position except where permanent removal is indicated.
D. Monuments for land surveys encountered in the path of work shall be carefully protected from
movement. Should removal be necessary, the Contractor shall notify the Construction
Coordinator in advance. The Contractor will set reference stakes and give notice that the
monument can be removed. The Contractor will reset the monument after backfilling and settling
at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor will also be held responsible for reestablishing
monuments lost due to his negligence or failure to notify the Construction Coordinator.
3.02 Subsurface Obstructions
A. The approximate location and size of sewers, drains, culverts, irrigation pipes, gas mains,
watermains, electric and telephone conduits and other underground structures shown on the
drawings are based on records available to the Owner or surface markings indicating their
existence.
B. The Contractor shall use caution in excavating and trenching so that the exact location of
underground structures, both known and unknown, may be determined; he shall be held
responsible for the repair of such structures when broken or otherwise damaged during
construction.
C. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the utility companies for any relocation of
interfering utilities.
D. When the Construction Coordinator permits the Contractor to make a change to avoid a utility
relocation, the Construction Coordinator shall determine whether the change constitutes extra
work as defined in the General Conditions.
E. Any underground utilities or other structures that are located outside of the construction limits of
this contract which the Contractor wishes to have moved to facilitate construction shall be
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 5 of 9
arranged with the owner of such structures; the Contractor shall pay all costs of the
accommodation and shall provide written authorization prior to any such activity.
F. In the event that there is any question as to whether any of the above enumerated obstructions,
underground utilities, or other structures cross or pass through the space occupied by the
completed structures of this contract, the Construction Coordinator’s decision shall be binding.
G. During the construction of the pipelines, it may be necessary to cross under certain sewers, drains,
culverts, water lines, gas lines, electric conduits, and other underground structures. Where
necessary, the flow in drains or culverts shall be diverted so that the excavation may be kept dry
during the progress of the construction work. Every effort shall be made to prevent damage to
such underground structures. Wherever such structures are disturbed or broken, they shall be
restored to existing or better condition at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. The Contractor shall use sand or gravel backfill beneath said structures. This backfill shall be
deposited and thoroughly compacted by mechanical means in layers not to exceed six inches in
depth.
3.03 Excavation
A. Excavation shall be made in such a manner that the pipe can be laid safely and accurately to the
line and grade shown.
B. Topsoil shall be salvaged and reused as required.
C. The depth of excavation shall extend from the ground surface to the bottom of the pipe bedding.
Unnecessary excavation below this required level shall be backfilled at the Contractor’s expense
with compacted sand, gravel, crushed stone or concrete, as approved by the Construction
Coordinator.
D. The bottom of the trench must be dug to a depth of 4 inches minimum below the pipe barrel and
bell, or as indicated on the Drawings. Bell holes must be hand excavated to allow for proper
jointing, and to insure that the pipe rests evenly along the barrel and is not resting on the bell.
E. Trench widths shall be limited at the top of the pipe to not less than a 6-inch clearance on either
side of the barrel to allow for the free flow of bedding material between the pipe and the trench
wall. Maximum trench width at the top of the pipe shall be the outside pipe diameter plus 30
inches, except that the trench width need not be less than 30 inches. The trench above the top of
the pipe may be sloped, stepped or vertical, to comply with state and federal regulations.
F. No more than 150 feet of trench shall be left open at any time. The entire trench shall be
backfilled to within 50 feet of the open trench upon conclusion of each day’s work. The trench
shall not be backfilled until the pipe installation is reviewed by the ENGINEER. Trench shall be
backfilled within 100 feet of the pipe installation at all times. Provide construction fence
barricades around open trenches and pits when unattended.
Maintain access to residences, commercial enterprises and municipal facilities at all times.
Intersecting streets, private drives, and alleys shall be open to local traffic at end of each day,
unless otherwise permitted by the Owner.
G. Clean-up shall be maintained within 400 feet of the trench excavation.
Prior to placement in the trench, all pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be cleaned and
examined for defects by the CONTRACTOR. If found defective, the CONTRACTOR shall
reject the defective pipe, fitting, or appurtenance. The CONTRACTOR shall advise the
ENGINEER of all defective materials.
All surplus excavation shall be placed, in an orderly manner. If material is stockpiled on private
property, written permission must be obtained from the property owner and provided to the
ENGINEER.
All muck excavation, bedding, and pipe zone material shall be imported unless otherwise
designated by the OWNER’s geotechnical engineer.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 6 of 9
Upon completion of the work, all plants, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, and other like
material shall be removed from the job site. The site shall be left in a state of order and
cleanliness.
H. Contractor shall follow the most current regulations concerning excavations set forth by OSHA,
29 CFR Part 1926.
3.04 Rock Excavation
A. Rock excavation shall be defined to include all hard, solid rock in ledges, bedded deposits,
boulders, buried concrete structures not shown on the plans, and all natural conglomerated
deposits so firmly cemented as to possess all the characteristics of solid rock. Removals of
isolated masses less than 1/2 cubic yard which are not attached to larger masses will not be
considered rock excavation.
B. Firmly cemented sedimentary materials in the form of silt-stone, sandstone, shale, or
conglomerate, shall be classified as rock if, after several blows with the pointed end of a standard
pick applied to the flat surface, the material cannot be loosened, broken down, or penetrated.
C. When the Contractor believes he has encountered what may be classified as rock excavation, he
shall notify the Construction Coordinator who will test the degree of resistance, and make a final
determination.
D. The depth of rock excavation in a trench shall be a minimum of 6 inches below the pipe barrel to
provide space for a sand or gravel bedding material. Bedding material shall be evenly spread,
compacted, and shaped to conform to the pipe.
E. Trench width in rock excavation shall not be less than that for ordinary excavation. Maximum
trench width shall be the outside pipe diameter plus 18 inches for an unsheathed trench, and not to
exceed the outside pipe diameter plus 30 inches for a sheathed trench.
F. Blasting will not be permitted unless securing Construction Coordinator’s approval, showing
evidence of insurance specifically for such work, and demonstrating that the blasting will be
conducted to protect adjacent existing or completed work, persons, and surrounding property.
The hours of blasting may be fixed by the Construction Coordinator. Any damage caused by
blasting shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall ascertain
that the method of blasting will be in accordance with state and local ordinances. Any blasting
shall be done only under the direct supervision of a certified blaster.
3.05 Sheathing and Bracing
A. Where it is necessary to protect nearby structures and pavements, or when the trench must be
confined to allow for traffic flow, tight sheathing will be required. The Contractor to call the
Construction Coordinator’s attention to any unforeseen condition that requires the use of
sheathing. Sheathing must be driven unless soil conditions allow the sets to be placed after
excavating. If placed after excavating, the voids between the trench wall and sheathing must be
immediately filled with sand.
B. Removal of sheathing must not take place until the trench is backfilled. Flooding or jetting the
trench shall be done after the sheathing is removed.
C. The Construction Coordinator may approve, in writing, some or all of the sheathed sets to remain
in place. Sheathing ordered left in place shall have the upper portion within 2 feet of a street
surface cut off and removed.
D. Spot braces, individual shorings spaced at various intervals along trench, portable trench boxes or
sliding shields will be considered incidental to the cost of the pipe laying.
3.06 Wet Trench Conditions
A. The Contractor shall attempt to dispose of all groundwater or surface drainage seeping in the
trench by employing ordinary dewatering techniques such as the use of sump pumps, dikes, etc.
Allowing water to flow into the pipe being laid will not be permitted except in the case of a storm
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 7 of 9
sewer where the joints have set. Water entering the installed pipe must flow through the pipe or
be pumped out. The installed pipe shall not be used as a reservoir. A temporary stopper or plug
must be installed on the upper end of each pipe being laid if there is danger of sand or debris
being washed into the pipe. Do not place water so that it ponds on roadway subgrade or adjacent
private property.
B. Contractor shall follow provisions of Section 02140 Water Control, the approved Water Control
Plan, and the Groundwater Discharge Permit.
C. If the existing soil in the trench bottom is judged to be unsuitable by the Construction Coordinator
after dewatering measures have been taken, a minimum of the top 6-inches of the subgrade shall
be removed and replaced with stabilization material.
3.07 Dewatering
A. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a dry trench by ordinary dewatering techniques,
well points, or other measures as approved in the Water Control Plan or by the Construction
Coordinator during the course of work.
B. If wells are utilized for dewatering, the wells shall be drilled, maintained, and abandoned in
accordance with the requirements of the State of Colorado, Office of the State Engineer.
3.08 Granular Base to Replace Poor Subsoil
A. At any time material such as muck, sawdust, bark, or other material is encountered which would
not form a suitable and permanent base, the Construction Coordinator shall be notified to decide if
it should be removed and replaced with suitable granular bedding or stabilization material. The
sand or gravel base replacement is to be compacted in 6-inch layers up to the bottom of the
normal trench section.
3.09 Granular Bedding
A. Bedding material shall be placed from the trench bottom to the pipe spring line in accordance with
the Drawings or as required by pipe material specifications.
3.10 Backfilling with Existing Material
A. Backfilling shall be accomplished immediately after installation of the pipe unless otherwise
approved by the Construction Coordinator.
B. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, initial backfill material over the pipe to a minimum
depth of 1 foot above the pipe shall be granular bedding material or previously excavated granular
soil reasonably free of large rock, organic matter, clay or other unsuitable material if approved by
the Construction Coordinator. Trench backfill over the initial backfill zone may be previously
excavated soil except as determined by the Construction Coordinator to be unsuitable.
C. The initial backfill material over the pipe up to a minimum depth of one foot above the pipe shall
be filled in by hand and well compacted over and around the pipe with hand tampers or
mechanical means to the proper density. Special care shall be taken in placing and tamping the
initial backfill material so the alignment and grade of the pipe will not be disturbed nor the pipe
damaged.
D. When backfilling in frozen material, the Contractor shall cover the pipe and tamp the backfill
around the pipe using only loose thawed material. No frozen material shall be placed in the
trench. All frozen material shall be kept from around manholes and other structures.
3.11 Granular Backfill
A. Granular backfill shall be provided by the Contractor and placed in the trench when the excavated
material is unsuitable for backfill or when ordered by the Construction Coordinator. Bank run
gravel may be used provided the initial backfill zone (one foot above pipe) has been filled with
acceptable granular bedding material.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 8 of 9
3.12 Trench Compaction
A. The pipe trench shall be backfilled to the limits as shown on the Contract Drawings. The backfill
in all areas shall be moisture treated to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content (sand soils)
or between optimum and 3 percent over optimum moisture content (clay soils), processed to a
uniform consistency, placed in 8 inch maximum loose lifts, and compacted by vibrating, tamping,
or a combination thereof to 75% relative density for sand material as determined by the relative
density of cohesionless soils test, ASTM D4253, or to 95% of the Maximum Standard Proctor
Density for cohesive soils as determined by ASTM D698. Where cement sand is utilized,
compaction may be achieved using at least 5 passes of a heavy, walk behind or self-propelled,
vibratory mechanical compactor. Prior to compaction, sand soils shall be brought to within 2
percent of the optimum moisture content, and clay soils shall be processed to between optimum
and 3 percent above optimum moisture content for soil compacted according to ASTM D698.
All backfill shall be brought up to equal height along each side of the pipe in such a manner as to
avoid displacement. Backfill material shall be distributed in 6-inch maximum lifts over the full
width of the trench. Wet, soft or frozen material, asphalt chunks, or other deleterious substances
shall not be used for backfill. If the excavated material is not suitable for backfill, as determined
by the ENGINEER, suitable material shall be hauled in and utilized and the rejected material
hauled away and disposed of.
Backfilling shall be conducted at all times in a manner to prevent damage to the pipe or its coating
and shall be kept as close to the pipe laying operation as practical.
Backfilling procedures shall conform to the additional requirements, if any, of appropriate
agencies or private right-of-way agreements.
3.13 Restoration
A. Unsurfaced Areas:
All surface cuts shall be, as a minimum, restored to a condition equal to that prior to construction.
B. Surfaced Areas:
All surface cuts shall be, as a minimum, restored to a condition equal to that prior to construction.
All gravel or paved streets shall be restored in accordance with the regulations and requirements
of the agency having control or jurisdiction over the street, roadway, or right-of-way.
C. Grassed or Landscaped Areas:
In landscaped or agricultural areas, topsoil, to a depth of 12 inches, shall be removed from the
area of general disturbance and stockpiled. After installation of all pipelines, appurtenances and
structures and completion of all backfill and compaction, the stockpiled topsoil shall be
redistributed evenly over all disturbed areas. Care should be taken to conform to the original
ground contour or final grading plans.
3.14 Disposal of Surplus or Undesirable Material
A. Surplus material shall include all excavation that is more than the amount needed for backfilling or
is undesirable for backfilling.
B. The Contractor shall find his own disposal sites, remove and load excess material, haul, and
dispose of material. Such material shall become property of the Contractor. Measurement and
payment will not be made separately but will be incidental to other Bid Items.
3.15 Field Quality Control
A. Moisture and density tests are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed by a
private Geotechnical Consultant.
B. Field tests will be conducted to determine compliance of moisture/density testing methods with
specified density in accordance with ASTM D2922.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02321 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Page 9 of 9
C. Test results shall be submitted to the Construction Coordinator by the Contractor or the
Geotechnical Consultant for approval by the Owner prior to acceptance of the pipeline and shall
be made available on the day of the test.
D. Moisture/density tests shall be performed at a minimum of once every 200 linear feet, as measured
along the pipe, or as determined by the Construction Coordinator. Tests shall be performed at a
depth of two (2) feet above the top of the pipe bedding and in two (2) foot vertical increments up
to finish grade. A minimum of one test shall be performed in the backfill and one at final grade.
A minimum of one test shall be performed for each service line or lateral installation.
E. Moisture/density tests in the vicinity of manholes shall be performed at a maximum of one (1) foot
away from the manhole section. A test shall be performed in all four directions from the manhole
(four tests total per set). A minimum of one set of tests shall be performed for every two (2) feet
of backfill material.
F. All failed test areas shall be recompacted and retested at Contractor’s expense.
G. All compaction shall be to a minimum of 95 percent (%) of the maximum Standard Proctor
Density unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
H. All compacted material shall be within 2% (+/-) of the optimum moisture content of the soil as
determined by ASTM D698. Water shall be added to the material, or the material shall be
harrowed, disced, bladed, or otherwise worked to ensure a uniform moisture content as specified.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02507 – PVC PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02507 – PVC PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 Summary
A. Provide pipe and fittings as shown and as specified.
1.02 Related Sections
A. Section 02225 – Structural Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting
B. Section 02620 - Subdrainage
1.03 Submittals
A. Test Reports: Upon request, submit three certified copies of test and inspection reports in
accordance with applicable ASTM Standards.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for pipe, fittings, and gaskets.
C. Accurately record locations of fittings and field changes. Prior to final application for payment,
deliver record drawings to Owner.
1.04 Material Handling
A. Carefully unload and store pipe to prevent chipping, cracking, or damage to surface coatings. Pipe
shall not be skidded upon ground. Repair damaged coatings.
B. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Damaged pipe or fittings shall not be installed.
C. Lubricant shall be stored or handled in a manner to prevent contamination of the lubricant.
D. Rubber gaskets shall be stored in a location which protects them from deterioration.
E. Pipe shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 PVC Plastic Pipe, General
A. PVC pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be of material and type indicated in the Drawings and
shall conform to the quality and type specified in this Section. If not designated, use the material
listed below. Each pipe shall be stamped or indelibly marked with its type and class and the
manufacturer's name or mark.
2.02 PVC Gravity Pipe
A. All gravity pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR-35 poly (vinyl
chloride); or ASTM F789, Type PS-46, poly (vinyl chloride). The standard dimension ratio
(SDR) of plastic gravity pipe shall not exceed 35.
B. All PVC pipe fittings shall be made from PVC components that conform to ASTM D1784.
C. All joints shall be bell and spigot type and shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM
D3212. All gaskets shall be of o-ring type and manufactured in accordance with ASTM F477.
All bells shall be formed integrally with the pipe and shall contain a factory installed elastomeric
gasket, which is positively retained.
2.03 PVC Pressure Pipe
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) plastic pressure pipe, AWWA C900, Class 150, SDR-18, ductile iron
O.D., with elastomeric gasket bell and spigot joints. PVC pressure pipe only allowed where
specified in the Drawings. Mechanical joint restraints are not required.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02507 – PVC PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
Page 2 of 3
2.04 Bedding
A. PVC pipe shall be bedded in accordance with the Drawings (see standard details) using CDOT
#67 granular material place to a minimum of one (1) foot above the top of pipe. Refer to Section
02321 for Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting specifications.
2.05 Tees and Wyes
A. Tees and wyes shall be of the diameter indicated consisting of a standard or short length of main
pipe with a factory fabricated spur attached. Joining of spur to main line pipe shall provide
strength, water-tightness, and a flush inside surface of the main line pipe. All work shall be done
in accordance with the Drawings (see standard details).
2.06 Gravity Pipe Couplings
A. ASTM C1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless band assembly fabricated to mate with
OD of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints.
2.07 Gravity Pipe Couplings
A. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03300.
PART 3 – PRODUCTS
3.01 Line and Grade
A. Contractor shall provide line and grade at a convenient offset. Contractor shall be responsible for
preservation of line and grade markings and if disturbed, shall pay actual cost of replacement.
B. Contractor shall transfer line and grade from offset to sewer by means of laser beam equipment or
other approved methods. Inform Owner of proposed methods and equipment prior to
construction. Discontinue methods that do not produce accurate control for setting line and grade.
3.02 Line and Grade
A. PVC pipe installation, including trenching, bedding, backfill, and compaction, shall be done in
accordance with the Drawings and with Section 02321, Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting.
Pipe shall be joined in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified below.
B. Where practicable, begin at lowest point of proposed sewer line; lay with bell end or receiving
groove edge upstream in direction of laying.
C. Pipe shall be laid immediately following the trench preparation and bedding provisions of Section
02321 and of the Drawings.
D. Exercise care when handling pipe. Ropes, nylon slings, or other devices must be used for
lowering pipe into trench. Only pipe which is suitable for use is to remain on site. Damaged or
broken pipe shall be immediately separated from acceptable pipe.
E. Lay pipe uniformly to line and grade on a prepared bed providing even support along entire barrel.
Excavate bell holes in bedding material so pipe will rest on barrel and not on bell. As work
progresses, interior of sewer shall be cleared of dirt and debris. Do not lay pipe where water is
above bedding material except where Owner determines that foundation is stable, pipe will not be
displaced upward, and joint construction will not be affected by water.
F. Joint materials and methods shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Rubber-type gasket joint shall be made using lubricant of vegetable origin. Groove in spigot shall
be lubricated before setting gasket. Prior to connecting pipe joints, all surface of the joint shall be
clean, dry, and completely free of dirt. When final grade is achieved, the joint shall be carefully
pushed home using approved methods of leverage. Seating of the gasket shall be checked around
the entire circumference of the pipe by visual and feeler gauge inspection.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02507 – PVC PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
Page 3 of 3
H. At all watermain crossings provide and install watertight external gasket joint sealant a minimum
of 10 feet to each side of the watermain crossing or at two pipe joints, whichever is greater.
Follow manufacturer installation specifications.
I. Each pipe shall be bedded by hand or by equally careful means to 12-inch cover before laying
subsequent pipes. Fill space between pipe and trench wall in 6-inch layers and manually compact.
Pipe sizes larger than 15 inches diameter may require mechanical compaction of bedding material.
J. Pipes shall be laid with straight alignment between adjacent manholes and/or inlets.
K. When work is not in progress, securely close ends of pipe fittings so that no trench water, earth, or
other substances will enter pipe.
3.03 Alignment and Grade
A. Owner reserves the right to require further tests of alignment and grade if video tape and
inspections indicate additional tests are necessary in the Engineer's opinion. If so directed,
Contractor shall check alignment and grade by the lamping method. If pipe shows poor
alignment, offset or open joints, sags or kinks; defects shall be corrected by Contractor before final
acceptance. If defects are found due to failure of proper installation or sound materials, Contractor
shall pay for and promptly correct defects.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02620 – SUBDRAINAGE
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02620 – SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 General Provisions
A. The Conditions of the Contract and all Sections of Division 2 are hereby made a part of this Section.
1.2 Description of Work
A. Work Included:
1. Prepare trench bottom to have continuous contact with pipe at specified elevation as shown in
plans. Ensure trench is sloped as specified in plans to flow toward outlet.
2. Provide EZ Flow product and install beginning at the low-point and work upstream using internal
coupling to connect EZ Flow.
3. Provide and install specified fill material over EZ Flow pipe.
4. Provide and install grass, or other cover medium, by using method per plans.
Supplying all labor, equipment, materials and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on
the plans, but which are incidental and required to complete the work specified.
B. Related Work:
1. Subgrade preparation under Section 02200 Earthwork.
2. Subsurface drainage materials - Section 02720 Storm Drainage, when needed
3. Irrigation installation - Section 02810 Irrigation, when needed.
1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Follow Section 01330 requirements.
B. Submit manufacturer’s data as required by specifications.
C. Installation: Performed only by skilled workpeople with satisfactory record of performance on
landscaping or drainage projects of comparable size and quality.
1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Protect EZ Flow Pipe sections from damage during delivery and store under tarp to protect from
sunlight, when time from delivery to installation exceeds one week.
1.5 Project Conditions
A. Review installation procedures and coordinate EZ Flow work with other work affected. Generally, EZ
Flow will be installed concurrent with other site drainage.
B. Cold weather:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost if in an area needing
compaction or required to support load.
C. Protect partially completed EZ Flow installations against damage from other construction traffic when work
is in progress.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02620 – SUBDRAINAGE
Page 2 of 3
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Availability
A. NDS, Inc., 851 North Harvard Avenue, PO Box 339, Lindsay, California 93247. Toll Free (800) 726-
1994. Toll Free Fax (800) 726-1998. Phone (559) 562-9888. Fax (559) 562-4488. Website:
www.ndspro.com. E-Mail nds@ndspro.com.
2.2 Materials
A. EZ Flow Pipe
1. Pipe shall be manufactured from High Density Polyethylene and shall be both corrugated and
perforated.
2. EZ Flow shall have Expanded Polystyrene Aggregate surrounding the pipe and enclosed by fabric
mesh.
3. Expanded Polystyrene aggregate must be made from 100% Recycled Polyethylene.
4. Expanded Polystyrene aggregate shall have a measured void space of 57%
5. EZ Flow sections must be provided in 10 foot sections
6. Internal couplings shall be used to connect EZ Flow sections.
Part Number Part Description Diameter Flow Rate Length
A. Soil
1. Obtain specified fill material as backfill over EZ Flow drain pipe.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection
A. Examine excavated trench for smoothness and ensure trench is free of debris. Inspect trench for correct
slope and elevation in accordance with plans. Do not start EZ Flow installation until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
B. Inspect EZ Flow product to ensure product has not been damaged during delivery. Inspect interior of
pipe for debris, soil or other foreign objects, if found remove before installation.
EZ-0701F EZ Flow with 3” Pipe 7” 80.8 gpm/ft 10’
EZ-0701A EZ Flow without Pipe 7” 37.1 gpm/ft 10’
EZ-1001F EZ Flow with 4” Pipe 10” 130.9 gpm/ft 10’
EZ-1001A EZ Flow without Pipe 10” 75.7 gpm/ft 10’
EZ-1501F EZ Flow with 6” Pipe 15” 345.0 gpm/ft 10’
EZ-1501A EZ Flow without Pipe 15” 170.3 gpm/ft 10’
3C05 3” Internal Coupling 7” n/a n/a
4C07 4” Internal Coupling 10” n/a n/a
6C09 6” Internal Coupling 15” n/a n/a
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02620 – SUBDRAINAGE
Page 3 of 3
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory
performance. If existing conditions are found unsatisfactory, contact Quality Control Manager for
resolution.
3.2 Preparation
A. Excavate trench as specified in plans to desired width accommodating the EZ Flow pipe system.
B. Slope trench as specified in plans to flow toward outlet(s).
C. Prepare and shape smooth trench bottom to have continuous contact with pipe at specified elevation as
shown in plans.
3.3 Installation of EZ Flow drainage system
A. Provide EZ Flow product and install beginning at the outlet point and work upstream.
B. Use internal couplings provided by NDS to connect EZ Flow sections together.
C. To cut EZ Flow pipe to lengths other than ten foot intervals, mark the mesh where cut needs to be made
and carefully make a cross-sectional cut in the mesh to access Polystyrene Aggregate. Remove and set
aside sufficient aggregate to expose the pipe and to re-connect the mesh to the pipe. Using an
appropriate connector such as a nylon wire tie, reattach the mesh to the pipe, making sure remaining
aggregate is properly contained. Cut the exposed polyethylene pipe to the measured length. Dispose of
remaining aggregate properly.
D. At the end of the work day all upstream open ends of EZ Flow shall be covered or plugged to prevent
intrusion of dirt, debris and foreign objects.
E. Connection to onsite storm drain systems and structures shall be considered incidental to the
completion of this specification section.
F. Provide and install specified fill material over EZ Flow pipe. Lift thickness and compaction density
shall be in accordance with plans and specifications. Areas subject to H-25 traffic loading shall
maintain 1’ – 0” minimum cover to final subgrade elevation. Areas subject to construction traffic shall
maintain 1’ – 6” minimum cover while subject to construction traffic loading.
G. Install surface medium as specified in plans.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02791 – PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
Page 1 of 5
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02791 – PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Unitary synthetic seamless surface.
2. Inorganic loose-fill surface (sand)
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section 02620 for playground subdrainage system.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation. According to CPSC No. 325, this means
"the fall height below which a life-threatening head injury would not be expected to occur."
B. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.
C. EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer rubber
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Impact Attenuation: According to ASTM F 1292.
B. Accessibility of Surface Systems: According to ASTM F 1951.
C. Minimum Characteristics for Organic Loose-Fill Surfaces: According to ASTM F 2075.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Test results confirming product has been tested and in compliance with ASTM F-1292-99.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Detailed shop drawings of safety surfacing edging details, material thickness and base
construction.
2. Colors and pattern of surfaces.
3. Location of drainage accessories.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of playground surface system indicated.
1. Minimum 1-quart loose-fill surface sealed in a container or storage bag.
2. Minimum 6-by-6-inch- square Sample of unitary synthetic seamless surface.
3. Minimum 12-by-12-inch Sample of geosynthetic fabric.
4. Minimum 6-by-6-inch Sample of geosynthetic, molded-sheet drainage panel.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02791 – PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
Page 2 of 5
E. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
F. Material Certificates: For each playground surface system product, signed by manufacturers.
G. Maintenance Data: For playground surface system to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ANSI Z34.1 for
testing indicated.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain playground surface system materials, including primers and binders,
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide secondary materials including adhesives, primers, geosynthetics, and repair materials
of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of playground surface system
materials.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit playground surface system installation to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of playground surface systems with installation of playground equipment
specified in Division 2 Section "Playground Equipment and Structures."
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of playground surface system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Reduction in impact attenuation, and
deterioration of surface and other materials beyond normal ware and weathering.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Unitary Seamless Surfacing - Three year manufacturer’s warranty for from date of
Substantial Completion.
b. Organic Loose Fill Surface - Three year manufacturer’s warranty for from date of
Substantial Completion.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. In-Organic loose fill surface (sand): 10 percent of amount installed.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02791 – PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
Page 3 of 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable
product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.02 UNITARY SYNTHETIC SEAMLESS SURFACE
A. QUALIFICATIONS
1. Qualified installer must be a licensed contractor.
B. SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer must submit proof of compliance to:
U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission publication entitled “Handbook for Public Playground
Safety”
American Society for Testing and Materials standard ASTM F1292.
ASTM F1951
2. Manufacturer’s written specifications and manufacturer’s sales brochure marked to annotate the
specific product to be utilized.
3. Statement of compliance with volatile emission regulations for all components, including adhesive
systems or binders.
4. Materials Safety Data Sheet shall be submitted for the proposed product.
5. Manufacturer and installer must submit proof of liability insurance.
6. Guarantee and warranty for no less than 5 years.
7. Installer shall submit three (3) completed projects with references.
8. Submit a representative sample of the product and the recommended manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
C. SITE CONDITIONS
If Installer is responsible for the completion of the subsurface in the area where the poured-in-place
rubberized surfacing is to be applied, The Installer shall:
1. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations for grade.
2. Sub-base shall slope to provide positive drainage at a minimum of 1” per 10’ and shall not pond water at
any location.
3. If surfacing is to be laid on a stone base, provide subsurface drainage where shown on plans.
4. Materials shall be delivered in clearly labeled unopened containers.
5. Materials shall be stored and handled in a manner that will insure protection from weather.
6. Materials stored on site shall be protected by use of barricades and fencing.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02791 – PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
Page 4 of 5
D. PRODUCT
Provide a base layer and top wearing course to meet critical fall height standards for CPSC and ASTM
guidelines for maximum height of play structures provided by the owner.
1. Cast-in-place surfaces shall be manufactured on site of UV stabilized polyurethane and rubber granules, no
less than specified thickness.
2. Base course rubber – 100% recycled SBR black rubber, free of all dust and extraneous fiber, metal and
similar substances. Foam rubber fillers are not acceptable.
3. Top course rubber – 100% new EPDM rubber, peroxide cured, UV stabilized; size 1-3 mm. with aliphatic
binder.
4. Color to be determined by owner.
E. EXECUTION
When laying surfaces on a compacted stone base, proof-roll prepared sub-base surface immediately prior to
paving to check for unstable loose areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Compact the base
material as required to secure moisture content and a uniform compaction of not less than 90%. Compacted
stone base should be water permeable and sub-grade should allow for free drainage by weeps and/or
slumps.
When laying surfaces on asphalt or concrete, be assured that the surface is fully cured for no less than 30
days, clean of dust and debris, oil free and dry. Fill and patch any surface irregularities with structural
bonding type fillers.
1. Notify owner of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin laying paving until deficient sub-base areas have
been corrected and are ready to receive paving.
2. Plan the layout and placement of varying thickness zones by string line, chalk line and grade stakes to
provide reference points throughout the installation process.
3. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
4. Taper edges to existing, surrounding surfaces when shown on plan.
5. Finished site shall be free of tools, equipment, unused materials and debris; broom area clean.
F. PROTECTION
Fencing and barricades shall protect finished surfaces. Owner will provide reasonable supervision on site
after hours. Cure shall be no less than 24 hours.
G. FINAL INSPECTION
Manufacturer’s sales representative and/or installer must attend a follow up inspection with a City of Ft.
Collin’s CPSI prior to acceptance of the installation.
2.03 INORGANIC LOOSE-FILL SURFACE
A. Inorganic Aggregate Materials: Clean, washed, and free of loam, clay, organic matter, debris, and
other foreign substances.
1. Masonry Sand: Complying with ASTM C 136 for the following sieve analysis test results;
provide minimum depth of material with critical height indicated according to CPSC No. 325:
a. Sieve Sizes and Percent Passing through Screen: No. 16 passing 100 percent, No. 30
passing 98 percent, No. 50 passing 62 percent, No. 100 passing 17 percent, and No. 200
passing 0 to 1 percent.
B. Critical Height: Play Structure C – Per Manufacturer’s Recommendations
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02791 – PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING
Page 5 of 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare substrates to receive surfacing products according to playground surface system
manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that substrates are sound and without high spots,
ridges, holes, and depressions.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with playground surface system manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Install playground surface system over area and in thickness indicated.
3.03 GEOSYNTHETIC INSTALLATION
A. General: Install geosynthetics according to playground surface system manufacturer's and
geosynthetic manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Geotextiles: Completely cover area indicated, overlapping sides and edges a minimum of 6
incheswith manufacturer's standard treatment for overlapping loosely laid seams.
1. Perimeter: Adhere edges to top of perimeter curb or footing.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF INORGANIC LOOSE FILL SURFACING
A. Loose Fill: Place playground surface system materials including manufacturer's standard amount
of excess material for compacting mechanically to required depths after Installation of playground
equipment support posts and foundations.
B. Compacting and Grading: Uniformly compact and grade loose-fill according to manufacturer's
written instructions to an even surface free from irregular surface changes as indicated.
C. Finish Grading: Hand rake to a smooth finished surface and to required elevations.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of playground surface system
shall take place according to ASTM F 1292.
C. Remove and replace applications of playground surface system where test results indicate that it
does not comply with requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with requirements.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Seamless Systems: Prevent traffic over system for not less than 48 hours after installation.
3.08 CLEANUP
A. Remove spills or residue that may make contact with structure or surrounding curbs or sidewalks.
On completion of work and the 24 hr. cure time, remove protection provided for the same.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02750 - CONCRETE PAVING
Page 1 of 6
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02750 – CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Included
A. Bidding Documents and Information, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General
Requirements apply to the Work of this Section of the Specifications.
B. Section Includes:
1. Sidewalks, curb and gutter, plazas and exterior slabs
2. Aggregate Finish
1.02 Related Sections:
A. Section 07900 – Sealants and Joint Fillers
B. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.03 References
A. Geotechnical Engineering Report prepared by CTL Thompson, dated 01/09/12
B. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
2. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
3. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.
4. ACI 316R - Recommendations for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Bases.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
2. ASTM C979 - Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
1.04 Submittals
A. Submit product data and manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section 01330 for:
1. Admixtures and Curing compounds.
2. Reinforcing and Concrete Mix Designs
1.05 Quality Assurance
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 316R.
B. Conform to ACI 305R during hot weather.
C. Conform to ACI 306R during cold weather.
D. Obtain materials from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship
throughout Project.
E. Installer Qualifications: Concrete shall be finished by firm with five years experience with work of
similar scope and quality.
F. Concrete Field Samples:
1. Provide field sample under provisions of Section 01330.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02750 - CONCRETE PAVING
Page 2 of 6
2. At location on Project selected by Owner’s Representative, place and finish 4 x 4 feet area
demonstrating materials, workmanship, and curing method to be used throughout Project.
3. Retain samples of cements and aggregates used in mock-up for comparison with materials
used in remaining Work.
4. Accepted field sample provides visual standard for work of Section.
5. Field sample may remain as part of Work. However, it can be removed when no longer
required for comparison with finished work.
G. Where work occurs in public rights-of-way, it shall conform strictly to current government
specifications.
1.07 Project Conditions
A. Concrete Environmental Requirements:
1. Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are
applied.
2. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow, or frost is forecast within 24 hours. Protect fresh
concrete from moisture and freezing.
1.08 Performance Requirements
A. Pavement design and installation shall accommodate Light duty commercial vehicles and trash
removal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Forms
A. Forms may be either stationary or slip-form type. If slip forms are used, finished surfaces shall be
of quality equal to that produced by stationary forms.
B. Stationary forms shall be steel or wood, free of distortion and defects, and of appropriate size and
strength. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends. Apply
nonstaining, clear, paraffin-based form oil.
2.01 Concrete Mix
A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
1. Provide non-colored concrete for exterior slabs on grade, plazas, sidewalks, curb and gutter,
walls, aprons and ramps with the following characteristics:
Unit Measurement
a. 28-Day Field Compressive 4,000 psi
Strength
b. Cement/Fly Ash 615 lbs./cu. yd. Min.
c. Max. Water/Cement Ratio 0.44
d. Air Content % Range 5-8
e. Maximum Slump 4”
f. Fine Aggregate 50%
(max. % of total Aggregate)
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02750 - CONCRETE PAVING
Page 3 of 6
C. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type I/II, Color shall be gray.
D. Sand: Color shall be locally available natural sand.
E. Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride admixtures.
F. Aggregates: ASTM C33, normal weight. In addition, the combined aggregate shall comply with
the following gradation, shown in percent passing.
Sieve Size ¾-Inch Nominal Maximum Size
¾ Inch 90 – 100
3/8 Inch 60 – 80
No. 4 40 – 60
No. 8 30 – 45
No. 16 20 – 35
No. 30 13 – 23
No. 50 5 – 15
No. 100 0 – 5
H. Fly Ash and Water: Upon approval based on a satisfactory trial mix, the CONTRACTOR shall
have the option of substituting approved fly ash for Portland cement, up to a maximum of 20
percent by weight. The total weight of cement and fly ash shall not be less than the specified mix
design.
1. Fly ash for concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.
All chemical requirements of ASTM C 618 Table 1-A shall apply with the exception of
footnote A. Class C fly ash will not be permitted where sulfate resistant cement is required.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit certified laboratory test results for the fly ash. Test results
that do not meet the physical and chemical requirements may result in the suspension of the
use of fly ash until the corrections necessary have been taken to insure that the material meets
the specifications.
2. Water used in mixing or curing shall be clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, sugar,
vegetable, or other substance injurious to the finished product. Water will be tested in
accordance with, and shall meet the suggested requirements of AASHTO T 26. Water known
to be of potable quality may be used without test. Where the source of water is relatively
shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass, or other foreign
materials.
I. Coarse Aggregate for Exposed Aggregate Finish: 5/8-inch maximum size; rounded shape, ratio of
maximum to minimum dimensions not to exceed 2.5:1; color to be tan to brown, no more than 2%
white or black combined, no pink, no red, no green.
J. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.02 Admixtures
General: Unless specified in the mix or directed in Part 3, no admixtures shall be used without
approval of the Owner’s Representative. Do not use admixtures that would result in mixing water
with a concentration of more than 150 ppm of chloride ion.
Air Entraining: ASTM C260.
Water Reducing: ASTM C494, Type A.
Accelerator: Nonchloride, ASTM C494, Type C or E.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02750 - CONCRETE PAVING
Page 4 of 6
Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D.
2.03 Accessories
A. Curing Compound for Exposed Aggregate Concrete: Acryseal by Prokete Industries of Denver,
Colorado
B. Sealants: Joint sealers shall be type specified in Section 07900.
C. Forms: Wood, masonite or steel, profiled to site conditions.
D. Joint Filler: Adjacent to Building and Other Areas Requiring a Sealant: Neoprene Sponge Rubber
ASTM D1752 Type I, 1/2 inch thick, with strippable top.
E. Other Joints: Asphalt impregnated fiberboard, ASTM D1751 1/2 inch thick by full depth of
concrete.
F. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 40 ksi; deformed bars.
G. Surface Retardant: Surface retarding agent intended for exposed aggregate. Retardx-SR0” by
Prokrete of Denver, Colorado, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Sample
A. Provide a 4' X 4' sample of each proposed concrete and finish for review by the Owner’s
Representative prior to placement of sidewalks or pavement. Obtain written authorization to
proceed prior to placing remaining walk. The sample may become a part of the permanent work if
approved by the Owner. If the sample is not approved, the Contractor shall remove the test
section from the site and shall place another sample for approval.
3.02 Examination and Preparation
A. Verify grades and elevations of base. Remove loose material from compacted subgrade. Proof-
roll subgrade; give notice of unstable areas. Moisten subgrade to provide a uniformly damp
condition.
B. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support paving and imposed loads. ASTM D698,
Minimum Percent Compaction: 95
C. Moisten substrate to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
D. Set clean forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Sidewalks shall be
minimum 5-inch thick.
D. Check tolerances as follows (slip form methods shall produce equivalent results):
1. Top of form: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
2. Alignment of vertical face: 1/4 inch in 10 feet
E. Adjust manholes and utility structures to grade.
3.03 Forming
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile.
B. Place expansion joints per plans and details or at 90-foot intervals maximum.
C. Coordinate utility pads with respective Division 15 and Division 16 Contractors.
D. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02750 - CONCRETE PAVING
Page 5 of 6
E. Form for handicap accessibility at curbs and gutters as shown.
3.04 Placing Concrete
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and Section 03050.
B. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints.
D. Apply curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.05 Finishing
A. Provide uniform joint patterns as shown on drawings, with dummy joints at 10 foot o.c. where not
otherwise shown. Sawed joints should be cut within 24 hours of concrete placement, and should
be a minimum of 25% of slab thickness.
B. Sidewalks: Medium broom, radius edges and trowel joint. Remove joint tool marks so only
vertical joint is visible. Heavy broom finish and scoring required by ADA at handicap access
ramp and curb ramp locations
C. Slope or cross slope walks and slabs to provide positive drainage.
D. Broomed: Pull broom across freshly floated concrete to produce fine, medium texture in straight
lines perpendicular to main line of traffic. Do not dampen brooms.
3.06 Joints
A. Construct expansion, weakened-plane control (contraction), and construction joints straight with
face perpendicular to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline,
unless otherwise detailed.
B. Weakened-Plane Control or Contraction Joints: Provide joints at spacing of 15’-0" on centers
maximum each way. Construct control joints for depth equal to at least ¼ of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
1. Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top with recommended tool and finishing
edge with jointer.
2. Form sawed joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-
rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn,
abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action.
C. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where
placement operations are stopped for period of more than ½ hour, except where such placements
terminate at expansion joints. Construct joints using standard metal keyway-section forms.
D. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints at maximum of 90’-0" on centers maximum each way
unless otherwise shown on the Construction Drawings. Provide premolded joint filler for
expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, sidewalks, and
other fixed objects.
E. Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than ½ inch or more
than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece
lengths for full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace
or clip joint filler sections together.
F. Joint Sealants: Joints shall be sealed with approved exterior pavement joint sealants and shall be
installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.09 Damaged Work
A. Concrete work shall be protected from damage as a result of settlement, vandalism, construction
activity, or other causes.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02750 - CONCRETE PAVING
Page 6 of 6
B. Cracked or otherwise damaged sidewalks shall be removed and replaced.
3.10 Curing
A. Exposed Aggregate Concrete: Apply curing compound for exposed aggregate concrete in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.11 Repair and Protection
A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete. Remove surface stains. Protect concrete from
damage until Substantial Completion.
B. Prior to final inspection, sweep concrete and wash free of stains, dirt, and other foreign material.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 1
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS & SPECIALTY PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concrete pavers set in aggregate setting bed.
2. Edge restraints for unit pavers.
3. Porous Stone Pavement
4. Glasscrete
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any, under unit
pavers.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast In Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete slabs, curbs and gutters
serving as edge restraint for unit pavers.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit pavers with
elastomeric sealants.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Concrete pavers.
2. Sand setting bed sieve analysis report.
3. Sand joint filler sieve analysis report.
4. Porous stone pavement
5. Glasscrete
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing
the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each color,
texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. Include Samples of exposed edge restraints.
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 2
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, square
footage of unit pavers installed, names and addresses of architects and owners, and descriptions of
subbase preparation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction
with a minimum 5 year record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source
with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
C. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required
to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints,
and contiguous work as indicated:
1. Build mockups in a location indicated as permanent installation and of the size indicated as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from
earth and other materials.
1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel
strapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Concrete Pavers:
a. Hanover Engineerural Products, Inc.
b. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc.
c. Pavestone, Inc.
d. Wassau Tile, Inc.; Terra-Paving Div.
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 3
2. Porous Stone Pavement, Gravel-Lok, By Cell-Tek Geosynthetics, 2431 Crofton Lane, Ste 9, Crofton,
MD 21114, phone : 888-851-0051, or approved equal
3. Glasscrete, Lithocrete by Colorado Hardscapes, 8085 East Harvard, Denver, CO 80231, 303-750-8200,
or approved equal
2.02 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: As indicated by manufacturer's designations as follows:
1. Paver Stones in spiral random Pattern. Color to be a random mix of Pavestone standard color
“Winter Blend. Heritage Series” or approved equal
2. Porous Stone pavement in pattern coordinated with Project Artist as shown on drawings, Colors to
be selected from standard rock colors available by Owner and Project Artist
3. Lithocrete in pattern coordinated with Project Artist as shown on drawings, Colors to be selected
from standard glass colors available by Owner and Project Artist
2.03 UNIT PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight aggregates in
sizes and shapes indicated, with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi.
B. Type to be Pavestone Carriage Stone Split or approved equal.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 4000 psi.
B. Soil Sterilizer
C. Edge Restraints per Gravel-Lok or approved equal
2.05 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size
No. 57.
B. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
D. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16
(1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 4
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional
compaction. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and
are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or
cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and
textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut
units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where
possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D. Joint Pattern: As indicated.
E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from
level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
3.04 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density.
B. Place aggregate base in thickness indicated. Compact by tamping with plate vibrator and screed to depth
required to allow setting of pavers.
C. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/4 inches, taking care that moisture content
remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. Place leveling
course such that installed unit pavers will set 1/8 to 1/4 inches above edge restraints.
D. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
E. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/8th inch and a maximum of 1/4 inch, being careful not to
disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string
lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with pieces cut to fit from full-
size unit pavers.
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 5
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars
on sides of each unit.
F. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf
compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under
the following conditions:
1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to
rain.
2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches of the
laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped 48 inches on each side
of the laying face to protect it from rain.
G. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers
and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand
on the surface for joint filling.
H. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
3.05 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do
not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same
manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION 02780
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 1
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concrete pavers set in aggregate setting bed.
2. Edge restraints for unit pavers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any, under unit
pavers.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast In Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete slabs, curbs and gutters
serving as edge restraint for unit pavers.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit pavers with
elastomeric sealants.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Concrete pavers.
2. Sand setting bed sieve analysis report.
3. Sand joint filler sieve analysis report.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing
the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each color,
texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. Include Samples of exposed edge restraints.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, square
footage of unit pavers installed, names and addresses of architects and owners, and descriptions of
subbase preparation.
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction
with a minimum 5 year record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source
with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
C. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required
to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints,
and contiguous work as indicated:
1. Build mockups in a location indicated as permanent installation and of the size indicated as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from
earth and other materials.
1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel
strapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Concrete Pavers:
a. Hanover Engineerural Products, Inc.
b. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc.
c. Pavestone, Inc.
d. Wassau Tile, Inc.; Terra-Paving Div.
2.02 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: As indicated by manufacturer's designations as follows:
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 3
1. Stones in spiral random Pattern. Color to be a random mix of Pavestone standard color “Winter
Blend. Heritage Series” or approved equal
2.03 UNIT PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight aggregates in
sizes and shapes indicated, with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi.
B. Type to be Pavestone Carriage Stone Split or approved equal.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 4000 psi.
B. Soil Sterilizer:
2.05 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size
No. 57.
B. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
D. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16
(1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional
compaction. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and
are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 4
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or
cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and
textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut
units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where
possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D. Joint Pattern: As indicated.
E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from
level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
3.04 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density.
B. Place aggregate base in thickness indicated. Compact by tamping with plate vibrator and screed to depth
required to allow setting of pavers.
C. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/4 inches, taking care that moisture content
remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. Place leveling
course such that installed unit pavers will set 1/8 to 1/4 inches above edge restraints.
D. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
E. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/8th inch and a maximum of 1/4 inch, being careful not to
disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string
lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with pieces cut to fit from full-
size unit pavers.
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars
on sides of each unit.
F. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf
compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under
the following conditions:
1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to
rain.
2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches of the
laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped 48 inches on each side
of the laying face to protect it from rain.
Radiant Neighborhood Park Unit Pavers 02780 - 5
G. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers
and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand
on the surface for joint filling.
H. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
3.05 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do
not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same
manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION 02780
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02810- IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools and transportation, and perform
all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of
the irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation
details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are:
A. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees.
B. Coordination of Utility Locates (“Call Before You Dig”).
C. Connection of electrical power supply to the irrigation control system.
D. Connection of irrigation system to existing raw water stubout.
E. Maintenance period.
F. Sleeving for irrigation pipe and wire.
1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED
Items of work specifically excluded or covered under other sections are:
A. Payment of all development, plant investment, or any other fees and permits
associated with the purchase and installation of the tap.
B. Coordination of Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig").
C. Provision and connection of electrical power supply to the irrigation control system.
D. Installation of pumping plant for irrigation system.
E. Maintenance period.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver four (4) copies of all required submittals to the Owners’ Representative within
15 days from the date of Notice to Proceed.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 2
B. Materials List: Include pipe, fittings, mainline components, water emission
components, control system components. Quantities of materials need not be
included.
C. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and
operating instructions for equipment shown on the materials list.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details. Show
products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical
dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail.
E. Project Record Drawings: Submit project record (as-built) drawings to Owner prior
to commencement of maintenance period (refer to specification section 3.12 for
specific requirements).
1.4 RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National
Electric Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing
Officials Association, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing
authorities.
B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or
larger size than required by the above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide the
quality and size required by the contract documents.
C. If quantities are provided either in these specifications or on the drawings, these
quantities are provided for information only. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
determine the actual quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by
the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage.
1.5 TESTING
A. Notify the Owners’ Representative three days in advance of testing.
B. Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to a
pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with
solvent-welded PVC joints shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before testing.
C. Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of
the Owners’ Representative.
D. Furnish clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to
conduct tests or retests.
E. Hydrostatic Pressure Test:
1) Subject mainline pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the anticipated
operating pressure of 120 PSI for two hours. Test with mainline components
installed. A 2 PSI pressure variation is allowed.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 3
2) Subject lateral pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the anticipated operating
pressure of 60 PSI. Test with risers for sprinklers capped.
3) Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and
fittings.
4) Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe, fitting,
joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test.
a. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.
F. Operational Test:
1) Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller. The Owners’
Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and
leakage.
2) Replace defective remote control valve, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to
correct operational deficiencies.
3) Replace, adjust, or move water emission devices to correct operational or
coverage deficiencies.
4) Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct
leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.
5) Repeat test(s) until each lateral passes all tests.
G. Central Control System Acceptance Test:
1) Upon completion of the centralized control system installation and Final
Review, a System Acceptance Test must be passed.
2) Following Final Review, an evaluation period will commence. Upon completion
of 30 days of continuous service without major system problems, the system
will be accepted and the guarantee/warranty period will begin. If at any time
during the 30-day evaluation period, a major system problem occurs, the
source of the problem will be determined and corrected and the 30-day
evaluation period will start again. Equipment will not be accepted until such
time as the System Acceptance Test is passed.
3) If successful completion of the System Acceptance Test is not attained within
90 days following Final Review, the Engineer/Landscape Architect/Owner's
Representative has the option to request replacement of equipment, terminate
the order, or portions thereof, or continue with the System Acceptance Test.
These options will remain in effect until such time as a successful completion of
the System Acceptance Test.
4) Final payment will be made after successful completion of the final System
Acceptance Test.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 4
H. Signal Wire:
1) Test for leaks to ground per manufacturer's recommendations. Test results
must meet or exceed manufacturer's guidelines for acceptance.
2) Replace defective wire, underground splices, or appurtenances. Repeat the
test until the manufacturer's guidelines are met.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
The purpose of on-site reviews by the Owners’ Representative is to periodically observe
the work in progress and the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents
and to address questions with regards to the installation.
A. Scheduled reviews such as those for irrigation system layout or testing should be
scheduled with the Owners’ Representative as required by these specifications.
B. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project.
C. Final review will occur at the completion of the irrigation system installation and
Record (As-Built) Drawing submittal.
1.7 GURANTEE/ WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT
The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives irrigation
materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner.
A. For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period,
guarantee/warranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against
defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural features
damaged by the settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to
the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of
notification from the Owners’ Representative.
B. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make
replacements at no additional cost to the contract price.
C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and
replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period.
PART 2: MATERIALS
2.1 QUALITY
Use materials which are new and without flaws or defects of any type, and which are the
best of their class and kind.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 5
2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be
increased at the option of the Contractor.
2.3 SLEEVING
A. Install separate sleeve beneath paved areas to route each run of irrigation pipe or
wiring bundle.
B. Sleeving material beneath pedestrian pavements shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with
solvent welded joints.
C. Sleeving beneath drives and streets shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent
welded joints.
D. Sleeving diameter: as indicated on the drawings and installation details or equal to
twice that of the pipe or wiring bundle.
2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mainline Pipe and Fittings:
1) Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the
requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard
D1784, with an integral belled end.
2) Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and
tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at
higher pressures than Class 200 in the case of small nominal diameters which
are not manufactured in Class 200.
a. Use rubber-gasketed pipe for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter greater
than or equal to 3-inches and rubber-gasketed ductile iron fittings with
lubricant approved by the pipe manufacturer. Service tees shall be Harco
ductile iron swivel tee.
Use gasketed pipe equipped with Reiber Gasket System. Pipe fittings may
use standard gaskets.
b. Use solvent weld pipe for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter less than
3-inches or where a pipe connection occurs in a sleeve. Use Schedule 40,
Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466
and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent
cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564.
B. Lateral Pipe and Fittings:
1) Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the
requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 6
D1784, with an integral belled end suitable for solvent welding.
Use class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and
tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at
higher pressures than Class 200 in the case of small nominal diameters which
are not manufactured in Class 200.
Use UV radiation resistant Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings
conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for PVC pipe.
2) Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to
ASTM Standard D2564, of a type approved by the pipe manufacturer.
3) For drip irrigation laterals downstream of zone control valves, use UV radiation
resistant polyethylene pipe manufactured from Prime Union Carbide G-resin
7510 Natural 7 manufactured by Union Carbide or a Union Carbide Licensee
with a minimum of 2% carbon black, and minimum nominal pipe ID dimension
of 0.810" for 3/4 inch pipe.
Use PVC /compression line fittings compatible with the drip lateral pipe. Use
tubing stakes to hold above-ground pipe in place.
C. Specialized Pipe and Fittings:
1) Copper pipe: Use Type "K" rigid conforming to ASTM Standard B88.
Use wrought copper or cast bronze fittings, soldered or threaded per the
installation details. Use a 95% tin and 5% antimony solder.
2) Galvanized steel pipe: Use Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM Standard A120.
Use galvanized, threaded, standard weight, malleable iron fittings.
3) Ductile iron pipe: Use Class 50 conforming to ASTM Standard.
Use Class 50 ductile iron fittings.
4) Use a dielectric union wherever a copper-based metal (copper, brass, bronze)
is joined to an iron-based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel).
5) Swing joints shall be rated at 315 psi, and use O-ring and Marlex street elbows
and Sch 80 PVC nipple construction.
6) Low Density Polyethylene Hose:
a. Use pipe specifically intended for use as a flexible swing joint.
Inside diameter: 0.490+0.010 inch.
Wall thickness: 0.100+0.010 inch.
Color: Black.
b. Use spiral barb fittings supplied by the same manufacturer as the hose.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 7
7) Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC Schedule 80
nipples and PVC Schedule 40 threaded fittings.
8) Joint sealant:
Use only Teflon-type tape pipe joint sealant on plastic threads. Use
nonhardening, nontoxic pipe joint sealant formulated for use on water-carrying
pipes on metal threaded connections.
D. Marking Tape:
1) Mainline Pipe - Christy underground I.D. tape TA-DT-3-P-NPW. {DESIGNER
NOTE: Non Potable detectable marking tape is called out; see pg 16 in Christy
catalog for spec designations }.
E. Thrust Blocks:
1) Use thrust blocks for fittings on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or
any diameter rubber gasketed pipe.
2) Use 3,000 PSI concrete.
3) Use No. 4 Rebar wrapped or painted with asphalt tar based mastic coating.
F. Joint Restrain Harness:
1) Use a joint restrain harness wherever joints are not positively restrained by
flanged fittings, threaded fittings, and/or thrust blocks.
2) Use a joint restrain harness with transition fittings between metal and PVC
pipe, where weak trench banks do no allow the use of thrust blocks, or where
extra support is required to retain a fitting or joint.
3) Use bolts, nuts, retaining clamps, all-thread, or other joint restrain harness
materials that are zinc plated or galvanized.
4) Use on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any diameter rubber
gasketed pipe.
2.5 MAINLINE COMPONENTS
A. Main System Shutoff Valve: As per local practice and in compliance with local code.
B. Winterization Assembly: As per local practice and in compliance with local code.
C. Master Valve Assembly: As presented in the installation details.
D. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: As presented in the installation details. Install a
separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 8
E. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: Double swing joint arrangement as presented in
the installation details.
F. Manual Drain Valve Assembly: As presented in the installation details. Install a
separate sump consisting of three cubic feet of 3/4-inch gravel for each drain valve.
2.6 SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS
A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals:
As presented in the installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing
sealant to join control wires to solenoid valves. Use standard Christy I.D. tags with
hot-stamped black letters on a yellow background. Install a separate valve box over
a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. Adjust flow control per
manufacturer’s recommendations prior to use. Install Toro CDEC-ISP-1 decoder on
each valve for communication on 2-wire control system.
B. Sprinkler Assembly: As presented in the drawings and installation details. Use the
sprinkler manufacturer's pressure compensating screens (Rain Bird PCS) to achieve
30 PSI operating conditions on each sprinkler and to control excessive operating
pressures.
2.7 DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS
A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Drip Laterals: As presented in the
installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealant to join control
wires to solenoid valves. Use standard Christy I.D. tags with hot-stamped black
letters on a yellow background. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of
3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. Adjust flow control per manufacturer’s
recommendations prior to use. Install Toro CDEC-ISP-1 decoder on each valve for
communication on 2-wire control system.
B. Drip Emitter Assembly:
1) Barb-mounted, vortex and/or pressure compensating emitter device as
presented in the installation details. The device shall be Rain Bird Xeri-bug
XB-10pc series.
2) Install emitter types and quantities on the following schedule:
a. Ground cover plant: 1 single outlet emitter each or 1 single outlet emitter
per square foot of planting area, whichever is less.
b. Shrub: 2 single outlet emitters each.
c. Tree: 4 single outlet emitters each or 1 multi-outlet emitter each (with 4
outlets open).
3) Use 1/4-inch diameter flexible plastic tubing to direct water from emitter outlet
to emission point. Length of emitter outlet tubing shall not exceed five feet.
Secure emitter outlet tubing with tubing stakes.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 9
4) Install an access sleeve for each multiple-outlet emitter located in a turf area.
C. Flush Cap Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Locate at the end of
each drip irrigation lateral pipe. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of
3/4-inch gravel for each assembly.
2.8 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Irrigation Controller Unit:
1) As presented in the drawings and installation details.
2) Primary surge protection arrestors:
As required by control system manufacturer.
3) Valve output surge protection arrestors:
As required by control system manufacturer.
4) Lightning protection: 4” x 96” x 0.0625” copper-clad grounding plate.
5) Wire markers: Pre-numbered or labeled with indelible non-fading ink, made of
permanent, non-fading material.
6) Valve output surge protection arrestors: As recommended by controller
manufacturer. Ground every 12 decoders or every 1,000 feet of wire per Toro
specifications.
7) Ground the end of every wire run per Toro specifications
8) Additional Central Control radio communication equipment as determined by a
communication test. See Section 3.9.
B. Instrumentation:
1) As presented in the drawings and installation details.
2) Flow Sensor: Data Industrial Model IR220B with polypropylene mounting
saddle.
3) Central control communication components
C. Control Wire:
1) Use Toro jacketed decoder cable (2-#14 AWG wires), direct burial, solid
copper, for power to decoders. Install per Toro specifications.
2) Spare control wires shall be of a color different from that of the active control
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 10
wire. Wire color shall be continuous over its entire length.
3) Splices: Use wire connector with waterproof sealant. Wire connector to be of
plastic construction consisting of two (2) pieces, one piece which snap locks
into the other. A copper crimp sleeve to be provided with connector. Utilize
DBR6-300 splices.
4) Encase wiring not located near PVC irrigation pipe in PVC Schedule 40
electrical conduit.
OTHER COMPONENTS
A. Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment,
other items, and spare parts indicated in the General Notes of the drawings.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS
A. Site Inspections:
1) Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section.
Report irregularities to the Owners’ Representative prior to beginning work.
2) Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions.
3) Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and
irrigation system installation.
4) Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take
precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation
equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown
on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation
equipment, as necessary, at Contractor’s expense.
B. Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"):
1) Arrange for and coordinate with local authorities the location of all underground
utilities.
2) Repair any underground utilities damaged during construction. Make repairs at
no additional cost to the contract price.
C. Irrigation System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after the
staking has been completed. Notify the Owners’ Representative two days in
advance of review. Modifications will be identified by the Owners’ Representative at
this review.
3.2 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. Stake out the irrigation system. Items staked include: sprinklers, pipe, control
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 11
valves, manual drains, controller, and isolation valves.
B. Install all mainline pipe and mainline components inside of project property lines.
3.3 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work
space for installing connections and fittings.
B. Minimum cover (distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade):
1) 24-inch over mainline pipe and over electrical conduit.
2) Control wire under mainline.
3) 16-inch over lateral pipe to sprinklers and over manifold pipe to drip system
zone control valves.
4) 8-inch over drip lateral pipe in turf or paved areas downstream of drip system
zone control valves.
5) 3-inch minimum mulch cover over drip lateral pipe in planting beds downstream
of drip system zone control valves. PVC UV radiation resistant lateral pipe
shall be installed directly on the soil surface under landscape fabric.
C. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested.
D. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be free from
rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2-inches in
maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next
to pipe shall be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe. Stones larger
than 1-inch maximum dimension are not permitted in first (deepest) 6-inches of
backfill.
E. Backfill unsleeved pipe and sleeves in either of the following manners:
1) Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill
the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding
soil.
2) Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of
the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil.
F. Backfill unsleeved pipe by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the
pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting each layer to 90% Standard Proctor Density,
ASTM D698-78. Conduct one compaction test for every 300 feet of trench. Costs
for such testing and any necessary retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. Use
of water for compaction, "puddling", will not be permitted.
G. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways, walks, curbs, etc. in sleeves. Minimum
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 12
compaction of backfill for sleeves shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density, ASTM
D698-78. Conduct one compaction test for each sleeved crossing less than 50 feet
long. Conduct two compaction tests for each sleeved crossing greater than 50 feet
long. Costs for such testing and any necessary retesting shall be borne by the
Contractor. Use of water for compaction around sleeves, "puddling", will not be
permitted.
H. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backfill into existing site
grades. Dispose of excess backfill off site.
I. Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the Owners’
Representative for trench depth adjustments.
3.4 SLEEVING AND BORING
A. Install sleeving at a depth which permits the encased pipe or wiring to remain at the
specified burial depth.
B. Extend sleeve ends six inches beyond the edge of the paved surface. Cover pipe
ends and mark with stakes. Mark concrete with a chiseled "x" at sleeve end
locations.
C. Bore for sleeves under obstructions which cannot be removed. Employ equipment
and methods designed for horizontal boring.
3.5 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General:
1) Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur.
Clean pipe ends.
2) Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to
continue assembly.
B. Mainline Pipe and Fittings:
1) Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe.
2) PVC Rubber-Gasketed Pipe:
a. Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer
and in accordance with accepted industry practices.
b. Epoxy-coated steel fittings shall not be struck with a metallic tool. Cushion
blows with a wood block or similar shock absorber.
3) PVC Solvent Weld Pipe:
a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in a manner recommended by
the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 13
b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in
pipe.
c. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench.
4) Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted.
C. Lateral Pipe and Fittings:
1) Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe.
2) PVC Solvent Weld Pipe:
a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in the manner recommended by
the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices.
b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in
the pipe.
c. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench.
3) UV Radiation Resistant Polyethylene Pipe:
a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance
with accepted industry practices.
b. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench, on the soil surface, and hold
in place with tubing stakes spaced every five feet.
4) Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted.
D. Specialized Pipe and Fittings:
1) Copper Pipe:
a. Buff surfaces to be joined to a bright finish. Coat with solder flux.
b. Solder so that a continuous bead shows around the joint circumference.
2) Galvanized Steel Pipe:
a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance
with accepted industry practices.
b. Use factory-made threads whenever possible. Field-cut threads will be
permitted only where absolutely necessary. Cut threads on axis using
clean, sharp dies.
c. Apply Teflon-type tape or pipe joint compound to the male threads only.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 14
3) Ductile Iron Pipe:
a. Use push-on joints whenever possible. Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in the
manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted
industry practices.
4) Insert a dielectric union wherever a copper-based metal (copper, brass,
bronze) and an iron-based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel) are
joined.
5) Pre-fabricated double swing joints: Install per City of Fort Collins standards
and details.
6) Low Density Polyethylene Hose: Install per manufacturer's recommendations.
7) PVC Threaded Connections:
a. Use only factory-formed threads. Field-cut threads are not permitted.
b. Use only Teflon-type tape.
c. When connection is plastic-to-metal, the plastic component shall have male
threads and the metal component shall have female threads.
8) Make metal-to-metal, threaded connections with Teflon-type tape or pipe joint
compound applied to the male threads only.
E. Thrust Blocks:
1) Use cast-in-place concrete bearing against undisturbed soil.
2) Size, orientation and placement shall be as shown on the installation details.
3) Install rebar with mastic coating as shown on the installation details.
F. Joint Restrain Harness:
1) Install harness in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and in
accordance with accepted industry practices.
2) Install self-restraining casing spacers at all pipe bell joints and every 10-feet
along the mainline pipe routing through sleeving. Provide correct number and
type of restraint per manufacturer’s requirements.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS
A. Main System Shut Off Valve: Install where indicated on the drawings.
B. Winterization Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 15
C. Master Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.
D. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly:
1) Install where indicated on the drawings.
2) Locate at least 12-inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved
areas.
E. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.
F. Manual Drain Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings and at other
low points in the mainline piping.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS
A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals:
1) Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly.
2) Install where indicated on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof
sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires.
Install connectors and sealant per the manufacturer's recommendations.
3) Install only one RCV to a valve box. Locate valve box at least 12-inches from
and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies
together where practical. Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns.
Allow at least 12-inches between valve boxes.
4) Adjust RCV to regulate the downstream operating pressure.
5) Attach ID tag with controller station number to control wiring.
B. Sprinkler Assembly:
1) Flush lateral pipe before installing sprinkler assembly.
2) Install per the installation details at locations shown on the drawings.
3) Locate rotary sprinklers 12-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of
paved areas.
4) Locate spray sprinklers 3-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of
paved areas.
5) Set sprinklers perpendicular to the finish grade.
6) Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best
performance.
7) Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 16
3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS
A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Drip Laterals:
1) Flush mainline pipe before installing RCV assembly.
2) Locate as shown on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant
shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires.
Connectors and sealant shall be installed as per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3) Install only one RCV to valve box. Locate at least 12-inches from and align
with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies together
where practical.
4) Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns. Set RCV assembly
discharge pressure to 30 PSI.
B. Zone Control Valve Assembly: Install at locations shown on the drawings.
C. Drip Emitter Assembly:
1) Locate as shown on the drawings and installation details.
2) Flush lateral pipe before installing emitter assembly.
3) Cut emitter outlet distribution tubing square.
4) ¼-inch distribution tubing shall not be greater than 5’ in length.
5) Install an access sleeve as part of each multiple-outlet emitter assembly for
emitters located in turf areas.
6) Use tools and techniques recommended by the manufacturer.
Make openings for barb-mounted emitters with the emitter manufacturer's hole-
punching tool.
D. Flush Cap Assembly: Install at the end of each drip irrigation lateral pipe as shown
on the installation details.
E. Pressure Adjustment Procedure:
1) Fully open all zone control valves and energize the RCV assembly.
2) Determine which emitter has the least outlet pressure; this is the critical emitter.
3) Identify zone control valve associated with the critical emitter; this is the critical
zone control valve.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 17
4) Set discharge pressure of RCV such that the critical vortex emitter has a
pressure of 15 PSI + 2 PSI and/or the critical pressure compensating emitter
has a pressure of 25 PSI + 5 PSI. Measure with pressure gauge attached to
critical emitter.
5) Identify the critical emitter for remaining zone control valves.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Irrigation Controller Unit:
1) The location of the controller unit as depicted on the drawings is approximate;
the Owners’ Representative will determine the exact site location during
irrigation system installation.
2) Lightning Protection: A 25-foot continuous length (no splices allowed unless
using exothermic welding process) of 6 AWG solid bare copper wire is to be
attached to the plate by the manufacturer using an approved welding process.
Install grounding plate to meet minimum requirements of Article 250-52 (d) of
the 199 National Electric Code. Plate must be made of a copper alloy. Wire is
to be connected to the electric equipment ground lug as shown in the detail of
page 1. The ground plate is to be installed to a minimum depth of 30”, or below
the frost line if it is lower than 30”, at a location 8 feet from the electronic
equipment and underground wires and cables.
Two (2) 50-pound bags of PowerSet [Paige Electric part number
1820058] earth contact material must be spread so that it surrounds
the copper plate evenly along its length within a 6” wide trench.
Salts, fertilizers, bentonite clay, cement, coke, carbon, and other
chemicals are not to be used to improve soil conductivity because
these materials are corrosive and will cause the copper electrodes
to erode and become less effective with time.
3) Lightning protection: Provide on all remote control valve wiring as
recommended by the manufacturer. Provide other components such as
ground rod, grounding wire, etc., to manufacturer's recommendations.
4) Install primary surge protection arrestors on incoming power lines.
5) Install one valve output surge protection arrestor on each control wire and one
for the common wire.
6) Attach wire markers to the ends of control wires inside the controller unit
housing. Label wires with the identification number (see drawings) of the
remote control valve to which the control wire is connected.
7) Connect control wires to the corresponding controller terminal.
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 18
8) Contractor shall schedule Central Control communication radio test with the
control system manufacturer representative. On-site controller must
communicate by radio with the Central Control system at the Fossil Creek Park
Maintenance Facility, radio frequency 453.0375.
B. Instrumentation:
1) Install sensors per the installation details and manufacturer's
recommendations. Install at locations shown on the drawings.
2) Install electrical connections between irrigation controller and sensors per
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Control Wire:
1) Bundle control wires where two or more are in the same trench. Bundle with
pipe wrapping tape spaced at 10-foot intervals.
2) Provide a 24-inch excess length of wire in an 8-inch diameter loop at each 90
degree change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100-foot intervals
along continuous runs of wiring. Make wiring loop by turning control wire 5
turns around 1-inch pipe. Coil 24-inch length of wire within each remote control
valve box.
3) Install spare two wire Toro jacketed decoder cable along entire length of
mainline, pulled into each valve box and into the controller.
4) Install control wire under mainline.
5) Do not encase control wires in thrust blocks.
6) If a control wire must be spliced, make splice with wire connectors and
waterproof sealant, installed per the manufacturer's instructions. Locate splice
in a valve box which contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate 6-
inch round valve box.
Use same procedure for connection to valves as for in-line splices.
7) Unless noted on plans, install wire parallel with and under PVC mainline pipe.
If wire is installed adjacent to section of metal pipe, separate wire from pipe
minimum of 6-inches and install wire in PVC conduit.
8) Encase wire not installed with PVC mainline pipe in electrical conduit.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS
A. Tools and Spare Parts:
IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS Effective Date Section - 02810
RADIANT PARK 3/12/2012 Page - 19
1) Prior to the Pre-Maintenance Review, supply to the Owner operating keys,
servicing tools, test equipment, and any other items indicated on the drawings.
2) Prior to Final Review, supply to the Owner the spare parts indicated in the
General Notes on the drawings.
B. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or
installation details to be part of the irrigation system, even though such items may
not have been referenced in these specifications.
3.11 Project Record (As-Built) Drawings
Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete
set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not
permanently cover work until as-built information is recorded.
A. Record pipe and wiring network alterations. Record work which is installed
differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference
dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each
irrigation system valve, each backflow prevention device, each controller or control
unit, each sleeve end, each stub-out for future pipe or wiring connections, and other
irrigation components enclosed within a valve box.
B. Prior to Final Review, obtain electronic copy of the drawings. Using AutoCAD,
duplicate information contained on the project record drawings maintained on site.
Label each sheet "Record Drawing". Completion of the Record Drawings will be a
prerequisite for the Final Review.
3.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Upon completion of Final Review, maintain irrigation system for a duration of 30
calendar days. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system
components so as to achieve the most desirable application of water.
B. Following completion of the Contractor's maintenance period, the Owner will be
responsible for maintaining the system in working order during the remainder of the
guarantee/warranty period, for performing necessary minor maintenance, for
trimming around sprinklers, for protecting against vandalism, and for preventing
damage during the landscape maintenance operation.
3.13 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess
materials, and rubbish.
End of Section
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02861 – PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 4
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02861 – PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Work Included
A. Playground equipment work as shown on the drawings for play equipment, and similar items.
1.02 Related Sections and Documents
A. Section 02791: Playground Safety Surfacing
B. Section 02750: Concrete Paving.
C. Drawings and general provisions of the Construction Contract, and Division-1 Specification sections
apply to work of this section.
1.03 Submittals
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each item of
equipment required or to be reinstalled.
1.04 Substitutes
A. Substitutes will not be accepted for specified playground equipment.
1.05 Quality Assurance
A. Safety Standards: Provide playground equipment complying with or exceeding requirements in the
following:
1. ASTM F 1487.
2. CPSC No. 325.
B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturers.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm whose playground equipment components have been certified by
IPEMA's third-party product certification service.
1. Provide playground equipment and play structure components bearing the IPEMA Certification
Seal.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ANSI Z34.1 for testing
indicated.
1.06 Deliverables
A. Toolkit: Contractor will provide the tool box repair kit for the playground equipment.
1.07 Guarantee
A. Contractor to guarantee equipment from settling, shifting, or structural failure for a period of two years
from the date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer’s or supplier’s warranties shall apply in
addition to contractor’s warranty.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02861 – PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
Page 2 of 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Materials
A. Playground Items: by Conlastic. Items below available through Recreation Plus, Ltd., contact Miriam
Hootstein, Phone 888-278-1455 or 303-278-1455.
1. “Nest (large)”, Item #CON30111 Conlastic Playpoints, as prepared by Recreation Plus. Color to
be Mellon Yellow, RAL 1028, Quantity: 1
2. “The Rodeo”, Item #CON40141, Conlastic Playpoints, as prepared by Recreation Plus. Quantity: 1
3. “Waterfall (large)”, Item#CON10813, Conlastic Playpoints, as prepared by Recreation Plus.
Quantity: 1
4. “Spaghettini”, Item#CON31313, Conlastic Playpoints, as prepared by Recreation Plus. Quantity: 1
B. Additional Playground Items available thru Recreation Plus, Ltd., contact Miriam Hootstein, Phone 888-
278-1455 or 303-278-1455.
1. “Pow’r Load’ R”, Item #2004A Natural Choice Playground, CO, as prepared by Recreation Plus.
Accessible Model Quantity: 1
2. “Pow’r Load’ R”, Item #2000 Natural Choice Playground, CO, as prepared by Recreation Plus.
Seated Model Quantity: 2
3. “KB Arch Swing with 2 Tot Swings, Item #200122459, by Little Tikes Commercial, as prepared
by Recreation Plus. Color to be determined, Quantity: 1
C. Playground Items by Berliner, Items below available through All Around Recreation, LLC., contact
Melissa Sphatt. Phone 720-270-5879. Email: melissa@allaroundrec.com
1. “Custom Combination Net Climber”, per drawing USP00241. Color to be determined, Quantity: 1.
2. “Speedway.”, Model # 97.110.004. Color to be determined, Quantity: 1
3. “Picadilly Circle”, Model #UDB260302, Color to be Traffic Green, RAL 6024, Quantity: 1
4. “Berliner Terrano Hammocks”, Model # 95.170.196,), Color to be determined, Quantity: 2 (2 nets
with 3 posts)
2.02 Concrete
A. Refer to sections 02750 and 03300 for concrete specifications which are applicable to concrete
required in this section. Install concrete footings per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.03 Paint
A. Use manufacturer’s standard finish system unless noted otherwise.
2.04 Drain Pipe
A. Drain pipe shall be Polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe, bell end, perforated to meet ASTM 2729.
B. Refer to Section 02507 for drain pipe specs.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02861 – PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
Page 3 of 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Inspection
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site
clearing, earthwork, site surface and subgrade drainage, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base. Verify compaction for footings and subgrades. Beginning of
installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading required for placing protective surfacing is
completed, unless otherwise permitted by Architect.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify locations of playground perimeter and pathways. Verify that playground layout and equipment
locations comply with requirements for each type and component of equipment.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated. Anchor playground equipment securely, positioned at locations and
elevations indicated. All Playground equipment to be installed by certified playground equipment
installer.
1. Maximum Equipment Height: Coordinate installed heights of equipment and components with
finished elevations of protective surfacing. Set equipment so fall heights and elevation
requirements for age group use and accessibility are within required limits. Verify that playground
equipment elevations comply with requirements for each type and component of equipment.
B. Post and Footing Excavation: Excavate holes for posts and footings as indicated in firm, undisturbed
or compacted subgrade soil.
C. Post Set with Concrete Footing: Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting,
forming, and placing concrete.
1. Set playground equipment posts in concrete footings, unless otherwise required by the
manufacturer. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are
set plumb or at the correct angle, alignment, height, and spacing.
a. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Hold posts in position
during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
2. Embedded Items: Use setting drawings and manufacturer's written instructions to ensure correct
installation of anchorages for equipment.
3. Concrete Footings: Smooth top, and shape to shed water.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Arrange for playground equipment manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect playground and
playground equipment and components during installation and at final completion and to certify
compliance with the following:
1. ASTM F 1487.
2. CPSC No. 325
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02861 – PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
Page 4 of 4
C. Items must be protected from staining, cracking, chipping, vandalism, and other drainage during
progress of the work and left in a first class condition upon completion.
D. Notify Owner’s Representative 48 hours in advance of date and time of final inspection.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02870 – SITE FURNISHINGS
Page 1 of 3
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02870 – SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
A. Bidding Documents and Information, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 – General
Requirements apply to the Work of this Section of the Specifications.
B. Work covered by this specification concerns labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation
of:
1. Site Benches
2. Bike Rack
3. Picnic Tables
4. Drinking Fountain
5. Trash/Recycling Cans
1.02 Related Sections
A. Section 02750 – Concrete Paving
B. Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete.
1.03 Submittals
A. Shop drawings, technical literature from manufacturer for each of the following:
1. Site Benches
2. Bike Rack
3. Picnic Tables
4. Drinking Fountain
5. Trash/Recycling Cans
1.04 Samples
A. Submit color swatches on finish metal for each of the above site furnishings:
1.05 Substitutions
A. No substitutions for specific materials will be accepted except under the following conditions.
Alternative bid proposals may be submitted for consideration by the Owner's Representative prior to
bid opening. Alternative proposals must be fully supported by necessary documentation showing
compatibility/comparability with specific materials. Substitutions must also comply with the General
Conditions.
1.06 Quality Assurance
A. Workmanship, fabrication and shop connections shall be in accordance with AWS and AISC
specifications.
B. Welding shall be done by welder(s) certified for AWS, D.1 structural welding requirements.
Water’s Way Neighborhood Park SECTION 02870 – SITE FURNISHINGS
Page 2 of 3
1.04 Product Delivery and Handling
A. Coordinate delivery requirements with manufacturer.
B. Products shall be delivered to the project site in good condition, and shall be contained in the
Manufacturer’s crate/packaging. The Contractor shall not accept delivery of damaged items. Products
shall free from defects and damage. Damaged products shall be replaced by the manufacturer at no
additional cost.
C. Comply with manufacturer’s requirements for unloading, lifting, and placement.
1.06 Warranty
A. Guarantee material used in this section against defects due to any cause for a period of two full years
from the date of Substantial Completion of work.
B. Replace materials when it is no longer in a satisfactory condition as determined by the City
Representative for the duration of the Warranty Period. Make replacements within fourteen days of
notification from the City Representative.
C. This guarantee will not be enforced should materials be subject to vandalism; improper maintenance
procedures carried out by the Owner involving resulting in damage, or other similar circumstances
beyond the control of the Contractor.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 Site Benches
A. Manufacturer: Landscape Forms
B. Quantity: three (3) total
C. Model: “Stay” (Backed)
D. Color: Silver
E. Mounting: Surface Mount
F. Factory Representative: Landscape Forms, Vivian Kovacs, 9272 Miles Drive, Lone Tree, CO 80124, 1-
303-799-0028, www.landscapeforms.com.
2.03 Bike Rack
A. Manufacturer: Landscape Forms
B. Quantity: One (1)
C. Model: “Bicilinea”, 10’
D. Frame Color: To be stainless steel.
E. Mounting: Surface Mount
F. Factory Representative: Landscape Forms, Vivian Kovacs, 9272 Miles Drive, Lone Tree, CO 80124, 1-
303-799-0028, www.landscapeforms.com.
2.04 Picnic Tables
A. Manufacturer: Landscape Forms
B. Quantity: Three (3)
C. Model: “Charlie”
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02870 – SITE FURNISHINGS
Page 3 of 3
D. Color: Black for straps, Silver for benches and table tops
E. Mounting: Surface Mount
F. Factory Representative: Landscape Forms, Vivian Kovacs, 9272 Miles Drive, Lone Tree, CO 80124, 1-
303-799-0028, www.landscapeforms.com.
2.08 Drinking Fountain
A. See Architectural Specification Section 15440
2.09 Trash/Recycling Cans
A. Manufacturer: Landscape Forms
B. Quantity: Two(2)
C. Model: “Select”, 50 gallon double unit, combination perforated door solid body with lock
D. Color: Silver with black trim
E. Mounting: Surface Mount
F. Factory Representative: Landscape Forms, Vivian Kovacs, 9272 Miles Drive, Lone Tree, CO 80124, 1-
303-799-0028, www.landscapeforms.com.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the plans and details and with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Site Furnishing shall be installed in the locations and quantities shown on the plan and details.
C. Where applicable, the Owner’s Representative shall approve the site furnishing locations prior to
fastening in place.
D. Use templates, provided by the manufacturer, to properly position mounting bolts.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 1 of 15
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
A. Bidding Documents and Information, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 – General
Requirements apply to the Work of this Section of the Specifications
B. Topsoil, soil preparation and soil amendments
C. Finish grading
D. Fertilizer
E. Organic Mulch
F. Weed Barrier
G. Landscape Boulders
H. Tree Stakes, Guys and Tree Wrap
I. Tree Relocation
J. Plant Materials
K. Sod
L. Seeding
1.02 Related Sections
A. Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment: Requirements applicable to unit prices for the work of
this Section.
B. Section 02810 - Irrigation
C. Section 02970 - Planting and Irrigation Maintenance
D. Section 02870 - Site Furnishings
1.03 Unit Price – Measurement and Payment
E. Organic Amendment: By percent complete. Includes supplying amendment. Provide Delivery
Tickets with job name and delivery date from supplier.
F. Soil Preparation: Includes distribution of soil amendment, grading, ripping, roto-tilling, and finish
grading. By the percent complete. Includes all soil preparation, placing and tilling amendments,
mulch bed subgrade establishment and finish grading.
G. Tree, shrub, and groundcover planting: Includes installation of weed barrier, mulches, planting of
trees, relocating trees, shrubs, groundcovers, perennials, and annuals. Includes fertilization and
imported topsoil/backfill. By the percent complete.
H. Sodding: Includes, installation, and fertilization. By the percent complete.
I. Seeding: Includes furnishing and installation of seed. By the percent complete.
J. Landscape Boulders: Includes furnishing and installation of boulders. By the percent complete.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 2 of 15
1.04 Protection
A. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final work.
B. Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, utilities, paving, and curbs.
1.05 Samples, Submittals and Quality Assurance
A. Organic Amendment: Submit sample in a plastic baggie. Product delivered to site shall match the
submitted sample.
B. Organic Amendment Analysis: Submit copies of amendment analysis from qualified soil testing
laboratory.
C. Organic Amendment: Submit organic amendment delivery receipts to owner’s representative for
review.
D. Soil Analysis: Submit copies of soil test results from CSU lab. Submit copies of CSU cover letter
with recommendations that are provided with soil test.
E. Fertilizer:
1. Submit copy of sod fertilizer composition to be used and supplier source.
2. Submit sample of Osmocote fertilizer in a plastic baggie.
F. Organic Mulch:
1. Wood Mulch: Material to be provided by City, delivery and installation by contractor
G. Weed barrier: Submit brand name and model number/name of proposed weed barrier to be used.
H. Tree Stakes, Guys, Webbing, Protective Caps, and Guying cord. Submit sample of each.
I. Sod: Submit written statement of company to be used for sod supply. Statement shall include phone
number and address of company. Submit sod certification for species.
J. Seed: Submit written statement on supplier’s letterhead of Manufacturer’s specifications, tests
(within 6 months of application), seed mixes, quantities, and seed tags from bags on day of seeding
operations.
1.06 Inspections
A. Site Inspection:
1. Contractor will inspect existing site conditions and note irregularities affecting the work of
this section. Verify that grading operations have been satisfactorily completed and that topsoil
of adequate quantity and quality has been placed in areas as specified. Verify that the areas to
be revegetated are protected from concentrated runoff and sediment from adjacent areas. Note
previous treatments to the areas such as temporary seeding or mulching and discuss with the
Owner’s Representative how these treatments will affect permanent revegetation. Report
irregularities affecting work of this section to the Owner’s Representative before initiating
work. When the Contractor begins work under this section, it implies acceptance of existing
conditions.
2. Contractor shall notify Owner’s Representative prior to start of work. Owner’s
Representative will be responsible to monitor the work.
B. Pre-planting Inspections:
1. Plant material shall be inspected by an Owner’s Representative before planting. Inspection of
materials may be sequenced by major planting areas to accommodate efficient planting
operations. Plants for inspection must be in a single location preferably on the project site.
Rejected materials must be removed from the site, replaced and re-inspected before planting.
If the supplier is a local nursery, tagged plants may be inspected at the nursery. Photographs
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 3 of 15
of the plant materials to be obtained from non-local sources may be submitted to the City’s
Owner’s Representative for preliminary inspection. This preliminary inspection is subject to
final approval of plants at the job site. The Owner reserves the right to reject plant
material at any stage of construction or guarantee period.
2. Soil amendments, backfill mixes and mulches will be inspected at the site by the Owner’s
Representative before they are used in planting operations.
3. Owner’s Representatives will inspect staked locations of trees before digging for those plants
occurs. Owner’s Representatives will inspect the location of shrubs in their containers at the
proposed locations before digging commences. Contact Owner’s Representative at least two
days in advance.
C. Substantial Completion Inspection:
1. As soon as all planting is completed, a review and preliminary inspection to determine the
condition of the vegetation will be held by the Owner’s Representatives upon request by the
Contractor.
2. The inspection will occur only after the following conditions have been met:
a. Landscape areas will be free of weeds and neatly cultivated;
b. Plant basins shall be in good repair;
c. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with heads properly adjusted;
d. Debris and litter shall be cleaned up and walkways and curbs shall be cleaned of soil and
debris left from planting operations.
3. If, after the inspection, the Owner’s Representative is of the opinion that the work has been
performed as per the Contract Documents, and that the vegetation is in satisfactory growing
condition, he will give the Contractor Written Notice of Acceptance and the Guarantee
Period shall begin.
4. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of the City Representative shall be
performed within the first ten (10) days of the guarantee period. Any work not performed
within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the guarantee period. Corrective
work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, and
shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
5. Final approval and Substantial Completion notice will be given when all deficiencies are
corrected.
D. End of Guarantee Period Inspection:
1. At the end of the second full growing season the Owner’s Representatives will inspect trees
for satisfactory condition. The inspection shall take place in September and the Owner’s
Representative shall contact the Contractor concerning replacements. Replacements may take
place the following spring if deemed proper or necessary.
2. The Contractor is responsible for removal of tree stakes, tree wrap, wire and webbing at the
end of the guarantee period.
1.07 Plant Material Guarantee/Warranty
A. Provide a two-year warranty (unless noted otherwise) from the date of Substantial Completion.
Substantial Completion is hereby defined as the point at which the Landscape Contractor is 100%
complete with installation and is ready for a Substantial Completion Review. The Owner's
representative will have sole authority to grant Substantial Completion. The minimum two-year
warranty includes all aspects of this section including installation, and materials.
B. Guarantee plant material used in this section against defects due to any cause for a period of two
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 4 of 15
full growing seasons from the date of acceptance of all work. This guarantee includes insect
infestation or infection by disease organisms.
C. Replace woody vegetation when it is no longer in a satisfactory condition as determined by the City
Representative for the duration of the Warranty Period. Make replacements within fourteen days of
notification from the City Representative. Replacement planting for trees shall be done in the spring
planting season, except as approved otherwise. If a tree is in marginal condition at the end of the
guarantee period it may be agreeable to both parties to wait until the end of the growing season
before deciding whether to replace that tree. Plant materials that are replaced during the warranty
period shall be replaced one time at the Contractor's expense. Cost of subsequent replacements, if
required, shall be negotiated with the Owner's Representative. Warranty replacement plant materials
planted within 6 months after Substantial completion shall have the same end of warranty as the
original installation. Plants replaced within 6 months of the end of the warranty shall be warranted
an additional 6 months after the date of completion of the initial warranty period.
D. This guarantee will not be enforced should woody vegetation die due to vandalism; improper
maintenance procedures carried out by the Owner involving over or under watering, lawn mower
damage, over-fertilization, fire, flood, or hail or other similar circumstances beyond the control of
the Contractor.
E. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to monitor ongoing maintenance of the project
during the warranty period. If the Landscape Contractor finds fault with ongoing maintenance
activities of the Maintenance Contractor, they shall be immediately brought to the attention of the
Owner's Representative. The warranty will in no way be invalidated because of activities of the
Maintenance Contractor unless approved by the Owner's Representative.
F. Replacements shall be of the same kind and size as originally specified and shall be installed as
described in the contract documents unless changes are approved by City Representatives. Repairs
and replacements shall be made at no expense to the Owner.
G. Replace seeded turf when it is no longer in a satisfactory condition as determined by the Owner’s
Representative for the duration of the guarantee period.
H. Areas seeded in the spring shall be inspected for required coverage the following fall no later than
October. Areas seeded in the fall will be inspected October of the following year.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 Organic Amendment
A. Organic Amendment shall be A-1 Organic, Colorado Compost (Windsor 686-5121), or equivalent
approved 7 days prior to bidding. Compost shall meet the following specifications: A totally organic
product (Mountain peat is not acceptable in the amendment) that has been aerobically and naturally
processed without the addition of coarse wood chips, in such a manner as to maintain a consistent
temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit or greater for a period of time sufficient to create the
following characteristics, measured by dry weight:
1. Maximum allowable organic matter: 60%
2. Organic matter to nitrogen ratio 25:1 to 30:1.
3. pH: 6.5 to 7.5
4. Salts: Less than 2.5 mmhos.
5. Less that 40% inorganic matter.
6. Less than 5% soil, dirt, or sand
7. Maximum particle size of ½” diameter
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 5 of 15
8. Eradication of all harmful weed seeds, pathogens, and bacteria.
9. A well decomposed earthy smell (non-offensive)
2.02 Topsoil
A. Strip and reuse existing topsoil for use as backfill mix. Submit a minimum of 1 sample of soil to the
Colorado State University Soil Testing laboratory for analysis and fertilizer recommendations.
2.03 Fertilizer:
A. Fertilizer for turf shall be commercial type, of uniform composition, free flowing, and conforming to
applicable state and federal laws. Fertilizer shall be formulated to meet the suggestions of the CSU
soil laboratory for turf fertilization.
B. Fertilizer for trees, shrubs, and perennials shall be Osmocote Sierrablen, 9 month slow release
fertilizer. Apply per manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Bone Meal. Commercially available brand. Submit proposed formulation and company name.
2.04 Mulch
A. City supplied recycled mulch shall be used in planting beds.
2.05 Weed Barrier
A. Weed barrier shall be - Mirafi 140, Typar 3341, or Polyspun 300 or approved equivalent.
2.06 Landscape Boulders
A. Boulders shall be provided of the type, sizes, and quantity that are indicated in the plans and details
or as selected by Owner.
2.07 Tree Stakes, Guys, and Tree Wrap
1. Tree Stakes - 8 Foot long, 2" diameter Lodgepole Pine or metal “T” post with rubber sleeve safety
caps. (Available from Direct Landscape Supply (303) 797-7733).
2. Guy Anchors - 24" long metal "T" posts or approved equivalent.
3. Guying and Staking Cord - 1/4" Diameter yellow nylon rope or 14AWG wire with 1/2" X 12"
PVC sleeves.
4. Webbing: 2"nylon webbing or rubberized cloth. No hose permitted.
5. Tree Wrap: 4" minimum width commercial tree wrap. Secure tree wrap with jute rope or a similar
biodegradable material.
2.08 Plant Materials
A. Plant List - A plant list is provided on the drawings. Quantities shown on the list are for information
only. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying quantity takeoffs as shown on the drawings. In
the event of a discrepancy between quantities shown on the plant list and quantities depicted on the
plans, the quantities depicted on the plans shall govern.
B. Plant Material Quality - Plants shall meet the American Association of Nurserymen (AAN)
standards for established plants and, the Landscape Contractors of Colorado standard specifications.
The most recent editions shall govern. Plants shall be well branched and well established in their
containers or balls. Plants that shown signs of being pot-bound with substantial roots circling the
perimeter of the container may be rejected. Trees shall be Colorado grown, or have been grown at a
source with a latitude equal to or north of Colorado and with a similar climate, or have been
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 6 of 15
acclimated in Colorado for at least 3 growing seasons. Shrubs and perennials shall be Colorado
grown or have been acclimated to the Colorado climate by being planted early enough in the
growing season to adapt to Colorado conditions and develop adequate rooting to survive winter.
Meeting these standards shall not relieve the contractor of required conditions of the
warranty/guaranty.
C. Diseases and injuries - Plants with disease or insects are not permitted. Plants with substantial
scarring of the trunk may be rejected. Plants with wounds or broken branches may be rejected
D. Plant Review - All plant material is subject to review by the Owner's Representative prior to
delivery to the site. Review at the nursery does not constitute final acceptance. All plant material is
subject to review at the site prior to planting, review during substantial completion, review at final
acceptance, review at any time during the warranty period, and review at the time of the warranty
completion. Dead, poor, or unhealthy specimens shall be replaced within 10 days of notification by
the Owner's Representative. The Owner's representative or his assigned representative shall be the
sole person responsible for deciding whether a plant is to be replaced.
E. Botanic and Common Names - Both names are given in the plant list and are in conformance with
standard horticultural practice. Plants are to be delivered to the site with tags bearing the botanic
name as indicated on the plant list.
F. Digging, wrapping and handling - Plants shall be dug and prepared for shipment in a manner that
will not cause damage to branches, shape, and future development after planting.
G. Balled and burlapped plants shall be nursery grown stock adequately balled with a firm rootball, and
in sizes and ratios conforming to the Colorado Nursery Act and in conformance with the AAN
standards. Balls shall be firmly wrapped in non treated burlap and bound and secured with wire,
nylon, or jute. Broken or heavily damaged balls will not be accepted. Chicken wire is not
acceptable.
H. Container grown plants shall have been nursery grown in containers and shall have sufficient roots
to hold the entire soil mass together when the container is removed.
I. Options: If all other requirements for size are met a container plant may be substituted for a balled
and burlapped plant. A spaded plant may be substituted for a balled and burlapped plant.
2.09 Plant Protection
A. Plants shall be protected at all times from drying out or other injury. Protect balls of plants from
drying out. Wrap trees with a protective cloth when transporting. Do not transport trees in a an
uncovered moving vehicle when the outside temperature is above 85 degrees Fahrenheit. Spray trees
with water prior to travel to any destination. Use caution in handling plants to prevent major damage
to roots/ trunk, or branches.
2.10 Buffalo Grass Sod
1. Sod shall be in healthy, green, growing condition free from insects or disease and in a healthy
growing form. Sod shall be a minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will support
its own weight without tearing when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners.
2. Sod shall be grown by a commercial sod company specializing in sod production and harvesting
with a minimum of 5 years experience.
2.11 Seed
A. General: delivered in original containers, unopened and bearing dealer’s warranty analysis.
Maximum crop and weed content shall be 0.10% each. Noxious weeds (Colorado lists A, B and C)
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 7 of 15
are not permitted. Seed mix shall be supplied on basis of pure live seed (P.L.S.) in pounds.
Formula for determining quantity of P. L.S. shall be:
Bulk Pounds of Seed Required =
PLS pounds specified / (%Purity* % Germination*)
*Percents expressed as decimal, eg. 10% = .10
B. Irrigated Turf Seeding:
6. Seed shall be of the latest crop available and shall meet Colorado Department of Agriculture Seed
Laws, Chapter 35, Article 27. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged shall not be
used. Seed shall be delivered in sealed bags showing weight, analysis, and vendor’s name.
7. Seed shall be Turf Fescue Seed Mix by Arkansas Valley Seed Solutions, 4625 Colorado
Boulevard, Denver CO 80216, (877) 957-3337, or approved equivalent. Seed shall be a mixture
that matches the following:
a. 25% Grande II
b. 25% SR8650
c. 25% Guardian 21
d. 25% Watchdog
8. Application rate: 9 lbs. PLS per 1,000 square feet (175 lbs per acre). PLS = Pure Live Seed
*Double this rate for broadcast seeding
C. Blue Gramma Seeding:
1. Seed shall be of the latest crop available and shall meet Colorado Department of Agriculture Seed
Laws, Chapter 35, Article 27. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged shall not be
used. Seed shall be delivered in sealed bags showing weight, analysis, and vendor’s name.
2. Seed shall be Blue Gramma by Arkansas Valley Seed Solutions, 4625 Colorado Boulevard,
Denver CO 80216, (877) 957-3337, or approved equivalent. Seed shall be a mixture that matches
the following:
a. 75% Hachita
b. 10% Alma
c. 10% Bad River
d. 5% Lovington
3. Application rate: 9 lbs. PLS per 1,000 square feet (175 lbs per acre). PLS = Pure Live Seed
*Double this rate for broadcast seeding
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 8 of 15
D. Dryland Turf Seeding:
1. Seed shall be of the latest crop available and shall meet Colorado Department of Agriculture Seed
Laws, Chapter 35, Article 27. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged shall not
be used. Seed shall be delivered in sealed bags showing weight, analysis, and vendor’s name.
2. Seed mix shall be the following:
Common Name and Variety Scientific Name
%
PLS/acre
Pounds
PLS/acre†
Grasses
Blue grama, Native Bouteloua gracilis 5 1.5
Sideoats grama, Vaughn Bouteloua curtipendula 10 3
Sideoats grama, Native Bouteloua curtipendula 5 1.5
Little bluetem, Pastura Schizachyrium scoparium 10 3
Western wheatgrass, Arriba Agropyron smithii 33.33 10
Western wheatgrass, Native Agropyron smithii 10 3
Buffalograss, Sharp’s improved Buchloe dactyloides 10 3
Sheeps’s Fescue Festuca ovina 16.67 5
Total
100 30
PLS = Pure Live Seed
*Double this rate for broadcast seeding
3. If the available seed as supplied does not meet the pure live seed (PLS) specification, the
Contractor shall compensate for the percentage of purity and germination by furnishing sufficient
additional seed to equal the specified pure live product. The formula for determining the quantity
of PLS shall be:
Pounds of Seed (bulk) x % purity x % germination = pounds of pure live seed (PLS)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough grading is within 1 tenth of a foot. Verify site is free from obstructions, objects, or
structures that are not a part of the final site construction. Verify major drainages are completed and
in place. Do not start work until the site is acceptable. Once landscape grading has commenced, the
Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for bringing all grading to final line and grade and
creating positive drainage.
B. Verify substrate base has been contoured.
3.02 CLEARING
A. Prior to any soil preparation, existing vegetation not to remain and which might interfere with the
specified soil preparation shall be mowed, grubbed, raked, and the debris removed from the site.
Prior to or during grading or tillage operations the ground surface shall be cleared of materials
which might hinder final operations.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 9 of 15
3.03 Soil Preparation and Finish Grading
A. Installation:
1. Install in locations and to depth shown on plans or as directed.
B. Ripping:
1. Protection- Field locate all buried cables, wires, electrical service, irrigation lines and any other
subsurface element that may be damaged during ripping operations. Stake and/or paint locations
with an easily visible system that will enable equipment operators to avoid damaging buried
utilities.
2. Prepare irrigated and non-irrigated seed, sod, shrub bed , and ground cover areas as follows:
a. Rip soil to a minimum depth of 12" in two directions using an agricultural ripper with tines
spaced no greater than 12". Areas adjacent to walks, buried obstructions, structures, curbs etc.
where the use of large mechanical equipment is difficult, shall be worked by hand.
b. If roots of trees are encountered, minimize ripping operations as needed to avoid cutting roots
or damaging plant material.
c. Apply Roundup to areas to be seeded a minimum of 2 weeks after topsoil has been
redistributed and before application of soil amendment. Apply Roundup only when weeds are
growing vigorously. Apply at manufacturers maximum recommended rate.
C. Spread the following amendments over the entire area to receive landscaping. Incorporate the
amendments into the top 6 inches of soil by rototilling:
Non Irrigated Seed
Areas
General Irrigated
Seed and Sod Areas
Soccer Field
Shrub Bed,
groundcover, and
perennial Area
Compost
Per recommendation
of soil lab report
Up to 6 CY/1,000SF.
Per recommendation
of soil lab report
6CY/1,000SF
Up to 6 CY/1,000SF
Per recommendation
of soil lab report
Fertilizer
Per recommendation
of soil lab report
Per recommendation
of soil lab report
Per recommendation
of soil lab report
Per recommendation
of soil lab report
Bone
Meal
NA
NA
NA
20lbs./100SF
D. Incorporate amendments by discing or rototilling into the top 6 inches of soil. Obtain a uniform
mixture. Work tight areas by hand.
E. Restore fine grade with float drag to remove irregularities resulting from tilling operations. Float
drag in two directions. Use only a hand rake in perennial and annual beds.
F. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Establish a finish grade that provides positive drainage as
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 10 of 15
Adjacent to curb s & other
Surfaces
Tolerances within
Open Areas
1. Seeded areas
1/2" below pavement and curbs
0" - 1"
2. Sodded areas
1" below curbs and walks
1" - 1/2"
3. Shrub bed areas
2" below curbs and walks
3"- 1"
4. Perennial Beds
4" below curbs and walks
2"
I. Do not plant until finish grade has been reviewed by the Owner's Representative. This review does
not reduce Contractor's responsibility to provide a finished product that drains.
3.04 Weed Barrier
A. Weed barrier shall be placed in shrub and perennial beds and where noted on the plans and details.
At edges of curbs, walls, structures, pavements, and headers, weed barrier shall be turned down into
grade and secured with 11 gauge, 12 inch long staples at 18" inches O.C.
B. Where individual weed barrier sheet abut they shall overlap a minimum of 4 inches and be secured
with 11 gauge, 12 inch long staples at 18" inches O.C. along the joint.
3.05 Mulching
A. Wood Mulch Beds.
1. Place Owner supplied mulch in shrub and perennial beds.
2. Place Owner supplied mulch to a 4 inch depth.
3. Gently brush mulch off of perennials once installed. Take care in placement not to damage newly
planted materials.
4. Prior to placing mulch and planting in mulch beds, apply Roundup herbicide to weeds and allow
beds to sit for 7 days. Apply Roundup at manufacturers recommended rate for perennials.
5. Place a 4" layer of Owner supplied mulch in tree rings not incorporated into shrub beds. Do not
install weed barrier in tree rings.
3.08 Tree and Shrub Planting
A. Tree Staking: Prior to planting, stake all proposed tree locations for review by the Owner's
Representative. Any plant material installed prior to this review is subject to removal or relocation
at the expense of the Contractor.
B. Planting Pits:
1. Dig planting pits twice the diameter of the rootball for container and balled and burlapped stock.
Establish bottom of the planting pit so that the top of rootballs will be slightly higher than
surrounding grade in order to allow for settlement. Roughen edges of planting pits to provide a
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 11 of 15
rough surface on edges. Retain excavated material next to planting pit for mixing organic
amendment and fertilizers.
2. For planting trees amend excavated planting pit soil with Bone Meal and organic amendment using
the following mix: Bone Meal at the Rate of 1 cup per tree. Organic amendment at the rate of 4
shovelfuls (Spade) per tree.
3. Thoroughly combine, organic amendment, and bone meal with imported topsoil. Mixture should
provide an evenly blended mixture for use as backfill.
C. Tree and Shrub Planting:
1. Shrub Planting:
a. Remove stock from containers including shrubs in peat pots. Do not break the rootballs. Do
not remove plant materials by pulling on the stems of the plants. Once removed, slice the
perimeter of the rootballs in several locations using a sharp instrument or butterfly pot-bound
plant materials prior to planting by sticking the shovel into the bottom of the rootball and
splaying the root mass. Roughen side of the plants to break up circular root growth.
b. Plant shrubs so that the plant, when in the ground, is approximately 2 inches above the
surrounding grade. Lightly compact import topsoil backfill in hole after planting and water
thoroughly.
c. Apply Osmocote fertilizer at the base of the plant after backfilling. Apply at manufacturer's
recommended rate. Water lightly to activate fertilizer.
2. Tree Planting
a. Establish planting pit as specified above.
b. If trees are containerized, remove trees from containers. If trees are balled and burlapped,
leave burlap firmly secured until after planting.
c. Handle trees carefully during planting. Avoid excessive shaking and rapid movements. Protect
tree trunks with a soft cloth or rubberized material when handling by the trunk.
d. Roughen the sides of planting pits.
e. Gently lower tree into planting pit and set plumb. Establish bottom of pit so that top of tree
rootball is approximately 2 inches above surrounding grade. Protect trunk and tree branches
while placing tree.
f. Untie and remove burlap from the top 1/3 of the rootball. Remove wire basket from the top
and 2/3 (or all) of all sides of the rootball.
g. Backfill tree planting pit using the mixture described in section 3.08B. Backfill one-half of pit
with backfill mixture and water in thoroughly before placing any more backfill.
h. Backfill the rest of the planting pit with backfill mixture and water in thoroughly. Lightly
compact backfill. Do not vigorously compact.
i. Apply slow release Osmocote fertilizer around the rootball diameter of the tree. Apply at
manufacturer's recommended rate.
j. Stake or guy all trees. Trees should be plumb. Stake deciduous trees up to 2" caliper. Guy
deciduous trees over 2" caliper. Guy all evergreen trees. Install 3 guys per tree at 1/3 points.
Drive Guys for evergreens and deciduous trees fully into the ground so no part of the guy is
above finish grade.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 12 of 15
k. Wrap deciduous trees with specified tree wrap. Wrap from bottom of trunk to the first major
lateral branch. Secure with jute or other biodegradable material. Install after November 15 and
no later than December 15. Remove wrap approximately March 15 and no later than April 15.
l. In non-irrigated grass areas (if any), build a soil watering ring six inches larger than the
diameter of the rootball and 4 inches high to form a basin to hold water (not required for
conifers). Fill basin with water, being careful not to break the rim of the ring.
m. If there are spade dug and planted trees they shall be deep watered with a watering needle
angling from the inside of the ball out toward the perimeter.
n. Trees in irrigated or non-irrigated grass areas to be mulched with Owner provided mulch per
details. Trees in shrub beds to be mulched with fibrous shredded cedar mulch.
3.09 Perennial, Groundcover and Annual Planting
A. Planting Beds Staking. Prior to planting any perennials or annuals, and prior to installing header or
header, stake, flag, or paint proposed beds scaling off the plans to determine bed configuration and
size. Contact the Owner's Representative for review of extent and configuration. Do not plant or install
header until review has been completed.
B. Establish fine grade and subgrade adjacent to headers as described above.
C. Prepare soil as per section 3.4 under soil preparation.
D. Layout all planting pots prior to planting. Space plants equally within beds to ensure a uniform
appearance. Remove all pots prior to planting including peat pots.
E. Plant all plant material so that the plants are flush with finish grade (top of mulch) when complete. This
will require slightly mounding each plant. Lightly compact soil around base of plant to ensure adequate
root/ soil contact. Do not vigorously compact.
F. Reestablish fine grade by hand raking or smoothing grade by hand prior to placing mulch.
G. Apply specified mulch taking care not to damage plants. Clear excess mulch from plant foliage.
H. Apply Osmocote slow release fertilizer at the manufacturer's recommended application rate. Water in
thoroughly. Keep plants moist but not saturated each day for 14 days after planting.
3.10 Sodding
A. After soil preparation, scarify the surface to a depth of 3/8 inch using a chain drag, chain link, or rake.
B. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid over a 24 hour period.
C. Do not lay sod on frozen ground.
D. Keep soil bed slightly moist during laying of sod.
E. Lay sod smoothly, edge to edge. Establish firm jointing between sod pieces with no visible soil
between. Stagger joints. Lay sod perpendicular to slopes.
F. Water sod lightly as sodding progresses to prevent drying. Roll sod diagonally with a light roller,
leveling irregularities and sealing joints. Do not roll with a saturated subgrade.
G. In order to facilitate drainage, place sod flush with pavement on the uphill side of pavement. Place sod
slightly below pavement on the downhill side of pavement.
H. Hold sod back from tree trunks in a radius of 18 inches taken from the tree trunk.
I. On sod placed on three to one slopes, secure sod with stakes. Drive stakes flush with grade.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 13 of 15
J. Place signs on all newly laid sod indicating "New Sod, Please stay off." Place signs at 50' to 100'
intervals as appropriate.
3.11 Irrigated and Non-Irrigated Seeding
A. Definitions.
1. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will,
Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
A. Seed areas indicated on drawings and areas disturbed by construction.
B. Re-work previously prepared areas that have become compacted or damaged by rains or traffic.
C. Apply by means of a Brillion mechanical power drawn drill seeder to a maximum depth of ¼ inch
followed by packer wheels or drag chains to provide smooth finish. Seed in two passes at right
angles to one another. Sow half of the seed in each pass. Provide markers or other means to assure
that the successive seeded strips will overlap or be separated by a space no greater than the space
between rows planted by the equipment being used.
D. Broadcast or hydro seed in areas that are inaccessible or too steep to drill or as indicated on plans.
Broadcast seed in two opposite directions. Rake in seed after broadcasting.
E. Restore fine grade after seeding as requested by the owner’s representative..
F. Cover seed to depth of 1/4 inch by raking or dragging.
G. Firm seeded areas with a roller weighing maximum of 100 lbs. per foot of width.
H. Seed application rates shall be as specified.
I. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, when ground is frozen or
untillable, or during windy periods.
J. Selection of the time of seeding shall be Contractor’s responsibility, consistent with germination and
erosion control requirements. Optimal seeding time is mid May through early September.
3.13 Landscape Boulders
A. Install boulders in the locations shown on the plans and details.
B. The contractor shall notify the owner’s representative 48 hours in advance of placing landscape
boulders. The owner’s representative and/or the landscape architect shall be present during the
placement of landscape boulders to approve their final placement.
3.14 Maintenance
A. General
1. Continuously maintain plantings included in the Contract from the beginning of Contract
work and during the progress of work, see Section 02970 Planting Maintenance.
2. The Owner will assume the responsibility of maintenance including watering, fertilizing,
weeding, etc. upon written acceptance of Substantial Completion from the Owner. The
Contractor shall periodically inspect the project during the two-year guarantee period and
immediately notify the Owner’s Representative of any irregularities or deficiencies which will
affect the guarantee.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 14 of 15
3. Round-Up herbicide may be used in mulched tree rings if grass seed has sprouted from
seeding operations.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for resetting of any plants to an upright position or to
proper grade and for the removal and replacement of any dead plant material.
B. Seed Establishment Period:
1. Water seeded areas as needed, minimum of two times per day, until grass is established.
Water so that no erosion or movement of seed or mulch occurs. Hand water as necessary to
prevent movement of seed.
2. Seed establishment period shall begin upon the notice of “Conditional Acceptance” given by
the Owner’s Representative in writing and continue through the first mowing or until the turf
is established.
3. Post “keep off the grass” signs until turf is established.
4. Maintain seeded areas until the grass is established and has been mowed at least once.
Maintenance shall include watering, fertilizing and herbicide weed control as necessary. Do
not apply herbicide before the first mowing; do not mow before the majority of seedlings have
three leaf blades.
5. Required coverage for grass seed areas shall be twenty five (25) viable live seedlings of the
species specified per square foot as measured from five (5) feet directly overhead for irrigated
turf. Required coverage for grass seed areas shall be ten (10) viable live seedlings of the
species specified per square foot as measured from five (5) feet directly overhead for non-
irrigated turf. Determination of required coverage will be based on a random sampling of the
entire project area, and shall consist of a minimum of five samples, each two square feet in
area. Bare spots are defined as those areas larger than one square foot which do not meet the
required coverage. After the inspection it is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform the
required maintenance within one week to insure a healthy established seeding condition.
6. The total area occupied by bare spots larger than 0.5 square feet must not exceed ten percent
(10%) of the total seeded area. Maximum single bare spot size is one square foot. All seeded
grass areas which do not meet the satisfactory stand of growth qualification shall be reseeded
and mulched.
7. Once the maintenance periods are completed and seed establishment is accepted, the City
Representative shall issue a written notice of Final Acceptance. The guarantee period extends
for two growing seasons after Final Acceptance.
3.16 Reseeding and Repair
A. Reseed areas where there is not a satisfactory stand of grass at the end of establishment period.
Scratch the surface to prepare seedbed and over-seed with drill seeder or hydromulch.
B. Reseed areas that have been damaged or disturbed by the Contractor's operation according to these
specifications.
C. After one growing season, there shall be no visual difference between seed and healthy sod in
irrigated areas.
3.17 Project Record (As-Built Drawing)
A. Maintain one complete set of contract documents on site. Keep documents current. Record
changes in location, quantity and species of plant material. Submit corrected drawings to the
Owner’s Representative prior to final inspection.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02950 – PLANTING, SOIL PREPARATION AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 15 of 15
3.18 Tree Stakes
C. Remove tree stakes, tree wrap, guy wire and webbing at the end of the two-season guarantee
period.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02970 - PLANTING MAINTENANCE
Page 1 of 2
DIVISION 2
SECTION 02970 – PLANTING MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
A. Furnish all supervision, labor, material equipment, and transportation, and perform operations in
connection with and reasonably incidental to maintaining planting, including winter watering,
called for under this contract. Maintain landscape materials in an attractive, healthy, operable
condition until seeded areas are established, landscape punch list items are complete, and
landscape work is accepted by Owner.
1.02 Quality Assurance
A. Work Force: Contractor’s representative shall be experienced in planting and irrigation
maintenance.
B. Maintenance Record: Submit to the Owner’s Representative a monthly record of maintenance
operations performed, including a record of all herbicides, insecticides, and disease control
chemicals used.
1.03 Environmental Conditions
A. The requirements for winter treatment of plants will be applicable when the maintenance period
extends past October 15.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 Materials
A. Replacement materials shall conform to the specifications for original installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Tree Care
A. Watering: When hand watering, use a water wand to break the water force. All trees and shrubs
shall be winter watered using a need type root feeder at least once per month between irrigation
system winterization and spring start-up. Irrigation system may be used for winter watering,
providing the system is re-winterized after each use.
B. Staking: Inspect stakes monthly to prevent girdling of trunks or branches, and to prevent rubbing
that causes bark wounds. Remove stakes and guys after one year, or as determined by Owner’s
Representative. Stakes will remain the Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the site.
C. Weed Control: Keep planting areas free of weeds. Use recommended legally approved
herbicides. Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots. Weed at least once per
week.
D. Insect and Disease Control: Maintain reasonable control with approved materials to prevent visual
and structural damage to the plants.
E. Wounds: All wounds or injuries should be traced out and disinfected with alcohol or equal. No
tree wound compounds or paints shall be applied.
F. Tree rings: Mulched tree rings shall be kept tidy and weed free.
Radiant Neighborhood Park SECTION 02970 - PLANTING MAINTENANCE
Page 2 of 2
G. Replacement of Plants: Remove dead and dying plants and replace with plants of an equal size,
condition, and variety or original planting plan. Replacements shall be made at no expense to
Owner.
H. Trash Removal: Remove trash, clipped grass, and blown dirt weekly from shrub beds, lawns,
walks, and tree basins. Keep the entire area within the limits of planting free from trash and dirt
(water or wind carried) at all times. Repair erosion damage for duration of maintenance period.
3.02 Turfgrass Care
A. Mowing: Mow only the turf areas as needed to maintain a height of 3 inches. Do not mow
wildflowers.
B. Edging: Trim edges at least twice monthly or as needed for neat appearance. Catch clippings and
removed from lawn areas. Vacuum or blow off walks.
C. Watering: Water turf areas at the frequency required to obtain proper turf establishment and to
maintain a lush, green lawn. Apply water in such a way to encourage deep root growth.
3.03 Low Maintenance Grasses
A. Mowing: Mow low maintenance grasses and wetlands grasses only after they have produced
mature seeds and/or gone dormant for the winter or for weed control.
B. Watering: Water as frequently as needed to obtain plant establishment (usually 6 to 8 weeks) and
thereafter as needed to avoid dieback. Apply water slowly and deeply to prevent runoff and
encourage deep root growth.
C. Weed Control: The Owner will determine the need for weed control.
END OF SECTION
03100 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for the complete construction of required
formwork for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Furnish and install anchor bolts, connectors, embedded plates, dovetail slots and anchors and
other accessories required to be cast into concrete work.
C. Furnish materials and equipment necessary to strip and remove formwork.
D. Install embedded items furnished by other Sections.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
4. Section 03250, Concrete Accessories.
5. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, "Specification
for Structural Concrete in Buildings", and ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete
Formwork", unless otherwise shown.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and engineering, construction and maintenance
of formwork, as well as its adequacy and safety.
C. Contractor shall design formwork for all loads and lateral pressures before and during
placement of concrete. Maintain position and shape of formwork at all times. Provide positive
means of adjustment for shores and forms which rest on compressible material.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation
instructions for all form-coating materials, manufactured form systems, form ties and
accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Fiber Forms: Store prefabricated fiber forms on site horizontally if length requires, supported
along the entire length of the form and elevated a minimum 4" off of ground, completely
covered with waterproof membrane including ends, and not stacked over 5'-0" high. If stored
03100 - 2
Radiant Park
vertically, the ends shall be covered with waterproof membrane and elevated a minimum 4" off
of ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE
A. Construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with prefabricated sections of metal-
framed/plywood-faced, metal or plastic panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight,
smooth, solid exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints. Do not use any forms having defects on contact surfaces.
1. Plywood forms will only be acceptable upon specific approval of the Architect, and
then only after visual inspection on the job site.
2. Plywood for facing of metal framed formwork shall be sufficiently thick to withstand
pressure of wet concrete without bow or deflection but shall not be less than 5/8"
thick, complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1, "B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete
Form, Class 1", or "B-B Exterior Type DFPA Plyform, Class 1".
B. Chamfer exposed external corners and edges, using chamfer strips accurately fabricated to
produce uniform smooth lines and tight-edge joints.
1. Chamfer Size(s): As indicated on the Drawings, or 3/4" minimum.
C. Refer to the Drawings for locations where special joints may be required.
D. Arrangement for sheets or liner sheets shall be orderly and symmetrical. Form ties shall be
spaced uniformly and aligned horizontally and vertically where locations are exposed to view in
the completed project.
2.02 FORMWORK FOR UNEXPOSED CONCRETE
A. Form concrete which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, boards, metal or
other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two (2) edges and one
(1) side for a tight fit.
B. Earthen or trenched forms shall not be used for vertical formwork.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Premolded Joint Fillers: In joints caulked or sealed with silicone or thiokol-based compound,
filler shall be non-bituminous, non-extruding, conforming to ASTM D1752. In all other joints,
filler shall be bituminous type conforming to ASTM D1751. Filler shall be 1/2" thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Non-Bituminous Filler: Sonoflex F by Sonneborne or equal.
B. Premolded Fiberboard Joint Fillers (Bituminous-Type): Preformed rigid cane fiberboard
material, impregnated with a durable asphaltic compound, conforming to AASHTO-M213.
Fillers shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Bituminous Filler: Flexcell by Celotex or approved equal.
C. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings or required by the work, provide minimum two
(2) layers 15-lb. non-bituminous felt bond breaker.
D. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non-
bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler
material.
E. Keyways: Provide nominal 1-1/2" deep keyways in all construction joints in walls, slabs and
joints between walls and slabs, unless otherwise shown.
F. Form Ties: Provide factory-fabricated break-back, removable, or snap-type form ties designed
to prevent spalling concrete surfaces on removal and which will leave no metal within 1/2" of
concrete surface. Use stainless steel, plastic-coated or hot-dipped galvanized at exposed con-
crete with cone-shaped tie heads, manufactured by Dayton, Gates, Heckman, Richmond or
approved equal.
G. Release Agent: Provide commercial formulated synthetic resin or oil-type form coating
compounds that will not bond with or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
03100 - 3
Radiant Park
subsequent finish treatment of surfaces, manufactured by Protex Pro-Coat, Euclid Eucoslip, J &
P Tex-Mastic or approved equal.
1. Contractor shall ensure that release agent is compatible with the finish requirements of
concrete to be exposed to view.
H. Embedded Plates, Sleeves and Anchor Bolts: Miscellaneous embedded items furnished by other
Sections. Refer to the appropriate Section(s) in these Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
B. Expansion, Construction and Other Joints: Properly lay out work and make necessary
preparations for construction of specified joints in cast-in-place concrete work.
1. Take special care to provide joints to allow for removal of sections of concrete
foundations, walls or flatwork for future construction where shown on the Drawings.
C. Ensure that connector plates, sleeves, dovetail anchor slots and other concrete accessories
embedded in concrete are properly located, aligned and secured prior to placing concrete.
3.02 FABRICATION
A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions as
shown on the Drawings and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level
and plumb work in finished structures. Use selected material to obtain the required finishes.
Concrete tolerances shall be as specified in Section 03300.
B. Construct formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place
concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete
placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup materials at joints as may be required to
prevent leakage. Ensure that formwork is properly braced and tied.
D. Provide openings in forms as required to accommodate other work. Accurately place and
securely support all items required to be built into the forms. Size and locations of openings,
recesses, chases and other built-in items shall be obtained from the Contractor or the trades
involved.
3.03 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Prior to each use, coat contact surfaces of forms with release agent prior to placement of
reinforcement, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow excess
coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against
which fresh concrete will be placed.
B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or
applied coverings which are affected by agent. Refer to Section 03300 for required concrete
finishes.
C. Ensure that all debris and frost has been removed from forms before placing concrete.
D. Clean, repair and recoat surfaces of forms that are to be reused. Split, frayed, delaminated or
otherwise damaged form facing materials will not be acceptable.
E. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,
remove fins and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure all joints to avoid offsets.
F. Place void form material to create a continuous void space under all grade beams; omit
directly above caissons or footings.
03100 - 4
Radiant Park
3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of grade beams, walls and similar
parts of work may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, providing concrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by removal operations and providing that curing and
protection operations are maintained. Refer to specific requirements for hot- and cold-
weather concreting in Section 03300.
B. Formwork for beam soffits, slabs and other parts that support the weight of concrete shall
remain in place at least 14 days and until concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength.
C. Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, cure exposed concrete as specified in
Section 03300.
D. Contractor shall verify required tolerances specified in Section 03300 immediately after
removal of forms.
E. Carefully remove fins or other minor surface defects from concrete to remain exposed in the
final construction, and leave surfaces prepared for sealers, paint, skim coats or other finishes.
Repair minor imperfections as specified in Section 03300.
END OF SECTION
03200 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish, bend and install all reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, ties and supports.
B. Furnish and install fiber reinforcing materials.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
4. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
5. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
6. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
7. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ACI 318, "ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
2. ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures".
3. ACI 301-72, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
4. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice".
5. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars".
6. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports".
7. AWS D12.1, "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and
Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction".
8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. General: Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with the latest edition of ACI
315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", and as
detailed on the Drawings.
C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Refer to Section 03300 for requirements.
D. Contractor shall obtain specific approval from the Architect/Engineer for the following items:
1. Relocation of bars to an extent that causes placement tolerances to be violated.
2. Bar chairs and spacers.
3. Splices not shown on the Drawings and mechanical connectors.
4. Bending of reinforcement embedded in hardened concrete.
E. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing steel larger than #3 bars, indicating
bending and cutting, preformed corners and intersections. Comply with ACI 315 showing bar
schedules, stirrup or tie spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement and assemblies as
required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. Include all special
reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Show all grade beam and
wall reinforcement on elevations drawn at a scale of not less than 1/4" = 1'-0".
1. Shop drawing submittal may be waived for reinforcing bars small enough to be field
bent, if requested by Contractor in writing and approved by Structural Engineer.
Structural Engineer must observe reinforcement prior to concrete placement.
03200 - 2
Radiant Park
B. Certificates: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical and
chemical tests of reinforcing steel and post-tensioning strands, if requested by the Structural
Engineer.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Notify the Owner's testing and inspection agency and Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours in
advance of closing of forms and/or placing concrete so that inspection of reinforcement in
place can be made. Do not cover any reinforcement with formwork or concrete until
reinforcement has been checked and approval given to proceed with formwork and/or
concreting operations.
B. Testing of reinforcing welds and splices will be as specified in Section 01410.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcing steel to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to bar
schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating. Store bars
off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings.
B. Deliver fiber reinforcing in manufacturer's original, sealed bags or containers. Store in dry
location, out of direct sunlight, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcement is in place, it
shall be protected by suitable covering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Bars: ASTM A615 or ASTM A706, 60 KSI, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as indicated on
the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond-reducing coatings.
B. Ties, Stirrups and Field Bent Bars: #3 or smaller, may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI (ASTM A706, 60
KSI).
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish, welded
intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall only be permitted
when approved by the Structural Engineer.
D. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold-drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82.
E. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, Fiber Mesh I, Fiber Mesh, Inc.,
Chattanooga, TN, or equal.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 75% minimum.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
03200 - 3
Radiant Park
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers,
chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and
supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of
reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-metallic devices are not
acceptable.
B. For concrete slab-on-grade use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted
base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete briquettes for support of reinforcement
for slabs-on-grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper height.
C. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs which are hot-dipped galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel
protected.
D. Wire Ties: Wire for tying shall be annealed, cold-drawn wire of at least 16-gage.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions with
fabrication tolerance complying with ACI 315. Cold bend bars in a manner which will not injure
material.
B. Straightening or rebending at site will not be permitted unless using ASTM A706, 60 KSI
reinforcing.
C. Where reinforcing bars are shown field welded to structural steel, bars shall be furnished by
rebar supplier and welded in place by structural steel erector. Reinforcing bars shown as shop
welded to a steel fabricated assembly shall be furnished and welded in place by the structural
steel fabricator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
3.02 SPLICES
A. Splices not shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Structural Engineer.
B. Lapped splices shall be securely wired together. Minimum laps shall be in accordance with
requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 301-72 and as shown on the Drawings. Offset vertical lap
splices at least one bar diameter.
C. Lapped splices for welded wire fabric shall be made so that overlap of outermost wires is not
less than two (2) full mesh spaces. Lace splices together with 16-gage wire.
3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL
A. Prior to placing into position, thoroughly clean reinforcement of mill and excessive rust, scale,
dust, mud, oil, ice and all other deleterious coating which may destroy or reduce bond.
B. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the "Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", ACI 315, ACI 301 and ACI 318.
C. Accurately place and support reinforcing steel with chairs, bar supports, spacers or hangers as
recommended by ACI detailing manual except in slab-on-grade work. Support bars in slabs-on-
grade and footings with approved accessories.
D. Place reinforcing bars to a tolerance of +/- 1/4", except that minimum spacings between bars
shall be to a tolerance of +/- 1/4". Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with
other reinforcing steel, conduit or embedded items. The Structural Engineer's approval must
03200 - 4
Radiant Park
be obtained prior to moving bars under these circumstances.
E. Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete.
F. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection shown on
the Drawings and specified. Do not place reinforcement with additional concrete cover unless
expressly approved by the Structural Engineer.
G. Install dowels before any concrete is placed. Locate column dowels accurately with aid of
template before concrete starts to set.
H. Steel reinforcing bars shall run continuous through cold joints.
3.04 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC
A. Welded wire fabric shall be placed 2" below slab surface or as indicated on the Drawings and
shall not be permitted to be placed on subgrade prior to concrete placement and hooked into
position. Reinforcement shall be fully supported at required elevation prior to concrete
placement. Use continuous chairs or support bars in structural slabs to maintain proper
locations as shown on the Drawings.
B. Install welded wire fabric using full sheets as large as possible. Lap adjoining pieces as
specified herein. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
3.05 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING
A. Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
1. 1-1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing materials shall be placed in quantities, sizes and spacing as shown on the Drawings
and/or as scheduled herein:
1. Reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric shall be installed where shown or scheduled on
the Drawings.
2. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed in all poured-in-place concrete flatwork, including
exterior concrete drives, apron pavements and curb and gutter sections, sidewalks,
etc., regardless of whether these already are reinforced with steel or wire materials.
3. Fiber reinforcing is not required in footings, foundation walls, grade beamss.
END OF SECTION
03300 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for footings, foundations, slabs-on-grade and any
other concrete work required but not itemized.
B. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for thrust restraint, encasement or other work.
C. Furnish and place granular sub-base under slabs-on-grade.
D. Furnish and install patterned and/or colored concrete slabs-on-grade, where specifically shown
on the Drawings, using forms specified in Section 03100.
E. Finishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of slabs.
F. Furnishing and placing joint materials.
G. Furnish and install cast-in concrete accessories, unless arranged for otherwise.
H. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
4. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
5. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
6. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement.
7. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
8. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
9. Section 07150, Dampproofing.
10. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders.
11. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
12. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation
13. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
14. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile.
15. Division 15, Mechanical.
16. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforcing Concrete".
4. ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete".
5. ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
6. ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting".
7. ASTM C94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete".
8. ASTM C33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates".
9. ASTM C150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement".
10. ASTM C260, "Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete".
11. ASTM C494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete".
12. ASTM C618, "Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete".
13. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
03300 - 2
Radiant Park
B. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall have in place a quality assurance
program to monitor the composition of the ready-mixed concrete provided for this project.
The quality assurance program shall detail:
1. Quality and types of aggregates, cement, mineral admixtures, chemical admixtures and
water.
2. Batching of these materials, including properties of the batched mix(es).
3. Delivery and placement requirements for the batched mix(es).
4. Regular contractor monitoring and testing of batched materials.
C. Contractor shall maintain a copy of ACI SP-15, "Field Reference Manual" in the field office at all
times.
D. Contractor shall employ an experienced and competent foreman for all concrete work. The
foreman shall be thoroughly familiar with all phases of concrete construction, including
formwork. Upon request submit records of qualifications and experience of the foreman to the
Architect.
E. All concrete work which does not conform to specified requirements, including strength,
tolerances and finishes, shall be corrected or removed and replaced as directed by the Archi-
tect/Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the
cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from correction to concrete work
and for any additional testing of work in place which may be required.
F. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design(s) in accordance with ACI 301 for approval by the
Architect/Engineer. Submit written design mix reports for each class of concrete at least
fifteen (15) days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report:
1. Project identification.
2. Concrete class.
3. Specified properties for concrete.
4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement.
5. Cement type and brand.
6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures.
7. Proportions of concrete mixed per cubic yard.
8. Required strength qualification data for each property specified for design mix in
accordance with ACI 301.
9. Unit weight.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, color additives and concrete
stains, sealers, hardener and finishing compounds.
C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Submit for review by the Architect/Engineer in
accordance with paragraph 1.02.B.
D. Certificates:
1. Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates.
2. Certification of appropriate use for hardening and sealing products, as specified in
paragraph 2.05.
E. Contractor shall retain for Architect/Engineer’s review, if requested, all delivery tickets for
each load delivered to the site. Tickets shall show truck number, concrete strength, cement
brand and type, cement content, water content (also expressed as water/cement ratio),
amount of course aggregate and fine aggregate, name and amount of admixture, number of
yards delivered, time of arrival at site and mixing time.
F. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
03300 - 3
Radiant Park
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
3. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for interior paints and coatings (if used) used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each
product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the
requirements of individual specification sections. Indicate VOC content in g/L
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1.04 INSPECTION
A. Provide free access for the Architect/Engineer/Inspection Agency to locations where concrete
materials are stored, proportioned or mixed. Do not place concrete until forming and
reinforcing for a given pour has been approved by the Architect/Engineer/Inspection Agency.
B. Provide minimum 24 hours advance notice for inspection to the Architect/Engineer/Inspection
Agency, but ensure that forming and reinforcing are substantially complete at the time of
notification.
1.05 TESTING
A. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing agent
approved by the Architect. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and
Supplementary Conditions.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with the appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed concrete mix design to the inspection and testing firm for review prior to
commencement of work.
D. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the
placement of concrete, as follows:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM
C94.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; one (1) test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, one (1) test each set of compressive test
specimens, or when the indication of change requires.
4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; one (1) set of four (4) standard cylinders for
each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed.
5. Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field-cured test
specimens as specified in ASTM C31.
E. Compressive Strength Tests:
1. ASTM C39: One (1) set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each mix design
placed in any one day, or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; one (1)
specimen tested at seven (7) days, two (2) specimens tested at 28 days, and one (1)
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
2. When the frequency of testing will provide less than three (3) strength tests for a given
mix design, conduct testing from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from
each batch if fewer than three (3) are used.
3. Testing for Drilled Pier Concrete: If more than one pier is cast from the same
truckload, take one (1) set per truckload. If more than one truckload is placed in a
pier, take one (1) set per pier.
4. Report test results in writing to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor
and ready-mix supplier on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive
strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of
concrete placement, the name of contractor, name of the concrete supplier and truck
number, name of the concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of
concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-
day tests and 28-day tests.
5. The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results
indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not been attained in
03300 - 4
Radiant Park
the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The testing agency shall conduct
tests to determine the strength and other characteristics of the in-place concrete by
compression tests on cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, by load testing
specified in ACI 318 or other acceptable non-destructive testing methods, as directed.
The Contractor shall pay for this additional testing.
F. Slump Test: One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
G. Air Entrainment Test: One (1) air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders
taken.
H. Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40° F and below, and when 80° F and above
and each time a set of compression test specimens are made.
1.06 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air
content outside the specified values.
B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed
the 28-day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete and no individual
strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the
concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject to
additional testing as herein specified or removal and replacement of the concrete which the
test represents.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination and
warehouse set.
B. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or
other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each aggregate stockpile.
C. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures
from freezing or harmful temperature ranges.
D. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the concrete is
completely placed.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow, unless
adequate protection is provided. Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or
damage the surface finish.
B. Cold Weather Concreting:
1. Refer to ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting".
2. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not be less than the following:
Minimum Concrete Temp. Degrees
Air Temp. F Section with Least Dimension
Degrees F Under 12" 12" and Over
30 to 45 60 50
0 to 30 65 55
Below 0 70 60
3. When placed, heated concrete shall not be warmer than 80° F.
4. Prior to placing concrete, all ice, snow, surface and subsurface frost shall be removed
and the temperature of the surfaces to be in contact with the new concrete shall be
raised above 35° F.
5. Protect the concrete from freezing during specified curing period.
6. Heated enclosures shall be strong and windproof to ensure adequate protection of
corners, edges and thin sections. Do not permit heating units to locally heat or dry the
03300 - 5
Radiant Park
concrete. Do not use combustion heaters during the first 24 hours, unless the concrete
is protected from exposure to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide.
C. Hot Weather Concreting:
1. Refer to ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
2. Take precautions when the ambient air temperature is 90° F or above. Temperature of
concrete when placed shall not exceed 85° F.
3. Cool forms and reinforcing to a maximum of 90° F by spraying with water prior to
placing concrete.
4. Do not use cement that has reached a temperature of 270° F or more.
5. Do not place concrete when the evaporation rate (actual or anticipated) equals or
exceeds 0.20 pounds per sq. ft. per hour.
6. Approved set-retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used with the Archi-
tect/Engineer's approval when ambient air temperature is 90° F or above to offset the
accelerating effects of high temperatures.
1.09 WARRANTIES
A. Provide Installer’s written warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and
subgrade failure for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. Owner’s Representative
shall determine needs for repairs or replacement, and his/her decision shall be final and
obligatory upon the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Use only one (1) brand of cement in any individual
structure.
B. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33.
C. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone
conforming to ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes.
D. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other
deleterious substances.
E. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer.
1. Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR, Sika AER,
Grace Darex AEA, Protex, or equal.
2. Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E.
3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D.
4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-Lith,
Grace WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete, or equal.
5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
6. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are specifically prohibited.
7. Color Additive: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of
color(s), Davis Color or equal. Provide colored concrete where shown or scheduled on
the Drawings.
8. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and paragraph 3.02 of this Section.
F. LEED Design Criteria: Refer to paragraph 3.02, Design Mixes, of this Section.
2.02 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Provide premixed, factory-packaged non-shrink, non-metallic grouting compounds specified in
Section 05120.
2.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENTS
A. Provide an aqueous phase, film forming, freeze-thaw resistant compound suitable for brush or
spray application, complying with Military Specification MIL-B-19235.
03300 - 6
Radiant Park
1. Chem Master Polyweld, Grace Daraweld-PBA, Larson Weldcrete, Euclid Eucoweld,
Protex Proweld-D, or equal.
B. Provide a two-component, all-purpose epoxy bonding agent for structural repair or corrections.
1. Protex Probond ET-150, Sika Colma-Dur, or equal.
2.04 SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING
A. General: A blend of white and gray Portland cement, dry polymers and aggregates providing a
smooth, textured patching material for thin, vertical surface repairs and coating applications.
Product shall not contain gypsum.
B. Compressive Strength: 800 psi at 1 day; 3,000 psi at 7 days; 4,000 psi at 28 days.
C. Adhesion: Polymer modified for increased adhesion.
D. Color: To match concrete.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. 3-2-1 by U. S. Spec, Denver, CO, (303) 778-7227.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and
performance are acceptable.
2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 03100.
B. Grade Beam Void Forms: Cardboard type, sizes as indicated on the Drawings, specified in
Section 03100.
C. Fiber Reinforcing: Polypropylene fiber reinforcing, specified in Section 03200.
2.06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Provide membrane-forming curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, specified
below. Where used, curing compound must be compatible with applied finishes.
2.07 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS
A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the schedule below for applications.
Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished
for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the following criteria:
1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified.
2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure.
3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use of space.
4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat or
other deleterious material.
B. Liquid Acrylic-Based Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing: Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborne or equal.
VOC not to exceed 350 g/L.
C. Non-Slip Abrasive Aggregate: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery as abrasive
aggregate for non-slip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum
oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rust-
proof and non-glazing and that is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials
(Sonneborne Frictex, Toch Brothers Toxgrip, Grace Durafax, Sonneborne Frictex 176), Grip-it.
D. Waterproofing Membrane: Refer to Section 07130.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434.
2. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL, and represented locally by The Rio Grande Co.,
Denver, CO, (303) 825-2211.
3. Zerovac Technology, LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 331-6181.
4. L. M. Scofield Company, Los Angeles, CA, (800) 800-9900, represented locally by
Conrep West, Englewood, CO, (303) 740-7787.
5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and
performance are acceptable, except as limited above.
03300 - 7
Radiant Park
2.08 UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS
A. Granular Sub-Base: 3/8" to 3/4" angular gravel or crushed rock, extent and thickness as shown
on the Drawings or as required by the Soils Report.
B. Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07190.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION
A. Notify any trades that may have items to be recessed or embedded in concrete, or that may
require openings in concrete, of placing schedule. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of
concrete and to avoid delays in the work. This work may include, but is not limited to:
1. Site furnishings.
2. Fencing.
3. Bicycle racks.
4. Concrete reinforcing specified in Section 03200.
5. Structural steel specified in Section 05120.
6. Metal stairs specified in Section 05510.
7. Pipe and tube railings specified in Section 05521.
8. Inlaid artwork, furnished by others.
9. Postal specialties specified in Section 10550.
10. Mechanical work specified in Division 15.
11. Electrical work specified in Division 16.
B. Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and standing
or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not deposit concrete
against frozen ground.
C. Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under
detrimental weather conditions.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing of any concrete. Do not deposit
any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has observed reinforcement and other work in
place and given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission to proceed shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper placement of reinforcement and
placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence to other requirements of the
Construction Documents.
E. Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this Section.
Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100.
F. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
G. Ensure that form inserts for all exposed edges and corners requiring chamfers are properly
placed, as specified in Section 03100.
H. Ensure that sleeves and other site items to be installed under concrete work are properly
located and installed, as specified in other Sections.
I. Smoothing and Resurfacing Coating: All surfaces in contact with coating shall be free of dirt,
oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants.
J. Acid Etching: Where concrete stains or other applications require acid etching of concrete
slabs-on-grade, the acid etching shall be scheduled and performed prior to installation of steel
stud framing, handrails, guardrails, or other metal materials, fixtures or equipment. Refer to
Section 03355.
K. Patterned Concrete Slab-on-Grade: Do not begin concrete work until all operations are
complete enough to allow placement to be carried on as a continuous operation for the entire
section that is to be placed.
03300 - 8
Radiant Park
3.02 DESIGN MIXES
A. Structural and Architectural Concrete: Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Structural
Drawings or specified herein for specific locations.
B. Site and Decorative Landscape Concrete: Concrete mixes shall be as itemized in Sections
02515, 02750 or specified herein for specific locations.
C. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall be
reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect/Engineer.
D. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all parts of the
work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without excessive segregation
and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by these Specifications and the
Contract Documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into
the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcements by the methods of placing and
consolidation employed on the work.
E. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each class of
concrete, at the Contractor's expense.
F. Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or proposed by
the Contractor to be used in concrete.
G. Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory-cured cylinders
will be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Refer to paragraph 1.05 for
testing requirements.
H. Color Additive(s): Include specified color additives as indicated on the Drawings or specified
herein.
I. Concrete Mixes:
1. Class I: For piers and caissons, 3,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type II cement/cubic
yard (minimum), maximum aggregate size 3/4", 3" to 5" slump. Air entrained 5% to 7%.
No fly ash substitution.
2. Class II: For foundation walls and grade beams, 3,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type
I cement/cubic yard (minimum), maximum aggregate size 3/4", 2" to 4" slump, air
entrained 5% to 7%.
3. Class III: For interior slabs, 4,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type I cement/cubic
yard (minimum), 3" to 4" slump, air entrained 4% to 6%, fibermesh.
4. Class IV: For exterior flatwork, 4,000 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacks of Type II Portland
cement/cubic yard, 3" to 4" slump, 5% to 7% air entrainment, fibermesh. Add selected
color additive where shown on the Drawings.
5. Class VII: For exterior curbs, gutters, concrete pavements and sitework: Conform to
City of Fort Collins engineering standards, unless otherwise directed by the Owner or
Engineer. Refer to Section 02515.
6. Except as excluded, fly ash may be substituted for Portland cement to a maximum of
15% by weight; 20% maximum where exposed in the final structure. If used, no further
cement reduction due to use of water-reducing agent will be allowed.
J. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content:
a. Recycled Aggregate: 50% minimum.
b. Fly Ash: As specified in subparagraph 3.02 H above or on the Structural
Drawings.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
4. Credit EQ 4.2, Low Emitting Materials: As specified in paragraph 2.07 above.
K. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements
specified for each concrete mix and used successfully on previous projects under conditions
similar to those anticipated on this project may be used, providing the following are submitted
for the Architect/Engineer's approval for each class of concrete:
1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results.
03300 - 9
Radiant Park
2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 7- and 28-day concrete strength test made
during the last six (6) months and the calculations of standard deviation for these tests.
3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last six (6)
months.
4. Mix submittals and required statistical strengths shall be in accordance with ACI 301.
L. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200.
3.03 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING
A. Ready-mixed batch plant equipment and facilities must comply with the requirements of ACI
614 and ASTM C94. The plant must have sufficient capacity to produce and deliver concrete of
specified qualities in quantities required to meet the construction schedule.
B. Site-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Measure, mix and deliver concrete in accordance
with ASTM C94, except as specified herein.
C. All concrete not placed within 90 minutes of initial contact of cement and water shall be
rejected.
D. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited. Obtain the Architect/
Engineer's approval for any addition of water. Do not exceed the maximum permissible
water/cement ratio or maximum slump under any circumstances.
3.04 PREPARATION OF INSERTS, EMBEDDED ITEMS AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other work to be
embedded in and passing through concrete work.
B. Coordinate work of other Sections and cooperate with trades involved in forming and setting
openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts.
C. Accurately position and securely fasten all anchor bolts, castings, steel shapes, conduit,
sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials to be embedded in the concrete. "Wet-
stabbing" of anchor bolts is not allowed.
D. Install conduits between reinforcing steel in walls, slabs or columns with reinforcing in both
faces and below reinforcing in slabs with only one (1) layer of reinforcing steel.
E. Embedments shall be clean when installed. Remove concrete spatter from all surfaces not in
contact with concrete.
3.05 PLACING UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS
A. Granular Sub-Base: Place a minimum of 4" (200mm) of gravel over compacted sub-base, level
and compact thoroughly, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. Vapor Barrier: Install underslab vapor barrier as specified in Section 07190.
3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Transit-mixed concrete shall be truck-mixed in accordance with "Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete", ASTM C94-67.
B. Concrete shall have a temperature of 70° F +/- 20° F at the time of placing, unless prior
permission has been granted in writing by the Architect/Engineer to exceed these tolerances.
C. Transport the concrete from mixer to final position as rapidly as practical without segregation,
contamination or loss of material. Maximum not-to-exceed from introduction of water to
placement of concrete is 90 minutes. Place concrete in forms with drop chutes, baffles or
other methods which will prevent segregation. Comply with the requirements of ACI 614.
1. Contractor shall assess the placement requirements of the site, construction staging
and other factors, and provide concrete pumping equipment for concrete placement as
may be necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Concrete foundation structures shall be placed on undisturbed, clean surfaces free from frost,
ice, mud, standing or running water.
E. Ensure that hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris have been removed from
the interior of the forms and all hardened concrete and foreign materials have been removed
from the inner surfaces of the mixing and conveying equipment. Forms shall be wetted, oiled
03300 - 10
Radiant Park
or treated with an approved form-coating material prior to placing concrete. Reinforcement
shall be cleaned, secured in position, inspected and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
starting the pouring of concrete.
F. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position so as to avoid
rehandling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement
with concrete in advance of pouring.
G. Place concrete in horizontal layers not more than 24" thick, unless otherwise required by
specific conditions of the work, i.e., round, tubular fiber-formed columns. Place successive
layers at such speed so that the preceding layer is still plastic.
H. Immediately after depositing, the concrete shall be compacted to force out all air pockets,
working the mixture into corners, around reinforcement and inserts to prevent the formation of
voids. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading or rodding. Do not over-vibrate or use
vibrators to transport concrete. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced
locations not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert
vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set.
1. Mechanical vibrators need not be used for thrust restraints.
2. When vibrating is not practical, concrete shall be consolidated and all faces well
spaced by continuous working with a suitable tool in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Complete finishing operation within 24 hours after stripping forms. Patch repairable defective
areas immediately after form removal.
B. Subgrade Surfaces: Rough form finish is acceptable on all subgrade surfaces, except as
indicated otherwise. Patch all defective areas.
C. Exposed Surfaces: Provide smooth rubbed finish on any formed surfaces exposed to view,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Foundation walls or grade beams with 12" or more of exposed vertical surface shall
receive rubbed finish.
2. Retaining walls and foundation walls at loading dock.
D. Strip forms while concrete is still green and steel trowel surfaces to a dense, hard finish with
corners, intersections and terminations chamfered 1/2" and smooth.
1. Repair and patch all tie holes and defects with mortar. Remove all fins and
projections.
2. Tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed
surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed and floated to a texture
consistent to that of formed surfaces. Final treatment of formed surfaces shall
continue uniformly across unformed surfaces.
3. Strike chamfered edges and corners of exposed concrete clean, straight and true to
line.
E. Honeycombing or spillage through forms shall be repaired or replaced as specified below in this
section.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS
A. Joint Materials: Refer to Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, and paragraph 2.05 of this
Section.
B. General: Locate and install construction joints which are not shown on the Drawings so as not
to impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In general, locate near the middle of
the span of slabs, beams and grade beams, unless a beam intersects a girder at this point.
Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for joint locations.
C. Pour floor slabs in pattern indicated on the Drawings. Form control joints and place expansion
joints as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case exceed the following requirements:
1. Control joints shall be spaced at 15'-0" maximum intervals each way so as not to
encompass an area to exceed 225 sq. ft., or other spacing and pattern(s) as shown on
the Drawings, or as required by the Soils Report.
2. Place control joints at internal corners, columns or other points of natural weakness.
03300 - 11
Radiant Park
3. Refer to Section 03365 for restrictions on joints in post-tensioned concrete slabs.
D. Before depositing new concrete, remove all laitance and loose aggregates immediately before
placing fresh concrete. Dampen but do not saturate the joint surface. At slabs and beams,
apply a neat cement grout.
E. Expansion or Isolation Joints: Where expansion joints are indicated on the Drawings, place
filler strips to within 1/2" of finished surface. Joint recess shall be formed with a separate
removable filler section to provide a clean, true recess to receive sealant as specified in
Section 07900.
F. Interior Construction and Control Joints: Keyed construction joints shall be formed with
prefabricated joint materials and shall adhere to the control joint pattern shown.
1. Refer to the Drawings for special control joint patterns.
G. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings, provide minimum two (2) layers 15# non-
bituminous felt bond breaker between interior or exterior slabs-on-grade and vertical wall
surfaces.
H. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non-
bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler
material.
I. Exterior Slab, Curb and Gutter Control Joints: Tool or saw joints to a depth of one-fourth (1/4)
the thickness of the slab, where indicated on the plans. Refer to Section 02515 for joint
spacing in concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk and exterior flatwork sections.
3.09 FINISHING FLATWORK
A. General: Verify all flatwork finishes with the Architect in the field prior to proceeding with
this work.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do
not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or
when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both.
Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible
to power units. Check and level surface plane to required tolerance. Cut down high spots and
fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface
to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view,
unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint
or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using
a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the
trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate the concrete surface by final hand-troweling
operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, with a surface plane
tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface
defects which would telegraph through applied floor coverings system.
D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: After completion of floated finish, draw a broom or a burlap belt
transversely across the surface perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use broom finish after
floating for surfaces to receive topping or cementitious finishes. Coordinate final texture with
the Architect prior to application.
E. Finishing Slabs at Floor Drains: Hold elevation of concrete slabs-on-grade around floor drains
level to within 16" around each drain location, then shape surface to elevation of drains as
shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for special sloped areas of concrete slabs-on-
grade to floor or trench drains.
F. Slab Finish Schedule: Refer to Part 4, Schedules, at the end of this Section.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain the following tolerances for all cast-in-place concrete work. Defective work shall be
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
1. Variation from Plumb:
a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum.
b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum.
03300 - 12
Radiant Park
2. Variation in Thickness: 1/4" to 1/2" standard, 5% for footings.
3. Variation in Grade:
a. 0-10': 1/4" standard, 1/8" for floor slabs.
b. 10-20': 3/8" standard, 1/4" for floor slabs.
c. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for floor slabs.
4. Variation in Plan:
a. 0-20': 1/2".
b. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, +1/2" for footings.
5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings.
6. Variation in Openings:
a. Location: 1/4".
B. Slab Tolerances:
1. Interior Floor Slabs: 1/8" in 10' maximum.
2. Exterior Sidewalks, Slabs and Ramps: 1/4" in 10' maximum.
3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of
time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.
B. Refer to Section 03100 for stripping and removal of formwork after curing.
C. Start curing immediately after finishing. Cure for at least seven (7) days, not necessarily
consecutive, during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50° F. Wood forms
shall be kept wet. If forms are removed during curing period, an approved curing method must
be started immediately.
D. Cure slabs by approved moisture-retaining coverings, lapped and sealed, and kept continuously
wet. Approved curing compounds may be used if compatible with specified finishes. Specific
approval is required from the Architect/Engineer. Curing compounds shall be applied in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from vandalism,
accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from subgrade settlement
or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to restrict traffic in the area of
fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete shall be repaired or replaced by
the Contractor at the Owner's discretion.
F. Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. Temperature of
concrete when placed shall be less than 90° F. When necessary to prevent premature drying,
arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet
covering of light color shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures
shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow.
G. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When
atmospheric temperature is 40° F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less than
50° F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for
heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and
moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat.
H. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall be as
uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one (1) hour or 50° F in any 24-hour period.
3.12 SEALING AND FINISH APPLICATIONS
A. General: Consult with the manufacturer's representative prior to application. Follow the
manufacturer's printed instructions for applying materials.
B. Schedule of Exterior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing,
sealing and hardening products for exterior concrete in accordance with the following
schedule:
1. Concrete Sidewalks, Slabs, Aprons and Curb and Gutter Sections: Damp cure and
Lapidolith, white pigment.
2. Exposed Surfaces of Retaining Walls: Kure-N-Seal.
3. Concrete not Scheduled for Other Finishes: Kure-N-Seal.
03300 - 13
Radiant Park
C. Schedule of Interior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing,
sealing and hardening products for interior floor slabs in accordance with the following
schedule. Refer to paragraph 2.06 for certification of appropriate use.
1. Slabs to Receive No Flooring: Kure-N-Seal.
D. Application Process: Apply curing, hardening and sealing products in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
E. Chemically-Reactive Stains or Integral Stained/Polished Concrete Flatwork: Refer to Section
03355 for application of specialty finish sealers, hardeners and other materials.
F. Apply materials only after concrete surfaces are completely cured and dry. Follow the
manufacturer's recommended application instructions, generally applying it in three (3) coats
with ample drying time between coats. Remove surplus hardener after final application has
dried.
3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE APPLICATIONS
A. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on the Drawings or required by the work. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment
to template at correct elevations. Comply with certified diagrams or templates of the
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. Items include but are not limited to:
1. Electrical transformers. Coordinate sizes of transformer bases and other equipment
with the governmental agency or utility having jurisdiction.
B. Site Concrete Work: Provide miscellaneous site cast-in-place concrete items as detailed on the
Drawings or specified herein, to include but not be limited to:
1. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Specified in Section 02515.
2. Concrete retaining walls and seating walls.
3. Base and/or pier foundations for site signage, fencing and gates, pipe bollards and
miscellaneous site furnishings.
3.14 APPLICATION OF SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING
A. General: Prepare surfaces to receive coating per manufacturer's requirements and
recommendations.
1. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants.
2. Remove unsound concrete to ensure a good bond.
3. Mechanically abrade smooth, dense surfaces to provide necessary bonding.
4. Moisten area prior to application.
5. Maintain contact areas between 40° F and 90° F prior to repair and during initial curing
period.
B. Mixing: Use a mechanical mixer with rotating blades on low rpm for 3-5 minutes to achieve
desired consistency.
C. Placing: Place material consistently without multiple layers, using a putty knife, trowel or
sponge float.
1. Apply in applications from feather edge to 1/8" thickness.
2. For areas greater than 1/8" thick, apply U. S. Spec Quickset 20 to within 1/16" of final
repair, then apply finish coat.
D. Finishing: Follow standard ACI curing practices.
3.15 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and elevation
as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other
defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except upon express
direction of the Architect.
C. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the
Owner's discretion.
03300 - 14
Radiant Park
3.16 PATCHING AND POINTING
A. Patch and point all vertical and horizontal formed concrete surfaces where exposed to view, as
defined herein.
B. Fill holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless
otherwise shown or directed, after such work is in place.
C. Mix, place and cure concrete to blend with in-place construction.
D. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Exposed cast-in-place concrete work shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the
Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1. Slab finishes.
2. Tolerances specified.
3. Wall and corner surfaces, including patching and pointing.
4. Joint materials and placement.
5. Surfaces of fiber formed architectural columns.
6. Specialty slab finishes, i.e. stamped pattern concrete, for accuracy of placement,
alignment and flushness of pattern, surfaces and finishes.
B. Power wash, or clean by other acceptable means, all dampproofing or waterproofing overspray
or other surface visual defect.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 EXTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES
A. Exterior Sidewalks and Ramps: Non-slip broom or sweat finish.
B. Exterior Pavilion Slabs: Non-slip broom or sweat finish.
C. Exterior Slabs and Aprons: Non-slip broom or sweat finish, unless scheduled for other finishes.
4.02 INTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES
A. Interior Floor Slabs: Troweled finish.
END OF SECTION
04100 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 04100
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install mortar, with integral water repellent, and grout materials for new concrete
block masonry units.
B. Furnish and install mortar, with integral water repellent, and grout materials for new stone or
cultured stone masonry units.
C. Furnish and install mortar, with integral water repellent, and grout materials for new
architectural precast concrete caps, copings and other units.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Caps and wall coping units.
4. Section 03480, Precast Concrete Accessories.
5. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
6. Section 04430, Simulated Stone Masonry.
7. Section 04520, Masonry Repair.
8. Section 05120, Structural Steel: Non-shrink structural grout.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM, American Society of Testing and Materials.
2. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
3. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
4. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
5. ASTM C270, Mortar Mix.
6. ASTM C476, Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry.
7. ASTM E514, Moisture Resistance in Masonry Assemblies.
8. PCA, current edition.
9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications for each type of mortar
specified, including certification that each type complies with the specifications.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of mortar colors for selection by the
Architect.
C. Sample Panel: Refer to Section 04210 and/or 04520 for sample panel requirements. Mortar
color shall be reviewed for approval by the Architect.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
04100 - 2
Radiant Park
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 TESTING
A. Inspection and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory, approved by
the Architect, conforming to ASTM E149, E514 and C270. Testing fees shall be paid as specified
in the General and Supplementary Conditions. Test samples shall be taken at random to
provide sampling over the course of work. Materials not conforming to these specifications
shall be removed from the job and replaced.
1. Refer to Section 04210, 04220 and/or 04400 for testing requirements.
B. Mortar Analysis: Contractor shall obtain an independent mortar analysis of the existing mortar
to determine the composition and proportions of materials in the mortar. Mortar shall be
sampled in a minimum of three (3) random locations throughout the existing building for
verification and averaging of these results. Submit the results of the mortar analysis in written
form to the Architect as specified above.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70° F and 100° F.
B. Contractor shall use only one (1) type mortar to ensure uniform color. Masonry cement is not
permitted.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, natural.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for new construction.
1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: ASTM C207, Type N, or as required by mortar
analysis.
C. Aggregate Sand: ASTM C144.
1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Select source to match existing mortar to the
extent possible.
D. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, less than 3/8".
E. Water: ASTM C270, clean and suitable for domestic consumption.
F. Admixtures: Pozzolan with approval; calcium chloride not permitted.
G. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric-based water repellent admixture, conforming to
ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok for Mortar by ACM Chemistries, Inc.,
Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal.
1. Integral water repellent shall be used in all concrete unit masonry construction.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar Mixes for Structural Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S mortar with hydrated
lime for all new masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 28 days,
or as indicated on the Structural Drawings:
1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1.
2. 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime.
3. 2-1/4 to 3-1/2 parts damp, loose sand.
4. Integral water repellent.
5. Mortar coloring.
B. Mortar Mixes for Brick, Concrete Unit or Stone Masonry Veneer: ASTM C270, Type N mortar
with hydrated lime for all new veneer masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of
750 psi at 28 days, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings:
C. Masonry Grout Mix: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days:
1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1.
04100 - 3
Radiant Park
2. 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose sand.
3. 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate.
4. Pozzolan as per manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Air entrainment shall be not more than 5% by volume.
D. Mixtures may change as per manufacturer's recommendations to meet requirements.
E. Non-Shrink Structural Grout: Refer to Section 05120.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in
compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Masonry installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed
and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the masonry installer.
B. Simulated Stone Masonry: Masonry installer shall verify the mix design requirements for the
mortar with the simulated stone masonry manufacturer for compatibility of materials.
C. Clean existing precast concrete wall cap and coping units prior to resetting.
3.02 JOINT PREPARATION
A. Existing mortar shall be removed using hand tools only.
3.03 BATCH CONTROL
A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required proportions for
mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained.
B. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of five (5) minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Do not
use mortar which has begun to set or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing.
Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore workability.
1. Ensure addition of integral water repellent for all exterior masonry construction,
proportioned as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80° F, and 2-1/2 hours at
temperatures under 50° F.
3.04 JOINTS
A. General: Lay coursed modular units with 3/8" joints, unless otherwise indicated, except for
minor variations required to maintain bond alignment.
B. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Lay units with "buttered" joints, thickness to match
existing, unless otherwise indicated to maintain bond alignment with existing brick masonry
work.
C. Bond Pattern and Joint Type: Refer to Section 04210 and/or 04220.
D. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown.
E. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work.
F. Point out or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work.
G. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces.
Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.
04100 - 4
Radiant Park
3.05 INSTALLATION OF LOW-VISCOSITY GROUT
A. General: Mix and install low-viscosity, flowable grout materials in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
END OF SECTION
04220 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry, with integral water repellent, including units and
special shapes, mortar, ties, anchors and accessories.
B. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry as structural back-up material in composite wall
construction, including units, mortar, ties, anchors and accessories.
C. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry horizontal joint and vertical reinforcing.
D. Furnish and install flexible masonry flashings, cavity filter fabric, cavity filler, and create
weepholes in veneer and/or composite wall construction.
E. Install all bolts, nailing blocks, inserts, door frames, steel lintels, vents, conduits and other
related work furnished by others to be built into concrete unit masonry.
F. Furnish and install masonry grout for grouted cells of concrete unit masonry.
G. Furnish test specimens and samples of materials to be built into work.
H. Install composite wall and foam-in masonry cell insulation materials, furnished by others.
I. Clean new and/or existing concrete unit masonry and remove surplus material and waste.
J. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete.
4. Section 04100, Mortar.
5. Section 04430, Simulated Stone Masonry.
6. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
7. Section 05400, Light-Gage Metal Structural Framing.
8. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
9. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
10. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
11. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
12. Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. ASTM C90, Standard Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
2. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
3. ASTM E514, Moisture Resistance in Masonry Assemblies.
4. ANSI A-41.1, Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
5. ACI 530.1, Standard Specification for Tolerances.
6. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) "Specification for the Design and
Construction of Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry".
7. Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute.
8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 TESTING
A. Test reports for each type of concrete masonry unit shall be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for approval. Testing is to be performed by an independent testing
laboratory, in accordance with ASTM C140-63T and E514. Reports shall include the following:
04220 - 2
Radiant Park
1. Compressive strength.
2. Water absorption.
3. Complete identification of units, including size, grade and type.
B. If results of test and/or inspections do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents
or are otherwise unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall proceed as directed by the
Architect/Engineer. Additional costs resulting because of retesting, load testing, removal and
replacement of masonry, damage to the work of other trades shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. Structural Engineer shall have the right to order tests of any material entering into the masonry
work or any other tests deemed necessary to determine whether materials and methods in use
are such as to produce work of necessary quality, to order test under load of any portion of
completed structure when conditions have been such as to leave doubt as to adequacy of the
structure to serve purposes for which it is intended and to order change in proportions or
material at Contractor's expense, if work of required quality cannot be obtained with materials
and/or proportions furnished by the Contractor.
D. Materials or proportions of materials entering into masonry walls shall not be changed, unless
approved by the Structural Engineer. Materials from any new source or changes in proportions
shall be subject to all required tests, which shall be made at the Contractor's expense.
E. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Cooperate and provide every assistance to facilitate inspection and testing.
2. Furnish mix designs for mortar and grout prior to commencement of work, submit to
the Architect mix designs and test results for each type of grout, all with materials and
in proportions proposed to be used in the actual construction. No work shall commence
until the mix designs have been reviewed and approved by the Structural Engineer.
3. Furnish materials and labor required to make and handle test specimens at the project
site under proposed job conditions.
4. Furnish temporary facilities for field-cured specimens.
5. Advise testing agency sufficiently in advance of operation to allow for completion of
quality tests.
1.04 CERTIFICATION
A. Prior to delivery, furnish Architect with certificates, letters or test reports attesting
compliance with the applicable specifications for the following:
1. Masonry units.
2. Mortar and grout materials.
3. Reinforcing steel.
B. Prior to installation, provide Architect with certificates or other documentation attesting to
date of block casting.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of each specified masonry unit for approval before delivery to the
site, unless only standard, plain concrete unit masonry is used. Samples shall include shapes,
sizes and kinds in sufficient number to show full range of color and texture of each type of
masonry unit specified. Final approval shall be by the Architect. One (1) color and size for
each different type of unit specified shall be used throughout the project.
B. Sample Panel: Erect minimum 4'-0" x 4'-0" sample panel consisting of approved concrete unit
masonry that satisfactorily shows proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and
workmanship.
1. Contractor shall not continue work until Architect and Owner's representative have
accepted sample panel.
2. Sample panel shall remain on site until work of this Section is complete and will be
used as standard of comparison for balance of work.
C. Certificates: Submit certificates with test data or other supporting documentation attesting to
test results and date of block casting, as specified above.
D. Masonry Wall Reinforcing Drawings: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing
bars. Comply with ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement”. Show
elevations of reinforced walls including: bar sizes, location and quantities of reinforcing steel,
04220 - 3
Radiant Park
location and arrangement of supporting and spacing devices, bending and cutting schedules,
size and location of all openings, pockets, embedments and anchor bolts, top and bottom
elevations of walls and bearing elevations of all elements supported, all masonry control joints
and all other framing and/or special conditions affecting the work.
E. Masonry Preconstruction Prism Testing Results:
1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per ASTM C1314.
2. Current Prism Test: Prisms shall be ungrouted with only face shell bedding and
capping.
3. Include mortar and grout proportions used in test specimens.
4. One set of five (5) prisms of each type of unit and each type of masonry assemblage
shall be built and tested using the materials and proportions specified for the project.
The average of the prisms shall exceed the specified 28-day strength (f’m). As an
alternate, a prism test record consisting of at least 30 prism tests may be submitted to
substantiate f’m. These prisms shall have been constructed under the observations of
and have been constructed with similar materials to these specified for this Project.
The average compressive strength of these tests shall exceed 1.33 f’m.
F. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.06 TESTING OF MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Mortar: Make one (1) set of three (3) 2" x 4" cylinders for each type of mortar each day that
mortar is laid. Break one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days.
1. Spread mortar on masonry units between 1/2" and 3/4" thick and allow to stand one (1)
minute.
2. Remove mortar and place it in a 2" x 4" cylinder in two (2) layers, compressing mortar
into cylinder using a flat-end stick or fingers.
3. Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep
them damp until taken to laboratory.
4. Contractor’s Option: Contractor may substitute a prism test of in-place concrete unit
masonry construction, in lieu of specified mortar testing, upon prior approval of the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
B. Grout: Make one (1) set of three (3) 3" x 3" x 6" high specimens for each type of grout and type
of wall where used each day grout is poured. Break one (1) specimen at seven (7) days and two
(2) at 28 days.
1. On a flat non-absorbent base, form a space 3" x 3" x 6" high, using masonry units having
same moisture condition as those being laid.
2. Line the space with permeable paper or porous separator so that water may pass
through the liner into masonry units.
3. Thoroughly mix the grout to obtain fully representative mix and place into molds in two
(2) layers. Puddle each layer with 1" x 2" stick to eliminate air bubbles.
4. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the
laboratory.
C. After 48-hour set, remove molds, cap the specimens and place them in fog room until tested in
damp condition, in accordance with ASTM C31.
D. Test in accordance with ASTM C39. From each set of cylinders, break one (1) at seven (7) days
and two (2) at 28 days.
E. Reports shall include location and description of wall, dates, weather conditions, temperature
of mortar and grout, description of mortar and grout mixes, description of masonry prisms,
breaking stresses and nature of break.
04220 - 4
Radiant Park
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep masonry units completely covered
and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle masonry units carefully to avoid chipping, breakage,
contact with soil or contaminating materials. Protect steel materials from moisture and keep
free from rust or scale. Store mortar materials in dry place. Damaged materials shall not be
used.
B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction
activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work.
C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50° F prior to, during and 48
hours after completion of masonry work.
B. During freezing or near-freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a
minimum temperature of 50° F and to protect masonry work completed or in progress.
C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather when work is not in progress by covering
top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2'
down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.
D. Walls which may be exposed to high winds during erection shall be adequately braced until
permanent support is provided at floor or roof level immediately above the story under
construction.
E. Cold Weather Masonry Installation:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
2. Do not use antifreeze compounds, calcium chloride or substances containing calcium
chloride in mortar or grout.
3. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or
freezing.
4. Protect masonry being placed from wind with enclosures or shields when air
temperature is below 32° F.
5. Do not heat water above 106° F.
6. When mortar or grout materials have been combined, temperature of the mixture shall
not be less than 50° F or more than 100° F.
7. Masonry materials shall be preconditioned and completed masonry protected as
follows:
a. When air temperature is below 40° F and above 32° F, heat mixing water.
Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by means of waterproof covers.
b. When air temperature is below 32° F and above 20° F, heat both sand and
mixing water. Maintain a temperature of at least 40° F on both sides of walls
by means of suitable covers or enclosures for 24 hours.
c. When air temperature is 20° F and below, heat sand, mixing water and block
and provide heated enclosures. A temperature of at least 40° F shall be
maintained within enclosures for 48 hours.
d. Periods required for protection and maintenance of specified temperatures
may be reduced to 1/2 of those specified herein before if Type III Portland
cement is used with the Engineer's approval.
F. Hot Weather Masonry Installation:
1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog spray
of mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent premature
drying of mortar.
04220 - 5
Radiant Park
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Plain Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C90, Grade N, minimum 1,900 psi light-weight, load-
bearing units.
1. Size: Nominal 8" high x 16" long face dimension x 8" deep units, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Color: Natural.
3. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric-based water repellent admixture,
conforming to ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok by ACM
Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal.
a. None required for plain concrete unit masonry used as structural back-up
material in composite wall construction, or for interior walls.
b. None required for plain concrete unit masonry where covered with stucco
and/or plaster on both faces.
4. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks, chips or
deleterious matter.
5. Special shapes as shown on the Drawings or as required:
a. Knock-out bond beam units at bearing and top course of walls and in other
locations shown on the Drawings.
b. Bullnose external corners where shown on the Drawings.
B. Bond Beam Units: All bond beam units shall have knockout webs and open bottoms, except at
masonry lintels over openings. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01.
C. Lintel Units: All lintel units shall have solid bottoms, cast as U-shaped units in lengths as
required for project conditions. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01.
D. Tolerances: No overall dimension of width, height or length shall vary by more than 1/8" from
the specified standard dimension.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Robinson Block Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 390-5477, (800) 284-8037.
2. Basalite Concrete Products LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 292-2345.
3. Powers Masonry Supply, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484-1292.
4. Trenwyth by Superlite Block, Phoenix, AZ, (800) 331-9823.
5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, appearance, quality, performance
and range of selection, including matching the selected product(s) specified above in
the sole opinion of the Architect, are acceptable.
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHORS AND TIES
A. General: Corrosion-resistant metal meeting or exceeding applicable standards ASTM A153 and
ASTM A116.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03200.
C. Veneer and Horizontal Reinforcing Types:
1. Wire Mesh: Minimum 30-gage plain wire. Mesh shall be 1/2" width, 1" (25mm) less
than width of masonry.
2. Truss- or Ladder-Type for Single Wythe Masonry: Prefabricated welded wire units, 6"
wide x not less than 10'-0" long for 8" deep structural units, with matching corner and
tee units. Wire shall be 9-gage, with single pair of deformed side rods and continuous
plain diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.
04220 - 6
Radiant Park
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL, and distributed locally at Denver, CO, (303) 321-
1836.
2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL, (800) 621-4140.
3. Manufacturers providing products of same performance and function are acceptable.
2.03 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Flexible Masonry Flashings: Non-reinforced homogenous, waterproof elastomeric sheeting, 20
mil minimum thickness.
1. Tensile Strength: 2200 psi minimum, ASTM D412.
2. Elongation: 250% minimum, ASTM D412.
3. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbs. minimum.
4. Flashing shall retain flexibility to a temperature of -20° F minimum.
5. Materials and adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular
application.
6. Approved Manufacturer: Vi-Seal Plastic Flashing by AFCO Products, Inc., Somerville,
MA, (800) 397-2687, or approved equal.
B. Control Joints: Non-asphaltic-type foam backer rod by Celotex or equal. Thicknesses as shown
on the Drawings.
2.04 INSULATION
A. Composite Wall Insulation: Refer to Section 07210, Building Insulation.
B. Foam Masonry Cell Insulation: Refer to Section 07210, Building Insulation.
2.05 SEALER
A. Integral Water Repellent: Specified in paragraph 2.01 above.
B. Graffiti-Resistant Sealer: Refer to Section 07180, Water Repellent Sealers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION, COORDINATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized.
B. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place concrete unit masonry
in accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings.
C. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of
uniform thickness.
D. Chases and recesses shall be built in and not cut in. Provide not less than 16" of masonry
between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.
E. Unfinished masonry walls shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Do not tooth.
F. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the work of other
Sections, shall be done by masonry mechanics with masonry saws.
G. Bearing for horizontal load-carrying members shall be of grouted masonry as shown on the
Drawings. If no detail is shown, bearing under beams shall consist of grouted masonry at least
8" x 16" in plan and 16" deep.
04220 - 7
Radiant Park
H. Mask or otherwise protect doors and frames, louvers, mechanical and electrical equipment and
other miscellaneous accessories not scheduled to receive masonry sealers prior to application
of spray- or brush-applied sealers.
3.02 CURING OF MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Concrete masonry units shall be cured for minimum of 28 days from the date of
casting before being delivered to the site and installed in masonry walls. Consult with Rocky
Mountain Masonry Institute as necessary.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. General: Install masonry flashings in locations specified herein as shown on the Drawings.
Place flashings, filter fabric and other cavity drainage materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and as detailed on the Drawings.
B. Cavity Filter Fabric and Drainage Course: Drape cavity filter fabric above weep level in
accordance with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Place cavity filler in
filter fabric.
C. Wall, Parapet and Column Caps: Install masonry flashings over top of all brick walls, full depth
or dimension of wall or cap, directly below precast concrete cap units, concrete unit masonry
wall caps or stone cap units.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. Refer to Section 04100, Mortar, for installation and workmanship requirements for mortar and
grout mixes.
B. Ensure that concrete masonry units have properly cured prior to installation, as specified in
3.02 above.
C. Lay, level and align corner units first. Lay concrete unit masonry in running (stack) bond,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Course one (1) block unit and
mortar joint to equal 8" vertically. Lay external and internal courses as shown on the
Drawings.
D. Lay first course of concrete unit masonry in full bed of mortar, except at locations of filled
cores. Lay subsequent courses in face-shell mortar bedding properly jointed with other work.
Fully mortar webs around each core to be grouted. Fully bond external and internal corners
and intersections.
E. Align cells to be filled with grout to provide continuous, unobstructed vertical space.
F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper power tools to provide straight, true and
unchipped edges.
1. Cut masonry units forming gable ends accurately to form straight and uniform gable
lines.
G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be
made, remove mortar and replace.
H. Where knock-out bond beams are specified, place wire mesh in joints below bond beam to stop
flow of grout, except at reinforced vertical cells.
I. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking block corners. Clean
excess mortar from cores to be grouted.
J. Tolerances: Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit: 1/8".
K. Tooling and Joints: Refer to paragraph 3.06.
3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS
A. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to face shell of unit and shall be shoved
tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. Do not slush head joints.
B. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: Lay with full mortar coverage over horizontal and vertical face
shells.
C. Starting Joint: Provide full mortar coverage on bed, except that area where grout occurs shall
be kept free from mortar.
04220 - 8
Radiant Park
D. Mortar protrusions extending more than 3/8" into cells or cavities to be reinforced and/or
filled, or into air space for veneer masonry, shall be removed.
E. Joint width shall be 3/8", unless otherwise shown.
F. Non-Bearing Walls: Provide masonry bond at all corners. Except at bonded corners, walls shall
be tied together with strips of wire mesh placed not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
3.06 TOOLING
A. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of
caulking or sealants where required.
1. Interior Face of Exterior Walls: Tooled concave joints.
2. Both Faces of Interior Walls: Tooled concave joints.
B. Concealed Joints: Cut joints flush, unless otherwise shown.
C. Joints to be covered with paint shall be filled flush and then sacked to produce dense surface
without sheen.
D. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then tooled.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Reinforce all walls with continuous ladder- or truss-type horizontal joint
reinforcement, unless specifically shown otherwise. Provide special shapes where shown on
the Drawings. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at splices.
B. At each level, place reinforcement in bed joint between first and second course and then at
regular intervals not exceeding 16" o.c. vertically.
C. Place reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face-shell mortar beds and are
fully embedded in mortar for their entire length with minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on
exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations.
D. Bed Joints Between Concrete Unit Masonry and Brick/Stone Masonry: Install ladder- or truss-
type horizontal reinforcing at all bed joints of dissimilar masonry materials, rake joint and
install caulking or sealant.
E. Unless otherwise shown, provide reinforcement in first and second bed joints immediately
above and below openings or recesses in walls. Reinforcement shall extend minimum 24"
beyond end of sills or lintels or to end of panel if distance to end of panel is less than 24".
F. Use only prefabricated "L" and "T" units at corners and intersections, respectively.
G. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement, unless shown on the Drawings.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF VENEER TIES
A. General: Install corrugated masonry veneer tie to solid wall sheathing or other substrate at
spacing specified in paragraph 3.03 above.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING BARS
A. Reinforcing bars shall be straight, except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks
are detailed. Bars partially embedded in masonry shall not be field-bent, except as shown on
the Drawings or specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer.
B. Bars shall be free of loose rust, mud, oil or other coatings that would destroy or reduce bond.
C. Splices shall be made only at locations shown on the Drawings or where specifically permitted
by the Structural Engineer. Bars shall be lapped as specified in the Structural Drawings and be
separated by 1 bar diameter or wired together.
D. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed into position indicated on the Drawings using
reinforcing bar positioners and secured rigidly against displacement within a tolerance of 1/4".
E. Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2" from masonry and not less than 1
bar diameter between bars.
F. Vertical reinforcing shall be placed in masonry cores as shown or specified on the Drawings,
including but not limited to the following locations:
1. Load-bearing masonry walls, reinforcing bars spaced as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Cores in jambs of all door and window openings in load-bearing walls.
04220 - 9
Radiant Park
3. Cores below bearing of structural members, as indicated on the Drawings and specified
in paragraph 3.01 above.
G. Horizontal bars shall be placed in continuous masonry courses, consisting of bond-beam or
through-block units and shall be solidly grouted in place.
H. When foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical unit core, it shall not be sloped more
than 1 horizontal in 6 vertical. Dowel shall be grouted into core in vertical alignment, even
though it is in an adjacent cell to vertical wall reinforcing.
3.10 GROUTING OF MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Grout cells of hollow concrete unit masonry where indicated on the Drawings or
required by project conditions, including but not limited to the following locations:
1. All vertical cells to be reinforced as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
2. Walls Supporting Fixtures: Non-bearing walls supporting wall-hung toilet fixtures or
other equipment or accessories shall be fully grouted at cores containing anchorage
devices.
B. When laying masonry units, extreme care shall be taken to prevent excess mortar from
squeezing out and falling into air space or cells to be grouted or sand-filled. Mortar which
projects more than 3/8" into grout space shall be removed.
C. Grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place.
D. To control area to be grouted, use metal lath or masonry dam. Do not use paper or wood.
E. Pour grout into horizontal members at maximum 48" o.c.
F. Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in one (1) continuous operation.
G. Vertical cells containing reinforcement and cells of walls scheduled to be filled shall be
grouted solidly. Pours shall be stopped 1-1/2" below top of course, except at top of wall, to
form a key at pour joints. Provide clean-out openings at bottom of each pour for inspection.
H. Grouting Masonry of Hollow Units: Walls shall be erected and grouted in lifts not higher than
8'. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment and shall have clear unobstructed
cell area of at least 2" x 3".
I. Grout Spaces Less Than 2" in Width: Walls shall be grouted in heights of less than 8" or six (6)
times the grout joint thickness, whichever is less. Pour grout up to 1" from top of lower wythe.
One (1) wythe of wall shall be laid up higher than the other, but not more than 16". Grout
joint shall be at least 1" wide and shall be filled solidly with grout.
J. Grout Spaces 2" or More in Width: Grout space must be cleaned and inspected before grouting.
Wall shall be grouted in heights of 2' or less for spaces less than 4" wide and in heights of 4' or
less for spaces 4" or wider.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF LINTELS
A. General: Install loose lintels where shown on the Drawings or required for a complete
installation.
B. Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry unit lintels where shown and whenever openings of more
than 12" but less than 30" are shown without steel or other lintels. Temporarily support
formed-in-place lintels.
1. Unless otherwise shown, provide one (1) #5 reinforcing bar for each 4" of wall
thickness. Fill lintel units solidly with grout.
2. Refer to the Structural Drawings for loose lintel schedule.
C. Bearing: Unless otherwise shown, provide minimum bearing of 6" for openings less than 6'-0"
wide and 8" for wider openings.
D. Place control joint materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, recessed
in joint for caulking as specified in Section 07900.
3.12 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Locate vertical control, expansion and isolation joints in concrete unit masonry as shown on the
Drawings. Joints shall be continuous through depth of the masonry work, unless otherwise
detailed.
04220 - 10
Radiant Park
B. Maintain control joint voids clear of mortar, grout and debris. Rake out mortar in preparation
for application of caulking and sealants.
C. Control Joint Spacing: Refer to the Drawings for joint locations. If location of control joints is
not shown, place vertical joints maximum 20'-0" o.c. for unbroken lengths of concrete unit
masonry, except as specified herein:
1. Locate joints at points of natural weakness in supporting structure, at wall openings
and at control joints located in the floor slab when walls are supported on the slab.
2. Wall Openings: Where doors, windows, louvers or other wall openings in masonry
occur, control joints shall be placed on one (1) side of openings less than 6'-0" wide, on
both (2) sides of openings 6'-0" wide or greater, or at locations and spacings shown on
the Drawings, but in no case less than 12'-0" o.c. Joints at lintels or headers shall be
offset as required by structural bearing requirements, with joint offset using slip plane
formed by building paper or other approved material.
3. External Corners: Place control joints at maximum 4'-0" to 6'-0" from all bonded
external corners.
4. Internal Corners: Form cold isolation joints at all internal corners.
5. Masonry Veneer: Locate vertical control joints in continuous runs of masonry veneer so
ratio of horizontal run to vertical height of veneer does not exceed 4:1, or 20'-0",
whichever is greater.
6. Masonry Veneer: Locate control joints within 2'-0" maximum of all bonded external
corners.
7. Masonry Veneer: Provide at least one (1) control joint in each wall plane.
3.13 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build-in hollow metal frames, signage, electrical and mechanical
accessories, anchor bolts, plates, specialties and other items supplied by others. Place items
plumb and true to line.
3.14 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and other items as required. Cooperate fully with
other Sections to ensure correct size, shape and location.
B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on the
Drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work.
3.15 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION AND OTHER FILL MATERIALS
A. Foam Masonry Cell Insulation: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. Refer to Section 07210.
B. Acoustical Sand Fill: Install in all non-grouted cells of concrete unit masonry, in locations
shown on the Drawings.
3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: All new and/or existing concrete unit masonry, where exposed to view in the
completed work and not scheduled to be painted, shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion
of the work.
B. Adhere to the following procedures for cleaning concrete unit masonry. Never clean concrete
unit masonry before mortar has set, minimum 14 days.
1. Dry clean wall with wood paddles or scrapers, removing large particles of mortar.
2. Presoak wall with clean water, scrub with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate
and 1/3 cup household detergent to one gallon of water. Scrub with a stiff fiber brush
only.
3. Thoroughly rinse with clean, low-pressure water immediately after scrubbing to remove
all cleaning solution, dirt, and mortar crumbs. Water pressure shall not exceed 500
psi.
04220 - 11
Radiant Park
C. Clean soiled surfaces exposed to view using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry
or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-
metallic tools in cleaning operations. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings,
if specified.
D. Remove and replace any chipped or broken concrete masonry units. Remove excess mortar and
smears upon completion of masonry work. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent
work.
3.17 APPLICATION OF MASONRY SEALER
A. Ensure that concrete masonry units have been properly cleaned and dried prior to applying
sealer. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces from overspray of sealer.
B. Ensure that sealants for control and expansion joints have been installed prior to applying
sealer.
C. Ensure that proper precautions are taken for handling products near sources of heat or open
flames.
D. Prior to full application, test panels of approximately 4' x 4' shall be treated to determine the
degree of color change in the masonry and precise application procedures.
E. Apply sealer at consistency and rate of application in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
F. Apply sealer to all exterior exposed masonry surfaces, unless otherwise noted or scheduled to
receive other finishes.
G. Clean excess sealer from concrete masonry units and adjacent surfaces.
3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Installation of masonry units, mortar and grout, special curing and workmanship of
joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample panel.
B. All concrete unit masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that may
interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the
construction.
C. Where masonry units are to be exposed in the completed construction, the face or faces that
are exposed shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections to the satisfaction of the
Architect, except that chips not larger than 1/4" will be considered acceptable.
D. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected masonry units or portions of the work and
replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel.
E. Special Inspection: Special inspection shall be performed for compliance with drawings and
standards cited herein. Special inspection shall include the following:
1. Observe preparation of all masonry prisms and preparation of all grout and mortar
specimens.
2. Verify all embedded bolts, plates and dowels are installed, are the correct size, have
the proper embedment, and are otherwise as specified.
3. Verify masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials
meet the requirements of the contract documents. Verify all materials are properly
stored.
4. For masonry constructed by low-lift grouting techniques, observe the following at least
two (2) times each day that masonry construction is in progress (low-lift grouting is
grouting which does not require clean-outs):
a. Observe proportioning, mixing and placing of mortar and grout. Observe
cleanliness of grout cavities. Observe placement of masonry units including
construction details, procedures and workmanship. Observe grout
consolidation and reconsolidation.
b. Observe type, size and location of reinforcing, ties and accessories. Observe
placement, splice locations and splice lengths.
5. Daily reports of all special inspections shall be prepared and distributed as specified in
Section 01400, Quality Control, with 48 hours of the time the inspections were made.
Provide other reports as required by the governing building code.
END OF SECTION
04430 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 04430
SIMULATED STONE MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install non-load bearing simulated stone masonry veneer, including units and
special shapes, mortar, weather barrier, metal lath, stucco scratch coat and accessories.
B. Furnish and install flexible masonry flashings and create weepholes in veneer and/or composite
wall construction.
C. Install all bolts, nailing blocks, inserts, door frames, steel lintels, vents, conduits and other
related work furnished by others to be built into simulated stone masonry.
D. Furnish test specimens and samples of materials to be built into work.
E. Clean simulated stone masonry and remove surplus material and waste.
F. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 04100, Mortar.
2. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
3. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
4. Section 05400, Light-Gage Metal Framing.
5. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
6. Section 07210, Building Insulation.
7. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
8. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
9. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
10. Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
11. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing: Glass Block Units.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. ASTM C170, Compressive Strength, Dimensional Stone Method.
2. ASTM C67, Compressive Strength, Brick Method.
3. ASTM C97, Absorption and Density.
4. ASTM C99, Modulus of Rupture.
5. ANSI A-41.1, Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
6. International Building Code, current edition.
7. UL, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
1.03 TESTING OF MORTAR
A. Mortar: Make one (1) set of three (3) 2" x 4" cylinders for each type of mortar each day that
mortar is laid. Break one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days.
1. Spread mortar on masonry units between 1/2" and 3/4" thick and allow to stand one (1)
minute.
2. Remove mortar and place it in a 2" x 4" cylinder in two (2) layers, compressing mortar
into cylinder using a flat-end stick or fingers.
3. Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep
them damp until taken to laboratory.
B. After 48-hour set, remove molds, cap the specimens and place them in fog room until tested in
damp condition, in accordance with ASTM C31.
04430 - 2
Radiant Park
C. Test in accordance with ASTM C39. From each set of cylinders, break one (1) at seven (7) days
and two (2) at 28 days.
D. Reports shall include location and description of wall, dates, weather conditions, temperature
of mortar and grout, description of mortar and grout mixes, description of masonry prisms,
breaking stresses and nature of break.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature, specifications, installation
instructions and ASTM test compliance data showing compliance with the requirements of this
Section.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all factory fabricated unit types, including any
specified special shapes, or special shapes required by field locations of corners, door
openings, steps in masonry ledges, etc. for units specified for chamfered or draft margin face
finishes.
D. Samples: Submit samples of the specified simulated stone masonry for approval before
delivery to the site. Samples shall include shapes, sizes and kinds in sufficient number to show
full range of color and texture of each type of masonry unit specified. Final approval shall be
by the Architect.
E. Sample Panel: Erect minimum 3'-0" x 4'-0" sample panel consisting of approved simulated stone
masonry that satisfactorily shows proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and
workmanship. Sample panel shall be constructed showing a corner condition.
1. Contractor shall not continue work until Architect and Owner's representative have
accepted sample panel.
2. Sample panel shall remain on site until work of this Section is complete and will be
used as standard of comparison for balance of work.
3. Sample panel may be constructed as a part of the permanent building construction if
approved by the Architect.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep masonry units completely covered
and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle masonry units carefully to avoid chipping, breakage,
contact with soil or contaminating materials. Protect steel materials from moisture and keep
free from rust or scale. Store mortar materials in dry place. Damaged materials shall not be
used.
B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction
activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50° F prior to, during and 48
hours after completion of masonry work.
B. During freezing or near-freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a
minimum temperature of 50° F and to protect masonry work completed or in progress.
C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather when work is not in progress by covering
top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2'
down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.
D. Cold Weather Masonry Installation:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
2. Do not use anti-freeze compounds, calcium chloride or substances containing calcium
chloride in mortar or grout.
3. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or
freezing.
4. Protect masonry being placed from wind with enclosures or shields when air
temperature is below 32° F.
5. Do not heat water above 106° F.
04430 - 3
Radiant Park
6. When mortar or grout materials have been combined, temperature of the mixture shall
not be less than 70° F nor more than 100° F.
7. Masonry materials shall be preconditioned and completed masonry protected as
required by the stone manufacturer, or as follows:
a. When air temperature is below 40° F and above 32° F, heat mixing water.
Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by means of waterproof covers.
b. When air temperature is below 32° F and above 20° F, heat both sand and
mixing water. Maintain a temperature of at least 40° F on both sides of walls
by means of suitable covers or enclosures for 24 hours.
c. When air temperature is 20° F and below, heat sand, mixing water and block
and provide heated enclosures. A temperature of at least 40° F shall be
maintained within enclosures for 48 hours.
d. Periods required for protection and maintenance of specified temperatures
may be reduced to 1/2 of those specified herein before if Type III Portland
cement is used with the Engineer's approval.
E. Hot Weather Masonry Installation:
1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog spray
of mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent premature
drying of mortar.
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer’s written 30-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTWEIGHT SIMULATED STONE MASONRY
A. General: Simulated, cultured stone units manufactured from Portland cement, lightweight
aggregates and mineral oxide pigments in forms created from natural stone, installed as a
lightweight, dry-stack non-load bearing veneer.
B. Sizes: Random sizes, based upon manufacturer’s standard range of sizes for the product line
specified.
C. Materials:
1. Portland Cement, ASTM C150, Type I or masonry cement (Type N), ASTM C91.
2. Masonry sand.
3. Lime: ASTM C207.
4. Iron oxide pigments.
D. Range of Physical Properties:
1. Compressive Strength: UBC Standard 26-10, Parts 1 and 4.
2. Water Absorption: UBC Standard 32-12.
3. Density: 8-12 lbs. per sq. ft., determined in accordance with ASTM C567.
4. Shear (Adhesion) Strength: ASTM C482.
5. Freeze/Thaw Characteristics: ASTM C67-83.
6. Thermal Conductivity: ASTM C177, with the following minimum standards:
a. Temperature, hot side (F): 82°
b. Temperature, cold side (F): 75.8°
c. Average mean temperature (F): 80.2°
d. Thermal conductivity (k): 2.82
e. Thermal resistance (r) for 1" layer: .355
7. Fire Classification: Flame spread rating of 0 and smoke developed rating of 0, when
tested in accordance with UL 723.
E. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks, chips or
deleterious matter. Representative sample in sample panel subject to approval by Architect.
F. Special Shapes: Provide manufacturer's standard prefabricated units and special shapes as
required for project conditions, including but not limited to:
04430 - 4
Radiant Park
1. External corners.
2. Internal corners.
3. Cap units at retaining walls.
G. Fabrication: Manufacture units requiring special shapes specified above, or where corners,
door openings and other site conditions require factory-fabricated edge and ends.
H. Accessory Materials:
1. Weather-Resistant Barrier: 2-ply, Grade D stucco paper by Fortifiber Corp., or
approved equal.
2. Metal Lath: 18-gage galvanized woven wire mesh, or 2.5 lb. flat diamond or 3.4 lb. flat
rib galvanized mesh.
3. Mortar: Refer to Section 04100. Provide color additive for all dry-stack and grouted
applications, Davis Color or equal.
I. Approved Product Line: Ledgestone by Signature Stone as basis of design.
J. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, appearance, quality, performance
and range of size, color and face finish selection, including matching the selected
product(s) specified above in the sole opinion of the Architect, are acceptable as
approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Masonry Flashings: Non-reinforced homogenous, waterproof elastomeric sheeting, 20 mil
minimum thickness.
1. Tensile Strength: 2200 psi, minimum, ASTM D412.
2. Elongation: 250%, minimum, ASTM D412.
3. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbs. minimum.
4. Flashing shall retain flexibility to a temperature of -20° F minimum.
5. Materials and adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular
application.
6. Approved Manufacturer: Vi-Seal Plastic Flashing by AFCO Products, Inc., Somerville,
MA, (800) 397-2687, or approved equal.
B. Weather-Resistant Barrier: Specified in paragraph 2.01 above.
C. Control Joints: Non-asphaltic-type foam backer rod by Celotex or equal. Thicknesses as shown
on the Drawings.
2.03 SEALER
A. Clear Masonry Sealer: Graffiti-resistant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION
A. Installer shall inspect the foundations, retaining walls, formed masonry ledges, steel or wood
stud framing backup, wall sheathing and other substrates scheduled to receive simulated stone
masonry work of this Section. Notify Contractor in writing of any condition that may
potentially affect the installation, performance or appearance of the completed work. Do not
begin installation until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.
B. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized.
C. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place simulated stone unit
masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings.
D. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of
uniform thickness.
E. Chases and recesses shall be built-in and not cut-in. Provide not less than 16" of masonry
between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.
F. Unfinished masonry walls shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Do not tooth.
04430 - 5
Radiant Park
G. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the work of other
Sections, shall be done by masonry mechanics with masonry saws.
H. Bearing for horizontal load-carrying members shall be of grouted masonry as shown on the
Drawings. If no detail is shown, bearing under beams shall consist of grouted masonry at least
8" x 16" in plan and 16" deep.
I. Mask or otherwise protect doors and frames, louvers, mechanical and electrical equipment and
other miscellaneous accessories not scheduled to receive masonry sealers prior to application
of spray- or brush-applied sealers.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Sheathed Surfaces: Install one (1) layer of weather-resistant barrier with lap joints 4" shingle
fashion. Install metal lath, attach with galvanized screws which penetrate a minimum of 1".
Apply 6" on center vertically and 16" on center horizontally. Apply 1/2" to 3/4" thick scratch
coat and allow to dry 48 hours. Wrap weather-resistant barrier and metal lath a minimum of
16" around all outside and inside corners.
B. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces – New, Clean and Untreated: (no preparation needed) Examine
newly poured concrete closely to ensure that its finished surface contains no releasing agents
(form oil). If it does contain form oil, etch surface with muriatic acid, rinse thoroughly and/or
score with a wire brush, or use high-pressure water or sandblasting to remove.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. General: Install masonry flashings in locations as shown on the Drawings.
B. Place flashings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and as
detailed on the Drawings.
C. Place weep-holes through bottom course of masonry construction as shown on the Drawings,
but in no case to exceed 48" o.c. Form weep-holes full depth of head joints, minimum 2" high
and spaced as specified. Coordinate with Architect in the field as necessary.
D. Composite Wall Construction: Refer to Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry, for installation
of thru-wall flashings for composite wall construction.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTWEIGHT SIMULATED STONE MASONRY
A. General: Install lightweight simulated stone masonry units in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Mortar Mixing: Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in
accordance with ASTM C270, Type N.
C. Apply 1/2" to 3/4" of mortar to metal lath as scratch coat, covering a maximum of 10 sq. ft. at
one time. Ensure that scratch coat has cured minimum 48 hours, or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
D. Butter back surfaces of simulated stone masonry and press units firmly into position in soft
mortar bed, wiggle and apply slight pressure to unit to ensure firm bonding, causing mortar to
extrude slightly around edges of units.
E. Place units with uniform mortar joints. Stone joints should not be over 1/4" in width. When
installing "pre-fitted" stone textures, units should be fitted tight against each other with no
allowance for mortar joints. Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths
alternated.
1. Install simulated stone masonry as "dry stacked", as specified in paragraph 2.01 above.
F. Plan work to minimize job site cutting. Perform necessary cutting with proper tools to provide
uniform edges; take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges.
G. Remove excess mortar; do not allow mortar to set up on face of units. Clean and finish joints
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS
A. General: Install mortar and joints as required or recommended by the manufacturer.
04430 - 6
Radiant Park
B. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to face shell of unit and shall be shoved
tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. Do not slush head joints.
C. Mortar protrusions extending more than 3/8" into cells or cavities to be reinforced and/or
filled, or into air space for veneer masonry, shall be removed.
D. Joint width shall be uniformly 3/8", unless otherwise shown.
3.06 TOOLING
A. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of
caulking or sealants where required.
1. Exterior Face of Exterior Walls: Tooled concave joints or as recommended by the
manufacturer for the types of face finishes specified.
B. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then tooled.
3.07 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build-in hollow metal frames, signage, electrical and mechanical
accessories, anchor bolts, plates, specialties and other items supplied by others. Place items
plumb and true to line.
3.08 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and other items as required. Cooperate fully with
other Sections to ensure correct size, shape and location.
B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on the
Drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work.
3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace any chipped or broken concrete masonry units. Remove excess mortar and
smears upon completion of masonry work. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent
work.
B. Clean soiled surfaces exposed to view using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry
or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-
metallic tools in cleaning operations. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings,
if specified.
3.10 APPLICATION OF MASONRY SEALER
A. Ensure that concrete masonry units have been properly cleaned and dried prior to applying
sealer. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces from overspray of sealer.
B. Ensure that proper precautions are taken for handling products near sources of heat or open
flames.
C. Prior to full application, test panels of approximately 4' x 4' shall be treated to determine the
degree of color change in the masonry and precise application procedures.
D. Apply sealer at consistency and rate of application in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
E. Apply sealer to all exterior exposed masonry surfaces, unless otherwise noted or scheduled to
receive other finishes.
F. Clean excess sealer from concrete masonry units and adjacent surfaces.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Installation of simulated stone masonry units, mortar and grout, special curing and
workmanship of joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample panel.
1. Maintain required moisture content of mortar mix as work proceeds.
B. All simulated stone unit masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that
may interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the
04430 - 7
Radiant Park
construction.
C. All exposed faces and surfaces shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections to the
satisfaction of the Architect, except that chips not larger than 1/4" will be considered
acceptable.
D. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected simulated stone masonry units or portions of
the work and replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel.
END OF SECTION
05120 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish, fabricate and erect all structural steel framing, including columns, girders, beams,
purlins, bridging, bracing and other framing members.
B. Furnish and fabricate items to be embedded in concrete or masonry such as anchor bolts,
angles or plates for attachment of structural steel and other work, except embedded items for
attachment of precast concrete, which will be furnished by the precast manufacturer for
installation by the General Contractor.
C. Furnish, fabricate and install miscellaneous non-structural steel items, such as pipe bollards,
decorative perforated steel plate, trench grates and cover plates, unless furnished by Section
05999 or arranged for otherwise.
D. Repair and/or reinforce existing structural steel members as indicated on the Drawings.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01410, Testing.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing.
5. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
6. Section 05200, Steel Joists and Joist Girders.
7. Section 05300, Metal Decking.
8. Section 05400, Light-Gage Metal Structural Framing.
9. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals.
10. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Miscellaneous metal hangers, post caps, etc.
11. Section 07610, Prefinished Metal Roofing.
12. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. AISC: Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings.
2. AISC: Manual of Steel Construction.
3. AISC: Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, current edition, as
amended below.
a. Section 3.1: Revise the second paragraph to read: "The Contract Documents
shall clearly show the work that is to be performed and shall give the following
information with sufficient dimensions to accurately convey the quantity and
nature of the structural steel to be fabricated."
b. Section 3.2: Replace the entire section with the following: "Requirements for
structural steel including dimensions, arrangement and details shall be shown
in the overall contract document package. Fabricator shall be responsible for
incorporating all such information from structural, architectural, mechanical
and electrical drawings, as well as those of other disciplines."
c. Section 3.5: Delete all text after the first sentence.
d. Section 3.6: Replace the text of the entire section with the following: "When
the fast-track project delivery system is selected, release of structural
drawings shall constitute release for construction only, if specifically noted on
the drawing. Drawings that indicate "not for construction" shall not be used for
detailing."
05120 - 2
Radiant Park
e. Section 4.2: 3rd paragraph: Eliminate the following: "When requested to do
so by the Owner's Designated Representative for Design".
f. Section 4.4: Revise 2nd sentence to read the following: "These drawings shall
be returned in accordance with the schedule defined in Division 1 of the
project specification. In the absence of this requirement, the Owner's
Designated Representative for Design shall return submittals within 14 days of
receipt from the Owner's Designated Representative for Design for
Construction."
g. Section 6.4.4: Page 33: Revise statement "For the purpose of inspection,
camber shall be measured in the fabricator's shop in the unstressed condition",
to read "camber specified on the drawings is intended to be camber at the time
of erection with decking placed prior to placing concrete. Owner's Designated
Representative for Construction shall submit methods for controlling
deflections on beams with inadequate camber prior to placing concrete on
deck."
h. Section 6.5.3: Page 38: Revise definition to read "two mils" (0.05 mm).
i. Section 7.10.3, Page 47: Refer to the design criteria in the general notes on
the drawings for definition of the complete lateral load resisting system for the
steel frame. The Contractor shall notify the Erector in accordance with Section
7.10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges of all
bracing requirements beyond those required to support the bare steel frame.
4. AISC: Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Approved by
the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation.
5. AWS: Code for Welding in Building Construction.
6. ASTM A36: Structural Steel.
7. ASTM A307: Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners.
8. ASTM A325: High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
9. ASTM A500-B: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Structural Steel.
10. ASTM A572-50: High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium Vanadium Structural Steel.
11. FS TT-P-31: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, red and brown.
12. ASTM A525: Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dipped Process.
13. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar
size and complexity.
C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators
currently certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved.
1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Certified Test Reports: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering
physical and chemical tests of structural steel and high-strength bolts, if requested by
Structural Engineer.
B. Specifications: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions showing
compliance with the specifications for filler metal for welding, shop paint and grout.
C. Calibration Data: Submit procedure for calibration of wrenches and installation of high-
strength bolts for Engineer's approval.
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature for any miscellaneous or
specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections.
E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including job standards for shop and field connections,
anchor bolt and base plate plans, erection drawings for framing, and detail drawings of all
structural members.
1. Erection drawings shall show all necessary erection details, location, type and size of
all bolts and welds, clearly distinguishing between shop and field bolts and welds.
05120 - 3
Radiant Park
2. Indicate all joints and attachments between the work of this Section and the
prefabricated steel structures specified in Section 13122.
3. Indicate all joints and attachments between the work of this Section and the
prefabricated wire mesh screens specified in Section 05999.
4. Truss connector plate drawings shall show each plate type or condition to scale, with
anchor bolt placement.
F. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not
submitted under separate Sections.
G. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 TESTING
A. Shop Inspection and Testing: For fabrication shops which participate in the AISC Certification
Program and are designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD (Standard for Steel Building
Structures), the following required special inspections and tests may be performed by the
fabricators designated in-house inspector in lieu of the independent special inspector.
1. Testing agency shall obtain copies of certifications of all welders and conduct shop
inspections and tests during fabrication of structural steel. Reports shall include:
welder's certifications, type of test, type and location of all defects and measures
taken to correct defects, statement of final approval of all welding and bolting of shop
connections and other data and information pertinent to proper completion of shop
connections.
2. Visually inspect members for cracks, bends, warps, kinks, and ASTM identification.
Visually compare fabricated members and assemblies with approved shop drawings.
Report exceptions and deviations.
3. Inspect and test welding and bolting during fabrication in accordance with referenced
specifications and as follows:
4. Shop Welding: Visually inspect all welds. Check size, length, pinholes, undercut and
overlap.
a. Inspect fillet welds as follows:
1) Single-pass fillet welds: Visually inspect.
2) Multiple-pass fillet welds: Visually Inspect
b. Inspect groove welds as follows:
1) Partial penetration welds: Visually inspect.
2) Full penetration welds: 100% of welds using ultrasonic testing method.
c. Additional testing: Additional testing by Owner's testing agency at Contractors
expense will be required if more than 10% of the tested welds are rejected,
then test an additional 10% of such welds using the same testing method.
Repeat this 10% additional testing process until the rejection rate drops below
in 10%.
5. ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts: Inspect and test in accordance with "Specifications for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". When "slip-critical" (SC) bolts are to
be installed, verify certification of fabricators tension measuring device used to
determine bolt tension. Verify that pre-installation tests and installation procedures
meet ASTM requirements. Inspect 100% of slip critical connections.
6. Camber: Measure four randomly selected beams requiring camber, for each level of
structure. Measure camber 24 hours after cambering operation and report camber by
beam mark.
05120 - 4
Radiant Park
7. Reporting: Special Inspector (or Fabricator's designated in-house inspector) shall
provide written reports indentifying tests and inspections performed and attesting to
the acceptance of the affected work. Include reports of non-conforming work along
with acceptable corrective work.
B. Field Inspection and Testing:
1. Field Assembly: Inspect steel frame to verify compliance with details shown on
approved drawings including, but not limited to: bracing, stiffening, member locations
and proper application of joint details at connections.
2. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection in accordance with AWS Code and as
follows:
a. Obtain copies of welders' certifications and conduct inspections and tests as
required. Record types and location of all defects found in work. Record work
required and performed to correct deficiencies.
b. Perform visual inspection of all welds. Check for size, length, pinholes,
undercut and overlap. Test suspected defects using magnetic particle method
for fillet welds and methods below for groove welds.
c. Inspect fillet welds as follows:
1) Single-pass fillet welds: Visually inspect
2) Multiple-pass fillet welds: Visually inspect
d. Inspect groove welds as follows:
1) Partial Penetration welds: Visually inspect.
2) Full penetration welds: 100% of welds using ultrasonic testing method.
e. Additional testing: Additional testing by Owners testing agency at Contractors
expense will be required if more than 10% of the tested welds are rejected,
then test an additional 10% of such welds using the same testing methods.
Repeat this 10% additional testing process unit the rejection rate drops below
one in ten.
3. High-Strength Bolted Connections: Inspect and test in accordance with HS bolting
specification and as follows.
a. Confirm accuracy of Contractor's Tension Calibration as noted above.
b. Inspect as noted in "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts".
c. Where "slip-critical" (SC) bolts are used, verify that erector is performing
required pre-shift calibrations and tests. Inspect installed SC bolts by the
"arbitration inspection" method, except, if any bolt fails, all bolts in that
connection shall be checked and tightened, if necessary, by the erector and
resubmitted. Inspect 10% of bolts, but not less than two, in each SC
connection.
d. Visually inspect all bolts for proper installation.
e. Cost of retests on bolts and connections that fail shall be borne by Contractor.
f. Alternative design tension control bolts. Visually inspect after installation per
AISC requirements. Pre-test a representative sample of (5) bolts of each
diameter, length, etc., at the jobsite in a device capable of indicating bolt
tension.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which
are embedded in cast-in-place concrete to the project site in time to be installed before the
start of cast-in-place concrete operations. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions
for installation of anchor bolts and other devices.
B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair
or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Storage of Structural Steel: Structural steel members stored at the project site shall be above
ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect
steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use.
Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container.
05120 - 5
Radiant Park
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES
A. Wide Flange Rolled Shapes and WT Sections: Comply with ASTM A992, 50 ksi.
B. Other Rolled Steel Shapes, Channels and Angles: Comply with ASTM A572-50, 50 ksi.
C. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold-rolled steel tubing, fully welded constructions. Comply
with ASTM A500, Grade B, 46 ksi.
D. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B, 46 ksi.
E. Solid Steel Bars and Plates: Comply with ASTM A36, 36 ksi.
F. Light-Gage Metal Structural Framing: Refer to Section 05400 for light-gage metal roof purlins,
wall studs, joists and parapet framing.
G. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 60% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
2.02 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: Regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM
A307, Grade A.
B. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagonal structural bolts and nuts and hardened
washers complying with ASTM A325, ASTM F1852 or ASTM A490.
C. Electrodes for manual shielded and metal arc welding shall be covered mild steel electrodes
conforming to the AWS Code and ASTM A233, Series E-60 and E-70.
D. Bare electrodes and granular flux for submerged arc welding shall conform to the AWS Code
and ASTM A588, Series F-60 and F-70.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 60% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Match paragraph 2.01
above.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Match paragraph 2.01
above.
2.03 FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. General: Structural steel shall be detailed and fabricated in accordance with the referenced
codes, AISC Specifications and standards and in compliance with the final approved shop
drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown.
B. Shop-fabricate and assemble sections in largest practical components for delivery and erection
on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings.
1. Trusses: Shop-fabricate structural steel trusses in one assembly for delivery to the
site.
2. Beam Connectors: Shop-fabricate structural steel tube columns, connector plates and
beam seats.
C. Properly mark and match mark all materials for field assembly. Coordinate fabrication and
delivery sequence to expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Plates and
anchor bolts to be built into concrete work shall be shipped loose.
D. Type of connection most suitable to shop or field facilities shall be used, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings.
E. Cutting and Fitting: Perform necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the accommodation of
other trades. Secure correct information for same, both before and after steel is delivered.
Cutting or drilling will not be permitted on the job without the approval of the Structural
05120 - 6
Radiant Park
Engineer.
F. Steel to be Exposed in Finished Structure: All steel trusses, truss connector plates, beam seats,
beams, columns, purlins and other items to be exposed in the completed work shall be
fabricated and cut square, true and uniform, with uneven, rough or abraded edges sanded
smooth prior to shop painting.
2.04 PRIMER AND PAINT
A. Shop Paint: Provide paint conforming to FS TT-P-636, manufacturer's standard red. Field
touch-up paint shall be the same as shop paint.
B. Asphaltic Paint: Provide an asphaltic base paint for all surfaces below grade and for all
members exposed in crawlspaces, and all exterior members to be in contact with concrete, or
as shown on the Drawings.
1. Sonneborn Hydrocide Semi-Mastic.
C. Primer: Conform to FS TT-P-31, red.
D. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize all structural steel components, conforming to
ASTM A525, in exterior locations, including all beams, channels, angles, pipe or wide flange
columns and other supports.
2.05 SHOP PAINTING
A. After fabrication, remove all loose scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil, grease, dirt or
other foreign materials.
B. Apply one (1) coat of shop paint to all steel, except as specified herein. Dry film thickness
shall not be less than 2 mils.
C. Do not paint surfaces of steel in contact areas to be welded or contact surfaces of friction-type
high-strength bolted connections. Protect machine-finished surfaces against corrosion. Do not
paint surfaces of steel embedded in concrete.
D. Do not paint/prime interior steel surfaces to receive application of spray-applied fireproofing.
2.06 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Provide factory-packaged non-shrink non-metallic flowable grout where shown on the
Drawings, manufactured by Embeco, Five Star or equal.
1. One (1) day compressive strength of 5,000 psi minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing
work of this Section. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies or
conditions which may affect the successful installation of the structural steel work. Do not
begin work until conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all dimensions, elevations and assuring fit of
structural steel members prior to commencing erection.
C. Prior to start of erection of the steel, Erector shall verify the location of embedded anchor
bolts and report deviations from the anchor bolt setting plan to the General Contractor in
writing.
D. Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during
field welding.
E. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Make provision for erection loads on existing structure,
and for sufficient temporary bracing as required.
F. Make provision for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure
safe, plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection.
G. Pre-Installation Conference: Refer to Section 01200.
05120 - 7
Radiant Park
3.02 PREPARATION FOR STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all dimensions, elevations and assuring fit of
structural steel members prior to commencing installation.
B. Contractor shall ensure the structural stability of the roof and floor framing components during
removal or modification of any existing connectors, and the installation of new connectors.
1. Shore or brace walls and framing members as necessary.
C. Field welding as a part of this work shall only be allowed where specifically shown on the
Drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer.
3. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during welding in the vicinity of existing
wood construction.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for the repair or replacement of any existing
construction damaged or destroyed by this work at no additional cost to the Owner.
5. Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks
during field welding.
3.03 SHOP AND FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Weld or bolt shop connections, unless otherwise shown. Bolt field connections, except where
welded connections are shown or specified. Use bolts conforming to ASTM A325, unless
otherwise shown.
1. All welds exposed to view are to be "Architectural Grade".
B. No one-sided connections shall be used, unless specifically shown on the Drawings.
C. Detailing and fabrication of high-strength bolted joints shall conform to "Specifications for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Connections are designed as bearing connec-
tions, unless otherwise noted on the Structural Drawings.
D. Finish work in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Work shall be true and free from
twists, kinks, buckles, open joints and other defects.
3.04 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. General: Erect steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice and
other specified requirements, including special provision of CSHA and COSH.
B. Erection equipment shall be of adequate capacity to perform all work safely. Do not use floor
and roof systems of building to support erection equipment.
C. Maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection. Provide temporary shoring and
bracing as required.
D. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated within specified AISC erection
tolerances. Align and adjust various members forming a part of complete frame or structure
before permanently fastening.
E. Clean bearing and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly.
1. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice.
Leveling and plumbing shall be based on a mean temperature of 70° F. Compensate for
difference in temperature at time of erection.
F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates on steel wedges or on other adjustable
devices. Tighten anchor bolts after the supporting members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims.
G. High-strength bolting shall be in accordance with AISC Specifications for Structural Joints.
Testing of high-strength bolting procedures shall be as specified in Section 01410.
H. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field
for correcting fabrication errors. All gas cutting must have prior approval of the Engineer.
I. Where reinforcing bars are shown welded to structural steel, bars are to be furnished by rebar
supplier and welded in place by structural steel erector.
J. Field Modifications: Written approval of the Structural Engineer must be obtained before using
cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel. Contractor shall be
responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in the field.
05120 - 8
Radiant Park
3.05 CLEANING AND FIELD PAINTING
A. Clean all steel surfaces in preparation for field finishing.
B. Paint only when ambient air temperature is above 40° F. Surfaces to be painted shall be free of
rust, oil, dirt and mud. Immediately after erection, touch-up field welds, bolted connections
and abrasions of the shop coat.
C. Apply asphaltic paint to portions of columns, including base plate that will be below grade or
top of slab-on-grade, and to all connections or other surfaces exposed in crawlspaces or to be
in contact with concrete in exterior applications.
D. Wash down all structural steel framing upon completion of erection.
E. Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for field finishing of exposed steel surfaces.
3.06 PLACEMENT OF NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Inspect surfaces prior to placement of grout. Check for cleanliness and proper placement and
installation of steel work to be in general conformance with the Drawings.
B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use. Follow
manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Pack grout solid taking care that
there are no voids. Refrain from tightening anchor bolts until grout has set and cured.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Refer to Structural Drawings for complete steel inspection table or schedule.
B. Shop- and field-welding of exposed structural steel members shall be subject to evaluation to
the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1. Alignment and spacing of members.
2. Flushness and plumb of adjacent members.
3. Quality and appearance of finished welds.
4. Alignment of bolts and other attachments, where exposed to view in finished structure.
5. Consistency of bolt length beyond nuts, where exposed to view in finished structure.
END OF SECTION
05300 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 05300
METAL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all materials required for complete installation of metal roof and soffit
decking.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
4. Section 05400, Light-Gage Metal Structural Framing.
5. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. AISI, "Specification for the Design of Light-Gage Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members".
2. AWS, "Code for Welding in Building Construction".
3. SDI, "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual".
4. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI).
1. All metal decking shall be by the same fabricator throughout the project, unless
specifically approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Welding Qualification: Contractor shall qualify welding processes and welding operators in
accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
1. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Remove and replace or
reweld work found to be defective and not complying with the specifications.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 DECK DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General: Design of decking and calculation of section properties shall conform to the AISI and
SDI specifications. Moment of inertia and section modulus of units shall provide sufficient
carrying capacity to support all dead and live loads shown on the Drawings, within the limits of
the design criteria herein specified.
B. Composite Metal Floor Decking:
1. Maximum deflection of decking shall not exceed L/240 of clear span or 1/2" under wet
concrete and 20 psf construction load and L/360 of clear span under live load.
2. Maximum stresses shall not exceed the following: 20,000 psi steel flexural stress;
1,350 psi concrete flexural stress; 60 psi concrete shear stress; and 40 psi bond stress.
3. Units shall be of minimum 22-gage steel.
4. Units shall be continuous over three (3) or more spans, except where structural steel
layout does not permit.
C. Metal Roof and Soffit Deck:
1. Live and dead load deflection shall not exceed L/240 of clear span.
2. Maximum steel flexural stress shall be 20,000 psi. Deck system shall be capable of
resisting at least 30 psf uplift over floor areas and 45 psf uplift within 10' of parapets.
Minimum gage shall be 22.
3. Furnish panels in lengths to span three (3) or more spans.
05300 - 2
Radiant Park
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, load tables, performance and test
data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including erection plans and details, deck types, gage
and properties, erection marks and sequence of erection, welding diagrams and instructions,
type of shop finish coat, accessories and installation instructions.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site with necessary erection markings.
B. Handle and store in a manner required to avoid damage to decking. Store above ground on
platforms, skids or similar supports; slope to permit drainage.
C. Keep free from dirt or other foreign matter. Protect against rust and corrosion by means of
weatherproof covering. Tie or weigh down broken bundles of deck to prevent wind from
blowing sheets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL ROOF DECKING
A. General: Prefabricated steel roof decking shall be as specified herein or as indicated on the
Structural Drawings.
1. Decking Width(s): 36", or as indicated on the Structural Drawings.
2. Profile(s): Type B, by United Steel Deck, Inc., as basis of design.
3. Gage(s): 22 gage, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings.
4. Deck Thickness: 1-1/2", or as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Steel Materials for Galvanized Deck Units: ASTM A446, Grade A with 1.25 oz./sq. ft.
"commercial" class zinc coating complying with ASTM A525.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized
surfaces, complying with MIL-P-21035.
D. Primed Finish: Deck units shall be furnished with manufacturer's standard baked-on rust
inhibitive primer, gray, unless otherwise specified herein. Field finishing specified in Section
09900, Painting where exposed to view in the finished project.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 50% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Vulcraft, Norfolk, NE, (402) 644-8500.
2. United Steel Deck Inc., Summit, NJ, (908) 277-1617.
3. Epic Metals Corp., Rankin, PA, (412) 351-1393.
05300 - 3
Radiant Park
4. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Wheeling, WV, (304) 234-2352.
5. Consolidated Systems, Inc., Columbia, SC, (800) 554-5421.
6. Manufacturers providing materials of the same design, function, quality and perfor-
mance are acceptable.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide end and side closures, column closures, sump pans and bent plates and other
miscellaneous shapes as indicated on the Drawings or as required by project conditions but not
itemized.
B. Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end abutting deck units of not less than 18-gage
sheet steel formed to match contour of deck units.
C. Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips of minimum 18-gage sheet steel formed to
provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking.
D. Cant Strips: Fabricate cant strips of 20 gage galvanized sheet steel. Bend to form a 45° cant
not less than 5" wide with top and bottom flanges not less than 3" wide, unless otherwise
shown.
2.03 FACTORY-APPLIED FINISHES
A. General: Apply specified factory finishes after metal surfaces have been chemically cleaned
and phosphatized.
B. Deck finishes shall be provided as follows:
1. Metal roof deck without concrete fill shall have the manufacturer's standard baked-on
rust inhibitive paint on all surfaces.
2. Metal composite floor deck and roof deck with concrete fill where exposed to view
shall have iron phosphate (70-100 mg) treatment of entire decking followed by baked-
on enamel to underside of deck.
3. Metal roof deck with concrete fill shall have manufacturer’s standard galvanized finish
on all surfaces where concealed from view.
4. Do not paint/prime interior metal deck surfaces to receive application of spray-applied
fireproofing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing
work of this Section. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies or
conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.
B. Steel deck manufacturer shall supply decking free of lubricants or oils which would impair the
adhesion of spray-applied fireproofing.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DECKING
A. General: Place units on supporting steel and adjust to final position before final welding. Units
shall be straight and true and have proper bearing on supporting steel.
B. Composite Floor Deck: Fasten form deck units to steel by 5/8" diameter welds through metal
washers spaced not more than 12" o.c. at ends and 24" o.c. at intermediate supports. Where
two (2) units abut, each unit shall be so fastened. Where units lap at ends, lap shall be 2" long
(minimum) and shall occur over support. Along sides of building weld deck to supporting steel
using metal washers spaced not more than 12" o.c.
C. Roof Deck: Fasten roof units as indicated on the Structural Drawings.
D. Fasten side laps of adjacent unit between supports as indicated on the Structural Drawings.
E. Fasten side and end closures of panels by tack welds or screws not more than 4' o.c. Close
openings between panels and columns with column closures.
05300 - 4
Radiant Park
3.03 APPLICATION OF TOUCH-UP PAINT
A. After installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred area, welds and rust spots on the top and
bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.
B. Touch up galvanized surfaces with galvanized repair paint applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Touch up painted surfaces with the same type of paint on the
adjacent surfaces.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT AT OPENINGS
A. General: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength,
continuity of decking and support of other work, unless otherwise shown.
B. Roof Deck: Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 12" in any dimension by means of
a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck.
Extend sheet 12" minimum beyond edge of opening in each direction. Provide steel sheet of
the same quality as the deck units not less than nominal 16-gage thick before coating and at
least 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide #12 TEK screws at each corner and
spaced not more than 6" o.c. along each side. Openings larger than 12" shall be framed with
angle frames as detailed on the Drawings.
C. Composite Floor Deck: Structural framing as detailed on the Drawings.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Wash down all metal deck, steel joists, bridging and other components upon completion of
erection.
END OF SECTION
05999 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 05999
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install miscellaneous fabricated items of ferrous and non-ferrous metals as shown
on the Drawings or required by the work, including but not limited to:
1. Panel and trims for roof, soffit and walls.
2. Pipe bollards.
3. Steel plate toilet partition screens and toilet accessories.
4. Stainless steel sheets and tubes (Bid Alternate).
5. Miscellaneous steel channels, angles, lintels, and straps, if not furnished by other
Sections.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
4. Section 05510, Metal Stairs.
5. Section 05511, Metal Fire Escape Stairs.
6. Section 05810, Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.
7. Section 09900, Painting.
8. Section 10260, Wall and Corner Guards: Stainless steel corner guards.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY OTHERS
A. Section 02515, Portland Cement Paving: Metal fabrications cast in concrete.
B. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete: Metal fabrications cast in concrete.
C. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Loose lintels and metal fabrications laid into concrete
block masonry.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM A36: Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A307: Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners.
3. ASTM A325: High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
4. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code.
5. FS TT-P-86: Paint, Red-Lead Base, Ready Mixed.
6. FS TT-P-645: Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type.
7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar
size and complexity.
C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators
currently certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved.
1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for any miscellaneous or
specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections.
05999 - 2
Radiant Park
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of expanded metal mesh screen/steel angle frame
panels, illustrating dimensions, components, spacing of predrilled holes for anchorage, finishes
and shop welds or other attachments.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not
submitted under separate Sections.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts, loose lintels and other anchorage
devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry construction to the project
site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations. Provide
setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices.
B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair
or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Storage of Steel Materials: Structural steel members stored at the project site shall be above
ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect
steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use.
Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: Conform to ASTM A572-50, 50 ksi. Refer to the Drawings for thicknesses
and/or gages.
1. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: High-strength type recommended for structural steel joints,
ASTM A307.
2. Plate for Toilet Partition Screens: 11-gage sheet steel.
3. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.
4. Primer: Zinc-chromate alkyd FS TT-P-645.
B. Galvanized Steel Panels and Trim:
1. Sheet Steel: 20 gage. Conform to ASTM A653, Standard Specification of Sheet Steel.
2. Screws, Nuts, Washers: Galvanized tamper-resistant screws with neoprene washers at
roof condition.
C. Stainless Steel Steel Panels and Trim (Bid Alternate):
1. Sheet Steel: 20 gage, #4 brushed sheet steel.
2. Screws, Nuts, Washers: Stainless steel tamper-resistant screws with neoprene washers
at roof condition.
D. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold-rolled steel tubing, fully welded construction. Conform
to ASTM A500, Grade B.
E. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 60% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
05999 - 3
Radiant Park
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop-fabricate and assemble items in largest practical components for delivery and installation
on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings.
B. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.
C. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces.
1. All welds exposed to view to be "Architectural Grade".
D. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage
and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise
specified.
E. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to prime painting.
F. Prime paint items for field finishing as specified in Section 09900. Do not shop-prime surfaces
in contact with concrete or requiring field welding. Shop-prime in one (1) coat.
G. Hot-dipped galvanize all items to be installed in exterior locations or to be in contact with
concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing
work of this Section. Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies or conditions which may
affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until such conditions are
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions affecting the work of this Section and coordinate fit
and installation details with related trades prior to fabrication.
C. Ensure that items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry are supplied to
the site prior to concrete or masonry work, complete with necessary setting templates.
D. Ensure that ferrous metal surfaces have been properly painted where in contact with aluminum
or other dissimilar metals as required to prevent electrolysis.
E. Pipe Bollards: Ensure that bollards have been properly located in relation to openings in
concrete, masonry or other materials or equipment to be protected by the bollards. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or required by specific site requirements, locate bollards as
follows:
1. Jambs: Centerline of bollard aligned with centerline of jamb opening, and placed 12"
out from face of wall.
2. Corners: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from corner in both directions.
3. Equipment: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from edge or corner of gas meters,
electrical transformers, pad-mounted condensing units and other equipment.
Coordinate clearance requirements with utility providers, as applicable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install prefabricated items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and recommendations. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from
distortion.
B. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
C. Replace items damaged in course of installation.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Pipe Bollards: Embed bollards minimum 24" deep into concrete piers with a minimum
dimension of 12" diameter x 36" depth below grade, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
1. Fill bollards with concrete and form top surface smooth, dense, and flush or crowned
to a maximum of 1/4" to allow proper drainage.
05999 - 4
Radiant Park
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Pipe Bollards: 6" o.d. (as indicated on the Drawings) steel pipe x 6'-0" long (where embedded
24" into concrete piers), concrete filled, as detailed on the Drawings.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Channels, Angles, Lintels and Straps: Furnish under this Section, unless
arranged for otherwise.
C. Steel Plate Toilet Partition Screens and Toilet Accessories:
1. Fabricate and install steel plate toilet partition screens with doors as detailed on the
Drawings or attached hereto.
D. Sheet Panels and Trims: As detailed on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
06100 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish materials and labor for installation of rough carpentry, including but not limited to:
1. Furring, stripping, blocking and sleepers.
2. Plywood and/or oriented strand board (OSB) roof sheathing.
3. Roof crickets, curbs, blocking and plates.
4. Miscellaneous wall-mounted plywood backer boards for electrical, audio/visual, sound
and related equipment.
B. Furnish nails, screws, bolts, fasteners, construction adhesives, and other related or accessory
materials required for a complete installation.
C. Furnish and install light-gage metal joist/truss connectors.
D. Coordination of all other trades as required for a complete installation.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
4. Section 05120, Structural Steel.
5. Section 05400, Light-Gage Metal Structural Framing.
6. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
7. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
8. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
9. Section 09110, Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing: Interior framing.
10. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard: Blocking and draft stops.
11. Division 15, Mechanical.
12. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood.
2. PS 2-92: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural Use Panels.
3. PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard.
4. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for Wood
Construction.
5. APA: American Plywood Association, Plywood Specification and Grade Guide.
6. AWPA: American Wood-Preservers' Association.
a. AWPA C1: All timber products – preservative treatment by pressure processes.
b. AWPA C2: Lumber, timber, bridge ties and mine ties – preservative treatment
by pressure processes.
c. AWPA C9: Plywood - preservative treatment by pressure processes.
d. AWPA C15: Wood for commercial-residential construction – preservative
treatment by pressure processes.
e. AWPA C17: Playground equipment treated with inorganic preservatives -
preservative treatment by pressure processes.
7. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
8. Applicable provisions of the codes as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over
this Project.
B. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Materials shall carry the visible grade stamp of agency certified by
National Forest Products Association (NFPA).
06100 - 2
Radiant Park
C. Plywood panels shall be identified with APA grade trademark of the American Plywood
Association.
D. Grading of lumber shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Western Wood
Products Association.
E. Pressure-Treated Lumber: Pressure-treated lumber materials shall not contain chromated
copper arsenate (CCA).
F. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and/or manufacturer's written product
literature for prefabricated interior wood stair systems, indicating materials, fabrication,
attachments and dimensions for each site condition required.
B. Preservative Treatment Certification: Treating plant's certification of compliance with
specified standards, process employed and preservative retention values.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for prefabricated wood-
polymer composite decking.
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for all construction adhesives.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for composite wood or agrifiber products indicating that
they do not contain any added urea-formaldehyde in resins.
3. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
4. Credit MR 7: Invoices and chain of custody certificates for products containing FSC
certified wood. Include statement of cost for each certified wood product, excluding
labor and costs for installation. Invoices must show the chain of custody number.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at jobsite.
B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required to be installed in the work.
C. Store on level racks and keep free of the ground to avoid warping. Stack to ensure proper
ventilation and drainage.
D. Pressure-Treated Wood Materials: Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional
changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant.
E. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original unbroken boxes, cartons or containers,
with labels intact. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1.05 COMPLIANCE
A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought onto or
to be stored at the jobsite.
B. Promptly remove non-complying materials from the jobsite and replace with materials meeting
the requirements of this Section.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for pressure-treated wood products covering
defects in materials and workmanship.
B. Provide manufacturer's written 1-year warranty for epoxy-type wood repair materials covering
defects in materials and workmanship.
1. Installation Warranty: Installing contractor shall provide a 2-year written warranty
06100 - 3
Radiant Park
covering installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Framing Lumber: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum
moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-Dry) S4S, of the following species and grades:
1. Blocking and Miscellaneous Furring and Stripping: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction
grade or better.
2. Roof Curbs and Plates: Pressure-treated Hem-Fir. Pressure-treated lumber shall not
contain CCA.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. ACQ Preserve by Chemical Specialties, Inc., Charlotte, NC, and distributed locally by
ECO Products, Boulder, CO, (303) 449-1876, as basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality, and
meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.06 below, are acceptable.
2.02 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A. General: APA-rated softwood plywood, meeting the grading requirements of PS-1, or wood
sheathing in conformance with PS-2.
1. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long x thicknesses as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Edges: Ship lapped.
B. Exterior Concealed Plywood: CDX, Exterior APA.
C. Interior Exposed Plywood: A/D or A/C, Interior APA, for painted opaque finish.
D. Interior Concealed Plywood: C/D plugged, Interior APA with exterior glue.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for
Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesives, 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives or 250
g/L for architectural sealants.
2. Credit EQ 4.4: Composite wood and agrifiber products containing no added urea
formaldehyde in resins.
3. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
4. Credit MR 7: At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Weyerhaeuser Corp., Tacoma, WA.
2. Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404) 652-4000.
3. Manufacturers providing products of the same design, function, quality and
performance are acceptable.
2.03 FASTENERS, ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application or as indicated
on the Drawings.
1. Medium Carbon Steel: Galvanized for exterior locations, high-humidity locations and
treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations or when in contact with concrete.
B. Prefabricated Soffit and Roof Vents: Specified in Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and
Trim.
2.04 CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVES
A. Construction Adhesives: Low-viscosity, mastic-type, multipurpose adhesive, formulated for
field-gluing for interior or exterior use, meeting the following specifications:
1. Reference Standards: Comply with the following minimum standards:
06100 - 4
Radiant Park
a. APA Spec. AFG-01.
b. ASTM D3498 and C557.
c. HUD/FHA requirements in Bulletin #60.
2. Type: Synthetic elastomeric polymer, VOC compliant.
a. Calculated VOC: 47 g/L maximum.
3. Base: Synthetic elastomer.
4. Consistency: Approx. 130,000 cps, Brookfield viscometer.
5. Weight/Gallon: 10.4 lbs. minimum.
6. Solids content: 78%.
7. Strength: ASTM D3498.
8. Aging: Retains flexibility after 500 hrs. at 300 psi and 158° F by ASTM D572-61.
9. Water Resistance: Waterproof.
10. Application Method: Caulking gun or trowel.
11. Application Temperature: 0°-100° F.
12. Service Range: -20° to 120° F.
13. Material Suitability: Select appropriate adhesive product(s) for materials/products to
be field bonded, including but not limited to:
a. Medium- and heavy-duty construction adhesives.
b. Drywall adhesive.
c. Subfloor adhesive.
d. Polyurethane adhesive.
e. Repair construction adhesive.
f. Resilient base adhesive.
g. FRP adhesive.
h. Multipurpose flooring adhesive.
i. Ceramic tile adhesive.
j. Ceiling tile adhesive.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for
Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesives or 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives.
C. Approved Product and Manufacturer:
1. Titebond VOC-Compliant Adhesives, manufactured by Franklin International, Columbus,
OH, (888) 533-9043, as basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same type, design, quality, performance and VOC
compliance are acceptable.
2.05 LIGHT-GAGE METAL JOIST/TRUSS CONNECTORS
A. General: Light-gage, galvanized metal hangers, clips, straps, base and column caps, size and
type as indicated on the Drawings, as required to suit job conditions or as recommended by
manufacturer for intended application.
B. Finishes:
1. In contact with preservative treated wood for above ground use: Galvanized, ASTM
A653, G185.
2. In contact with preservative treated wood for other than above ground use: Type 304
or 316 stainless steel.
3. All other applications: Galvanized, ASMT G653, G90.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA, (800) 999-5099.
2. Timber Engineering Co.
3. KC Metal Products Inc., San Jose, CA, (408) 436-8754.
4. Semco, Jacksonville, FL, (800) 874-0335.
5. Manufacturers providing framing connectors and accessories of same design, function,
performance and structural capabilities are acceptable.
2.06 WOOD TREATMENTS
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on the Drawings or specified
06100 - 5
Radiant Park
herein to be pressure-treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA standards C2, C9,
C14, C15, C16, C17 or ICBO ER4981, as applicable. Pressure-treat items with waterborne
preservatives complying with WPA LP-2, except that in no case shall chromated copper
arsenate (CCA) be used. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 19% for
lumber and 18% for plywood. Mark each treated item with the WPA quality mark requirements.
1. Application Rates: Apply specified preservative treatment as follows, or as
recommended by approved manufacturers:
a. Preservative treatment for above ground use: 0.25 lb./cu.ft. minimum.
b. Preservative treatment where in contact with ground: 0.40 lb./cu.ft.
minimum.
c. Preservative treatment for wood foundation systems: 0.60 lb./cu.ft. minimum.
2. Treated wood products shall be used in the following locations, unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings:
a. In contact with roofing, flashing or waterproofing.
b. In contact with masonry or concrete.
c. In contact, or within 6" of grade.
d. Exposed to weather.
e. Other locations indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. General: For new construction, the Contractor shall inspect the concrete or masonry walls and
foundation structures and/or concrete flatwork that will support the rough carpentry structures
associated with the work of this project, and notify the Architect/Engineer of any condition
that may affect the structural integrity, quality or appearance of the completed project. Do
not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the
Contractor.
B. Upon inspection by the Architect and Owner, the deteriorated materials will be replaced on a
unit price basis. Refer to Section 01022.
C. Contractor shall verify the rough opening requirements for interior stair construction and
adjust the opening dimensions in the field as necessary, depending upon the type of stair
construction selected. Coordinate with the Architect/Engineer as necessary.
D. Ensure that prefabricated roof trusses are properly sized and marked upon delivery to the site.
Check connector plate sizes for compliance with specification requirements.
E. Selection of Lumber Pieces:
1. Carefully select the members. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious de-
fects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing and will allow for proper
connections.
2. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function.
3. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer, whether or not it has been
installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus or mold, as well as for
improper cutting and fitting, provided such defects exceed the criteria allowed by
referenced standards for the lumber grade specified. The Contractor shall replace
rejected material at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Do not shim any framing component.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. General:
1. Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels; do
not deviate from true alignment more than 1/4" in 10'-0".
2. Space members as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein.
3. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
4. Construct and erect required built-up beams, headers and curbs.
06100 - 6
Radiant Park
5. Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in
accordance with the Drawings and with applicable codes and regulations.
6. Set horizontal and sloped members with the crown up. Crowns to be set in the same
direction for vertical or horizontal application.
7. Make bearings full and uniform for solid support.
8. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary
not more than 1/8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing
members.
9. Where scheduled, leave wood surfaces prepared for finishing specified in Section
09900, Painting, and Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
10. Coordinate rough openings for non-cased and trimmed doors and windows where
gypsum board returns are detailed at jambs and headers. Framed opening shall be
square and plumb to within 1/16" vertically from floor to header at trimmer and 1/16"
horizontally between trimmers at header.
B. Fastening:
1. Nailing shall be in accordance with the requirements of applicable sections of the
building code, current edition, unless indicated otherwise.
a. Nail without splitting wood.
b. Prebore as required.
c. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified
requirements.
2. Bolting:
a. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used.
b. Drill straight and true from one side only.
c. Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where
both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
3. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of
threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank.
C. Furring and Stripping: Member sizes as indicated on the Drawings spaced at maximum 24" o.c.,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Window Sills: Frame with beveled sill plate or beveled shim, to drain to exterior of wall.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BLOCKING
A. Miscellaneous Blocking: Provide solid blocking for all recessed and surface-mounted equipment
and accessories, unless furnished and installed by Section 09110, including but not limited to:
1. Wall-mounted finish hardware, including wall stops.
2. Wall-mounted handrail brackets.
3. Toilet partitions and urinal screens.
4. Toilet and bath accessories, including grab bars.
5. Cabinets and shelving systems.
6. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.
7. Signage systems and plaques.
8. Head track assemblies for window coverings.
9. Wall bumper guardrails.
10. Plumbing fixtures.
11. Electrical equipment and fixtures.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING
A. General: Install plywood and/or oriented strand board (OSB) sheathing as shown on the
Drawings or specified herein.
1. Roof Sheathing: Exterior plywood.
B. Roof Sheathing:
1. Place sheathing with face grain perpendicular to framing members, except where
plywood diaphragm must be continuous to shear walls.
2. Place sheathing with end joints staggered.
3. Protect sheathing from moisture until roofings are installed.
06100 - 7
Radiant Park
3.05 INSTALLATION OF WOOD SIDING AND TRIM
A. General: Installation of wood siding and trim shall be work of this Section, unless arranged for
otherwise.
B. Refer to Section 07466 for installation specifications.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD SIDING, SOFFITS AND CEILINGS
A. General: Installation of plywood siding, soffits, ceiling panels, etc., shall be work of this
Section, unless arranged for otherwise.
B. Refer to Section 07466 for installation specifications.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain the following tolerances for all rough carpentry work. Defective work shall be
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
1. Variation from Plumb:
a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum
2. Variation in Plan:
a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum
b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum
3. Variation in Openings:
a. Size: +/-1/8"
b. Location: +/-1/4"
3.08 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect oriented strand board (OSB) and plywood sheathing from exposure to
excessive moisture and accumulations of snow. Broom snow off uncovered floor sheathing
within 4 hours of snowfall.
B. Replace sheathing panels that exhibit delamination, swelling or other deterioration from
exposure to moisture, or as directed by the Architect.
3.09 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required by all other Sections of the
Specifications as a part of the work of this Section. Coordination shall be provided to ensure
the proper, timely and complete installation of all materials, equipment and systems of the
project.
END OF SECTION
06200 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all softwood finish carpentry, running and standing trim.
B. Fabrication and field workmanship standards for miscellaneous exterior and interior materials
specified in other Sections.
C. Installation of the following items, unless arranged for otherwise:
1. Hollow metal doors and frames.
2. Window sills.
3. Solid surface countertops.
4. Finish hardware specified in Division 8.
5. Building specialties specified in Division 10.
6. Miscellaneous equipment and accessories as specified elsewhere.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
5. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
6. Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
7. Section 09900, Painting.
8. Section 10520, Fire Protection Specialties.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations and quality standards of
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
B. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and quality requirements of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified:
1. PS 51: Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
2. PS 58: Basic Hardwood.
3. NFPA (National Forest Products Association) National Design Specification for Wood
Construction.
4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
5. California Redwood Association.
6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit EQ 4.2: Manufacturer's product data for paints and stains, including printed
statement of VOC content and chemical components.
3. Credit EQ 4.4:
a. Product data for composite wood or agrifiber products indicating that they do
not contain any added urea-formaldehyde in resins.
06200 - 2
Radiant Park
b. Adhesive manufacturer's product data for each adhesive used indicating that
the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde.
4. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data indicating percentages by weight of
postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.
5. Credit MR7: Certificates of chain-of-custody signed by manufacturers certifying that
products specifed to be made from certified wood were made from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria". Include evidence that mill is certified for chain-of-custody by
an FSC-accredited certification body. Invoices must show chain of custody number.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Hardwood: Graded in accordance with AWI requirements, maximum moisture content of 6%.
1. Maple, Custom Grade, S4S, Plain Sawn:
a. Running and standing interior wood trim.
B. Casing, Base and Miscellaneous Trim Sizes:
1. 3/4" thick x widths detailed on the Drawings or required for project conditions.
2. 1-1/2" thick x widths detailed on the Drawings or required for project conditions.
C. Nails: Size and type to suit application.
D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application; non-rust finish
in concealed location and finish to match material in exposed locations.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: Wood glues with VOC content not exceeding 30 g/L;
adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for multi-purpose
construction adhesives, 140 g/L for structural wood adhesives or 250 g/L for
architectural sealants.
3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, indicating
that product contains no added urea formaldehyde.
4. Credit MR 7: At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations of AWI and in
accordance with site-determined measurements.
B. Fabricate running and standing trim, interior stair railing components, casings and base as
detailed on the Drawings.
C. Shop-fabricate finish carpentry items to greatest extent practicable. Shop-assemble finish
carpentry items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through
building openings.
1. Fabricate 1-1/2" thick units by shop laminating two (2) pieces of 3/4" material,
staggering joints.
D. Field-fabricated running and standing trim and other finish carpentry items shall be fabricated
in accordance with the workmanship standards specified in paragraph 3.02 below.
1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Fabrication shall match jointery of existing
materials.
E. Attachments: Fabricate all finish carpentry items for countersunk attachment to substrates.
Provide wood plugs, same species as surrounding wood.
06200 - 3
Radiant Park
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall field measure conditions as required for the successful installation of all finish
carpentry items.
B. Installer shall examine the rough framing, wall blocking and other substrates and finishes under
which the finish carpentry work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any
condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work of this Section. Do not
proceed with the installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be considered acceptance
of substrates and site conditions.
C. Installer shall be responsible for inspecting all finish carpentry materials and culling any
material not meeting the quality standards of these Specifications, or that exhibit defects such
as knots, checks, splits, warping, bowing or excessive variation in color or grain. All materials
installed in the finished construction shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP FOR SITE-FABRICATED FINISH CARPENTRY
A. General: Site fabricate running and standing trim, casings, base and other finish carpentry
items in accordance with recommendations of AWI and in accordance with site-determined
measurements.
B. Scribe, miter and join running and standing trim accurately and neatly to conform to details.
C. Layout running and standing trim and other site-fabricated finish carpentry work to balance
lengths of material at each end of runs. Use longest possible lengths of material; joints will
not be allowed where single-length pieces can be used, in accordance with the following:
1. Running and standing trim, where grain is parallel to the length of the piece: 8'-0" long
minimum.
2. Running and standing trim, where grain is perpendicular to the length of the piece: 4'-
0" long minimum.
3. No lengths less than 24" long will be allowed.
D. All vertical end joints of finished carpentry along the run of running or standing trim shall have
scarf-type joints.
E. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. General: Set and secure finish carpentry items in place rigid, plumb and square in a manner
consistent with AWI requirements and recommendations.
B. Materials shall be installed in accordance with site-determined measurements. When
necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim
for scribing and site cutting. Ensure tolerances of not more than 1/8" in 10'.
C. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry.
D. Countersink semi-concealed anchorage devices used for wall-mount components and conceal
with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush and ensure that direction of
grain matches surrounding wood where scheduled for transparent finish.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED WOOD MILLWORK
A. General: Install prefabricated millwork components in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Erect the components plumb and square, true to lines, levels and/or elevations shown on the
Drawings.
C. Position supports and anchorage devices and set components in place prior to securing
fasteners.
D. Site cut components as required to meet site conditions, unless factory fabricated to exact
dimensions. If field cuts are made, consult with the Architect as necessary to maintain design
intent of installation.
06200 - 4
Radiant Park
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OTHER SECTIONS
A. Install doors and frames, windows, finish hardware, fixtures, accessories, specialties and
equipment supplied under other Sections for installation. Install items in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
3.06 PREPARATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY FOR FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
1. Items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
2. Items to receive opaque finishes, caulk all joints in running and standing trim.
C. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, outlet boxes and other fixtures and equipment.
Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions.
D. Fiberboard: MDF carpentry items shall be factory primed.
E. Refer to Sections 09900, Painting, and 09930, Transparent Finishes, for field finishing.
3.07 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Install finish carpentry items at mounting heights shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
All items in handicapped accessible areas shall comply with American National Standards
Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1-1992 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
1990.
END OF SECTION
06650 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 06650
SOLID POLYMER COUNTERTOP FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish solid polymer lavatory countertops, aprons and backsplashes.
B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals.
4. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
6. Section 10800, Toilet Accessories.
7. Division 15, Mechanical: Under-lavatory countertop mounted sinks and faucets.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ANSI A117.1-1986, Handicapped Accessibility.
2. ASTM D638: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties.
3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Certification: Furnish Certificate of Compliance attesting that all materials meet the
requirements of this Section.
C. All components and assemblies shall meet applicable requirements of the Americans with
Disabilities Act, 1990, for handicapped accessibility.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature, technical specifications, and
installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating anchorage and mounting details, coordination
of work specified in other Sections, finishes and all relevant dimensions.
C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of colors for selection by the Architect.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all solid polymer components in manufacturer's original packaging with protective
covers intact. Marred, scratched or stained surfaces will not be acceptable.
B. Store in a manner in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
06650 - 2
Radiant Park
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's 10-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship,
including breakage, corrosion and delamination.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOLID POLYMER COUNTERTOP FABRICATIONS
A. General: Lavatory countertops to be solid polymer sheets, fabricated from polymer resins
under high pressure, forming single component sections that are waterproof, corrosion-proof,
impact-resistant and non-absorbent.
1. Material Thickness: 3/4".
2. Molded-in Accessories: Provide molded-in sinks where specifically shown on the
Drawings or specified herein.
B. Support Panels: Furnish intermediate support panels, wall-hung type, where shown on the
Drawings, but not exceeding 3'-0" o.c.
C. Backsplashes and Aprons: Provide miscellaneous fabrications as shown on the Drawings or
required for a complete installation.
D. Color(s): Solid plastic components shall be fabricated with color homogenous throughout the
material.
1. Color(s) to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard
colors.
E. Attachments, Screws and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamperproof type, 304 satin finish where
exposed.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
G. Approved Styles and Manufacturers:
1. Corian Surfaces by Dupont Co., Scranton, PA, (800) 368-5002.
2. Avonite Surfaces by Aristech Acrylics L.L.C., Florence, KY, (800) 354-9858.
3. Swanstone by The Swan Corporation, St. Louis, MO.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, quality, performance and
appearance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricator/installer shall be approved by solid polymer manufacturer.
B. Dimensions: Fabricate units in manufacturer's standard sizes, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings or specified herein:
1. Vanities, Apron and Splashes: 24" wide x full length of vanity, one-piece construction
for each component of vanity, apron and backsplash.
C. Provide factory cutouts in lavatory countertops for sinks, faucets and other accessories. Refer
to Divisions 10 and 15.
D. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts and sand edges
smooth. Repair or replace defective or inaccurate work.
E. Edge Type: Ease all exposed edges uniformly.
F. Finish: All surfaces shall have uniform finish.
1. Semi-gloss, gloss rating 25-50.
2.03 ADHESIVES, GROUTS AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for composite stone and ceramic tile and
recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.
B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: Conforming to ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, by W. R. Bonsal Company, Bonstone
Materials Corp., Custom Building Products, Laticrete International, MAPEI Corp. or equal.
06650 - 3
Radiant Park
C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: Conforming to ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-
cleanable, tile-setting and –grouting epoxy, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, by Boirdi Products Corp., W. R. Bonsal Company,
Bostik Findley Inc., Custom Building Products, Laticrete International, MAPEI Corp. or equal.
1. Color(s) to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard
colors.
D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below,
complying with the applicable requirements of Section 07900 and will not stain the composite
stone materials.
1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
3. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for
multi-purpose construction adhesives and 250 g/L for architectural sealants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall inspect the rooms, substrates and conditions under which the vanities,
countertops, backsplashes and aprons and miscellaneous fabrications are to be installed prior
to commencing work of this Section. Notify the Contractor of any discrepancies in dimensions,
tolerances or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin
work until such conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Installer shall field verify site dimensions affecting this work prior to fabrication.
C. Obtain cutout requirements for sinks and faucets from the Contractor.
1. Ensure correct spacing of plumbing fixtures.
2. Ensure correct location of built-in framing, anchorage and bracing, where required.
3. Ensure locations of cutouts for accessories and plumbing fixtures.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install solid polymer lavatory countertops, backsplashes, aprons and other
miscellaneous fabrications in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Install units plumb, level and square with manufacturer's standard brackets and tamper-proof
bolts, nuts and washers.
C. Mount accessories and plumbing fixtures using manufacturer’s recommended adhesives and
hardware.
D. Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16" in 48".
2. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8" in 96", 1/4" maximum.
3. Variation in Joint Width: Hairline.
4. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64" difference between planes
of adjacent units.
5. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64" difference between
edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Damaged, scratched, stained or marred materials will not be acceptable and shall be replaced
with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Remove protective coverings and thoroughly clean solid plastic surfaces and hardware in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
07180 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 07180
WATER REPELLENT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install clear water-based silicone emulsion graffiti-resistance sealer for precast
concrete and simulated unit masonry.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Clear sealer, if specified.
4. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Integral water-repellent admixture.
5. Section 04430, Simulated Stone Masonry.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Application of water repellent sealer shall be by skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
C. Applicator shall be certified by the manufacturer of the specified water repellent system as an
approved applicator.
D. LEED Compliance: Not applicable.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature indicating compliance with
the requirements of this Section, including installation instructions.
B. LEED Submittals: Not applicable.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels
intact and legible at the time of use.
B. Maintain the products in a dry condition during delivery, storage, handling, and installation.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer’s written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
B. Provide installer’s written 5-year warranty covering application.
C. Should water penetrate through the work of this Section within warranty period following the
date of Substantial Completion of the work, and promptly upon receipt of notice from the
Owner to that affect, the materials supplier will provide such additional water repellent
materials as are required, and the applicator will provide such equipment, labor and other
materials as are required and will properly repair the area through which water penetrated, at
no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Should the water penetration not be due to faulty original workmanship or labor of this
Section, the equipment, labor and materials will be paid for promptly by the Owner at the
current rates of the Contractor, material supplier and applicator.
07180 - 2
Radiant Park
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEAR WATER-BASED SILICONE GRAFFITI-RESISTANT SEALER
A. Type: Clear, penetrating water-based silicone emulsion, breathable to allow moisture vapor
transmission, specifically formulated for graffiti control on precast concrete, brick, stucco, and
other dense surfaces without altering the natural appearance.
B. Performance Criteria: Provide the following minimum performance standards:
1. Water Permeance: Greater than 94% when tested in accordance with ASTM E-514.
2. Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate: 95% minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM
E-96 and D-1653.
3. Accelerated Weathering: No change at 1500 hours.
4. VOC Content: 600 g/L of coating maximum.
5. Durability: Sealer shall have the permeance to allow for removal of graffiti up to five
(5) times without the need for reapplication of the sealer.
C. LEED Design Criteria: None.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Sure Klean Weather Seal Blok-Guard and Graffiti Control II by Prosoco Inc., Lawrence,
KS, (785) 865-4200, as the basis of design.
2. Chemprobe Technologies, Inc., (800) 760-6776.
3. Huls America, Inc., Somerset, NJ, (800) 828-0919.
4. Okon, Inc., Lakewood, CO (303) 232-3571.
5. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, quality, durability, and
performance are acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Applicator shall examine the wall surfaces to receive the specified water repellent sealer and
notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the successful application or
performance of the product. Do not proceed with application until unacceptable conditions
have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Applicator.
B. Prior to beginning application, the Applicator shall attend a jobsite meeting with the
Contractor, Architect, and Owner to discuss the application procedure and any necessary
safeguards or precautions that need to be taken by the Contractor. Manufacturer's technical
representative shall also attend this meeting, if required by warranty coverage.
C. Ensure that all precast concrete and masonry to receive the specified water repellent sealer
has been thoroughly cleaned as specified in their respective Sections.
D. Ensure that all caulking and sealant work in precast concrete or masonry work has been
completed and approved prior to application of sealers.
E. Ensure that windows, doors, glazing, metal flashings, louvers, and other materials installed in
the walls or wall panels to receive water repellent sealers are properly masked and protected
prior to beginning application.
F. Remove loose materials, debris, and other items which might adversely affect integrity of the
water repellent.
G. Take all necessary precautions to prevent contamination of stormwater run-off areas or other
drainageways.
H. Coordinate scheduling of the work of this Section with other trades as necessary for the timely
completion of the work.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF GRAFFITI-RESISTANT SEALER
A. General: Apply specified graffiti-resistant, water repellent sealer in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, and with any applicable requirements of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction over this project.
07180 - 3
Radiant Park
B. Apply one (1) coat (wet on wet) of the specified clear sealer, at the application rate required
by the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Protect treated surfaces from rainfall for minimum six (6) hours after treatment.
D. Upon completion, any further soiling or damage to the precast concrete or masonry surfaces
shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Completed application of graffiti-resistant sealers shall be inspected by the manufacturer's
technical representative, as required by the warranty coverage.
PART 4 SCHEDULE
4.01 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General: Apply the specified clear sealer to the following areas:
1. Architectural precast concrete wall caps and copings.
2. Architectural precast concrete simulated stone veneer.
END OF SECTION
07190 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 07190
VAPOR RETARDERS AND BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install vapor non-permeable barrier system beneath concrete slab-on-grade
construction, complete with membrane, seam tape, mastic, pipe boots and other accessories.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
5. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
6. Section 07212, Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System.
7. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers: Vapor permeable air infiltration wraps and
flashings.
8. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers: Sealants at edges of crawlspace vapor
barriers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM E1643: Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of
Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete
Slabs.
2. ASTM E1745: Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
3. ASTM E154: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Concrete with
Earth Under Concrete Slabs.
4. ASTM E96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
5. ACI 302.1R-04: Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane) is not less than 10 mils
thick.
6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Reference Standards: Comply with FS UU-B-790A and VA and FHA minimum property standards
for vapor barrier placement under slabs.
C. LEED Compliance: Not applicable.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature indicating compliance with
this Section, including installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit samples of specified product(s), minimum 12" x 12".
C. LEED Submittals: Not applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BELOW-GRADE VAPOR BARRIER
A. Concrete Slab-on-Grade Vapor Barrier: Polyolefin geomembrane-type vapor barrier system,
minimum Class A complying with ASTM E96, ASTM E1643 and ASTM E1745, complete with
07190 - 2
Radiant Park
specified membrane, seam tape, mastic, pipe boots and other accessory materials for a
complete installation.
1. Thickness: 15-mil minimum.
2. Roll Width: Manufacturer's Standard.
3. Water Vapor Barrier: Class A, ASTM E1745.
4. Permeance Rating, ASTM E-96: 0.01 perms maximum.
B. Seam Tape: Compatible with specified vapor barrier membrane.
1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate, ASTM E-96: 0.3 perms maximum.
C. Vapor Proofing Mastic: Compatible with specified vapor barrier membrane.
1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate, ASTM E-96: 0.3 perms maximum.
D. Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or
mastic per manufacturer's instructions.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Stego Wrap 15-Mil Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, San Juan Capistrano, CA, (877)
464-7834, as basis of design.
2. Premoulded Membrane with Plasmatic Core by W. R. Meadows, Hampshire, IL, (800)
342-5976.
3. Translucent polyethylene sheet is NOT acceptable.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are
acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Concrete Slab-on-Grade Construction: Ensure that below-grade plumbing and other subgrade
work is completed and approved prior to installation of vapor barrier. Ensure that subgrade
has been properly compacted, rolled and/or tamped and approved by Soils Engineer.
B. Cellulose Insulation Installation: Where specified, vapor barrier is to cover wet-sprayed
cellulose insulation, ensure that insulation has dried for a minimum of 72 hours prior to
installation of vapor barrier.
3.02 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. General: Contractor shall conduct a pre-installation meeting to discuss installation
requirements for the below-grade vapor barrier system, to include:
1. General Contractor.
2. Installing Subcontractor.
3. Manufacturer's Technical Representative.
B. Manufacturer shall have no responsibility for inspection of the completed installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE VAPOR BARRIERS
A. General: Install below-grade vapor barrier membrane system in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, and the requirements of ASTM E1643
and ASTM E1745.
1. Unroll vapor barrier membrane with the longest dimension parallel with the direction
of the slab pour.
2. Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls.
3. Overlap joints minimum 6" and seal with manufacturer's tape.
4. Seal all penetrations including pipes per manufacturer's instructions.
07190 - 3
Radiant Park
5. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and
permanent utilities.
6. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6"
and taping all four (4) sides with tape.
END OF SECTION
07210 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 07210
THERMAL BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install building insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for
building elements and spaces, including:
1. Unfaced and faced rigid board insulation in exterior wall construction.
2. Foamed-in insulation at roof framing.
3. Foamed-in masonry cell insulation for hollow core masonry construction.
B. Installation of insulation materials furnished as part of the prefabricated steel building
systems, unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Installation of pourable loose-fill insulation.
4. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders.
5. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation
6. Section 07216, Composite Nailbase Insulation.
7. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
8. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim: Insulation baffles.
9. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
10. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Requirements for foamed insulation
in hollow metal doors and frames.
11. Division 15, Mechanical: Ductwork and piping insulations.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. FS HH-I-524: Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene).
2. FS L-P-375C (2): Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl-Chloride.
3. FS HH-I-521: Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for ambient temperatures.
4. FS HH-I-103B: Insulation, Blown-in Fiberglass.
5. ASTM E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
6. ASTM C665: Faced Insulation Materials.
7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos and
added urea formaldehyde and are non-toxic.
C. Certification: Fiberglass materials for interior building installations shall be GreenGuard
certified for indoor air quality.
D. Certification: Installer shall install an insulation certification card upon completion of the
insulation work as specified in paragraph 3.04.
E. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating
compliance with the requirements of this Section for each type of insulation material specified.
Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being furnished.
07210 - 2
Radiant Park
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches.
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or
equal.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide the manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of
R-value of insulation materials for the following terms:
1. Foil-Faced Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years.
2. Pourable Loose-Fill Insulation: One (1) year.
3. Foamed-in Masonry Cell Insulation: One (1) year.
4. Spray Polyurethane Foam: Two (2) years.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Install spray polyurethane foam work only when weather
conditions are in compliance with manufacturer’s specific environmental requirements and
conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and warranty requirements.
B. Spray Polyurethane Foam:
1. Do not proceed with installation of spray polyurethane foam until sheathing substrate
construction is complete and openings and penetrating items have been installed and
sealed.
2. Do not proceed with installation of spray polyurethane foam until substrate surface
temperatures accepting the spray polyurethane are above the manufacturer’s
recommended minimum surface temperatures.
3. Verify that substrate surfaces to receive spray polyurethane foam are free of frost, oil,
grease, oxidation, dirt, loose paint, loose scale, or other deleterious material that
would impair bond.
4. Do not apply spray polyurethane after the 6-month expiration date printed on the label
of each container.
5. Ventilate area to receive spray polyurethane foam by introducing fresh air and
exhausting air continuously during and 24 hours after application to maintain non-toxic,
unpolluted, safe working conditions.
6. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray and noxious vapors from contaminating
air beyond application area.
7. Protect workers as recommended by spray polyurethane foam manufacturer.
8. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fallout and
dusting of insulation materials.
9. Dispose of waste foam daily in location designated by Architect and empty drums in
accordance with foam manufacturer’s instructions.
07210 - 3
Radiant Park
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTRUDED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION
A. General: Comply with FS HH-I-1972/1, Class 2. Aluminum foil-faced, glass fiber reinforced
polyisocyanurate foam rigid board insulation. Density not less than 2.0 pcf; compressive
strength of 25 psi. Aged R-value of 7.2 minimum per inch at 75° F, tested in accordance with
ASTM C236. Board width: 16".
1. Apply to exterior of perimeter CMU walls with light-gage steel furred walls.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% minimum.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Thermax by Celotex, Fremont, CA, (800) 227-1216, as the basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.02 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM AIR BARRIER
A. General: Two-component spray polyurethane cellular plastic foam, complying with the
following methods and meeting the following physical properties:
1. Core Density (ASTM D1622): Nominal 2 lbs./cu. ft.
2. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): 140° F/90-day aged R-value, measured at 75° F mean
temperature: Minimum R6.1/inch.
3. Flame Spread: (ASTM E84, Class A): 25 or less.
4. Smoke Developed (ASTM E84, Class A): 450 or less.
5. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621, 10% parallel to rise): 25 psi minimum.
6. Closed Cell Content (ASTM D2856): 90% minimum.
7. Water Absorption by Volume (ASTM D2842): 5.0% maximum.
8. Water Vapor Permeability (ASTM E96): 3.0 perm-inches maximum.
B. Performance Criteria:
1. Class 1, not more than 25 flame spread index and 450 smoke developed index,
classified at maximum thickness per UL 723 criteria or ASTM E84 criteria.
2. Fire Performance Evaluation as a component of an NFPA 285 approved wall assembly,
per requirements of the International Building Code.
C. Approved Product(s): Formulation required will be dependent upon surface temperature of
substrate. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. Styrofoam Spray Polyurethane Foam CM2045:
a. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): 140° F/90-day aged R-value, measured at 75°
F mean temperature: Minimum R-6.1/inch.
b. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): 140° F/90-day aged R-value, measured at 75°
F mean temperature: Minimum R-49.
2. Styrofoam Spray Polyurethane Foam CM2060:
a. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): 140° F/90-day aged R-value, measured at 75°
F mean temperature: Minimum R-6.4/inch.
b. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): 140° F/90-day aged R-value, measured at 75°
F mean temperature: Minimum R-49.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Thermax by Celotex, Fremont, CA, (800) 227-1216, as the basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.03 FOAMED-IN MASONRY CELL INSULATION
A. General: Two-component foamed-in-place insulation system, consisting of amino-plast resin
and a catalyst foaming agent surfactant, Class A fire rating when tested in accordance with
ESTM E-84. R-value of 9.1 when installed in 8" thick concrete unit masonry walls.
1. Apply in all non-grouted cells of exterior hollow concrete unit masonry walls where
shown on the Drawings.
07210 - 4
Radiant Park
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc., Hickory, NC, (800) 627-1687.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.04 INSULATION ATTACHMENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive or Attachments: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, capable of securely
adhering insulation to applicable surfaces.
B. Vapor Barrier: Specified in Section 07190.
C. Tape: 2" wide self-adhering type, polyethylene-faced.
D. Air Infiltration Wrap: Specified in Section 07270.
E. Provide other accessories as required for a complete and thermally enclosed installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the surfaces, substrates, wall, floor and attic/ceiling cavities and
conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in
writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure that building shell has been completely and properly "dried in" prior to installation of
thermal insulation materials.
C. Ensure that insulation baffles have been properly installed in attic spaces.
D. Ensure that all electrical lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment and other devices protruding
into rafter, attic or soffit cavities are properly rated to be in contact with insulation. If they
are not, Contractor shall build enclosures around such fixtures to hold insulation materials
away as required by the fixture manufacturer's warranty and installation requirements.
Maintain tops of enclosures open to allow adequate ventilation of fixtures and devices. (Notify
Architect of any non-complying materials.)
E. Ensure that all existing and/or new electrical wiring and other devices protruding into wall
cavities are properly rated to be in contact with foamed-in insulation materials.
F. Installer shall discuss specific site conditions with the Architect concerning the proper selection
of appropriate materials for ceiling/attic installations, as referenced in Paragraph 3.03.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight.
B. Install insulation to fit tightly between framing members and fill all voids.
C. Fit insulation tight against mechanical, electrical and other items which protrude through plane
of insulation; fit insulation to outside of plumbing in exterior walls.
D. Ensure that cavities, chases and other void spaces open to attics, crawlspaces, etc. are sealed
with insulation, unless used as approved mechanical plenums.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FOIL-FACED EXTRUDED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION
A. General: Install rigid board insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. If instructions do not apply to project conditions, consult
with manufacturer's technical representative before proceeding with the work.
07210 - 5
Radiant Park
B. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive board insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter
and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation.
C. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building
spaces and elements. Use board insulation free of broken or chipped edges.
D. Secure rigid insulation in place using material of panel width required for spacing of Z-furring,
specified in Section 09110. Place insulation vertically, stagger horizontal joints and fit tightly
between furring members without gaps.
E. Install insulation with foil-face to the warm side of building spaces using method recommended
by manufacturer with specified adhesive.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF FOAMED-IN MASONRY CELL INSULATION
A. General: Install foamed-in-place insulation in all non-grouted areas of exterior 8" hollow
concrete unit masonry, in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Drill holes in mortar joints in increments recommended by the manufacturer, unless insulation
is to be installed from the top of uncapped walls.
C. Install insulation to completely fill all cavities and voids.
D. Patch holes in mortar joints upon completion of installation.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM
A. Preparation: Ensure that all insulation and masonry veneer attachments are completed and
approved prior to application of spray polyurethane foam.
1. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from overspray.
2. Apply primers for special conditions as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Cover wide joints with transition sheet membrane as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Clean work area prior to application of sprayed insulation.
5. Verify substrate temperature meets manufacturer’s requirements for specific
formulations used.
B. Application: Spray apply polyurethane foam in accordance with ASTM C1029 and
manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
1. Apply spray polyurethane foam by picture framing and one pass across all surfaces and
penetrations.
2. Finish applying spray polyurethane foam with one pass not exceeding 2" in thickness.
Two passes are acceptable to reach maximum thickness of 2".
3. Avoid formation of sub-layer air pockets.
4. Apply spray polyurethane foam in overlapping layers, in a manner to obtain a smooth,
uniform surface. Total thickness as indicated.
5. Do not apply spray polyurethane foam to inside of exit openings or electrical junction
boxes.
6. Maintain a continuous layer of spray foam from floor to roof to complete air barrier.
7. Site Tolerances: Maximum Variation in Applied Thickness: -1/4"/+5/8".
3.06 INSULATION CERTIFICATION
A. Upon completion, the Installer shall install an insulation certification card in the attic space of
each unit or applicable portion of building, at the access panel, stating the following
information:
1. Name of installer.
2. Date of installation.
3. Manufacturer(s) of insulation materials installed.
4. Types of insulation materials installed.
5. R-values of insulation materials installed.
END OF SECTION
07215-1
Radiant Park
SECTION 07215
FOUNDATION INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install foundation insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for
building elements, including:
1. Unfaced rigid board insulation at exterior perimeter foundation walls.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting: Foundation
excavation.
4. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
5. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders.
6. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. FS HH-I-524: Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene).
2. FS L-P-375C(2): Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl-Chloride.
3. FS HH-I-521: Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for ambient temperatures.
4. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos and
urea formaldehyde and are non-toxic.
C. Certification: Fiberglass materials for interior crawlspace installations shall be GreenGuard
certified for indoor air quality.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product literature and specifications indicating
compliance with the requirements of Section for each type of insulation material specified.
Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being furnished.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer’s original packaging, complete with installation instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder’s torches.
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or
equal.
07215-2
Radiant Park
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide the manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of
R-value of insulation materials for the following terms:
1. Faced Blanket Insulation: One (1) year.
2. Extruded Polystyrene Rigid Board Insulation: One (1) year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION
A. General: Comply with FS HH-I-524C, Type IV, high-density, extruded polystyrene rigid board
insulation, square edges. Compressive strength of 25 psi. R-value of 5.0 minimum per inch at
75° F. K-value of 0.20.
1. Apply at perimeter foundation walls of new construction as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Apply at perimeter grade beams of new construction as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Apply as protection board where specified as part of waterproofing and/or
dampproofing systems. Refer to Sections 07130 and 07150.
4. Thickness(es): 2" thick, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% minimum.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Styrofoam SM, Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, (800) 232-2436.
2. Foamular 250, UC Industries, Chicago, IL.
3. Amofoam CM or RCY, Amoco Foam Products Co., Atlanta, GA, (800) 241-4402.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the foundation and/or grade beam surfaces and crawlspace conditions
under which the foundation insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in
writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight. Fit insulation
tight against mechanical, electrical and other items which protrude through plane of
insulation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION
A. General: Install rigid board insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions and recommendations. If instructions do not apply to project conditions, consult
with manufacturer’s technical representative before proceeding with the work.
B. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive board insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter
and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation.
C. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building
spaces and elements. Use board insulation free of broken or chipped edges.
D. Secure rigid insulation on perimeter foundation walls and/or grade beams with specified
adhesive or other attachment using spot or bead method in accordance with insulation
manufacturer’s recommendations. Place insulation horizontally and stagger vertical joints.
E. For conditions where rigid board insulation is installed to the exterior face of foundation walls
and/or grade beams, extend insulation to within 2" of finished grade elevation, and protect top
07215-3
Radiant Park
edge with flexible fabric-type flashing membrane approved by insulation manufacturer. Attach
flashing to foundation wall and/or grade beam and extend down face of rigid board insulation
12" minimum. Where concrete sidewalks or aprons abut the exterior foundation, extend
insulation up to underside of sidewalk or apron unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F. As Dampproofing or Waterproofing Protection Board: Refer to Sections 07130 or 07150.
END OF SECTION
07270 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 07270
AIR INFILTRATION BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install vapor permeable air infiltration wrap for exterior wall construction.
B. Furnish and install self-adhesive moisture/air infiltration flashings at windows and doors in
framed wall construction.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders and Barriers: Vapor non-permeable barriers.
4. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
5. Section 07212, Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System.
6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
7. Division 8, Doors and Windows.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to current requirements of applicable portions of standards,
codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
1. ASTM D-779-03, Standard Test Method for Water Resistance of Paper, Paperboard, and
Other Sheet Materials by the Dry Indicator Method.
2. ASTM D-829-97, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Paper, Paperboard Using
Constant-Rate-of-Elongation Apparatus.
3. ASTM E-96-95, Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
4. ASTM E-331-00, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
5. ASTM F-1249-01, Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through
Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.
6. FS UU-B-790a, Type 1, Grade A, Style 4, ICBO Evaluation Report No. 1025.
7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Installer: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the work of this Section.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature, specifications or technical data
indicating compliance with the requirements of this Section for each type of air/moisture
infiltration material specified.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product Data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches.
07270 - 2
Radiant Park
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or
equal.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. General: Follow manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations for product handling
and application.
B. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is between 40° F and 120° F
before installation. Consult manufacturer if installation must be done at temperatures below the
minimum.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty for materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SYNTHETIC MASONRY AIR INFILTRATION WRAP
A. General: Sheet-type air infiltration membrane designed to prevent airflow through synthetic
masonry, hold out bulk water and wind-driven rain/snow and act as breathable membrane to
allow moisture vapor to escape from within walls.
B. Material: Spunbonded Olefin fiber, non-woven, non-perforated secondary weather-resistant
barrier, with vertical ribbed pattern.
1. Roll Size: 9' x 100' or as required by site conditions.
2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Compliance: Materials shall meet or exceed the following standards:
1. Air Penetration, ASTM E-1677: Type 1 minimum.
2. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E-96, Method B: 10 perms minimum/90 perms
maximum.
3. Water Penetration Resistance, AATCC-127: 210 cm.
4. Basis Weight, TAPPI T-41D: 2.1 oz./sq. yd.
5. Breaking Strength, ASTM D-882: 30/30 lbs./in.
6. Tear Resistance, ASTM D-117: 7/9 lbs.
7. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E-84: Class A flame spread and Class A smoke
developed.
D. Attachments: Manufacturer-approved attachments, as required for specific project
requirements.
1. Capped mechanical fasteners. Staples are not permitted.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
F. Approved Materials and Manufacturers:
1. Tyvek StuccoWrap by DuPont, Wilmington, DE, (800) 448-9835, as basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are
acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 MOISTURE/AIR INFILTRATION FLASHINGS
A. General: Self-adhesive, flexible moisture/air infiltration flashing, designed to prevent incidental
moisture intrusion around windows and doors in concealed perimeter flashing system.
07270 - 3
Radiant Park
B. Material: Fiberglass-reinforced membrane coated on both sides with water-resistant
polyethylene, backed with an aggressive 3" wide self-adhesive, self-sealing attachment band.
1. Strip Width: Minimum 6", use width recommended by manufacturer for specific
application(s).
2. Thickness: 12 mil minimum (membrane); 35 mil minimum (membrane plus adhesive
band).
3. Roll Length: 75', or manufacturer's standard.
C. Compliance: Materials shall meet or exceed the following standards:
1. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E-96: Less than 0.30 perms.
2. Water Resistance, ASTM D-779: 24 hours minimum.
3. Tensile Strength, ASTM D-828: MD - 20 lbs. f/inch.
CD – 20 lbs. f/inch
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Moistop E-Z Seal by Fortifiber Building Systems Group, (800) 773-4777.
2. StraightFlash and FlexWrap by DuPont, Wilmington, DE, (800) 448-9835.
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are
acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
F. Sill Seal: Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the wall substrates, window and door openings, and other conditions
under which air infiltration barrier materials are to be installed and notify the Contractor in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure that surfaces of wall sheathing and/or insulation, windows and door frame flanges and
other substrate materials are dry and clean, free of dirt, oil, construction debris or other
substances that may interfere with adhesion or the system performance.
3.02 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. General: Contractor shall conduct a pre-installation meeting to discuss installation requirements
for the vapor permeable air infiltration wrap system, to include:
1. General Contractor.
2. Installing Contractor.
3. Manufacturer's Technical Representative.
B. Manufacturer shall have no responsibility for inspection of the completed installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF SHEET-TYPE AIR INFILTRATION WRAP
A. General: Apply air infiltration wrap materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
B. Install air infiltration wrap after wall sheathing has been installed and approved, but prior to
installation of exterior doors and windows.
C. Install rolls horizontally beginning at the floor line and moving up the walls. Lap bottom edge
minimum 1" below joint at top of foundation.
07270 - 4
Radiant Park
D. Lap rolls minimum 6" at horizontal seams. Vertical seams shall be lapped 6-12".
E. Attach membrane with manufacturer-approved anchorages. If staples are used, they must have
1" minimum crown. Secure at 12-18" o.c. along vertical stud lines.
F. Wrap air infiltration membrane down over roof/wall flashing transitions.
G. Cut modified "I" in the membrane at window and door openings. Fold side and bottom flaps into
opening and secure. Cut head flap and flip up to expose sheathing, and temporarily secure.
H. Install flexible sill flashing, specified below.
I. Apply continuous bead of sealant along sides (jambs) and across head of rough opening. Position
such that window or door frame flange will contact sealant. Do not apply sealant across bottom
of opening, to allow moisture to escape.
J. Install windows and/or door frames, specified elsewhere.
K. Install jamb and then head flashings, specified below. Flip down head section of air infiltration
wrap and secure with tape.
L. Apply sealant to rear side of window sill sections.
M. Tape all vertical and horizontal seams in wrap.
N. Tape all plumbing, mechanical and electrical fixtures, equipment, piping and conduit protruding
through air infiltration wrap.
O. Synthetic Masonry Air Infiltration Wrap:
1. Shingle stucco wrap over the upper back edge of the lath weep screed for proper
drainage.
2. Install stucco wrap with grooved surface pattern running vertically to encourage moisture
to drain down to the weep screed.
P. Upon completion of air infiltration wrap installation, inspect wrap for holes, tears and punctures
and repair damaged areas. Wrap shall be airtight and free from holes, tears and punctures.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE/AIR INFILTRATION FLASHINGS
A. General: Apply self-adhesive flashing materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
B. Installation Sequence:
1. Ensure that air infiltration wrap has been properly installed, cut at window and/or door
openings and wrapped through the rough openings, as specified above.
2. Install self-adhesive, flexible strip flashings to sills and lower jambs of window and/or
door openings.
3. Apply compatible sealant to back surface of window and/or door frame flanges, and
install windows and/or door frames.
C. Peel away release paper and place self-adhesive strip flashings over window and/or door frame
sill flanges, then jambs, then heads, extending material beyond the flange opening and lapping
materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply firm pressure with a metal or wood roller
along the entire adhesive strip to ensure continuous seal.
D. Upon completion of installation, inspect strip flashings for gaps, holes, tears and punctures and
repair damaged areas. Flashings shall be airtight and free from holes, tears and punctures.
E. Cover installation as soon as possible. Do not leave strip flashings exposed to sunlight longer than
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
07621 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 07621
GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install new galvanized sheet metal reglets, counterflashings, downspouts and
overflow scuppers as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Furnish and install galvanized sheet metal valley and drip flashings.
C. Furnish and install galvanized sheet metal sill flashings at masonry veneer/caps, and
miscellaneous trims.
D. Furnish and install prefinished metal soffit vents and roof vents.
E. Furnish miscellaneous metal flashings to other Sections as required.
F. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Flexible masonry flashings.
4. Section 04430, Simulated Stone Masonry: Flexible masonry flashings.
5. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
7. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition.
2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Fabrication and installation shall be by manufacturer's personnel or manufacturer approved
Subcontractor with minimum five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and
complexity. Installation of fascias, parapet and cap flashings, or other areas exposed to view,
shall not be performed by the roofing Subcontractor, unless they meet the qualifications
specified herein and are approved by the Architect and Owner.
C. Design Criteria:
1. Wind Resistance: 100 mph, Exposure B (IBC) for galvanized metal flashing and trim.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and shop drawings indicating proposed
materials, shapes, proposed layout of joints, special details and intersections, and fabrication
and assembly details.
B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard colors of prefinished flashings, gutters and
downspouts for selection by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard profiles of galvanized flashings and trim for selection
by the Architect.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
07621 - 2
Radiant Park
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 10-, 15-year system warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship, and covering all specified design criteria. Warranty shall be written to cover the
wind resistance specified in paragraph 1.02 C above.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. General: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, except ASTM 527 for lock-forming
hot-dipped galvanized, standard G90 class finish. Use in applications not exposed to view,
unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings.
1. Gages:
a. 24-gage for cap flashings and step flashings.
b. 24-gage for open-faced box downspouts.
c. 24-gage for reglets and counterflashings.
d. 24-gage for gravel stops and kick flashings.
e. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials.
f. 26-gage for concealed edge and drip flashings, valley flashings and other
miscellaneous trims not specified for other gages.
2. Finish: Supply sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's standard galvanized
finish. No further field finishing will be performed where unexposed to view in the
completed project.
3. Profiles: As shown on the Drawings.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Fasteners: Concealed clip-type of same material as flashings, sized to suit application.
B. Nails: Hot-dipped galvanized steel roofing type.
C. Screws: Hot-dipped galvanized Phillips head, with neoprene washers.
D. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used.
E. Bituminous Paint: Acid- and alkali-resistant type, black color.
F. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type, FS SS-C-00153a.
G. Sealant: One (1) component silicone, conforming to FS TT-S-00230, non-staining, non-bleeding,
non-sagging, of color suitable for material matching.
1. Dow 790 or equal.
H. Soffit Vents (Disk Type): Galvanized sheet metal round disk vents for installation in soffits or
rafter rim joints/blocking, 26-gage.
1. Size: 2" diameter or manufacturer’s standard.
2. Finish: Galvanized for field finishing.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
B. Form sections in maximum lengths possible. Make allowances for expansion and contraction at
joints.
1. Provide for thermal expansion at 10' intervals, unless otherwise shown. Use material in
longest practical lengths. Sections shorter than 3'-0" will not be allowed.
C. Joints and Seams: Fabricate joints and seams along running lengths of metal as flat-lock type,
except corners, or detailed as flat-butt joints with back-up plate, where exposed to view.
Open-lap seams are not permitted for joints exposed to view.
D. Corners: Fabricate corners minimum 18" x 18", mitered, soldered and sealed as one (1) piece.
Seal all seams with elastic cement.
07621 - 3
Radiant Park
E. Fascias: Fabricate prefinished metal fascias with material of specified gage. Where dimension
of vertical fascias exceeds 12", fabricate as stepped fascia as detailed on the Drawings; or if
not shown, fabricate with one (1) horizontal rigidizing striation rib for each 6" of fascia depth
exceeding 12". Coordinate with Architect as necessary.
F. Wipe and wash clean soldered joints to remove traces of flux immediately after soldering.
G. Hem exposed edges of flashings to underside 1/2". Hemmed edges shall be straight, square
design, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
H. Backpaint flashings with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious
materials or dissimilar metals.
I. Profiles shall conform to current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual standards and
details.
1. Conductor Heads: Figure F, page 55 of the SMACNA manual.
2. Valley Flashings: 24" wide x continuous lengths.
3. Cap Flashings, Reglets and Counterflashings: As shown on the Drawings.
4. Overflow Scuppers: 8" x 8" thru-wall scuppers, prefinished, similar to Figure A, page
1.65 of the SMACNA manual, size to match gutter sections provided.
5. Drip/Fascia Flashings: As shown on the Drawings or as required by project conditions.
6. Step Flashings: As shown on the Drawings or as required by project conditions.
7. Kick Flashings: As required for specific project conditions, but in no case less than 2"
high x 4" long.
8. Curb Cap Flashings: As shown on the Drawings.
9. Sill Flashings at Masonry Veneer: As shown on the Drawings.
J. Refer to Section 07622 for associated aluminum gutters and downspouts.
2.04 FIELD EQUIPMENT
A. Installer shall furnish and maintain any site-based cutting, forming and seaming equipment as
necessary to fabricate and install all metal flashings, accessories and trims not factory
fabricated for a complete and weathertight installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which flashing and trim work is
to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions which would
prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure miscellaneous galvanized metal flashings and trims are fabricated in accordance with
paragraph 2.01 above.
C. Coordinate installation of flashings with Contractor for membrane sheet roofing and fiberglass
shingles as required.
D. Coordinate installation of flashings with Contractor for prefinished metal roofing as required.
E. Coordinate installation of valley and edge/drip flashings with primary and secondary roof
underlayments specified in other sections.
F. Coordinate installation of sill flashings with Contractor for masonry veneer.
G. Coordinate installation of miscellaneous drip and sill flashings and counterflashings with
Contractor for wood siding as required.
H. Coordinate installation of miscellaneous drip and sill flashings and counterflashings with
Contractor for composite facade panel/rainscreen assemblies as required.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF GALVANIZED SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General: Install fascias, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, flashings, reglets, counterflashings and
trim in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
1. Ensure adequate clearances for thermal expansion and contraction of fabricated
sections of materials.
07621 - 4
Radiant Park
2. Refer to paragraph 2.01 above for special fabrication/installation requirements for
sheet metal fascias.
B. Secure flashings in place using specified fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations
approved by Architect. When using exposed fasteners, they are to be of same finish as
flashings.
C. Conform to applicable SMACNA details, unless otherwise shown. Consult with Architect as
necessary.
D. Install kick flashings at all roof edge or eave conditions adjacent to vertical walls and other
conditions requiring diversion of drainage away from a particular point. Coordinate specific
conditions with Architect as necessary.
E. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashings and asphalt felt flashings.
F. Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and
straight in planes and lines accurate to profiles.
G. Counterflash mechanical, plumbing and electrical items projecting through roofing.
1. Mechanical, plumbing and electrical details may be schematic in nature. Install all
flashings in accordance with current SMACNA requirements.
2. Refer to the Drawings for any special flashing conditions.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean all exposed galvanized surfaces and leave prepared for field finishing as specified in
Section 09900.
1. Remove excess sealants, flux, plastic cement and bituminous paint.
2. Clean soiled surfaces with a solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces.
B. Clean all exposed prefinished galvanized surfaces. Remove smudges and other imperfections
using cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from
prefinished materials and leave installation in clean condition.
C. Advise Contractor of measures to be taken to protect prefinished surfaces from damage during
the balance of construction.
END OF SECTION
07900 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces.
B. Furnish and install joint backing materials.
C. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in exterior applications.
D. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in interior applications.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork: Joint fillers for cast-in-place concrete work.
4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
5. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Joint sealants.
6. Section 04430, Simulated Stone Masonry.
7. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders.
8. Section 07612, Screwed-Down Metal Roofing.
9. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashings and Trim.
10. All Sections of Division 8, Doors and Windows.
11. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile.
12. Section 09900, Painting: Joints of walls and/or ceilings of dissimilar colors.
13. Section 10800, Toilet and Bath Accessories.
14. Division 15, Mechanical.
15. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer of sealants and caulking shall have minimum five (5) years of
successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall be
continuously employed in work of this type.
C. Certification: Manufacturer/Supplier of sealant and accessory materials shall certify that
materials supplied are acceptable and appropriate for the materials, substrates and conditions
under which sealants are to be installed.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation
instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound and associated miscellaneous material
required.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard color line for each type of sealant
specified for exposed locations for selection by the Architect.
C. Sample Installation: Select a test area for each major exterior building material or system and
install caulking. Notify the Architect for approval and acceptance prior to proceeding with
caulking. The test area will become the standard for quality control of remaining caulking and
sealant work.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
07900 - 2
Radiant Park
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when
temperatures are below 40° F or above 100° F. Proceed with the work only when forecasted
weather conditions are favorable for proper curing and development of high early bond
strength. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric
sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of the manufacturer's recommended instal-
lation temperature range so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and
bond stress by subsequent low temperatures. Coordinate time schedule with Contractor to
avoid delay of project.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials when such
materials are properly applied and fully cured as described in the manufacturer's product data
sheets. The Contractor further agrees to replace sealants which fail because of loss of
cohesion or adhesion, or that do not cure properly due to improper application or curing, or
when the materials installed are not appropriate for that application, joint type or other factor
beyond the manufacturer's control, for a period of five (5) years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. General: Supplier/Installer of work of this Section shall certify that materials specified and/or
furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications for the following
criteria:
1. Compatibility of sealant material with adjacent materials.
2. Compatibility of sealant material with type and degree of weather exposure.
3. Compatibility of sealant material with expected use of space.
4. Compatibility of sealant material with joint type, width and depth.
B. Exterior: One- or two-part polyurethane-based elastomeric sealants complying with FS TT-S-
00230, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) or Type II (non-sag).
1. One-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended
by manufacturer for type of application.
2. Two-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-2 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as
recommended by manufacturer for type of application.
C. Interior: One-part silicone-based non-sag, elastomeric sealant, resistant to mildew complying
with FS TT-S-01543, Class A, and FF TT-S-00230, Class A.
1. Sonolastic Omniseal and OmniPlus by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended
by manufacturer for type of application.
D. Interior Paintable: One-part non-sag mildew-resistant acrylic emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C834, paintable.
1. Sonolac by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by the manufacturer for
type of application.
E. Concrete Slab Joints: One-part non-priming urethane-based self-leveling pourable sealant
complying with FS TT-S-00230C, Class A, Type 1 (horizontal use).
1. Sonolastic SL-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by manufacturer
for type of application.
2. Ensure that sealant is compatible with seamless flooring systems specified in Division 9.
3. Ensure that sealant is compatible with special concrete floor finish system specified in
Section 09800.
F. Color(s):
1. Colors are to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
07900 - 3
Radiant Park
2. Design intent is to match sealant color to color of adjacent material, unless indicated
otherwise. The Architect shall have final authority for color selection, including
variations from this policy.
3. Clear silicone sealant shall be installed at the following locations, including but not
limited to:
a. Perimeter of rimless vitreous china toilet and bath fixtures, tubs, water
closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories.
b. Perimeter of stainless steel kitchen and bar sinks.
c. Perimeter edges of stainless steel kitchen equipment adjacent to walls, floors,
ceilings or soffits.
d. Perimeter edges of stainless steel countertops and backsplashes to walls.
e. Joints between plastic laminate finished countertops and backsplashes.
G. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1, VOC Content of Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers that
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Sealants: 250 g/L.
b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Sonneborne Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434.
2. Tremco Sealants, Cleveland, OH, (800) 321-7906.
3. Schnee-Morehead Inc., Irving, TX, (800) 255-9427.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Primer: Non-staining type for joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer,
compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1056, round polyethylene foam rod, over-sized 30-50%, as recommended by
manufacturer of sealant used.
1. Provide closed cell or open cell foam rod materials, as recommended by the Installer
for specific applications.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
E. Joint Fillers for Cast-in-Place Concrete Work: Refer to Section 03100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine joint surfaces, backing and anchorage of units forming sealing rabbet
and conditions under which sealant work is to be performed and notify Contractor of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work, performance and curing of sealants. Do not
proceed with sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
B. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any
loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Ensure that horizontal and vertical surfaces are of sufficient dimension for required bonding of
sealant materials as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Ensure that sealants are compatible with the substrates to which they are to adhere.
E. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
F. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
G. Install joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly.
H. Install bond breaker where required.
07900 - 4
Radiant Park
I. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces which may be marred or damaged by sealant
materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS
A. General: Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealant within
recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied
within recommended temperature ranges.
B. Tool joints slightly concave in vertical surfaces and flush in horizontal surfaces.
C. Maintain joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges or sags.
D. Ensure that sealant is applied leaving crisp, clean lines with adjacent materials. Do not allow
sealant to bleed onto adjacent surfaces. Immediately wipe excess sealant materials off
adjacent surfaces.
E. Remove and replace any sealants improperly applied, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
F. Repair and replace any adjacent materials that have been damaged, marred or discolored by
work of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF SEALANT WORK
A. Exterior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not
limited to:
1. Expansion joints in exterior concrete flatwork adjacent to buildings and retaining walls.
2. Expansion joints in exterior concrete pavements, aprons, sidewalks, ramps and curb
and gutter sections.
3. Vertical expansion and control joints in concrete unit and brick masonry walls.
4. Vertical joints between architectural precast concrete wall panels.
5. Perimeter of aluminum storefront framing systems.
6. Vertical and horizontal joints between units of architectural precast concrete wall caps
and copings.
7. Perimeter of exterior window and door frames.
8. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs.
9. Perimeter joints of metal flashings, counterflashings, reglets and similar accessories.
10. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where
required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the
weathertightness of the project.
11. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the
Architect.
B. Interior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not
limited to:
1. Expansion joints and control joints in interior concrete slabs where surfaces are
scheduled to be sealed and/or exposed to view.
2. Vertical joints between architectural precast concrete wall panels.
3. Horizontal joints between interior concrete slabs and masonry walls.
4. Horizontal joints between vapor barrier attachment strips and perimeter concrete
foundation walls.
5. Vertical and horizontal joints between gypsum wallboard and structural framing and
decking at ceiling plenums.
6. Horizontal and vertical joints between walls, ceilings, soffits and running and standing
trims.
7. Perimeter of interior window and door frames.
8. Perimeter of aluminum storefront framing systems.
9. Perimeter of toilet fixtures, water closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories.
10. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs.
11. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where
required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the
07900 - 5
Radiant Park
weathertightness of the project.
12. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the
Architect.
C. Refer to other Division 2 sections for sealants required for site concrete work and other
materials.
D. Exterior materials/systems not to receive sealants, including but not limited to:
1. Drainage channels of aluminum storefront framing.
2. Weepholes in brick, concrete unit or stone masonry walls.
END OF SECTION
08110 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 08110
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish standard exterior and interior hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Grout cores of exterior hollow metal frames where shown on the Drawings or specified herein,
unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Anchorages.
4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Anchorages.
5. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation of doors and frames.
6. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation: Foam insulation at perimeter of door and
window frames.
7. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
8. Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
9. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
10. Section 09900, Painting.
11. Division 15 Mechanical: Mechanical units and louvers installed in hollow metal doors
and/or frames.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. SDI-100: Recommended Specifications of Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel
Door Institute (SDI).
2. ASTM A366: Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
3. NFPA 80: Fire-rated door assemblies.
4. NFPA 65: Smoke-control door assemblies.
5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Manufacturer: Member of Steel Door Institute (SDI).
C. Manufacturer shall comply with all requirements of Underwriters Laboratories where labeled
doors and frames are required.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and door installation
schedules.
B. Door Schedules: Submit schedule of doors and frames, using same reference marks or numbers
for doors and details as that shown on the Drawings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating general construction, configurations, jointing
methods, reinforcement and location of cutouts for louvers or glazing.
D. Samples: Submit representative sample of corner section of standard hollow metal doors and
frames to Architect for approval. Sample section shall indicate all details of construction and
finish.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
08110 - 2
Radiant Park
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle all hollow metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage
and deterioration.
B. Provide packaging, including corner guards, separators, spreaders, banding and, if prefinished,
plastic or vinyl wrappings as required to protect all metal doors and frames during
transportation and storage.
C. Store doors upright, in a protected area, off the ground, with air space between individual
pieces. Protect all finished surfaces.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty for standard steel doors and frames,
covering materials and workmanship, including dimensional stability, flushness of door faces,
squareness of doors and frames, and shop finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Hollow Metal Doors: Doors shall be cold-rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher-leveled, all
bonderized steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI-
100, except as amended in this Section.
1. Type: Composite construction with flush faces and seamless with hemmed edges.
Provide insulated doors where scheduled.
a. Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design.
b. Interior Doors: Grade I, standard-duty, Model 1, full flush design.
2. Construction: Steel face sheets bonded to 1-3/4" honeycomb or unitized steel core,
14-gage top and bottom channels and 7-gage hinge reinforcement. Provide full
urethane core on exterior doors or where scheduled to be insulated door. Furnish the
following minimum face sheets:
a. Exterior Doors: 16-gage.
b. Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 16-gage.
c. All Other Interior Doors: 18-gage.
3. Sizes: As scheduled on the Drawings, 1-3/4" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Style:
a. "Regent Door" by Ceco as basis of design for honeycomb core.
b. "Imperial Door" by Ceco as basis of design for insulated core.
c. "Medallion Door" by Ceco as basis of design for unitized steel core.
5. Finish: Shop-prime as specified below.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ceco Corp., Brentwood, TN, distributed locally by Architectural Doors, Denver, CO,
(303) 322-1410.
2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423-1334.
3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687.
4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733-5909.
5. Manufacturers providing products of same design, performance and function are
acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
08110 - 3
Radiant Park
2.02 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Frames shall be cold-rolled or hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel, all
bonderized sheets, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI-100, except as amended by this
Section. Except where other gages are indicated or specified, fabricate frames from steel not
lighter than the following:
a. Exterior Doors: 14-gage.
b. Single Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 14-gage.
c. All Other Frames: 16-gage.
1. Type: Mitered corners, fully welded frames. Knockdown-type frames are not
permitted, unless approved for use in interior fire-rated assemblies.
2. Sizes: As shown and scheduled on the Drawings.
3. Finish: Shop-primed as specified below.
4. Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type, minimum three (3) per jamb, equally
spaced.
5. Jamb Anchors:
a. Masonry or Architectural Precast Concrete Construction: Corrugated or other
deformed type, adjustable anchors, four (4) per jamb.
6. Floor Anchors: 16-gage, one (1) per jamb.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ceco Corp., Oak Brook, IL, distributed locally by Ceco Door Division, Fountain, CO,
(303) 382-7930.
2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423-1334.
3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687.
4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733-5909.
5. Manufacturers shall be the same as those for hollow metal doors.
2.03 PROFILES
A. Hollow Metal Frames for Doors: Jamb sections shall be standard 2" wide x 5-3/4" deep, double-
rabbeted, with 7/16" returns, or as shown on the Drawings or required by specified wall
construction, except as noted below. Fabricator to verify profile specified with wall
construction and furnish jamb sections with the required depth.
1. Head Sections: Provide 4" head sections for frames where shown or scheduled on the
Drawings.
B. Miscellaneous Filler and Closure Shapes: Fully weld to standard profiles and grind smooth as
detailed on the Drawings.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors: Fabricate doors in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements and
recommendations.
1. Fabricate doors of type, sizes, materials and designs indicated. Provide door clearance
of 1/8" at jambs and heads and 5/8" at bottoms. Doors shall have lock edges beveled
1/8" in 2".
2. Finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Form moulded
members straight and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed and in true
alignment. All welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed smooth so they are
invisible after finishing.
3. Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams. Leave seams invisible or weld, fill and grind
smooth. Close top and bottom edges of all hollow metal exterior doors to provide a
weather seal, provided as part of door construction.
4. Fabricate exterior doors with face sheets welded to perimeter stiles and inner frame
members. Form perimeter frame with continuous one-piece channel at hinge edge,
continuous one-piece channel at lock edge and channels at top and bottom. Inner
frame members shall be continuous one-piece vertical steel rib stiffeners spaced not to
08110 - 4
Radiant Park
exceed 6" o.c. Face sheets are to be continuously arc welded to perimeter channels.
Weld face sheets to interior frame members in manner to provide a door with smooth
surfaces. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound-deadened and insulated full height
of door where scheduled.
5. Fabricate interior doors with honeycomb core and steel face sheets welded to
perimeter stiles and inner frame members, same as specified above.
6. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware
requirements. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to receive all mortise-
type hardware. Provide reinforcing only for doors to receive surface-applied hardware
as required. Gages of metal for reinforcing plates shall comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for type of hardware used and size and thickness of doors.
7. Reinforce and prepare doors and/or frames to receive access control systems and other
specialty hardware. Refer to Section 08710 and Division 16, Electrical, for hardware
and wiring requirements.
8. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth uniform finish.
9. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements
and recommendations.
1. Form frames of steel to sizes, gages, profiles and shapes as detailed. Frames shall be
combination-type with integral trim and fabricated with full-welded type construction
at joints.
2. Form frames with full mitered corners and stops, butt T-joints of frames and
continuously weld all joints for full depth and width of frame and trim. Close all
contact edges tight and dress all welds on exposed surfaces smooth and flush.
3. Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and shall join with
and be secured to heads and jambs with continuous butt-welded joints. Reinforce
joints between members with concealed clip angles of same thickness as frame.
4. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects.
Fabricate moulded members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in true
alignment and fastenings concealed.
5. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for
hardware requirements.
a. Prepare frames at factory by templates for installation of specified type
hardware. Welding of hinges to frames is not acceptable. Provide frames to
receive surface-applied hardware with reinforcing plates only. Provide cover
boxes in back of all hardware cutouts.
6. Provide jamb anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for type of wall
substrate.
a. Fabricate jambs of frames with dimples for machine bolt anchorage specified
in paragraph 2.02 above.
7. Provide floor anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for anchoring frame to
type of floor construction. Clips shall be adjustable and drilled for two (2) 3/8" anchor
bolts.
8. Place minimum of three (3) silencers on each interior single door frame. Space equally
along jamb strike. Set out and adjust lock strikes to provide clearance for silencers.
Delete silencers where door jamb gaskets or continuous weather-stripping are specified
in Section 08700.
9. Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to
smooth finish.
10. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer as specified below.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Shop-prime by manufacturer using a phosphatized treatment followed by a prime coat paint
finish to all surfaces. Clean and chemically treat surfaces to ensure complete paint adherence.
Follow with a baked-on coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc-chromate or synthetic resin
primer on all surfaces. Air-drying is acceptable when metal is electro-galvanized. Field
finishing is specified in Section 09900.
08110 - 5
Radiant Park
B. Shop-prime by manufacturer using a hot-dipped galvanized process in accordance with ASTM
A525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. Field finishing is specified in
Section 09900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrates, wall openings and conditions under which the hollow
metal door and frames are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental
to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and conditions governing the work of this Section prior
to beginning fabrication.
C. Contractor shall verify depth of all frames with specified wall constructions prior to
fabrication. Notify Architect of any discrepancies or propose required modifications in the
shop drawings, noted as deviations as specified in Section 01340.
D. For welded frames, provide temporary steel shipping spreaders fastened across bottom of
frames. Where construction will permit concealment, leave spreaders in place after
installation; otherwise remove spreaders when frames are set and anchored. In place of
spreaders, frames may be strapped together in pairs with heads inverted for bracing during
shipment. Before shipping, label each frame with metal or plastic tags to show their location,
size, door swing and other pertinent information. Number frames to correspond to opening
numbers on construction drawings.
E. For doors and frames to be installed in prefabricated steel structures erected by others,
Contractor shall ensure that framed opening structurals are properly sized and erected, with
clearances provided as required by the hollow metal fabricator. Furnish welded frames to the
site in a timely manner so as not to interfere with the erection schedule of the buildings.
F. Ensure that air infiltration wrap has been properly installed and approved prior to beginning
installation of the door frames.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. General: Installation of hollow metal doors and frames is specified in Section 06200, Finish
Carpentry.
B. Install frames and doors in accordance with SDI-100, except as amended in this Section.
Remove shipping spreaders, set frames in position, plumb, align and brace securely until
permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion bolts or with
power fasteners. Provide wood spreaders to maintain jamb alignment. Build wall anchors into
walls, or secure to adjoining construction as indicated or specified. Where frames require
ceiling struts or other overhead bracing, they shall be anchored securely to ceilings or
structural framing above, as indicated or as required by site conditions.
C. Frames: Install hollow metal frames plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of
1/16". Ensure frames are accurately and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction.
D. Multiple Frame Sections: Field weld multiple sections of built-up clerestory window frames, as
approved in the shop drawings. All field welds shall be full welds, and meet workmanship
quality standards of shop welding for flushness and smoothness.
E. Grout all exterior hollow metal frames full with masonry mortar after installation in masonry or
concrete construction; foam in insulation in frames scheduled for insulated doors in other
construction, and frames in fire-rated assemblies where required by the applicable assembly.
F. Ensure that foam insulation, specified in Section 07210, has been installed around all door and
window frames prior to installation of gypsum wallboard and/or interior casings and trims.
G. Doors: Install hollow metal doors plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of
1/16". Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700 and adjust as
necessary for proper operation.
H. After installation, touch-up scratched or damaged surfaces. Use type of primer identical to
that used for shop coat.
08110 - 6
Radiant Park
I. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in doors, sidelites, and transoms, where scheduled.
J. Coordinate installation of mechanical units or louvers, furnished by Division 15, into hollow
metal doors and/or frames, if applicable. Ensure the compatibility of sizes, materials, finishes
and anchorages.
K. Doors are to be finished without hardware. Coordinate with painting trades. Masking of
hardware is unacceptable.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect doors and frames from damage during transportation and at site. After installation,
protect doors and frames from damage during subsequent construction activities. Damaged
work will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Clean all surfaces of hollow metal doors and frames, and leave prepared for field finishing.
Refer to Section 09900, Painting.
END OF SECTION
08410 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install aluminum storefront framing for fixed windows, complete with glazing stops
and all items necessary for a complete installation.
B. Install hardware supplied by Section 08700.
C. Furnish and install perimeter weatherstripping.
D. Install double insulated glazing furnished by Section 08800, unless arranged for otherwise.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation: Foam insulation at perimeter of door and
window frames.
4. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
6. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM B221: Aluminum alloy extruded bars, rods, wire, shapes and tubes.
2. FS TT-C-494: Coating compound, bituminous, solvent type, acid-resistant.
3. FS TT-S-00230: Sealing compound, elastomeric type, single component (for caulking,
sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures).
4. NFRC, National Fenestration Rating Council: Air infiltration.
5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Windows and framing systems shall carry the label of AAMA, American Architectural
Manufacturers Association.
C. Insulated glass units shall be certified by SIGMA, Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers
Association.
D. Manufacturer shall have minimum five (5) years experience in the manufacture of the specific
systems and components required by this Section.
E. Materials shall be installed by a contractor licensed by the manufacturer or certified by the
manufacturer as a qualified installer of the specified products.
F. Installer shall have minimum five (5) years of successful experience in projects of similar size
and complexity.
G. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General: Aluminum entrances and storefront framing systems shall be designed to meet or
exceed the following minimum standards:
1. Wind Velocity: Refer to Section 08800, Glass and Glazing, for applicable requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation
instructions for all system components.
08410 - 2
Radiant Park
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating pertinent dimensioning, component
connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations, fabrication
and installation details.
C. Samples: Submit one (1) minimum 6" long sample representative of each type of framing
system specified for approval by the Architect.
D. Finish Samples: Where exact finish or color has not been preselected, submit samples of
manufacturer's full line of anodized aluminum finishes and colors for selection by the Architect.
Samples shall be actual aluminum sections, minimum 1" x 2". Printed color sheets are not
acceptable.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original packaging complete with installation instructions.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard two (2)-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship, as well as leakage, air or water infiltration and system failure. Additionally,
door corner construction shall be warranted for the life of the door against structural failure
under normal use conditions.
B. Refer to Section 08800 for warranty requirements for hermetically sealed insulated glass units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Exterior Frames: Thermally-broken, extruded aluminum alloy 6063-TS, ASTM B221, 2" wide x 4-
1/2" deep profile, shear block fabrication capable of 1" double insulated glazing with integral
glass pockets for flush glazing without applied stops.
1. Thermal lock framing by Tubelite, Inc., finish as specified, as basis of design.
2. Double-glazed as scheduled on the Drawings.
3. Thermal break material shall be two-part, chemically-curing, high-density
polyurethane, or equal.
B. Accessories: Provide filler panels at column enclosures, angled corners and elsewhere as
required to complete installation.
1. Fillers to be integral with frames, snap-in construction, unless otherwise approved by
the Architect. Aluminum break metal will not be acceptable for filler panels.
C. Fasteners: All screws and miscellaneous fasteners shall be stainless steel or zinc-plated steel in
accordance with ASTM A164.
D. Miscellaneous Framing: Provide head (and jamb) receptors allowing for minimum 3/4"
deflection and starter sill trim.
E. Glazing: Refer to Section 08800. Furnish all exterior fixed storefront sections and exterior
doors with sealed double glazing units.
F. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks and shims or spacers, in hardness
recommended by manufacturer.
G. Glazing Sealants and Fillers: Manufacturer's standard, or as specified in Section 08800 and as
recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
H. Sealants and Joint Fillers for Joints within Aluminum Storefront System: As recommended by
manufacturer for project requirements. Also refer to Section 07900.
I. Insulation and/or Firesafing Materials: Refer to applicable Division 7 sections.
08410 - 3
Radiant Park
J. Thermal Break Material: Thermal break materials shall be two-part, chemically-curing, high-
density polyurethane, or equal.
K. Finish: All aluminum storefront framing systems, doors and integral hardware shall be
manufacturer's standard anodized aluminum finish, architectural Class 1.
1. Color: Clear.
L. Design Performance Criteria: Provide complete installed systems meeting or exceeding the
following criteria:
1. Air Infiltration (Storefront Framing Systems): Not to exceed .06 cfm/sq. ft., when
tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.24 psf pressure. Air infiltration shall meet
the requirements of the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC).
2. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water entry, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E331 at 8.0 psf static pressure.
4. Thermal Performance: Not greater than .54 BTU/hr./sq. ft./degree F, AAMA 1503.1-
1980.
5. Condensation Resistance Factor (Glass): Not less than 56, AAMA 1503.1-1988.
6. Condensation resistance Factor (Framing Systems): Not less than 70, ASTM C236-89 and
AAMA 1503.1-1988.
7. Thermal Transmittance-Construction: U=65.
8. Structural Performance: Maximum allowable deflection of L/175 of the span, but not
exceeding 3/4".
9. Thermal Movement: Provide systems capable of withstanding thermal movements
resulting from ambient temperature range of 120° F, that could cause a metal surface
temperature range of 180° F within the framing system.
10. Also refer to paragraph 1.03, Design Criteria above.
M. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 50% minimum.
N. Approved Systems and Manufacturers:
1. 14000 Series by Tubelite, Inc., Walker, MI, (800) 866-2227, as basis of design.
2. Kawneer, Inc., Norcross, GA, and represented in Aurora, CO, (719) 550-9331.
3. EFCO Corporation, Monett, NO, (800) 221-4169.
4. Manko Window Systems Inc., Manhattan, KS, and represented in Commerce City, CO,
(303) 853-9643.
5. Manufacturers providing materials and components of same design, function,
performance and appearance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to
bidding. Manufacturers shall submit product literature, independent test reports and
representative sample demonstrating compliance with the requirements of this
Section.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum storefront framing and windows to allow for clearances and shim spacing
around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation. Provide for thermal movement.
B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit door and frame assemblies in place.
C. Accurately and rigidly fit together joints and corners. Match components ensuring continuity of
line and design. Ensure that joints and connections are flush, hairline and weathertight.
D. Provide weeps to allow moisture entering joints and condensation occurring within frame
construction to drain to the exterior.
E. Apply one (1) coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
F. Glazing shall be by means of an interior, fixed glazing gasket and an exterior glazing wedge of
high quality extruded elastomeric material.
G. Thermal Barrier: Reusable type non-metallic clips made from weatherable DuPont Delrin
acetal resin or equal. Clips that must be broken in order to reglaze are unacceptable.
H. Filler and Closure Panels: Fabricate required filler and closure panels as extruded, snap-in
construction to match specified framing system. Break metal is not acceptable.
08410 - 4
Radiant Park
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall inspect the conditions under which work is to installed and notify the Contractor
in writing of unsatisfactory dimensions or conditions. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of conditions.
B. Field verify dimensions affecting work of this Section prior to fabrication.
C. Ensure that openings have been properly sized, framed and prepared for installation of the
aluminum storefront framing systems.
D. Ensure that air infiltration wrap has been properly installed and approved prior to beginning
installation of the storefront systems.
E. Ensure that accessories and flashings have been properly installed to divert moisture to the
exterior of the building.
F. Ensure that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been properly coordinated with
finish hardware items furnished by others, including compatibility of electric strikes with panic
devices.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. General: Install aluminum entrance doors, storefront framing systems and windows in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Ensure that
assemblies are properly aligned, plumb, rigid, level and free of warp or twist. Maintain
dimensional tolerances and alignments with adjacent work.
1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. Comply with
requirements specified under paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to AAMA
101-85.
2. Ensure that exterior aluminum storefront fabrications are thermally broken.
B. Install with sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten door and frame
assemblies in place.
C. Maintain required clearances and allow for expansion and contraction of materials.
D. Install fixed window lites in accordance with workmanship and installation requirements of
Section 08800.
E. Drill and tap frames and doors, and install hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, using proper templates. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Refer
to Section 08700 for installation requirements and Part 4 of this Section for hardware
schedules.
F. Install weatherstripping for all storefront system framing, doors and operable window units.
G. Leave installation of aluminum storefront systems prepared to receive sealants, specified in
Section 07900.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for
weathertight closure.
B. Thoroughly clean the complete system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising
care to avoid damage to anodized finishes.
C. Protect work from potential damage from other trades until completion of construction.
D. Final glass cleaning shall be provided by the Contractor as specified in Section 01710.
END OF SECTION
08700 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish finish hardware for new exterior doors, other than that specified in specific door
Sections.
B. Furnish keys in keyed groups as indicated, and deliver keys to Owner as specified.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, Sustainability Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management.
3. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation.
4. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
5. Division 16, Electrical: Controls.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. BHMA: Applicable standards for finish door hardware.
2. ANSI A115.2: Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4"
Doors.
3. ANSI A115.4: Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts.
4. ANSI A115.9: Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single-Acting.
5. ANSI A156.1: Butts and Hinges.
6. ANSI A156.2: Locks and Lock Trim.
7. ANSI A156.4: Door Controls (Closers).
8. ANSI A156.6: Architectural Door Trim.
9. ANSI A117.1-1992: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility.
10. Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility.
11. Applicable provisions of the codes as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over
this Project.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule of each type of hardware required for the Project,
indicating door location, type, quantity required, style, finish and keying group.
B. Templates: Supply hardware templates to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, and respective
Sections of Divisions 8 and 13 prior to hardware installation.
C. Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware
supplied and necessary tools required for proper maintenance of hardware.
1.04 KEYING
A. Provide two (2) change keys for each lock.
B. Provide two (2) master keys for each master keyed group.
C. Provide two (2) grand master keys, if required.
D. Provide one (1) master key for installation in the key access box, specified in Section 10520, for
fire department use.
E. Master Key Groups (review with Owner and Architect):
1. Key entire building to Owner's existing Master key system.
2. Key all building entry doors together.
08700 - 2
Radiant Park
F. Stamp or engrave each key with appropriate keying designation (MASTER, 1AA, 2AA, etc.).
When keys are turned over to Owner at completion of the project, secure keys with same
keying designation on same ring, one (1) ring for each keying designation.
G. Key Blanks: Provide Owner with specified quantity of blanks for keying separate from this
contract.
1. Quantity: 5.
H. Deliver keys to the Owner.
1.05 HARDWARE FUNCTIONS – CYLINDER LOCKS (BHMA)
A. F-81 (451) Office or Entry Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by knob from either side,
except when outside knob is locked by turn button in inside knob. When outside knob is
locked, latchbolt is operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Turn button
must be manually rotated to unlock outside knob.
B. F-86 (457) Storeroom/Utility Space Door Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key in
outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Outside knob is always fixed.
C. F-91 Door Locks: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key from both sides.
D. Deadlocks:
1. E-2141: Deadbolt operated by key from either side. Bolt automatically deadlocks
when fully thrown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH HARDWARE
A. General: Furnish hardware items of the type, function, quality and quantity to meet the
requirements of this Section and for a complete and operational installation. Products listed
are indicative of the design, grade, construction, size and type to be used by the listed
manufacturer. Alternate products of same quality, function, performance and design are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the specific requirements of
Section 01600 or this Section.
1. Hinges: Stanley, Bommer, Hager, Mont-Hard or McKinney.
2. Closers: LCN, Norton or Dorma.
3. Cylinder Locksets and Latchsets:
a. Commercial Line: Schlage only.
4. Deadbolts: Schlage.
5. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Pemko, Reese, Zero, Master Manufacturers or
Barrier Systems by Hager.
6. Trim, Stop and Holders: Hager, Trimco, Rockwood, Quality or Master Manufacturers.
7. Door Gaskets and Sweeps: Pemko, Reese, Zero, National Guard Products Inc. or Barrier
Systems by Hager.
8. Electric Power Supply: Securitron, BPS-24-1 with battery.
9. Panic Set: Securitron, TSB-3CL touch bar.
10. Electronic Timer: Access Support, DT-7.
11. Electromagnetic Lock: Magnalock Model 62, with bracket as required by location.
12. Manufacturers furnishing finish hardware items of the same function, design,
appearance, quality and performance are acceptable as approved by the Architect
prior to bidding except where restricted elsewhere in this Section.
B. Consistency: Hardware lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer, at a
minimum to the extent scheduled:
1. All closers shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project.
2. All cylinders, locksets and passage sets shall be by the same manufacturer and of the
same finish, unless otherwise indicated. Coordination of keying shall be the
responsibility of the hardware supplier for these items.
3. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available
designs are not satisfactory.
08700 - 3
Radiant Park
C. Handing: Handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier, to be reviewed by the
Architect as a part of the Hardware Schedule submittal.
D. Special Requirements:
1. All hinges shall be ball-bearing type, unless otherwise indicated. Provide non-
removable pins in all hinges of exterior outswinging doors.
2. All cores of cylinder locksets shall be interchangeable, unless otherwise specified.
3. All deadbolts specified for required exit or egress doors shall be provided with lever or
paddle type operators on the interior.
4. Provide concave-shaped wall stops where scheduled with privacy-type push button
locksets. Use convex-shaped wall stops elsewhere.
5. Where kickplates are specified for only one side of each door leaf, install on active
side, or as recommended by the supplier.
6. Closers shall be provided with hold-open capability, except where part of a fire-rated
door assembly.
7. Closers shall be parallel arm type for push side applications, and mounted on the room
side of all doors where possible. Regular arm-type closers are acceptable for pull side
applications.
E. Accessibility: Door hardware shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A117.1, current
edition, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for handicapped accessibility, and the
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.
1. All doors shall have lever trim as scheduled in this Section.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Refer to paragraph 2.01.A. above for approved manufacturers for specific types of
finish hardware.
2. Baldwin Brass, San Bruno, CA, (415) 588-8480.
3. Bommer, Landrum, SC, (800) 334-1654.
4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Charlotte, NC, (800) 543-3658.
5. Dorma Architectural Hardware, Reamstown, PA, (800) 523-8483.
6. Emtek Products, Inc., Industry, CA, (800) 356-2741.
7. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 613-8940.
8. Hager Companies, St. Louis, MO, (800) 325-9995.
9. Ilco Unican, Winston Salem, NC, (800) 849-8324.
10. LCN, Princeton, IL, (800) 526-2400.
11. Pemko, Ventura, CA, (800) 283-9988.
12. Omnia Industries Inc., (800) 310-7960.
13. Sargent Manufacturing Co., New Haven, CT, (800) 727-5477.
14. Schlage Lock Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 264-5300.
15. The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT, (800) 337-4393.
16. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA, (323) 262-4191.
17. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 897-9944.
18. Manufacturers providing products of same quality, function, performance, design and
finishes are acceptable, unless limited by the specific requirements of this Section.
2.02 COMMERCIAL HARDWARE DESIGNS AND FINISHES
A. General: Design of finish hardware shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph
2.01 above.
B. Commercial Line: Heavy-duty, commercial grade hardware.
1. Schlage D Series key in lever handle, as basis of design
C. Commercial Grade Trims:
1. Lever trim: Sparta by Schlage as basis of design.
D. Panic Set Trims: Securitron.
E. Commercial Line Finish: US26D, Satin Chromium.
F. Threshold Finish: Mill finish cast or extruded bronze.
08700 - 4
Radiant Park
2.03 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE ITEMS
A. Approved Models and Manufacturers, as basis of design:
1. Locksets and Latchsets: Product lines specified above, 2-3/4" backset.
2. Hinges: McKinney TA2714, Stanley or Hager BB1279, steel, full-mortised, 5-knuckle
ball bearing, 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", NRP.
a. Use 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" hinges at 1-3/8" hollow-core doors and in other locations
required for proper template spacing and anchorage of hinge to door frame.
3. Deadbolts:
a. Commercial Line: Heavy-duty, with interchangeable core, Schlage B-700
Series, as basis of design.
4. Closers: LCN 4000 Series, with full molded cover. Provide delayed-action option where
scheduled.
5. Push Plates/Pull Bars: Master Manufacturing M-604 x M-163, 8".
6. Kickplates: Trimco, 10" x length recommended for door width, 16-gage, (.050"
aluminum) (polished brass), beveled edges.
7. Saddle Thresholds: Pemko 271A-5, flat, or Reese S483AV-5" with integral vinyl stop.
All thresholds shall be handicapped accessible.
8. Door Shoes/Sweep: Pemko 217 AV extruded aluminum with vinyl insert for 1-3/4"
doors. Verify compatibility with specified threshold.
9. Door Astragal/Meeting Stile Closure for Paired Doors: Pemko 357SP with silicone.
Brush type not acceptable, unless otherwise approved.
10. Sweep: Pemko 307AV.
11. Door Smoke Gaskets: Pemko S88D.
12. Weatherstripping: Pemko 303AV for wood doors/frames; Pemko 316AV for hollow
metal doors/frames.
13. Wall Stop: Ives 407. Use wall-type, unless door position requires otherwise.
14. Floor Stop: Ives 438.
15. Wall Stop/Holder: Ives 449 holder and stop.
16. Floor Stop/Holder: Ives 450 holder and stop.
17. Door Bottom: Pemko 317AN. Mount with neoprene bulb under door if conditions
permit.
18. Panic Set: Securitron.
B. Furnish hardware items as listed in Schedule at the end of this Section, complete to the
function intended.
C. Furnish all accessory hardware items as required for a complete installation, including strikes
and anchorage devices.
2.04 SPECIALTY FINISH HARDWARE
A. Electronic, Timer-Controlled Magnetic Lock: Low-voltage electronic magnetic lock with a
holding force of at least 1,200 lbs. for standard 1-3/4" hollow metal door applications.
1. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC.
2. Current Draw: 0.50 amp at 24 volts.
3. Door/Frame Mounting Position: Manufacturer's standard head mounting.
4. Options: Provide manufacturer's standard adjustable time delay to allow automatic
delay relocking signal from 4 to 30 seconds.
5. Power Supply: UL-listed modular power unit with plug-in dual control modules and
field-selectable 12/24V output voltage, 510 Series by Locknetics or approved equal.
Provide the following power supply options:
a. Time Delay Module: Plug-in PC card providing an adjustable (0-30 seconds)
delay on relock.
6. Accessories and Hardware: Provide all required accessories, strikes, hardware, trims
and other items necessary for a complete and operational locking system.
7. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish, to match finishes specified in paragraph 2.02
above.
8. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Magforce 390.
08700 - 5
Radiant Park
b. 510 Series by Locknetics, Hamden, CT, as basis of design.
c. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
B. Electronic Lockset Controller: Manufacturer's standard, general-purpose 24-hour digital timer,
to be compatible with the electronic lockset specified in paragraph A above, with single pole,
single throw heavy duty switch rated for 40 amps at 120 volts.
1. Controller shall provide accurate, dependable, fully automatic control on a daily
repeating cycle for a 7-day period.
2. Time of Day Clock: Manufacturer's standard 60-minute vernier time digital clock.
3. Housing: NEMA-1 type indoor cabinet of heavy gage sheet steel with permanently
hinged, lockable cover. Provide manufacturer's standard knockouts for conduit/wire
connections.
4. Manual Control: Provide manufacturer's standard manual operation by means of an
ON/OFF switch. Such manual override will not interfere with subsequent automatic
operations or require reprogramming of the timer.
5. Finish: Housing shall be manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish.
6. Approved Manufacturers:
a. DT7 Automatic Time Switch by Securitron, Sparks, NV, as basis of design.
b. Manufacturer providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, provided
controller is by the same manufacturer as the specified electronic lockset.
C. Control Stations: Manufacturer’s standard manual override/emergency exit touch bar, to allow
the electronic magnet to be released from the inside of the room.
1. Touch Bar: Manufacturer’s standard 36" long touch bar, handicapped accessible, clear
finish.
2. Status Indicator Lights: None.
3. Provide one (1) manual touch bar in each restroom and change room equipped with the
specified electronic magnetic lock.
4. Approved Manufacturers:
a. TSB Series by Securitron, Sparks, NV, as basis of design.
b. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, provided
manual control station is by the same manufacturer as the specified electronic
lockset.
D. Secondary Control Stations: Use motion detector/occupancy sensor for secondary control
station. Magnetic lock shall not engage while occupancy sensor identifies room as occupied.
See Electrical for specified occupancy sensor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the doors, frames and other substrates that are to receive finish
hardware and notify the Contractor of any existing condition that will be detrimental to the
successful installation and performance of the hardware. Do not install hardware until such
conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.
B. Ensure that door cutouts or bores for hardware and frame cutouts for strike plates are properly
aligned.
C. Ensure that the Owner's existing security alarm, resident call, automatic locking or other
communicating systems tied to the door hardware have been bypassed prior to commencing
work. These systems shall remain powered for all doors not affected by new work.
D. Do not install finish hardware until doors, frames and other substrates have been painted,
stained or otherwise finished as specified in other Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE
A. General: Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
08700 - 6
Radiant Park
recommendations, using proper templates. Installation is specified in Section 06200.
B. Mounting Heights: Maintain following mounting heights for new doors, from finished floor to
center line of hardware item:
1. Locksets and Latchsets: 40", unless special height requirements are specified
elsewhere.
2. Pulls and Push Plates: 39".
3. Deadlocks: 48".
4. Wide-Angle Viewer: 60" and 40", unless other accessible height is approved.
C. Verify compliance of mounting heights with ANSI A117.1-1992 and ADA-1990 requirements.
D. Ensure proper operation of all finish hardware items. Adjust alignments as necessary for
smooth operation.
E. Adjust operating force for all door closers for compliance with applicable codes and
handicapped accessibility standards.
3.03 HARDWARE FURNISHED TO OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Hardware supplier to provide templates to door fabricator.
3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: While the following Hardware Schedule is intended to cover all doors and other
movable parts of the project and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall be the
specific responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the Drawings and
Specifications and furnish proper hardware for all openings, whether listed or not. If there are
any omissions in the hardware groups, the hardware supplier shall notify the Architect prior to
bid opening for instructions; otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be
allowed by the Owner or the Architect.
B. It is intended that the following groups be complete in the coverage of required items, but it is
the responsibility of the hardware supplier to furnish finish hardware necessary for a complete
installation, particularly in regard to fire-rated door assemblies. Where items are referred to
in the singular, they shall be furnished in numbers sufficient for a complete installation.
C. Every attempt has been made to coordinate the finish hardware items between each other and
with doors, etc. to which they are to be installed. It is the responsibility of the hardware
supplier to ensure the compatibility of the finish hardware supplied with both related hardware
items and the doors, etc. to which they are to be used.
D. Hardware Notes:
1. Ea. refers to each leaf.
2. LH refers to left-hand leaf only.
3. RH refers to right-hand leaf only.
4. All other handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier.
PART 4 SCHEDULE
4.01 HARDWARE GROUPS
Group A
1 ea. Deadlock
1 ea. Emergency exit touch bar
1 ea. Magnetic lock
1-1/2 pr. ea. leaf Hinges (1 electric hinge)
1 ea. Closer
1 ea. Threshold
2 ea. Kickplates
1 ea. Push/pull
1 ea. Door stop
1 ea. Door bottom
08700 - 7
Radiant Park
1 set Weatherstripping
1 Power supply
1 Battery
1 Timer
Group B
1 ea. Lockset F-86
1 ea. Deadlock
1-1/2 pr. ea. leaf Hinges
1 ea. Closer
1 ea. Kickplate
1 ea. Door stop w/hold open
1 ea. Door bottom
1 set Weatherstripping
END OF SECTION
08800 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install polycarbonate glazing for aluminum storefront systems.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Factory Sealed Insulated Glass Units: ASTM E774-84a, Standard Specifications for
Sealed Insulating Glass, when tested in accordance with ASTM E773-83, Standard Test
for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass.
2. ASTM E2074-00: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including
Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.
3. ASTM E2010-01: Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window
Assemblies.
4. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.
5. CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Type 1 and Type 2: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials.
6. UL 9 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
7. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
8. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
9. FS DD-G-4151C: Glass, Plate, Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses.
10. FS DD-G-1403B: Glass, Plate (Float), Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered.
11. FS TT-S-001543: Sealing Compound, Silicone Base (for caulking and glazing in buildings
and other structures).
12. NAAMM #SS-1B-68: Non-Skinning Resilient Preformed Compounds-Tapes, Ribbons,
Beads with Release Paper.
13. Sigma #67-7-2: Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
14. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Manufacturer: Certified by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
C. Installer: All exterior glass and glazing shall be installed by a single installer. Use adequate
numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts
and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for
proper performance of the work of this Section.
D. Design Criteria:
1. Wind Load (horizontal): 80 mph, Exposure B in accordance with the International
Building Code, or as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction over this
Project.
2. Refer to Part 2 Products for required increases in glass thicknesses based upon glazing
unit sizes.
E. Glazing Standards: FGMA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual, and recommendations of GANA.
F. Safety Glass: Each lite shall bear permanent, non-removable label certifying that units meet
the testing standards of CFR.
G. LEED Compliance: Not applicable.
08800 - 2
Radiant Park
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications for factory sealed
insulated polycarbonate units, with special coatings or film.
B. Samples: Submit minimum 12" x 12" insulated samples of specified types of polycarbonate for
approval of the Architect.
C. Certifications: Submit certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials
manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for Project comply with
specified requirements. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials
bearing manufacturer's permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided
labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or
independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction over this Project.
D. LEED Submittals: Not applicable.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule polycarbonate deliveries to coincide with glazing schedules.
B. Deliver polycarbonate lites and glazing materials to the site in manufacturer's original, sealed
cartons.
C. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically.
D. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between individual lites. Keep glazing and
interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are above dewpoint. If outside storage is
necessary, cover the glazing and interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect
periodically.
E. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer’s directions and as needed to prevent
damage to glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun,
or other causes.
1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply
with insulating glass fabricator’s recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.
F. Stack individual lites on edge and lean against sturdy supports at a slope of 5°-7° from vertical.
Cushion the bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips or other foreign
material.
G. Avoid rotating or cartwheeling factory sealed insulated glass units over their corners.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside
the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are
wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40° F.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Polycarbonate Sheet Glazing: Submit manufacturer’s written warranty signed by manufacturer
of polycarbonate sheet glazing agreeing to furnish replacements for shatter-resistant glass units
that deteriorate within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only
deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and
maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.
1. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 10 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
08800 - 3
Radiant Park
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 POLYCARBONATE GLAZING
A. General: Furnish all types and thicknesses of glass shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
B. Polycarbonate Glazing: Monolithic coated polycarbonate sheet glazing, 1/4" thick, clear, Lexan
XL Sheet, or approved equal.
C. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Polycarbonate Sheet Glazing: Lexan by G.E. Plastics manufactured by General Electric
Co., Pittsfield, MA, and distributed locally in Denver, CO, (303) 753-2272.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same appearance, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.02 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for
glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric, neoprene or silicone material with a Shore A durometer hardness
of 85 +/- 5.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded or neoprene molded fabricated into frames with molded corners,
ASTM C542.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side-
walking).
F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, non-
outgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant
depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance.
G. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl type, NAAMM SS-1B-68, with integral spacing devices, 10-15
durometer hardness, paper release, by Kawneer or equal.
1. Color: Clear or white for bronze aluminum frames.
2.04 FABRICATION OF GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required for glazed openings indicated for
Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with
recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to
comply with system performance requirements.
B. Fabricate glass and glazing lites to meet design and performance criteria as specified for
individual products, including coatings.
1. Scratch-resistant coating on surfaces #1 and #4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer shall examine the openings and framing systems into which the glass and glazing is to
be installed and report any conditions in writing to the Contractor which may prevent the
08800 - 4
Radiant Park
successful installation of the work. Do not begin the glazing installation until these conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from
obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work.
1. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of
sealants.
2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior
to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes.
3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Verify site dimensions of all tempered or other glazings that cannot be field cut prior to
ordering.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Unpack the glass from cases in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Do
not move partially unpacked cases or "end pick" individual lites.
B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges or are scratched,
abraded or damaged in any other manner.
C. Prevent contact of surfaces of individual lites; do not slide one lite over another.
D. Installation personnel shall wear gloves, safety shoes, hard hats and glazing gauntlets at all
times during the handling and installation of the glass.
E. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, application of masonry sealer,
texturing or other construction operations that might cause damage to glass. Complete clean
down of masonry shall be completed prior to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING
A. General: All glazing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. Comply with applicable FGMA and/or GANA standards.
1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
2. Glazing channel dimensions shall provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust
as required by site conditions during installation.
B. Clean surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry. Cut glazing channel to proper length
and install on glass pane. Weld joints by butting channel and dabbing with sealant.
C. Locate setting blocks at sills 1/4 of the width of the glass in from each end of the glass, unless
otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
1. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass from
stops, except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided.
a. Locate spacers no more than 24" apart and no closer than 12" to a corner.
b. Place spacers opposite one another.
c. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4" or more.
D. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance.
1. Install glass so distortion waves, if present, run in the horizontal direction.
2. Install glass with special coatings as required for proper performance and to meet the
design intent.
E. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system, unless the joint use is
approved in advance by the Architect.
F. Mask or otherwise protect surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants.
G. Miter-cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where
joints are required.
08800 - 5
Radiant Park
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect installed glass with screens of plywood or plastic wherever welding, cutting,
sandblasting, fireproofing, painting or other potentially damaging work is in process.
B. Do not mark glass with X or other identity symbol after glazing.
C. Final clean all glass surfaces in accordance with Section 01710, and remove all labels.
END OF SECTION
09110 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 09110
NON-LOAD BEARING METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install metal wall furring, channels, clips and other shapes required for a complete
installation.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
4. Section 07210, Building Insulation.
5. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard: Miscellaneous metal accessories.
6. Section 09830, Acoustical Wall and Floor/Ceiling Assemblies: Miscellaneous metal
accessories as part of acoustical assemblies.
7. Section 13122, Prefabricated Steel Structures.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Deflection Criteria: All non-load-bearing metal studs shall be sized for deflections of L/240
maximum.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature illustrating all items of
specified framing systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all non-load bearing metal framing system assemblies
requiring shop fabrication, as shown on the Drawings or proposed by the Contractor.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide non-load-bearing metal framing materials in accordance with ASTM C645,
A525, A568 and A446.
B. Z-Furring Channels: 2-1/2", 25-gage.
C. Fasteners and Anchorages: GA 216 and GA 203.
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. United States Gypsum Co., Chicago, IL, and represented locally in Denver, CO, (303)
721-9394.
09110 - 2
Radiant Park
2. Beadex Manufacturing Co., Renton, WA, (206) 228-6600.
3. Dale/Incor Industries, Inc., Dearborn, MI, (800) 882-7883.
4. Domtar Gypsum, Ann Arbor, MI, and represented locally in Aurora, CO, (303) 695-4581.
5. Georgia-Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404) 521-4000.
6. Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC, and represented locally in Lakewood, CO,
(303) 988-5005.
7. Dietrich Industries, Inc., Lenexa, KS, (913) 599-2026.
8. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing
work of this Section. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect
the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until conditions are corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Installer.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum
variation of 1/8" in 10' in any direction.
B. Installation shall be completely screw attached; crimping is not allowed.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR WALL FURRING SYSTEMS
A. General: Install Z-furring channels with specified fasteners, attached directly to substrate, in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Install channels vertically at maximum 16" o.c. Coordinate spacing with panel width of rigid
board insulation specified in Section 07210.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FURRING SYSTEMS
A. General: Install wall assembly furring channels with specified fasteners, attached directly to
substrate, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for the
wall and floor/ceiling assemblies referenced.
B. Space furring channels maximum 16" o.c. not more than 4" from floor and ceiling lines.
END OF SECTION
09310 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install ceramic tile sills, jambs and head with bullnose edges at windows.
B. Furnish and install tile mortar, grout, mastic and other accessory materials.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of the Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA) "Handbook for Ceramic
Tile Installation", current edition.
2. ANSI A108.4, Ceramic Tile Installed with Water-Resistant Organic Adhesives.
3. ANSI A118.4, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
4. ANSI A136.1, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
5. TCA 137.1, Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Quality Control: All materials used for work in this Section shall be made in one (1) batch or
consecutive batches to give the greatest assurance in consistency of color, texture and size.
Sufficient quantities, plus replacement of material damaged due to shipping or handling, shall
be produced with reserve retained by the manufacturer for no less than 90 days from date of
order.
C. All materials shall be shipped with clear labeling or stamping to identify batch numbers, dates
of manufacture and other pertinent information.
D. Installer shall employ only tile setters who are thoroughly trained and experienced in tile work
for projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall certify that tile setters are
completely familiar with the requirements and recommendations of the referenced standards.
E. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions and
recommendations, illustrating pertinent details for each type of ceramic tile, underlayment
membrane, edge and transition trim, and accessory specified.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of colors and/or patterns of the ceramic
tile materials, within the pricing categories specified, for selection by the Architect. Include
all internal and external corners, bullnose and other specialty trim units.
C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer’s full range of grout colors for selection by the
Architect.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
09310 - 2
Radiant Park
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original sealed cartons, with labels legible and intact
identifying brand name and contents. Tile cartons shall be grade-sealed by manufacturer in
accordance with ANSI A137.1, Section 9, with grade seals unbroken.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work of this Section is to be performed
to allow ceramic tile to properly set. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure that
excessive temperature changes do not occur.
B. Make necessary provisions for dust control. Use dustless operations wherever possible.
C. Vent temporary heating devices directly to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new
tile work.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 CERAMIC TILE
A. General: Glazed and/or unglazed ceramic tile, mounted-type, conforming to ANSI A137.1,
Section 5, standard grade. Ceramic tile work is covered by an Allowance. Refer to Section
01020.
B. Material: Standard buff body.
C. Face Finish: As scheduled below.
D. Edges: Cushioned, with spacer lugs on edges.
E. Thickness: 5/16" minimum.
F. Styles and Sizes:
1. Wall Tile: 4-1/4" x 4-1/4", Semi-Gloss by Dal-Tile, glazed, non-vitreous.
2. Miscellaneous trims and shapes as required for a complete installation, including
bullnose outside and inside corners.
G. Tile Pricing Categories: Dal-Tile pricing categories as basis of design, or other manufacturer’s
comparable selections:
1. Wall Tile: Categories 2 - 3 (select from 1-4, with 4 being the most expensive).
H. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
I. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Dal-Tile, Dallas, TX, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 744-1743.
2. American Olean, Lansdale, PA, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 371-9596.
3. Buchtal Ceramics, Roswell, GA, (404) 442-5500.
4. Crossville Ceramics, Crossville, TN, (615) 484-8418.
5. Florida Tile, Lakeland, FL, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 744-2433.
6. Mannington Ceramic Tile, Lexington, NC, (704) 249-3931.
7. Monarch Tile, Florence, AL, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 777-6651.
8. Summitville Tile, Summitville, OH, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 744-1743.
9. U.S. Ceramic Tile Co., East Sparta, OH, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 373-9090.
10. Impo Glaztile, Inc., Fiorano, Italy, and distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 722-4627.
09310 - 3
Radiant Park
11. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, performance and color
range specified are acceptable.
2.02 HISTORICAL REPLICATION CERAMIC TILE
A. General: Glazed custom ceramic tile, mounted-type, conforming to ANSI A137.1, Section 5,
standard grade. Ceramic tile work is covered by an Allowance. Refer to Section 01020.
B. Material: Standard buff body.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Mastic: Water-resistant latex solvent-based mastic CMC-52, as manufactured by Chicago Mastic
Corp. or equal. Mastic shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.
B. Additives: Laticrete International, Ker-Kote Products, or equal.
C. Mortar (Thin Set): Unmodified, conforming to ANSI A118.1.
D. Grout: Commercial dry-set Portland acrylic cement grout. Follow manufacturer's printed
instructions for mixing and application.
1. Approved Manufacturers: Mapei or approved equal.
E. Sealants for Joints: Aqua-Mix penetrating sealer, or equal as specified in Section 07900,
Sealants and Joint Fillers. Waterproofing sealers shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
F. Sealant for Expansion Joints: GE Silicone Sealant, white, or equal as specified in Section
07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
G. Installer shall verify that all accessory materials used are compatible with the ceramic tile
products specified, and are approved by the tile manufacturer to be used in this application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine surfaces that are to receive ceramic wall, floor and base tile and report
unsatisfactory conditions to Contractor. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with
installation of materials will be construed as evidence of acceptance of conditions.
B. Ensure that surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'. Level as
necessary prior to beginning work.
C. Lay out work prior to installation to center and balance tile to greatest extent possible. Refer
to Drawings for stripes, patterns or other special layouts required. Consult with Architect on
the site as necessary during layout of all ceramic tile work.
D. Coordinate installation of plumbing rough-ins, prefabricated shower stalls, shower floor
receptors, and other work to be built into the ceramic tile.
E. Whenever possible, Contractor shall schedule installation of ceramic tile work prior to
installation of plumbing fixtures, countertops, toilet partitions or accessories.
F. Backsplashes: Ensure that casework and plastic laminate countertops are properly installed
and approved prior to beginning tile installation.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage, soiling, adhesives and extraneous materials. Take
precautions to protect plumbing fixtures in the vicinity of the ceramic tile work by covering
with cardboard or other protective coverings. Protect ceramic tile work from damage by
weather and moisture.
B. Close spaces to traffic that are to receive work of this Section and keep closed until tile is
firmly set.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE
A. General: Set ceramic tile in place with mastic in accordance with manufacturer's written
09310 - 4
Radiant Park
instructions and recommendations. Lay out tile work on floors and lengthwise on walls so that
wherever possible no tiles less than half full-size will occur. For heights stated in feet and
inches, unless tile work is intended to exactly fill vertical spaces, maintain courses full to
produce nearest attainable height within variation, above or below, equivalent to less than
one-half course.
B. Align joints of wall, base and floor tile and trim shapes. Properly lay out and space work,
creating required stripes, patterns or other special layouts. Install ceramic tile maintaining
required tolerances.
C. Form intersections and returns perfectly. Cut and drill tiles neatly without marring surface.
Carefully grind and joint-cut edges of tiles against any trim, finish and built-in fixtures. Fit tile
close around electric outlets, plumbing pipes, fixtures and fittings so that usual plates, collars
or covering will overlap tile.
D. Form internal wall angles of wall tile square and external angles bullnosed.
E. Form internal and external angles of coved base tile bullnosed.
F. Wainscot: Use full-size bullnose wall tile units, or specialty quarter round tile units where
shown on the Drawings, to cap ceramic tile wainscot, or other wall tile where less than full
height.
G. Backsplashes: Install backsplashes as one (1) course of specified ceramic tile, using bullnosed
pieces. Extend tile to ends of all countertop runs, and return corners as may be applicable due
to project conditions. Consult with Architect in the field as necessary.
H. Use a neat bead of silicone sealant applied in all corners and at junction with ceiling.
I. Thoroughly grout all joints so they are completely filled with grout material. Ensure tile joints
are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Ensure
joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout. Pinholes in grout are not
acceptable. Grout over sealant.
J. Finish floors level and plumb with no variations exceeding 1/8" in 10' from required plane.
K. Finished tile work shall be clean and free of pitted, chipped, cracked or scratched tiles.
Replace broken tile or materials with marred surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Allow no traffic in tile-laying areas after start of work and for a period of 72 hours after
completion, allowing a minimum of 72 hours to damp-cure grout.
B. Clean ceramic tile work in accordance with TCA instructions and recommendations.
C. Clean all mastic and grout from face of tile. All joints shall be clearly struck and polished after
grouting.
D. Clean all grout from adjacent fixtures, countertops and other materials or equipment installed
prior to ceramic tile work.
END OF SECTION
09900 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare surfaces to receive opaque painted finishes as specified.
B. Furnish materials and finish surfaces as indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section.
Generally, the scope of work shall include painting all exposed surfaces, whether specifically
noted or not, and certain concealed surfaces, except where materials are prefinished or where
intended to remain unfinished as described in paragraph 1.02 below.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01030, Alternates.
3. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials.
4. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
5. Section 07180, Water Repellent Sealers.
6. Division 15, Mechanical.
7. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and
inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and
duct shafts.
B. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and
similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section, except as may be so
specified.
C. Materials, fixtures and equipment specified or supplied by the manufacturer as prefinished
shall not be painted, unless otherwise indicated in the Schedule at the end of this Section.
Materials supplied with factory-applied primer coats shall be field finished by this Section,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as valve
operators, linkages, sensing devices and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Priming or finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory-applied or installer-
performed under other Sections.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Finish work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms specializing in
work of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar
size and complexity.
C. Materials shall be applied with appropriate equipment and tools as specified herein, or as
required to provide the specified quality.
D. Coordination of Paint Finishes, Primers and Substrates:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to
be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various
substrates.
09900 - 2
Radiant Park
3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials
to assure that compatible prime coats are used.
4. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers or remove the primer and reprime
as required.
5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating
systems over prime coatings or substrates supplied under other Sections.
E. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all paint materials supplied contain no lead or other
toxic substances.
F. Certification: Paint materials used in interior building applications shall be GreenGuard
certified for indoor air quality.
G. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications to show compliance
with the specified requirements.
B. Materials List: Submit materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for interior paints and coatings (if used) used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each
product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the
requirements of individual specification sections. Indicate VOC content in g/L
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. The calculation of VOC shall exclude water and tinting color added at the point of sale.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name,
type of paint, brand name, color, designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.
B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45°
F in a well-ventilated area.
C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. General: Follow manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations for product
handling and application. Adhere to all applicable OSHA regulations related to product
application and handling of removed paint, rinse water and other residual materials.
B. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 40° F before
applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work is 45°
F; 50° F for exterior work.
C. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain
temperatures above 45° F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes.
D. Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be finished.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of
inadequate or unsuitable protection.
B. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings
from soiling surfaces not being painted and, in particular, surfaces within storage and
preparation area.
C. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal
containers and remove daily from the site.
D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting
operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of
work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer
finish.
09900 - 3
Radiant Park
1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock of not less than five (5) gallons of
each color of finish coating, except that one (1) gallon shall be adequate for all accent and
trim colors.
B. Containers are to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Paints, Enamels and Fillers: Type and brand scheduled herein, ready-mixed, except field-
catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency, capable of
readily and uniformly being dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture. Paints shall have
good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
1. Paint materials shall contain no lead or other toxic substances. Refer to paragraph
1.03.C.
2. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products
that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to
a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and
the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or
finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
a. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
b. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
c. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
d. Floor Coatings: VOC content of not more than 100 g/L.
e. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0% by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or
more benzene rings).
f. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
1) Acrolein 14) Formaldehyde
2) Acrylonitrile 15) Hexavalent chromium
3) Antimony 16) Isophorone
4) Benzene 17) Lead
5) Butyl benzyl phthalate 18) Mercury
6) Cadmium 19) Methyl ethyl ketone
7) Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate 20) Methyl isobutyl ketone
8) Di-n-butyl phthalate 21) Methylene chloride
9) Di-n-octyl phthalate 22) Naphthalene
10) 1,2-dichlorobenzene 23) Toluene (methylbenzene)
11) Diethyl phthalate 24) 1,1,1-trichloroethane
12) Dimethyl phthalate 25) Vinyl chloride
13) Ethylbenzene
B. Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically
indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified, of high quality and approved
manufacturer.
C. Color(s) as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full color selection, unless otherwise
indicated. Painter shall prepare samples for the Architect's approval of each paint color
selected. Remake samples until approved, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.2: Provide paints and coatings not exceeding the VOC limits listed in
paragraph 2.01.A above and Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
E. Approved Manufacturers: Use the same brand throughout the project for each type of paint
material specified:
09900 - 4
Radiant Park
1. Sherwin-Williams ProGreen 200 Low-VOC Series, as basis of design.
2. Paint: Pittsburgh, Diamond Vogel, ICI Dulux, Fuller O'Brien, Benjamin Moore, Kelly
Moore, Kwal-Howell and Sophir Morris. Using product lines of same quality, function
and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. For application of the specified paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for
application of the particular paint by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect, except
as limited by paragraph 2.02.C.
B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually
compatible with the material to be applied and that integrity of the finish will not be
jeopardized by use of this equipment.
C. Contractor shall use the following application equipment for the specific condition listed,
unless otherwise approved:
1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is not
permitted.
2. Insulated Metal Doors, Frames and Sidelites: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling
is not permitted.
3. Wood Doors and Frames: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is not permitted.
4. Other areas indicated in paragraph 3.03.
2.03 COLOR SCHEDULES
A. The Architect will prepare marked-up elevations or a color schedule with samples for guidance
in painting. Contractor shall furnish samples of all other related finish materials for
coordination in preparation of the color schedule.
B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work,
subject to the following:
1. Exterior Work: A maximum of two (2) different colors will be used.
2. Interior Work: A maximum of three (3) different pigmented colors will be used, plus
variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted or finished prior to
commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially affect proper
application and final appearance. Do not commence work until such defects have been
corrected to the satisfaction of the painting subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered
acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. General: All preparatory work shall be subject to evaluation and acceptance by the Architect.
Painting subcontractor will accept responsibility for the preparation of all surfaces, as specified
herein, prior to finishing.
B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comply with
the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning
products.
C. Ensure that the Contractor has corrected defects in all surfaces which may adversely affect
work of this Section, including but not limited to:
1. Ceramic tile and porcelain tile.
2. Hollow metal doors and frames.
3. Finish carpentry items.
4. Exposed structural steel and ornamental metal work.
09900 - 5
Radiant Park
5. Welding and other attachments.
D. Remove all hardware from doors before painting. Masking of hardware is unacceptable.
E. Schedule painting prior to installation of prefinished materials, specialties, furnishings and
fixtures to the extent possible, including but not limited to:
1. Toilet and bath fixtures and accessories.
2. Finish hardware.
3. Fire extinguisher cabinets and other specialties.
4. Surface-mounted mechanical and electrical devices such as thermostats, prefinished
grilles and diffusers, switchplates and outlet cover plates, etc.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply finish materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Ensure that surfaces have been properly prepared and primed prior to
application of finish coats.
B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat of finish to dry before the
following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. Sand lightly between
coats to achieve the required finish.
C. Brush Applications:
1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film.
2. Finish coats shall be finished by roping the paint, moving from wet to dry areas.
3. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
D. Spray Applications:
1. Except as specified in paragraph 2.02 or as specifically otherwise approved by the
Architect, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where
hand brush work would be inferior.
2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of
brush coats.
3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two (2) coats in
one (1) pass.
E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove,
refinish or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements.
3.04 PAINTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Painting of exposed equipment, louvers, ductwork, piping, conduits, etc. shall be
work of this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint all ductwork, piping, conduit and devices to be exposed to view in the completed
project, unless prefinished or in concealed areas as defined in paragraph 1.02.
2. Coordinate extent of field finishing of mechanical and electrical equipment with the
Architect as necessary.
3. Architect retains the right to require prefinished diffusers, grilles and other mechanical
or electrical devices to be field finished, whether or not specifically called for.
4. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts,
hangers, brackets, collars and supports in exposed locations, except where items are
plated or covered with a prefinished coating, or where located in mechanical chase
spaces. Finish paint primed equipment to color selected.
B. Color Coding: Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Sections for requirements concerning color
coding, identification branding of equipment, ducting, piping and conduit, if required.
1. Color code equipment, piping, conduit and exposed ductwork in accordance with
requirements indicated.
2. Color banding and identification (flow arrows, naming, numbering, etc.).
C. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location
and paint separately.
D. Paint face(s) and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing
backboards and mounting equipment on them.
1. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted
09900 - 6
Radiant Park
over or spattered.
E. Do not paint gas meters, electric meters and similar exterior equipment provided by outside
utility providers, if not permitted by those agencies. Coordinate requirements with the
appropriate Subcontractor prior to painting.
1. Exposed gas piping leading to the gas meters shall be painted.
2. Exterior surface-mounted meter centers, disconnects, CT cabinets, exposed conduit
and similar equipment shall be painted, where not specifically excluded above.
3. Interior panelboard cabinet frames and doors shall not be painted, unless specified
elsewhere.
3.05 PAINTING ROOFTOP ACCESSORIES
A. Paint exposed roof penetrations, flues, roof vents, exhaust vent caps, pipe vents, etc., where
located on sloped roofs or otherwise exposed to view, unless prefinished or otherwise
indicated.
B. Paint housings of rooftop mechanical equipment when not prefinished, as directed by the
Architect.
1. Rooftop mechanical equipment, exhaust fan hoods, roof access and smoke hatches,
pipe vents and other roof penetrations need not be painted where concealed from view
by parapet walls at least 2'-0" high or other obstructions, as determined by the
Architect. The Architect retains the right to require these items to be painted, if in his
sole opinion, they are exposed to view.
3.06 AREAS OF SPECIAL CONCERN
A. The painting subcontractor shall consult with the Architect concerning sequencing for painting
of trim and installation of prefinished siding prior to beginning work in this area.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove paint from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where spilled,
splashed or splattered.
B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comply with
the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning
products.
C. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials and debris.
D. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers
and remove daily from the site.
E. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
3.08 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Painted finishes shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the Architect,
including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1. Consistency and smoothness of surface.
2. Coverage and mil thickness.
3. Color match between adjacent areas.
4. Compliance with approved sample(s).
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
NOTE: MWF indicates minimum wet film thickness which is a per coat measurement in mils thickness.
Systems are based on Sherwin-Williams (S-W) or as noted.
09900 - 7
Radiant Park
A. Exterior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Location: Hollow metal doors and frames, insulated steel doors, pipe bollards, site
signage poles, ornamental fencing, handrails and guardrails.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
B. Metal Boxes, Conduits and Mechanical Equipment:
1. Location: As shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions.
2. Primer: One (1) coat, factory primed.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, MWF 3.6 mils where not factory finished.
4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim.
5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces.
C. Louvers: Paint where not prefinished by manufacturer.
D. Aluminum Windows: Prefinished by manufacturer.
4.02 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
A. Interior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Location: Hollow metal doors and frames, handrails and guardrails, and miscellaneous
metals.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
B. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry Surfaces:
1. Location: Exposed concrete block, unless scheduled for integral coloration or epoxy
finish.
2. Primer: One (1) coat vinyl emulsion block filler, MWF.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, MWF 3.6 mils.
4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Latex Eg-Shel Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
C. Concrete Floors: Integral color and/or finishes specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
D. Fire Protection Specialties: Prefinished by manufacturer.
E. Toilet and Bath Accessories: Prefinished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
10430 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish surface-mounted address signage on exterior building walls, where shown on the
Drawings.
B. Furnish handicapped accessibility symbol signage at all accessible building entries, unless
provided as a part of the interior signage package.
C. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Form: Allowances.
2. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete: Signage foundation construction, including
footings, foundation walls and piers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced or as adopted by any jurisdiction with
authority over this Project.
B. Signage systems shall comply with all applicable requirements of the Americans with
Disabilities Act, 1990, including signage size, lettering style, symbols, raised Braille and signage
location, placement and mounting heights.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's product literature, shop drawings and
schedule of required signage indicating type, size, style and method of installation.
1. Shop drawings and schedule shall illustrate each required sign for size, style and copy,
and indicate quantity required for each.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of standard colors and finishes for
selection by the Architect. Submit one full-size sample representative of each signage system
specified. Sample will be returned upon approval.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Package separately or in like groups, as applicable. Include installation template, hardware or
adhesive specified and installation instructions.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
10430 - 2
Radiant Park
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ENGRAVED FIBERGLASS SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
A. Type: 1/4" fiberglass for modular signage systems, color core contrasting to exterior face
color, with engraving through face layer to expose core layer and 1/32" raised characters. All
signage shall include raised Grade 2 Braille symbols.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall inspect the surfaces, substrates and conditions under which the signage is to be
installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions which will prevent the successful
installation of the signage.
B. Exact copy for all address signage is to be verified with the City of Fort Collins Engineering
Department and coordinated with the Architect prior to fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation shall be by qualified signage fabrication company personnel in
accordance with accepted industry standards.
B. Building-mounted signage shall be installed in locations indicated on the Drawings and
coordinated with components of the building materials and finish systems.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Building- or wall-mounted identification signage shall be installed in the location(s) shown on
the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
10520 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish portable fire extinguishers, complete with surface-mounted wall brackets.
B. Furnish key access box(es) for use by the local fire department, complete with mounting
hardware.
C. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers".
2. UL Labels: Provide units that have been approved and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories.
3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. All fire protection specialties shall be furnished by one (1) manufacturer throughout the
project.
C. Certification: Supplier shall certify that the fire extinguisher type specified for each space or
building is appropriate for the type of materials and/or hazards anticipated to be encountered
in each space, particularly specialized areas such as electrical equipment rooms.
D. LEED Compliance: Not applicable.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data on all fire protection accessories and
specialties for approval by the Architect.
B. LEED Submittals: Not applicable.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PORTABLE MULTIPURPOSE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Type: Units shall be 10-lb. multipurpose dry chemical pressurized type equipped with pressure
gauge and which do not need recharging, except after use.
1. Units shall be tested and approved by UL with a minimum 4A-60BC rating. UL rating
shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached to, and a part of, fire extinguisher
units.
2. Ensure that units are properly charged prior to installation.
3. Instructions for repairs, maintenance and recharging shall be attached.
4. Refer to certification requirements specified in paragraph 1.02 above.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. MP Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (800) 527-7367, as basis of design.
2. JL Industries, Bloomington, MN, (800) 554-6077.
10520 - 2
Radiant Park
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER WALL BRACKETS
A. Type: Manufacturer’s standard mounting bracket, suited to fire extinguisher supplied, white
baked enamel finish, complete with anchorage devices.
1. Supply each bracket with one (1) fire extinguisher specified above.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. B Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (800) 527-7367, as basis of design.
2. JL Industries, Bloomington, MN, (800) 554-6077.
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.03 KEY ACCESS BOX
A. Furnish surface-mounted, heavy-duty key access box, complete with all mounting hardware, as
required by the governing fire authority, located as shown on the Drawings.
1. Series 3200 Knox-Box, manufactured by the Knox Company, Newport Beach, CA, (714)
650-2885, or equal approved by the agency with jurisdiction.
B. Quantity: One (1).
C. Owner shall furnish a facility master key for use by the fire department.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrates and conditions under which the fire protection specialties
are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and conditions governing the work of this Section.
C. Ensure that recessed wall cavities for cabinets to be installed into fire-rated wall assemblies
have been properly constructed and lined with fire-rated gypsum wallboard.
D. Verify servicing, charging and tagging of all fire extinguishers.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection accessories where shown on the Drawings and in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Securely fasten all
components in position, square and plumb, in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B. Install multipurpose extinguishers in locations as shown on the Drawings or as required to
comply with governing regulations.
C. Install fire extinguishers and/or cabinets at mounting height to comply with handicapped
accessibility requirements:
1. Cabinet: 48" to centerline of handle.
D. Install key access box in location(s) as shown on the Drawings and at mounting height to comply
with requirements of the governing fire department:
1. Knox-Box: 6'-0" to centerline of access door, or as required by the governing fire
authority.
END OF SECTION
10800 - 1
Radiant Park
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install stainless steel, commercial quality toilet, bath and janitorial accessories
and associated hardware.
B. Furnish rough-in frames supplied to other Sections.
C. Furnish electric hand dryers.
D. Installation of Owner-furnished toilet and bath accessories.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
4. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals: Sheet steel toilet partitions.
5. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Framing of rough openings and blocking.
6. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile.
1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Certain toilet accessories shall be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor as
scheduled in this Section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM A167: Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
2. ASTM A366: Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality.
3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer throughout the project.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product list and data sheets indicating materials,
components, finishes and method of installation.
B. Samples: Provide one (1) sample of representative accessory specified herein, upon request by
the Architect. Sample will be returned upon approval.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to
receive them.
B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish.
C. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of the
work of this Section.
10800 - 2
Radiant Park
D. Owner-Furnished Accessories: Contractor shall receive, store and protect the accessories
furnished by the Owner.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty for all accessories covering
defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. Type: Surface-mounted or semi-recessed construction, commercial quality accessories, as
scheduled in paragraph 2.02.
B. Stainless Steel or Metal Components:
1. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold-rolled stretcher leveled, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. galvanized
coating.
2. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, commercial grade, 22-gage.
3. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded.
4. Brass: Solid brass alloy.
C. Anchorage and Attachment Devices:
1. Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel.
2. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by manufacturer for
component and substrate.
3. Anchor Plates: Steel anchor plates as recommended by manufacturer for secure
installation.
D. Fabrication:
1. Weld and grind smooth all joints of fabricated components.
2. Form exposed surfaces from one (1) sheet of stock, free of joints.
3. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes.
4. Form surfaces flat and without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or
dents.
5. Back-prime components where accessories will be in contact with dissimilar building
finishes to prevent electrolysis.
6. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.
7. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
E. Keying: Key all new accessories together.
F. Finishes:
1. Chrome/Nickel Plating: Satin finish.
2. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin finish.
G. Mounting: Concealed-screw mounting, unless otherwise indicated. Surface-mounted type,
unless scheduled as semi-recessed.
H. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
I. Approved Manufacturers:
1. General: Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer
throughout the project, at least to the extent scheduled. Deviations from consistency
of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available designs are not satisfactory.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., N. Hollywood, CA, (818) 982-9600, and represented
locally in Denver, CO, (303) 429-0133, as basis of design.
3. Bradley Corporation, Menomonee Falls, WI, (414) 354-0100.
4. American Specialties, Inc., Yonkers, NY, (914) 476-9000.
5. A&J Washroom Accessories, New Windsor, NY, (914) 562-3332.
6. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (Gamco), Durant, OK, (800) 451-5766.
7. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance, design and
appearance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
10800 - 3
Radiant Park
2.02 ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS
A. General: Fully-recessed type, porcelain enameled steel housing, U.L.-listed, 115V, 20 amp,
2300 watts, 50/60 Hz.
B. Operation: Manual push-button.
C. Drying Cycle: 30 seconds.
D. Features:
1. Fixed nozzle.
2. Provide ground fault interrupter type (GFI) where required by mounting location and
governing codes.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard porcelain enamel, with stainless steel nozzle, push button and
trims.
F. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
G. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Model RA-5, manual operation, by World Dryer, Berkeley, IL, (800) 449-6950. No
exceptions.
2.04 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES
A. Grab Bars, as basis of design:
1. 3-Piece Horizontal and Vertical at HC Accessible Toilet Compartments: Bobrick B-6206
x 18", 36" and 42" to 48" lengths with peened gripping surfaces, concealed mounting, 1-
1/2" diameter.
B. Toilet Paper Dispensers/Holders, as basis of design:
1. Multi-Roll Toilet Paper Dispensers: Bobrick B-288 multi-roll surface-mounted dispenser
with locking cover and concealed mounting.
2. Multi-Roll Toilet Paper Holders: Bobrick B-27460 multi-roll surface-mounted holders
with concealed mounting, no controlled delivery.
3. Single-Roll Toilet Paper Holder: Bobrick B-685 single-roll surface-mounted holder with
concealed mounting.
C. Mirrors, as basis of design:
1. Mirrors: Full frameless mirrors specified in Section 08800.
2. Framed Mirrors: Bobrick B-165 framed mirrors without shelf, 24" x 36" unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
3. Mirrors: Bobrick B-1556 surface-mounted sheet stainless steel, 24" x 36" unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings, with mounting screws.
D. Mop and Broom Holders: Bobrick B-223 surface-mounted holder, 24" long with three (3)
holders.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to the job site at appropriate time for building into the
work. Provide templates and rough-in measurements to the Contractor as required.
B. Before starting work, notify the Contractor in writing of any conflicts detrimental to the
installation or operation of the accessories.
10800 - 4
Radiant Park
C. Ensure that cutouts in specified toilet partitions for thru-partition mounted accessories have
been properly located and sized. Provide templates and rough-in dimensions to the toilet
partition manufacturer.
D. Coordinate exact location of accessories with the Architect as necessary.
E. Ensure that electrical conduit has been properly located and installed to location(s) of electric
hand dryers.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. General: Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Install Owner-furnished toilet and bath accessories as scheduled on the Drawings or specified
herein, including but not limited to:
1. Surface-mounted toilet paper holders.
2. Surface-mounted paper towel dispensers.
3. Surface-mounted soap dispensers.
3.04 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Install accessories in public restrooms at mounting heights to comply with American National
Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1-2003 and the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA), 1990, for handicapped accessible accessories:
1. Mounting Heights (above finished floor):
a. Horizontal Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 33"-36".
b. Vertical Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 39"-41" from wall and finished floor.
c. Grab Bars, Showers: 33"-36".
d. Toilet Paper Dispensers: 20" to centerline of roller. Verify clearances with
grab bars.
e. Mirrors: 38" to bottom edge, or as shown on the Drawings.
f. Electric Hand Dryers: 48" maximum to operating device.
B. Balance of accessories not located in handicapped accessible areas to be mounted at
manufacturer's recommended height. Comply with all governing regulations.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Quantities are the responsibility of the Contractor. Refer to the Drawings for locations.
B. Women's Restroom # 103:
1. Grab bars, 3-piece, as shown on the Drawings.
2. Grab bar, 1-piece, horizontally mounted on counter.
C. Men's Restroom # 101:
1. Grab Bars, 3-piece, as shown on the Drawings.
2. Grab bar, 1-piece, horizontally mounted on counter.
D. Janitor's Service Room # 102:
1. Mop and Broom Holder: One (1) per mop sink.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 1
SECTION 15010
MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the applicable provi-
sions of General Requirements are hereby adopted and made part of Division
15, Mechanical Work.
B. The Mechanical Drawings and the Division 15 sections listed below constitute
the Mechanical Construction portion of this project.
15010 Mechanical Special Conditions
15050 Materials and Methods
15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation
15440 Plumbing
15850 Heating and Ventilating
15950 Automatic Temperature Control
15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
C. Where "Project Manager" is used in this Specification, we mean that person so
designated by the Owner.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. These specifications are for the building plumbing, heating, ventilation, and
make-up air systems only.
1.03 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to
convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, ducts,
conduits, piping, and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets.
Mechanical trades shall follow these drawings in laying out their work, consult
general construction drawings to familiarize themselves with all conditions
affecting their work, and shall verify spaces in which their work will be installed.
Coordinate work with other trades as job conditions reasonably require.
B. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and
arrangement, make such changes without extra cost to Owner.
C. The drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing in measurements nor to
serve as shop drawings.
D. The installation details, instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of
the product used, modified, to obtain the best end result shall form the basis of
installation of the products for usage on this project except where definite and
specific instructions are set forth therein or details are shown on plans.
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 2
1.04 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. Shop Drawings must be submitted for the following equipment:
1. Valves
2. Insulation
3. Plumbing Piping
4. Plumbing Fixtures
5. Wall Hydrants
6. Dampers
7. Exhaust Fans
8. Louvers
9. Fan-coil & Unit Heaters
10. Temperature Controls
11. All items followed by '*'
B. Shop Drawings must first be checked by the Contractor for space conformance
and for performance characteristics established by Plans and/or Specifications,
and so stamped. Contractor's stamp shall include name and address of Contrac-
tor, specification paragraph, item designation and the following statement:
"Item(s) has (have) been checked for compliance with specification requirements
and space limitations and will meet these conditions; checked by; Date."
1. Shop Drawings not stamped as specified will be returned to the
Contractor without action.
2. Contractor must submit a minimum of 5 sets of complete drawings to
Engineer.
3. Alternately, Contractor shall have the option of submitting 1 compete set
of electronic shop drawings to the Engineer for review.
1.05 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A. Materials or products specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name, or
catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless changed by an
Addendum or a Contract Modification. Where two or more materials are named,
the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor.
B. Prior to award of the Contract, interested parties may request approval of substi-
tute materials. Such request shall be made in writing and be delivered to the
Engineer no later than 6 days (excluding Sundays and holidays) prior to date and
time of receipt of bids. All substitutions approved will be listed in an Addendum.
One set of specific detailed technical data for each item shall be delivered to the
Engineer.
C. See Section 01030, Alternates and Basic Section 01600, Material and
Equipment, for Alternates and Substitutions.
D. After the award of the Contract, any request for a substitution must be made in
writing by the Contractor (not material supplier or subcontractor). Such request
shall state the name of the product specified, the name of the product proposed
for substitution, the reason for requesting the substitution, and any change in
Contract Amount resulting from the substitution. No such substitution shall be
made until an appropriate Contract Modification has been issued and approved
by the Engineer and the Owner.
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 3
E. The cost of any changes of other trades as a result of use of the substitution
materials or equipment must be borne by the Contractor submitting such materi-
als or equipment.
1.06 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND CODES
A. All work shall be executed in accordance with the following codes applicable to
the trade affected and be subject to the inspection of these departments:
1. 2009 International Building Code
2. 2009 International Energy Conservation Code
3. 2009 International Plumbing Code
4. 2009 International Mechanical Code
5. All Local, State, and other attending codes, rules, regulations, and
amendments.
B. Obtain all permits and licenses required for work performed under Division 15
and pay all fees in connection with same.
C. Where work required by the drawings and specifications is above the standard
required by local regulations, it shall be done as shown and/or specified.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials, apparatus and equipment for the work shall be new and shall be of
first class quality, presently being manufactured. Absolutely NO "close-out" type
materials, apparatus or equipment shall be allowed. All materials, apparatus and
equipment shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every
detail, and shall be selected and arranged to fit properly into the allotted space
allowing proper room for maintenance.
1.08 TESTS
A. Tests shall be performed on the systems specified herein. Any one or all of the
systems listed herein may be provided. See Drawings and Specification Section
to determine which systems are to be provided. Tests shall be repeated until
each system is proven acceptable. All tests shall be made in the presence of the
Engineer and/or the Owners. A letter must be obtained by the Contractor and be
filed with the Engineer's Office, if the tests were witnessed by the Owner. Where
required, perform such tests in the presence of local or state building inspection
officials.
B. GENERAL
1. The pipe systems shall be tested to assure they are installed leak tight
and structurally safe for the intended purpose.
2. Cleaning and flushing tests and approvals shall be completed before
performing pipe system tests to eliminate retesting.
3. If the pipe tests fail, the pipe system shall be repaired and retested.
4. The installing supervisor shall confirm the safe test pressure for vessels,
equipment and accessories in the pipe system from drawings,
specifications, or name plate data.
5. Notify the Owner's Project Manager 24 hours in advance of each test.
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 4
C. NEW SYSTEM TEST
1. Instruments, vessels, equipment and accessories which cannot
withstand the test pressure required of attached piping shall be isolated
from the piping. Remove or block and vent direct operated or self-
contained regulators. Each part of a pipe system shall be tested, divided
as indicated, for the time specified for the given class of test.
2. Safety valves, relief valves, and rupture discs shall be removed during
the pipe system test and reinstalled after the test. New gaskets shall be
used when reinstalling all flanged items. Do not change spring settings
or make inoperative any safety and relief valves, except valves designed
to be pinned or yoked. Normally closed control valves shall be opened
before test.
3. Piping and vessels shall be vented when draining them to prevent their
collapse by vacuum.
4. The pipe system installer shall provide all necessary connections, vents
and drains to test and drain the system completely.
5. Allowance shall be made by the Project Manager for variations of pres-
sure and volume due to temperature changes in determining satisfactory
maintained test pressure.
6. The Project Manager shall check the test pressure at the beginning and
end of each test before acceptance of the system.
7. Pipe systems shall be tested and accepted before insulation, paint, or
other covering or coating is applied. The only exceptions are for those
parts, including vessels, which have been painted, covered or coated,
and have had previous certification tests.
8. The test shall be a hydrostatic test, or as otherwise specified.
D. TEST PRESSURES
1. The final test pressure shall be as follows:
a. 125 psig for domestic water systems
b. 12 ft. of water head or 5 psig air pressure held for 30 minutes for
waste and vent systems.
2. Domestic Water Systems
a. An initial test pressure of 24 psig shall be applied and a visual
inspection of the piping system conducted for leaks. The pressure
shall then be raised to .75 times the design pressure and rechecked
for leaks, after which the final test pressure shall be applied and a
final inspection of the piping system performed.
b. Clean domestic water shall be used as the test medium.
c. Trapped air shall be removed.
d. A test gauge with a minimum 4 1/2" diameter dial and a test pressure
reading between 1/2 to 3/4 of full scale shall be used. Test gauges
approved by the inspector shall be used.
e. The final test pressure shall be held for 4 hours, then visually
inspected for leaks. Pressure loss during the 4 hour test period may
be cause for rejection of the system.
f. Retesting Retest piping failing initial tests following correction of
defective work. Requirements of initial tests shall apply.
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 5
3. Final Test
a. After final connections to the existing system are made and prior to
application of insulation, a final test shall be made of the complete
new system.
b. The test shall be visual inspection in normal service test.
c. Systems to be tested - ALL piping systems.
d. The test pressure shall be the working pressure as a minimum or as
specified.
e. The test medium shall be the system's working fluid, or as specified.
f. Trapped air shall be removed.
g. Piping shall be visually inspected for leaks.
E. REPORT
1. The Report shall contain the following and be submitted within 24 hours
of each test:
a. Date, time and place of test
b. Duration of test
c. Person responsible for testing
d. Results of test
e. Action taken to correct deficiency
f. Outside dry bulb temperature Inside dry bulb temperature
g. Specific section of piping tested
2. The Report shall be required for final payment.
3. Notify the Project Manager after successful testing.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. All systems shall be warranted for one (1) year after Owner occupancy in
accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, etc. of
the contract.
B. In addition, the Contractor is hereby forewarned that expansive soils may exist in
the construction area. Any slab heave and resulting damage during the above
warranty period attributable to moisture from any leaking water, sewer, or storm
drainage piping installed under this Contract shall be corrected at no cost to the
Owner. Restore structure and repair all damage.
C. All lubrication, filter changes, and normal maintenance shall be the responsibility
of the Owner.
1.10 START-UP
A. At a time set by the Contractor and agreed to by Owner, arrange to place
equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required,
representatives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting equipment,
to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove satisfactory
operation prior to turning facility over to Owner.
B. Any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., shall be repaired or replaced as re-
quired prior to acceptance.
C. Run operating test for (3) 8 hour periods and submit test data for approval.
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 6
D. All equipment shall be freshly oiled, cleaned, filters changed with clean media
and installation completely finished prior to acceptance.
1.11 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prepare three (3) typed portfolios with complete sets of high quality copies of
Shop Drawings used in the erection of mechanical system. Each piece of
equipment shall have information on installation, testing, cleaning, and
maintenance instructions, list of materials for maintenance, parts list, wiring
diagrams, and ame and address of authorized service organization, with 24
hour phone number. List shall be alphabetized, within each category.
B. Complete manuals shall also include "As Built" temperature control drawings,
final balance report.
C. Include operating instructions for complete system, including emergency
procedures for fire or failure of major equipment, normal starting, operating and
shut down, and long term shut down.
D. Include maintenance instructions, identified equipment lists, proper lubricants
and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment, necessary cleaning,
replacement and/or adjustment schedule.
E. Information shall be folded, if necessary, and included in 8-1/2" x 11" hard cover,
indexed, loose-leaf 3 ring binder. Multiple binders shall be used if required to
contain materials. All material shall be properly identified with job name, date,
name and address of Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.
F. Portfolios shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of material and
completeness, and when approved by Engineer, portfolios will be turned over to
the Owner.
G. Where indicated in the specification, provide the services of a factory trained
representative to instruct the Owner's authorized personnel in the operation,
control, and maintenance of equipment. Contractor shall instruct Owner's Project
Manager and Maintenance Supervisor in the operation and maintenance of all
other equipment and systems, using the O & M Manual as a guide, including
paragraph C above. Final payment will not be made until this is done to the
Owner's satisfaction.
1.12 PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. All sheaves, belts, gears, couplings, and moving parts are to be protected by
approved permanent guards, casings, or railings.
1.13 PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR EQUIPMENT
A. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment (including open-ended piping
and ductwork) provided under Division 15 and equipment furnished by Owner for
installation under Division 15 to protect from mortar, paint, debris, etc., during
construction. A polyethylene covering tied securely around the equipment will be
acceptable for this purpose.
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 7
1.14 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from Mechanical Con-
tractor's work or operations, leaving the job and equipment in a clean condition.
All existing areas in which work is performed shall be cleaned and restored to
their original condition upon completion of the project.
B. Air surfaces of all coils, fans, air units, air filters, etc., shall be wiped clean or
washed if required. All plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all for-
eign matter, including stickers. Clean all items furnished, such as motors, etc.,
leaving the entire installation in a first-class condition.
C. Equipment and materials provided under Division 15 will be painted by the
General Contractor except where specified otherwise. However, any mechanical
equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish
coats of paint shall be restored to the original condition and appearance prior to
application of finish paint.
1.15 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing to
make arrangements for a final inspection.
B. After the final inspection is made, the Contractor will receive a list of items
requiring adjustment, correction, replacement or completion.
C. The Contractor shall comply completely with all the listed requirements within
thirty (30) days of receipt of list. Should the Contractor fail to perform within this
time limit, the Engineer and/or Owner reserves the right to have the work
completed by others and the cost deducted from the contract price.
D. The Contractor shall initial and date each item as completed and return copy to
Engineer prior to re-inspection.
1.16 EXISTING OUTSIDE UTILITIES
A. Utility companies shall be contacted and advised of proposed work prior to the
start of excavation.
B. Active Utilities: When encountered in work, protect, brace, support existing active
sewers, gas, electric, other services where required for proper execution of work.
If existing active utilities are encountered that are not indicated and which
required relocation, make request in writing for determination. Do not proceed
with work until written directions are received. Do not prevent or disturb
operation of active services that are to remain.
C. Inactive Utilities: When encountered in work, remove, cap, or plug inactive
services. Notify utility companies or municipal agencies having jurisdiction;
protect or remove these services as directed.
D. Interruption of Utilities: Where work makes temporary shutdown of services
unavoidable, shut down at night, or at such times as approved by Owner, which
will cause least interference with established operating routine. Arrange to work
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 8
continuously, including overtime, if required, to make necessary connections to
existing work.
1.17 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Brady
2. Seton
3. Westline Products
4. Approved Equal
B. Mark all pipe on both sides of partitions and slabs, at take-offs, valves,
connections to equipment and at intervals not exceeding 25 feet, identifying
markers, black on background color band; over 3" diameter pipe, 2" letters on 2
1/4" color band. Marker shall indicate domestic "CW", etc.
C. Show flow direction with arrows, immediately adjacent to all pipe identification
markers. 1 1/8" x 4 2/3" arrows shall be black on background color scheduled for
respective service.
D. Attach identifying markers and arrows on lower quadrant of overhead pipes, and
tape ends.
E. Application on soft insulation or chalky surface; binding tape shall be spirally
wrapped and overlapped around the circumference of the insulation for a
sufficient distance to mount identification markers and arrows to taped surface.
F. Pipe Identification List - Note: Any one or all of the following services may be
provided. See Drawings and Specifications Sections to determine which servic-
es are to be provided.
IDENTIFICATION BACKGROUND COLOR
Cold Water Green
Sanitary, Vent, Drain Green
Domestic Hot Water/Tempered Water Yellow
1.18 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all key equipment, fans, thermostats, controls, relays, dampers, etc.,
using Dymo Embossing Tape punched with M-3 Dymomite hand embossing tool.
Punch out 3/32" holes at each side of label and secure with Parker-Kalon self-
tapping screws in addition to adhesive.
B. Coordinate the location of all ceiling access panels for gypboard ceilings with the
General Contractor, so that there is access to each valve, volume damper, fire
damper or other equipment or temperature controls.
C. Familiarize the Owner's maintenance personnel with the locations of equipment
identified above.
Radiant Park – 1143.06 15010 - 9
1.19 TEMPORARY HEATING OF BUILDING
A. Provide temporary smokeless unit heaters as required. Installation, maintenance,
and fuel cost for temporary heat shall be at the expense of this Contractor,
OR
B. As specified in the General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of
this Specification. Permanent heating system shall not be used for temporary
heat during construction until all walls are taped and textured, without specific
approval by the Owner in writing.
1.20 ASBESTOS
A. Products, equipment or materials that contain asbestos shall not be allowed in
the construction of the mechanical and plumbing systems on this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
15050-1
Radiant Park – 1143.06
SECTION 15050
MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including references to applicable
provisions of the General Requirements, is hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SUMMARY
B. Materials and methods specified herein apply to all sections under Division 15 of the
specifications. Intent of this section is to set forth common requirements and to avoid repetition
under each particular section. See drawings and/or Division 15 Specification sections to
determine which systems are to be provided.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
C. Protect piping, fittings, valves, plumbing equipment, and HVAC equipment from moisture and dirt.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Provide pipe and fittings of type and materials scheduled herein, of quantities shown on the
drawings and as required to connect fixtures and equipment. All fittings shall have ANSI
tolerances and dimensions and have ASTM materials for conformance with piping below.
B. Provide standard weight IPS brass nipples and adapters where required between copper tubing
and fixtures. Steel or iron nipples are not permitted between copper lines and brass valves or
trim.
C. Joints: Joints in all copper domestic piping systems shall be made using 95/5 tin/antimony or
equal tensile strength solder that contains no lead. Engelhard "Silvabrite 100", Oatey "Safeflo" or
Canfield "Watersafe" are all acceptable. Use flux recommended by solder manufacturer.
Absolutely no lead containing solders or fluxes will be allowed in any portion of the work. The
Owner reserves the right to inspect solders, fluxes and joints. Any joint found containing lead
solder shall be cause for resoldering all joints made in all systems in the building.
D. Pipe and Fitting Schedule
1. Building sanitary sewer below grade.
a. Hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings, service weight, centrifugally spun,
ASTM A-74 and CISPI 301. Fittings cast iron hub and spigot. Pipe and fittings to
bear the mark of CISPI. Joints positive-seal elastomeric compression type
complying with ASTM-C564. Tyler Ty-Seal or equal.
b. Solid core Schedule 40 PVC DWV pipe and fittings with solvent welded joints.
ASTM F 1488.
15050-2
Radiant Park – 1143.06
2. Soil, waste, and vent piping in building above ground.
a. Hubless cast iron, service weight, centrifugally spun per CISPI-301. Fittings
hubless cast iron. Joints - neoprene sleeve and stainless steel retaining band
with double screw connectors bearing the mark of NSF, installed per manufactur-
er's recommendations. CISPI-310, latest edition.
3. Domestic water (hot and cold water) in building above ground.
a. 3” and smaller: Piping shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper water tube, per
ASTM B88. Fittings wrought copper, solder joint.
b. Except as otherwise specified elsewhere, Type "L" soft drawn copper may be
used adjacent to fixtures and equipment.
4. Water service and water in building underground.
a. Piping 2 1/2" and smaller, Type "K" soft drawn copper water tube ASTM B88.
Fittings, buried in ground, wrought copper, solder joint. There shall be no buried
fittings under the building.
5. Miscellaneous drain lines receiving condensate, etc.
a. Piping shall be Type "DWV" or “M” copper, fittings wrought copper, solder joint.
b. Schedule 40 PVC DWV with solvent welded joints in non-return air mechanical
chases only.
2.02 VALVES*
A. Provide valves in piping where indicated and provide shut-off valves in lines serving each piece
of equipment, including mixing valves, wall hydrants, sill cocks, pumps, water heaters, plumbing
fixtures, etc. Also isolate each major zone, building wing, loop, etc.
1. Ball valves shall be manufactured by Apollo, Nibco or Watts.
2. Check valves shall be manufactured by Stockham, Crane, Nibco, Watts, Jenkins,
Lunkenheimer, Milwaukee, Powell or Walworth.
3. Valves by other manufacturers must have prior approval.
B. Valve Schedule.
1. Shut-off valves for domestic water and natural gas shall be full flow ball valves, rated at
600 psig WOG.
a. Apollo 77............Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve
b. Nibco 585...........Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve
c. Watts LBF6080/LBF6081...Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve.
2. Where ball valves are used in insulated piping, handle extensions shall be provided.
Extension shall be manufactured as an option for the valve furnished and shall extend
the handle a minimum of 1/4" beyond the insulation jacket.
15050-3
Radiant Park – 1143.06
3. Swing check valves shall be bronze with swing regrinding seat and renewable disc Class
125.
a. Stockham Fig. Number:
- B-309......Bronze Soldered End
- B-319......Bronze Threaded End
- Or approved equal
4. Drain valves shall have 3/4" hose threaded adapter with cap and may be globe type with
composition disc or ball type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 UNIONS
A. Make connections at each piece of equipment with unions located for quick/easy disconnect for
maintenance. Provide unions on:
1. Equipment
2. Meters
3. Tanks
B. Use the same materials and finish as the piping system.
C. Use dielectric unions or flanges where copper or brass piping is connected to ferrous piping or
equipment. Epco Model FX, FB, EA. (All junctions of dissimilar metals).
D. Unions and flanges are not required at equipment where flanged valves, strainers, control valves,
etc., are used.
E. Omit unions and flanges in straight pipe runs or in concealed locations, except for flanged valve
applications.
F. Union Schedule:
1. Copper Piping
a. All pipe sizes: Copper, ground joint union. Chase 402, Mueller WC407.
3.02 PIPE AND DUCT SLEEVES
A. Provide sleeves for all pipes and ducts passing through floors, roofs, walls, and full height
partitions. Ducts passing through gypboard walls do not require sleeves.
B. For sleeves passing through fire rated walls/floors, fill void with fire stop material.
C. At points where a duct passes through a fire rated wall/floor and a fire damper is being installed,
the duct sleeve can be eliminated.
D. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Floor Sleeves in Exposed Areas: Schedule 40 PVC pipe, reamed, extending 2" above
floor in equipment rooms and wet areas and 1/4" above the floor in all other locations.
2. Masonry Wall Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC pipe reamed, and finished flush with wall.
15050-4
Radiant Park – 1143.06
3. Roof Sleeves and Floor Sleeves in Concealed Locations (as in chases)--Schedule 40
PVC.
4. Make pipe sleeves 1/2" larger inside diameter than the outside diameter of the pipe or
pipe insulation, where insulated. Fabricate sleeves from new materials, with ends cut
square.
5. Floor Sleeves, where water is to be kept out--fill with graphite packing and caulking
compound.
E. Sealing of all other sleeves shall be as specified under Section for Mechanical Systems
Insulation.
F. Sleeve Flashing, Caulking. For sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe,
except as otherwise specified herein, provide 16 oz. soft sheet copper of 4 pound lead per
square foot flashing extending 9" beyond sleeve in all directions; secure to waterproofing or lead
safe; turn down flashing into space between pipe and sleeve, insert oakum gasket, pour lead,
caulk water tight. Over air plenums caulk all sleeves with polysulfite base sealing compound
conforming to ASA A116.1 (Thiokol).
1. Where sleeves are indicated with flashing flanges provide Josam, or equal, 26420 series
threaded riser sleeve with anchor lugs, flashing flange, steel pipe extensions.
3.03 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES
A. Plates shall be installed on all exposed pipe passing through walls, floors, or ceilings. Plates
shall be as manufactured by Ritter Pattern and Casting Company, 120 Walker Street, New York,
New York 10013, or approved equal, chrome plated steel plates with set screw and concealed
hinge. Cut plates to fit flush at close-spaced piping locations.
3.04 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS*
A. Provide pipe hangers, supports, anchors, and guides as specified herein and/or indicated,
conforming to manufacturer's standardization society specification SP-69. Locate at changes in
direction and at concentrated loads. Hanger design shall permit vertical adjustment and lateral
movement to allow pipe expansion. Double nut hangers where piping is subject to water
hammer, i.e. near flush valves and solenoid valves.
B. Bear hot piping directly on hangers or on insulation shields and cold piping on insulation, shielded
as described under article for insulation.
Provide pipe hangers of ample diameter for cold piping insulation and vapor barrier jacket.
C. Use carbon steel adjustable hangers as follows:
1. Steel and cast iron, 2 1/2" and larger. Grinnell Fig. 260, Fee and Mason Fig. 239, Elcen
Fig. 12.
2. Steel, plastic and cast iron, 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. 69, Fee and Mason Fig. 400,
Elcen Fig. 202.
3. Copper pipe 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. CT-69, Fee and Mason Fig. 389, Elcen Fig.
389.
15050-5
Radiant Park – 1143.06
D. Three or more pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers using 2 clevis hangers and a capped
pipe cross member. Isolate copper pipe from bearing on the cross member with an electrically
insulating material.
1. Where indicated trapeze hangers shall be "Unistrut" or equal, double channel with drop
rods. Where pipes are indicated to be supported from the underside of trapeze hanger
provide "Unistrut" or equal speed clamps. Isolate copper pipe from cross member same
as specified above.
E. Support horizontal steel piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent:
Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing
Up to 1 1/4" 3/8" 8 ft.
1 1/2” to 3 1/2" 1/2" 8 ft.
4” & 5" 5/8" 12 ft.
6” 3/4” 12 ft.
F. Support horizontal copper piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent:
Nom. Tubing Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing
Up to 1 1/2" 3/8" 6 ft.
2” to 2 1/2" 3/8" 8 ft.
3” 1/2” 9 ft.
G. Support horizontal hub and spigot pipe at every hub, 10 ft. max. spacing.
H. Support horizontal hubless cast iron pipe at every joint and at each horizontal branch connection.
Sway brace to prevent shear.
I. Support vertical piping as follows:
1. Steel--Every other floor
2. Cast iron and Copper--Every floor, 10 ft. max. intervals
J. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited.
K. Support piping racked on walls with Uni-strut hangers and channel supports or equal. Copper
piping shall be insulated from contact with the steel channels.
3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are nominal pipe sizes, not outside diameters. Use
straight round pipe reamed to full size after cutting. Remove all chips from reaming.
2. Arrange pipe in group runs where feasible. Coordinate locations with all trades. Avoid
traps in piping.
3. The right is reserved to authorize minor changes in pipe location to avoid conflicts with
other trades at no additional cost to the Owner.
15050-6
Radiant Park – 1143.06
B. Waste and Vent Piping
1. All waste and vent piping shall be properly pitched at 1/4 inch to the foot (or 2%)
minimum for 3" and smaller pipe and 1/8 inch (or 1%) minimum for 4 inch and larger,
unless otherwise indicated. Piping shall be properly supported so that it will not sag and
form pockets. Exceptions must be approved in writing by the Engineer, Owner and by
the Administrative Authority.
2. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be carefully followed when installing pipe
using neoprene gasketed joints.
3. Locate vertical hubs of underground piping below partition walls for concealment. In
locations where hubs will project beyond finish partition wall, set hubs 1" below finished
floor.
C. Domestic Water Distribution Piping
1. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided.
3.06 DISINFECTING AND SPECIAL CLEANING
A. Domestic Water Systems
1. General: All new potable water systems shall be cleaned as herein specified prior to
testing or application of insulation. Testing must be witnessed by the State or County
Department of Health personnel and report filed with the Owner to receive final payment.
2. Notification: Notify State or County Department of Health in writing, 48 hours in advance
of the beginning of the cleaning process.
3. Witness: The cleaning process will not be deemed acceptable unless witnessed and
approved by the State or County Department of Health's representative.
4. Procedure: Comply with City of Fort Collins standards, Larimer County, or Colorado
State Department of Health requirements, whichever is more stringent.
5. Report: The report shall contain the following and be submitted to the Owner’s Project
Manager within 24 hours of the cleaning:
- Date, time and place of cleaning
- Duration
- Person responsible
- Solutions concentration and temperature
- Signature of County or State Department of Health representative
- Results
6. The report and its timely submission shall be required for final payment.
3.07 THERMOMETERS*
A. Furnish and install thermometers in pipe lines and equipment as scheduled and/or indicated.
Thermometers shall be Miljoco, Weiss, Trerice, or approved equal. Nine inch scale with
separable socket, cast aluminum case, adjustable industrial type complete with thermometer
wells. Scale range shall be 30°F to 240°F with 2 degree divisions.
15050-7
Radiant Park – 1143.06
B. Thermometer installation will not be accepted unless they can be easily read by an operator
standing on the floor.
C. Install one thermometer in the domestic water heater hot water discharge pipe.
3.08 ELECTRICAL
A. Electric Motors.
1. Provide electric motors with all equipment furnished and installed under Division 15,
unless specified otherwise.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. G.E.
b. U.S. Motors
c. MagneTek (Century)
3. Include the following features on all motors:
a. Ball bearings with lube lines extended to accessible location.
b. Cast iron or steel base with provision for slide adjustment unless directed
otherwise.
c. Conduit box with ample room for lead terminal connections.
d. Numbered leads of ample length for connection, terminating in the conduit box.
e. Permanently stamped nameplate.
f. Single speed 1750 RPM, unless specified otherwise.
g. Rated for continuous duty in ambient not exceeding 40 degrees C.
4. All motor wiring and windings shall be copper.
5. Power Factor
a. Motors shall have a labeled power factor, at name plate rating and rated voltage,
of not less than 85%. If a motor draws less than 1000 watts labeled rating, it is
excluded from the 85% P.F. requirement. If, through motor or design (i.e. RPM
less than 1200), an 85% power factor is not available, the supplier of that motor
shall furnish power factor correction components capable of correcting that non-
conforming motor to 90% or better.
6. Horsepower ratings -- in V-belt drive applications, size motor for 120 percent of brake
horsepower requirement, or scheduled horsepower, whichever is greater.
7. Single phase motors-- furnish for all applications 1/6 through 3/4 HP, single phase,
capacitor start, capacitor run, dripproof, thermally protected motors, unless indicated
otherwise, for 120 volt 60 hertz current.
B. Unit manufacturer shall provide belt guard.
C. Motor starters will be provided under Division 15, Mechanical, as specified below.
1. Starters shall be across-the-line, with manual reset, trip-free thermal overload relay in
each ungrounded conductor, necessary auxiliary contacts, proper NEMA Standard
enclosure for location, and hand-off-automatic switches in cover. Provide manual motor
starters for locally controlled single phase motors. For single phase motors which are
15050-8
Radiant Park – 1143.06
interlocked with external devices provide H-O-A magnetic starters or relay and switch
rated at locked rotor motor amps and manual starter. Starters, except those furnished
mounted in or on equipment, shall be by the same one of the following manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley
b. Cutler Hammer
c. Square D
D. Electrical wiring, except where otherwise specified in Division 15, will be provided under Division
16, Electrical Work.
1. Electrical wiring provided under Division 15 of the Specifications shall conform to all
applicable requirements of Division 16, Electrical Work.
2. Control Wiring: Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, relays, etc., and
wiring for valve and damper operators.
3. For single-phase devices where power current passes through controller and device,
wiring shall be considered power wiring.
E. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Division 15 equipment
shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule:
Set In Power Control
Furnished Place Wiring Wiring
Under Under Under Under
ITEM Division Division Division Division
Equipment Motors 15 15 16 -
Starters/Contactors:
Separate 15 16 16 15
Factory Mounted
and Wired 15 15 16 15
Pushbutton Stations:
Separate 15 16 - 15
In Starter Enclosure 15 16 - 15
Disconnect Switches 16 16 16 -
Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16 -
Control Relays 15 15 - 15
Control Transformers 15 16 16 15
Operating Switches 16 16 16 -
Line Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15
Low Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15
Sub-Base Low Voltage 15 15 - 15
15050-9
Radiant Park – 1143.06
Time Switches Not In
Control Panel 15 15 16 15
Thermostat and Controls
Integral with Equipment
of Directly Attached to
Ducts, Pipes, etc. 15 15 - 15
Set In Power Control
Furnished Place Wiring Wiring
Under Under Under Under
ITEM Division Division Division Division
Equipment in Temperature
Control Panels 15 15 - 15
Valve Motors, Damper
Motors, Solenoid Valves,
etc. 15 15 - 15
Control Circuit Outlets 16 16 16 -
Smoke Detectors Including
Relays for Fan Control 16 15 16 15
Equipment Interlocks 15 15 - 15
Note: Any one or all of the above devices may be provided. See Drawings and Specifications
Sections to determine which devices are to be provided.
END OF SECTION
15250 - 1
Radiant Park – 1143.06
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. The work involved in this section of the specification consists of furnishing all
labor, equipment, accessories and materials and in performing all operations
necessary for the installation of all insulation for the plumbing and duct systems,
and sealing of sleeves.
B. All insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled workmen
engaged in this type of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS*
A. All insulations shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings not exceeding the fol-
lowing unless otherwise specified:
Flame Spread 25
Smoke Developed 50
B. Insulation on all cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used shall be
applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal (hangers on outside of insulation
jacket).
C. Support inserts for cold water piping shall be installed at all outside hanger
points. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hangers shall consist of wood or rigid
insulation sections of equal thickness of the pipe insulation.
D. Inserts shall be installed in a manner to completely support the pipe and not
crush the insulation or damage the vapor barrier.
E. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces must
be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
15250 - 2
Radiant Park – 1143.06
2.02 MATERIAL APPROVAL CODE
A. Code I Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
1. Owens-Corning One or Two Piece Pipe Insulation
a. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - All service jacket
b. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - SSL - All service jacket
2. Schuller Flame Safe Pipe Insulation
a. All purpose jacket - AP
b. All purpose jacket - AP self-sealing lap system
3. Certain-Teed Manson Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
a. All service jacket
b. Or Equal by Knauf
B. Code II One Piece PVC Insulated Fitting Covers
1. Ceelco
2. Zeston
3. Perma-Jac
4. Proto LoSmoke
5. Or prior approved equal
C. Code VIII Elastomeric Pipe Insulation
1. Insulation shall not exceed the following fire hazard ratings:
Flame Spread 25
Smoke Developed (3/4") 225
2. For service - 40 degrees F. to 200 degrees F.
3. Armstrong FR Armaflex
4. Or Equal by IMCOA or Nomaco
D. Vapor barrier to be kraft paper reinforced foil with integral self-sealing pressure
sensitive adhesive longitudinal seam sealing strips. Insulation maximum thermal
conductivity shall be .25 at 75 deg. F per inch. No staples shall be used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COLD PIPING
A. Domestic Cold Water: All piping in concealed and exposed areas shall be insu-
lated with fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket or grades mentioned in
Code I. Thickness shall conform to the following schedule:
Service & Size Insulation Thickness
Domestic Cold Water:
1” and smaller 1/2"
1-1/4” and larger 1"
B. Piping in cores of block wall may be insulated with Code VIII insulation, thick-
ness as above.
15250 - 3
Radiant Park – 1143.06
C. Jackets and end laps shall be sealed with Chicago mastic 17-465, or equal,
applied to two surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system.
3.02 HOT PIPING
A. All piping in concealed and exposed areas shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe
insulation with all service jacket of grades mentioned in Code I. Thickness shall
conform to the following schedule:
Service and Size Insulation Thickness
Domestic Hot Water/Tempered Water:
2” and smaller 1"
B. Piping in cores of block wall may be insulated with Code VIII insulation, thickness
as above.
C. Jackets and end laps shall be sealed with Chicago mastic 17-465, or equal,
applied to two surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system.
3.03 FITTINGS, VALVE BODIES
A. PVC insulated fitting covers as mentioned in Code II.
1. The pre-cut insulation shall be applied to the fitting to make a snug fit of
equal thickness against the adjoining pipe insulation. The fitting covers
shall be secured by vapor barrier adhesive.
2. On cold services all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor
barrier adhesive.
3.04 SHIELDS
A. Provide sheet metal insulation shields at all hanger locations for cold services.
Form the shields to bear on the lower 1/3 periphery of the insulated pipe. Use 20
gauge sheet metal for pipes less than 4", 16 gauge for larger pipes. Comply with
the following table for shield length:
Pipe Size Length
4” and smaller 9"
6” to 10" 12"
3.05 SEALING OF SLEEVES
A. All sleeves for pipes, ductwork, etc., furnished under Division 15 of the specifi-
cations, penetrating floors, and walls and full height partitions shall be sealed in
accordance with the following:
1. All insulated services shall have the specified insulation terminated on
either side of sleeve. Services which require a vapor barrier jacket shall
have segment through sleeve insulated with calcium-silicate having a
minimum thickness same as specified for service. Entire void space
between inside of sleeve and outside of duct, pipe, and/or calcium- sili-
cate insulation shall be packed with fiber insulation, conforming to HHI-
521E Type 3 or HHI-558B Form A and having an ASTM fire class E-84
with fiber melt point in excess of 2000 deg. F., to a point 1/8 inch from
15250 - 4
Radiant Park – 1143.06
ends of pipe sleeve. After void is packed with fiber insulation, services
which are specified to be insulated shall have a section of insulation
installed on each side of sleeve, insulation to be fitted tight to sleeve
insulation. Balance of space in sleeve to be filled with non-hardening
silicone conforming to TTS-00230 and of type which will allow 50 percent
movement in one direction.
3.06 DUCTWORK
A. External wrap (thermal):
1. Insulation: Fiberglass blanket, 1 lb. density, vapor barrier jacketed with 2"
tab. Jacket - laminated aluminum foil, glass reinforced kraft paper.
2. Application: Secure to metal leaving no voids at the edges, with strips of
insulation adhesive. Lap all joints 2", seal with lap adhesive and staple
6"on center. Seal over staple with matching tape patches. Further secure
the bottom side insulation on ducts over 24" wide with welded pins and
mechanical fasteners, not over 18" on center and seal over with tape
matching patches.
3. Do not install insulation over access panels.
B. Insulation shall be in accordance to the following schedule for new ducts:
Ductwork Insulation Insulation
Type Type Thickness
Supply External 1-1/2"
Outside Air External 1-1/2"
END OF SECTION
15440 - 1
Radiant Park – 1143.06
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists
of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment necessary to
install all complete systems listed below, including minor items obviously neces-
sary for complete and operating installation.
1. Sanitary Drainage System
2. Domestic Water System
3. Plumbing Fixtures
1.03 CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Make all domestic water, waste, vent, drain, etc., connections to all equipment in
his building whether or not such equipment is furnished under this section or un-
der other sections of this specification. This includes installation, furnishing piping
and shut-off valves on branches to and from each piece of equipment from mains
or branch mains.
1.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning:
1. At completion clean strainers, traps, aerators, and valves of debris, sand
and dirt. Thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
B. Adjusting:
1. Adjust flush valves, faucets, and bubblers for proper flow, after cleaning
and flushing operations are accomplished.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect fixtures and related components from damage before, during and after
installation to date of Final Acceptance or Owner move-in. Provide protective
coverings or other protection as required.
15440 - 2
Radiant Park – 1143.06
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Supply two sets of faucet washers, o-rings, and other wearing parts for each fix-
ture type and turn over to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL and WASTE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight, bearing the mark of CISPI.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight, bearing the mark of CISPI.
a. Fittings: Cast iron.
b. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-
shield, assemblies bearing the mark of NSF.
C. Equipment Drains
a. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV or M.
b. Fittings: Wrought copper.
c. Joints: Soldered. Use lead free solder.
2.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, Hard Drawn.
1. Fittings: Wrought copper.
2. Joints: Soldered. Use lead free solder.
2.03 FLOOR DRAINS and CLEANOUTS*
A. Acceptable Manufactures:
1. Josam
2. JR Smith
3. Wade
4. Zurn
5. Prior Approved Equal
B. Floor Drains:
1. Floor drains shall be cast iron with double drainage flange, nickel-bronze
rim and strainer unless otherwise indicated, drain size as noted on the
plans. Provide clamping ring when installed in floors which have
waterproof membrane. Drains connected to cast iron soil pipe shall have
spigot outlets.
15440 - 3
Radiant Park – 1143.06
2. FD-1 Zurn ZN-415B (Restrooms and utility type rooms, in slab)
a. Floor drain with 6" diameter Type 'B' strainer and Zurn Z1000
cast iron deep seal P-trap.
C. Cleanouts (FCO, GCO, & WCO):
1. Inside caulk or spigot connections, bronze cleanout plug, straight
threaded with tapered shoulder and caulked lead seat.
2. Screwed pipe cleanouts - bronze pipe threaded plug with four raised
square lugs or counter sunk plug.
3. Floor cleanouts (FCO): frame and cover threaded for 1 1/2" vertical
adjustment, threads protected with shield to be removed when concrete
is set. Covers--nickel bronze round frame and cover, deep flange tractor
type. Extra heavy type in heavy traffic areas.
4. Wall cleanouts (WCO): square nickel bronze frame and cover with
minimum opening of 6" x 6".
5. Grade Cleanouts (GCO): cast iron cleanout with round, heavy duty
scoriated, non-tilt cast iron top, adjustable to finished grade level.
2.04 VENTS THRU ROOF
A. Do not install vents within two feet of roof edge, parapet or wall line of an "on-the-
roof structure."
B. Metal roof:
1. Flash vents through roof with galvanized roof jack with neoprene gasket
at neck.
2. Oakey 11853 or equal, no-caulk roof flashing, size as required.
2.05 SHOCK ABSORBERS (SA-1)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Wade
4. Zurn
5. Prior approved equal
B. Shock absorbers shall be the gas filled stainless steel bellows type, sized and in-
stalled per requirements of PDI-WH-201.
C. Shock absorbers shall be furnished and installed at all solenoids and other quick
closing valves and flush valves.
D. Each shock absorber shall have a line size shut-off ball valve for replacement.
2.06 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. A.O. Smith
2. Rheem
15440 - 4
Radiant Park – 1143.06
3. State
4. Prior approved equal
Provide where indicated, domestic water heater with capacities and characteris-
tics scheduled on plans.
B. Heater shall have ASHRAE 90.1b-1992 seal of approval, UL certified.
C. Tank shall be suitable for 150 PSI working pressure and shall be glass lined.
D. Assembly shall include P/T relief valve, magnesium anode rod, high limit cut off,
foam insulation, sheet metal jacket with baked enamel finish and drain valve.
E. 1 year limited warranty for commercial installation.
2.07 EXPANSION TANK – DOMESTIC HOT WATER*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. State
2. Amtrol
3. Bell & Gossett
4. A.O. Smith
5. Taco
6. Approved Equal.
B. Tank shall be designed for potable water systems. Tank shall be constructed of
steel with a maximum working pressure of 150 PSI and a maximum temperature
of 200oF.
C. Tank shall have an internal butyl diaphragm with a polymer lining or butyl bladder.
All internal parts must comply with FDA regulations and approvals.
D. Size as specified and as required for proper venting pressure or as scheduled on
plans.
2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR (Reduced pressure)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and models:
1. Watts Model 909, all sizes
2. Febco 825, 3/4" to 2"
3. Wilkins
4. Or prior approved equal
B. Shall be the reduced pressure type with atmospheric vent.
1. Bronze body and accessory construction and replaceable seats.
2. Bronze body ball valve test cocks and 1/4 turn ball valves on inlet and
outlet.
3. With bronze strainer, flanged adapter ends or unions, and air gap fitting.
15440 - 5
Radiant Park – 1143.06
2.09 HOSE BIB*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. J.R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Wade
4. Woodford
5. Zurn
6. Prior Approved Equal
B. Install hose bibs where indicated on the drawings.
C. HB-1 to be Woodford Model B74 backflow protected close coupled wall hydrant
with testable backflow preventer and loose key handle in bronze box with chrome
finish with loose key operable cover.
2.10 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Leonard
2. Symmons
3. Watts
4. Wilkins
5. Prior approved equal
B. A domestic water thermostatic mixing valve shall be provided on the domestic
hot water piping to all lavatories. Valve may be for individual or multiple fixture
applications as indicated on the plans.
C. Valve shall be ASSE 1070 listed.
D. Valve shall be of bronze body construction, adjustable outlet temperature, and
suitable for inlet temperatures up to 180 degrees F.
E. Valve shall be initially set for 110 degrees F. discharge temperature.
F. Install in a location that is easily accessible for temperature adjustment,
maintenance and replacement.
G. TMV-1 to be Watts Series LFMMV, 3/4" size.
2.11 FWH-1 FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANT*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. J.R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Wade
4. Woodford
5. Zurn
6. Prior approved equal
B. Provide a freeze proof wall hydrant where indicated on the plans.
15440 - 6
Radiant Park – 1143.06
C. WH-1 to be Woodford B65 complying with ASSE 1019-B, with ¾” male hose
thread equipped vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011, listed with IAPMO.
2.12 LAV-1 COUNTERTOP MOUNT LAVATORY*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Elkay
b. Just
c. Kohler
d. Advance Tabco
e. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide a countertop mount sink where indicated on the plans.
C. LAV-1 to be Just CLF-14, type 304 stainless steel, 18 ga, with built-in overflow,
and two 1 ¼” faucet drillings four inches on center. Provide with Just J-ADA-115-
FS chrome plated 17 ga, 1 ¼” offset drain with flat chrome plated brass strainer
and 1 ¼” 17 ga chrome plated brass tailpiece. Provide and install Just J-ADA-
125 drain safety cover.
D. Faucet to be Moen 8886 two handle metering faucet with adjustable cycle time,
0.25 GPC aerator, and control cartridges located out of the domestic water
stream.
2.13 UR-1 URINAL*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Acorn
2. Bradley
3. Willoughby
4. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide urinals where indicated on the plans.
C. Urinal to be Willoughby 1412-WO-BS-0.5-MT-WS-FVT wall mount washout uri-
nal with all welded 14 ga type 304 stainless steel construction, 0.5 GPF con-
sumption, ¾” back spud, satin finish, stainless steel beehive strainer, and an in-
tegral all welded type 304 stainless steel “P” trap with back 2” NPT connection.
D. Flush valve to be Sloan Royal 995-0.5-MBFW, concealed flush valve with back-
check, angle stop, vacuum breaker, elbow flush connection, vandal-proof ADA
rated hy-draulically operated metal push button.
2.14 WC-1 WATER CLOSET (Handicapped)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Acorn
2. Bradley
3. Willoughby
4. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide water closets where indicated on the plan.
15440 - 7
Radiant Park – 1143.06
C. Water Closet to be Acorn Model 1675-W-1-HET(1.28 GPF)-FVBO-ADA-CO1(4")-
FTV-HS-MT-SW, blow-out Jet type, 14 gauge stainless steel, satin finish, wall
mount, 4" wall outlet with cleanout, 1.5" back spud water inlet, 1.6 GPF, wall
sleeve, and hinged seat.
D. Flush valve to be Sloan Royal 952-1.28-MBFW, concealed flush valve with back-
check, angle stop, vacuum breaker, elbow flush connection, vandal-proof ADA
rated hydraulically operated metal push button.
2.15 MSB-1 MOP SERVICE BASIN*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Fiat
2. Zurn
3. Stern-Williams
4. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide mop service basins where indicated on the drawings.
C. Mop service basin to be: Zurn Z1996-24, 24”x24”x10” molded high density com-
posite basin, PVC drain body, stainless steel dome strainer/lint basket, and 3”
gasketed outlet connection. Provide with stainless steel bumper guards and one
stainless steel wall guard.
Faucet to be Zurn Z843M1 polished chrome-plated cast brass 8” service sink
faucet with quarter turn ceramic disc cartridges, integral service stops, and 6”
cast brass spout with chemical resistant atmospheric vacuum breaker, ¾” hose
threaded outlet, pail hook, and adjustable wall brace. Provide with lever handles.
2.16 DF-1 Drinking Fountain (Free-Standing Pedestal, Handicapped, with jug filler)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Murdock
2. Most Dependable
3. Haws
4. Elkay
5. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide fountains where indicated on the drawings.
C. Fountain to be GS Series Model GSM54-FRU2-JF2, all stainless steel “4”. Year-
round freeze resistant, even though to be used seasonally. Self-closing re-
cessed spigot jug filler (seasonal type). Free-standing pedestal fountain with
handicapped accessible arm bowl, and jug filler. Bowl and mouth guard shall be
stainless steel. With drain, bubbler, and replaceable valve. Color to be selected
by Architect. Fountain to meet NSF-61 requirements and have a UL approved
label with UL tracking number. Mount on concrete pad per specifications Section
02520, Concrete Paving. Connect to ¾" type K copper water supply and 2" PVC
Sanitary sewer as shown on the drawings and per manufacturer's recommenda-
tions. Install plumb using vandal resistant nuts.
15440 - 8
Radiant Park – 1143.06
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING
A. Waste Piping
1. Provide new waste piping as indicated on the plans.
2. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall careful-
ly survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the piping in-
stallation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone
cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc.
3. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including repair,
permits, etc., in his bid.
B. Water Piping
1. Provide new water piping as indicated on the plans. Provide new re-
duced pressure back flow preventer, size as indicated on the plan.
2. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall careful-
ly survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the piping in-
stallation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone
cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc.
3. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including repair,
permits, etc., in his bid.
C. Fixtures
1. Furnish stop valves and traps for all fixtures and equipment.
2. The exposed flush, waste, and supply pipes at the fixtures, except those
installed in Chase Room Number 102, shall be chromium plated brass
pipe, iron pipe size. Fittings and traps for brass pipe shall be cast brass,
chromium plated.
3. Install chromium-plated brass wall or floor plates where piping passes
through walls or floors and is exposed in a finished space.
4. Where reference is made to chromium-plated brass, same shall mean
polished brass, first nickel plated and finished with chromium plate.
5. Fixture Mounting Heights: Mount fixtures to the following heights above
finish floor:
a. Water Closet
i. Handicapped 17 - 19 inches to top of seat
b. Urinal:
ii. Handicapped 17 inches to lowest part of lip
c. Wall Hydrants:
iii. Standard 24 inches to outlet
6. Coordinate all fixture rough-ins with masonry contractor.
END OF SECTION
15850 - 1
Radiant Park 1143.06
SECTION 15850
HEATING AND VENTILATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work in this section of the specification and the accompanying drawings
consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment
necessary to install heating and air handling systems as indicated on drawings
and specified herein, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and
operating systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STATIONARY LOUVERS*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. American Warming and Ventilating
2. Arrow
3. Dowco
4. Greenheck
5. Industrial Louvers
6. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
7. Prior approved equal.
B. Provide stationary outside air intake and exhaust louvers where indicated on the
plans.
C. See schedule on the plans for exact type, construction, and accessories.
2.02 ELECTRIC FAN-COIL*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Berko
2. Markel
3. Q-mark
4. Prior approved equal
B. Manufacturer, Model, and Size:
1. As scheduled on the plans.
15850 - 2
Radiant Park 1143.06
C. Description:
1. Test operate prior to shipment to insure proper operation.
Completely factory assembled with all controls installed. U.L.
Rated.
2. Aluminum-finned, copper clad steel sheath heating element.
3. Heavy gauge cold rolled steel cabinet with baked-on paint finish,
insulated. Horizontal throw with duct flange.
4. With 24 VA control transformer factory installed with automatic
fan delay and thermal cutout. Or 120V controls.
5. Direct drive, centrifugal forward curved fan statically and
dynamically balanced, internally isolated. Internal overload
protected motor.
6. With wall-mounted thermostat. With rubber-in-shear isolators.
7. With mounting brackets as required.
8. Solid state motor speed controller.
9. Throw-away filters.
10. Cabinet access panels.
2.03 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Berko
2. Indeeco
3. Markel
4. Q-mark
5. Prior approved equal
B. Manufacturer, Model, and Size:
1. As scheduled on the plans.
C. Description:
1. Test operate prior to shipment to insure proper operation.
Completely factory assembled with all controls installed. U.L.
Rated.
2. 18 ga steel cabinet with powder coat finish and adjustable
horizontal discharge louvers.
3. Aluminum finned, copper clad steel sheath heating element with
capillary type automatic reset thermal overload protection.
4. Draw thru fan shall be direct drive with aluminum blades. Fan
motor shall be totally enclosed designed for continuous heavy
duty operation with integral thermal overload protection.
5. Electric Unit Heater shall have a 24 VAC control transformer.
6. Electric Unit Heaters shall be UL listed and meet the
requirements of the National Electric Code.
15850 - 3
Radiant Park 1143.06
2.04 EXHAUST FANS*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck.
2. PennBarry.
3. Loren Cook
4. Twin City.
5. Prior approved equal.
B. Provide where indicated and as scheduled on the plans. Arrangement shall be
as shown on the plans. With 12” roof curb and neoprene gasket.
All fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced at the factory.
C. Fan ratings shall be based upon tests performed in strict accordance with the
AMCA Standard 210-67 Test Code for Air Moving Devices. Each fan shall carry,
near the manufacturer's nameplate, the seal authorized by AMCA indicating that
ratings are certified. Fans not bearing this seal will not be acceptable.
D. Controls:
1. Controls for roof mounted exhaust fan to be provided by the
Temperature Control Contractor under Section 15950
“Automatic Temperature Control”.
2.05 SHEET METAL WORK - LOW VELOCITY SYSTEMS
A. Low velocity sheet metal work includes all ducts serving supply, return, and
exhaust air systems operating at a maximum of 2" W.G. of pressure.
B. Construction. Construct ducts from zinc coated iron or steel sheets conforming
accurately to the dimensions indicated on the drawings. All ducts shall be
straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. Construct ducts in
accordance with the recommendations in the current edition of the "SMACNA"
duct construction standards, 2" W.G. pressure class.
C. All ductwork transverse joints shall be made airtight by using duct sealer in
accordance with SMACNA standards. No open joints at the corners or else-
where will be allowed. All seams in horizontal ducts will be standing seams with
separate cleats mitering at the corners. All seams in vertical duct or risers shall
be self-supporting. All ducts shall be complete in themselves. No single
thickness partitions between ducts allowed. All ducts over 18" wide to be cross-
broken.
15850 - 4
Radiant Park 1143.06
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Securely attach all ductwork to the building construction in a manner to be free
from vibration and swaying under all conditions of operation. Hanger attach-
ments shall be appropriate for the building structure and shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval. Hang ducts from beams and joists whenever possible.
B. Ducts shall be substantially supported with hangers located at a maximum of 8
feet on centers, or less as conditions dictate, for the length of the duct. All
hangers shall be made of 1" wide galvanized iron straps, 18 gauge for hangers
spaced at 8 feet centers, 22 gauge for 4 feet centers, both for ducts up to 96"
semi-perimeter, or per latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards. Hanger straps to be secured to the bottom of the duct using sheet
metal screws. Additional screws to be added to sides of ductwork as conditions
dictate. Trapeze hangers per SMACNA standards may also be used.
3.02 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. All ductwork will be run substantially as shown on the plans. Changes in size or
cross section shall be made with long tapers. The Engineer reserves the right to
slightly change the run of certain ducts without extra cost to the Owner, if
necessary to avoid unforeseen structural or other interferences.
B. Where ducts run through ceiling spaces and structural, mechanical, or electrical
interference is encountered, maintain same cross sectional area as indicated on
plans with a maximum of 4 1/2 to 1 aspect ratio.
C. All openings in duct for grilles, registers, etc., shall be capped dust-tight with G.I.
metal caps during the construction period.
D. Where square turns are indicated, either round or rectangular duct, provide and
install square turn elbows with turning vanes. Vanes may be either commercial
type duct turns or approved equal, or shop fabricated to conform to SMACNA
standards. Vanes shall be single or double thickness type preassembled on
runners before installing in each elbow. Brace adequately and avoid rough
edges to prevent objectionable noise.
E. Where moisture may condense within the duct system, pitch ductwork to low
points and provide drip pans and drain connections with plugs for removal of
condensate.
F. No obstructions will be allowed in ducts except places where absolutely neces-
sary and prior approval has been received from the Engineer. In such cases
they shall be installed so as to least interfere with the passage of air.
15850 - 5
Radiant Park 1143.06
G. Curbs and Flashings:
1. This Contractor shall take responsibility for the integrity of the
roof, including making all new roof penetrations, installing curbs,
and making entire installation water-tight. Coordinate prefab
curb installation with General Contractor.
2. All flashing joints shall be soldered watertight.
3. Wash all flashings and counterflashing with acetic acid, and
paint with one coat of oil paint, silver or white in color.
4. Rooftop equipment shall be anchored to withstand wind loads of
30 pounds per square foot.
3.03 EXHAUST FANS:
A. Install per manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Wiring to roof mounted exhaust fans shall be routed up inside the curb utilizing
the fan manufacturer’s built-in conduit.
3.04 STATIONARY LOUVERS
A. Install louvers, where indicated on the plans, according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide anchor clips and caulk as required for a sound,
watertight installation. Make airtight duct connections to installed louvers.
3.05 ELECTRIC FAN COIL
A. Hang electric fan coil from ceiling/structure in compliance with manufacturer’s
written instructions. Make duct connections with neoprene coated fabric vibration
isolators.
B. All wiring shall be in compliance with the NEC.
C. Temperature controls shall be by the Temperature Controls Contractor.
3.06 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER
A. Hang electric unit heater from ceiling/structure in compliance with manufacturer’s
written instructions.
B. All wiring shall be in compliance with the NEC.
C. Temperature controls shall be by the Temperature Controls Contractor.
END OF SECTION
15950 - 1
Radiant Park - 1143.06
SECTION 15950
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements, in its entirety, including appli-
cable provisions of other Specification sections, are hereby adopted and made
part of this section of the Specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of
performing all labor and furnishing of all materials and equipment necessary to
provide the Automatic Temperature Control System for Heating, Ventilating and
Air Conditioning systems as specified herein, including minor items obviously
necessary for complete and operating installation.
1.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Control system shall be electric and electronic as manufactured by Honeywell,
Landis and Staefa, Kreuter, Reliable Controls, Robert Shaw, Siebe, or prior
approved equal.
B. The system shall be installed under the full-time supervision of an authorized
Installations Engineer employed by one of the above, or by Long and Assoc.,
Carrier Commercial Services, CW Industries, Air Comfort, Yoder Electrical
Services, or prior approved equal.
C. Prior to start of work, the Contractor shall submit control shop drawings as stated
in this Section. Shop drawings shall be prepared by an authorized temperature
control contractor as listed above. Work shall not begin until shop drawings are
approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTROL INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT*
2.02 In general, the control instruments and equipment furnished for this installation shall be the
best product of its type produced by the manufacturer.
A. Dampers and Damper Operators:
1. Damper Operators: 120 V electric type. Damper operators shall have metal
bodies. Provide operators with ample power to overcome friction of
damper linkage and air pressure acting on the damper blades. Locate the
damper operator mounting arrangement outside the airstream wherever
possible. Provide the operators with external adjustable stops to limit the
stroke. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit
normally closed position of the damper. Belimo operators are preferred.
B. Dampers:
15950 - 2
Radiant Park - 1143.06
1. Damper Frames: 13 gauge galvanized steel channel on 1/8" extruded
aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.
2. Damper Blades: Not to exceed six (6) inches in width. Blades shall be
suitable for high velocity performance. Opposed blades.
3. Damper Bearings: Nylon or Teflon. Bushings that turn in the bearing shall
be oil impregnated sintered metal.
4. Low leakage insulated type, with blade edge seals and side seals. Similar
to Greenheck Model ICD-45.
C. Thermostats:
1. Mechanical Chase Unit Heaters: Heating thermostat. 40 to 90 degrees F.
range. Honeywell T87K1007 with protective metal enclosure.
2. All room thermostats shall be mounted at 60” AFF.
3. Coordinate electrical requirements with Electrical Contractor.
D. Motion Detector:
1. See electrical drawings and specifications for motion detectors.
Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING:
A. Except where otherwise specified under sequence of controls, wire all electrical
controls furnished under this section of the specifications.
B. This installation shall comply with all rules and regulations of the National Electrical
Code and all state and local codes and regulations.
C. Install all conduits in a neat and orderly manner with conduit grouped as much as
possible following horizontal and vertical building lines and rigidly secure conduit to
the building construction.
D. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with
associated work being done under Division 16.
E. Except where otherwise specified, voltages for control of circuiting associated with
motors and their starters, and all control devices shall be rated at 120 volts or 24
volts.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the installation of temperature control equipment furnished under this
section but installed under other sections of this Division.
B. Electric Fan-coil, etc.: The manufacturer will provide all control devices,
transformers, relays, and other appurtenances as required per manufacturer's
system wiring and interlock submittals.
15950 - 3
Radiant Park - 1143.06
3.03 SERVICE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. After completion of the installation, adjust all thermostats, motors, and other
equipment provided under this Section.
B. Following complete adjustment, have a qualified representative fully acquainted
with the installation instruct the Owner's operators in the fundamentals and
operations of the system. This instruction period shall not be less than two (2)
hours.
1. Submit typewritten and/or printed sets of operating and maintenance
instructions, to be included in the O&M Manuals, including sheets
describing fundamentals of each system and an explanation of the
operation and function of each system device as part of the maintenance
and operating instructions portfolio required under Section 15010.
3.04 CONTROL DRAWINGS*
A. Before proceeding with the work required under this section, the Contractor shall
submit for approval complete temperature control diagrams, including a written
description of the systems and descriptive literature covering each item of control
equipment. Diagrams shall indicate all control functions required. Submit to
Engineer.
3.05 OPERATING TESTS
A. A complete system-operating test shall be made for a period of two (2) weeks with
controls set in their respective positions to ensure proper operation. All tests and
final adjustments, including calibration of all controllers and thermostats, shall be
made to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. At the completion of the test, Contractor shall prepare a list showing temperature
settings of all thermostats together with actual thermostat readings. This list shall
be submitted to the Engineer as part of the maintenance and operating instruction
portfolios.
3.06 "AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor will, at the same time, insure that the control diagrams for the
project are brought up-to-date and that they reflect the control system "As-Built".
These control diagrams will be included in the Maintenance Manuals, which shall
be turned over to the Owner following the acceptance of the above procedure by
the Consulting Engineer.
B. The "As- Built" diagrams will have an indication on them as to what changes
occurred to the control system between the system originally specified and the
system as installed. If necessary, the description of operation shall be changed to
adequately describe the completed control system.
1. Provide reproducible set of "As-Builts".
2. Operating sequences and control diagrams modified "As-Built," shall be
included in the O&M Manuals.
15950 - 4
Radiant Park - 1143.06
3.07 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. General: The following description gives the intent of the sequence of operation. It
is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate controls furnished with the
equipment with necessary supplementary controls under this section to provide a
working system as described below.
1. Fans, and Intake/Exhaust Dampers:
a. Exhaust fan normally off and dampers normally closed. The exhaust
fan starts from a signal from space motion sensors which will also
open intake and exhaust dampers.
2. Electric Fan-Coil:
a. The Electric Fan-Coil shall cycle to maintain the set point of 55
degrees F, adjustable, upon a drop in temperature as sensed by the
thermostat in the Women’s Rest Room. See plans for location.
3. Electric Unit Heater:
a. Unit heater shall cycle unit heating element and fan to maintain a
heating setpoint of 55 degrees F, adjustable, upon drop in temperature
in the Chase. See plans for location.
END OF SECTION
15990 - 1
Radiant Park – 1143.06
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Balance the building ventilation and heating systems only.
1.03 FIRM REQUIREMENTS
A. Balancing shall be done by a firm specializing in this work. Prequalified firms
are:
1. AirDronics, Inc, Parker, Colorado.
2. Fort Collins/Midwest, Fort Collins, Colorado.
3. Lawrence H. Finn & Assoc., Greeley, Colorado.
4. Double T Balancing.
B. Other firms desiring to furnish services for this project shall submit for written
approval during bid time.
1. A brochure shall be provided listing the qualifications of personnel in the
organization, instruments available to be used and a list of projects
successfully balanced within the last two years.
2. Information regarding qualifications must be in the office of the Design
Engineer at least six days, excluding Sundays and holidays, prior to the
date set for receiving bids.
C. The balancing work shall be performed by a firm having total professional
responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire air
system. All balancing shall be performed by qualified technicians in the employ
of the pre-qualified firm.
D. This firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders that are
required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and make
all necessary adjustments.
E. Instruments shall be used and applied which are best suited to the system func-
tion being tested. Instruments shall be in first-class state of repair and have
been calibrated within a period of six months prior to starting the job. Instru-
ments shall be recalibrated upon completion of the job if required by the Design
Engineer to prove reliability.
F. All air systems shall be balanced using an applicable proportionate procedure.
15990 - 2
Radiant Park – 1143.06
G. After all adjustments are made, a detailed written report shall be prepared and
submitted for approval. Final acceptance of this project will not be made until a
satisfactory report is received and field verified.
H. The Design Engineer will field verify the report in the following manner:
1. Select quantities to be tested at random. (Quantity shall not exceed 10%
of total.)
2. Require balancing firm to read the quantities in his presence.
3. Field tested values shall be within plus or minus 10% of those shown on
plans.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 AIR BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Before any adjustments are made, room is to be closed off with doors closed.
The systems are to be checked for such items as duct leakage, damper leakage,
equipment vibrations, correct damper operations, etc. All fan systems are to be
adjusted to deliver design air quantities within plus or minus 5 %. After balancing
is completed, check motor amperage.
B. Exhaust and recirculation air systems shall be adjusted for air quantities shown
on drawings and the proper relationship between supply and exhaust
established.
C. Distribution system shall be adjusted to obtain uniform space temperatures free
from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system.
D. Sheaves and/or belts shall be exchanged or speed controllers adjusted as
required to adjust the RPM of all fans so they handle specified air quantity.
3.02 MISCELLANEOUS
A. All installed thermal overload protection shall be observed and noted in the data
sheets. If thermal overload protection is incorrect, it shall be the responsibility of
the balancing firm to see that proper overload protection is installed at the
completion of the job.
B. The adjusting crew shall measure and set any special conditions such as
minimum outside air quantities; check and adjust outside and return air intakes
so that the system will deliver substantially the same volume on either; make
tests and record data as required in "REPORT" below.
C. All balancing devices, i.e. dampers, speed control switches, etc. shall be clearly
marked as to the final balanced position. Plug all test holes, replace access
doors and belt guards.
D. When deemed necessary, 24-hour space temperature recording shall be taken
and any required partial rebalance of the system shall be performed without
additional cost.
15990 - 3
Radiant Park – 1143.06
3.03 REPORT
A. A bound report shall be provided which shall contain a general information
sheet listing instruments used, methods of balancing, altitude correction, and
manufacturer's grille, register and diffuser data.
B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating, etc., of
all mechanical equipment, including fans, motors, starters, and drives.
Operating data shall include rotational speed, inlet and outlet pressures,
pressure drop components, and measured motor current and voltage.
C. Balancing data sheets shall indicate the required and actual CFM of all supply,
return and exhaust outlets or inlets, and shall be totaled and summarized by
systems.
D. Reports shall contain a reduced set of contract drawings with outlets marked
thereon for easy identification of the designation used in the data sheets.
E. The report shall outline any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in
the above.
F. Final report shall be included in the O&M Manuals.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Park 16000-1 March 12, 2012
SECTION 16000
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and
materials unless otherwise specified and of performing all operations necessary for the
installation of complete electrical systems as required by these specifications and/or as
indicated on the Drawings.
1. All work under this section shall also be governed by the project general conditions, along
with all supplements and amendments thereto, as published by the Engineer.
B. Work shall also include the completion of all labor and the supply of all materials, whether
specifically mentioned or not, for the successful operation of all electrical systems described
on the Drawings or required by these specifications.
1. Oversights at the bidding stage will not relieve the Contractor of providing complete
electrical systems including equipment, materials, tools and labor.
C. The scope of electrical work shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Underground secondary service and service entrance equipment for the restroom
building and extension of the irrigation building.
2. Power distribution and branch circuit wiring to all equipment in restroom and irrigation
buildings.
3. Installation of building’s lighting systems.
4. Control and instrument wiring as required to all equipment.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Codes and Regulations: Comply with all applicable state and local codes, regulations and
ordinances and the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code as
interpreted by the local inspection authority who shall have final jurisdiction.
B. Permits and Fees: Secure and pay for all permits, fees, taxes, royalties, licenses and
inspections in connection with the electrical work. Upon completion of work, furnish to the
Engineer a Certificate of Inspection indicating final approval by the local inspection authority.
C. Examination of Premises: Examine the premises prior to bidding and become fully familiar
with existing conditions.
D. Construction Power and Lighting: Provide all temporary power, lighting and wiring as required
during the construction period for the use of all the trades. Temporary facilities shall be
installed per NEC and are to be properly grounded throughout. Remove all temporary
facilities upon completion of the project.
1.3 DRAWINGS
A. The Drawings show functional requirements of the system described herein; components not
itemized on the Drawings and Specifications shall be provided by the Contractor to provide a
completed working system as indicated on the Drawings.
Radiant Park 16000-2 March 12, 2012
1. Before installing any wiring, equipment, outlets or other devices, examine architectural,
structural and mechanical drawings and specifications; if any discrepancies occur
between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report same to the Engineer
in writing and obtain written instructions for changes in the work. The architectural,
structural and mechanical drawings and specifications take precedence over the
electrical.
2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual
construction of the building and work of other trades will permit. All changes from
Drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed
and to fit work of other trades shall be made without cost to the Owner and shall be
marked on the documents for later submittal to the Engineer.
3. Data given herein and on the Drawings is as exact as could be secured, but absolute
accuracy is not guaranteed. Specifications and Drawings are for assistance and guidance
to the Contractor. Exact locations, distances, levels and dimensions will be governed by
the building; the Contractor shall use same with this understanding.
PART 2 – MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment shall be manufactured, tested and installed in accordance with
the following:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL).
3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
B. All electrical material shall display a UL label.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate electrical work with the progress of other work
and with the work of other trades on the job without cost to the Owner.
B. Cleanup: If so directed by the Engineer, remove any materials not installed in the work which
conflict with the work of other trades. At completion of work, clean up and remove from
premises all debris and materials not installed so premises will be left clean.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. When and if directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall test, under supervision of the
Engineer, all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds.
B. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate by megger test the
insulation resistance of any circuit. Where such a test indicates the presence of faulty
insulation, the Contractor shall locate the point of fault, replace with no additional cost to the
Owner and demonstrate by further test the elimination of such a fault.
C. After the installation has been completed and at such time as the Engineer may direct, the
Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval in accordance with the requirements
of this Specification.
Radiant Park 16100-1 March 12, 2012
SECTION 16100
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all new materials consistent with the requirements of Section 16000 and as specified
below.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog cut sheets on all basic materials to be used and receive Engineer's acceptance.
1. See supplemental conditions for distribution and count.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS - ACCEPTABLE CLASSES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide raceways as required below for raceway systems.
2. Conduit sizes not noted on Drawings shall be in accordance with NEC requirements for the
quantities and size of wire installed therein.
3. Where nonmetallic raceways are utilized, size as required to conform with the grounding
conductor considered as an insulated additional conductor.
4. Where metallic raceways are used, they must establish positive low-resistance paths to
ground and effectively isolate conductors so that any short-circuit arcs will be confined.
5. Reference Section 16450, Grounding.
B. Acceptable Classes.
1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
a. Install 2" and smaller for all exposed branch circuit wiring.
b. Galvanize on the outside and coat on the inside with a smooth hard finish of lacquer,
varnish or enamel.
c. Fittings.
1) Steel set screw.
d. Comply with Underwriters' Laboratories Standard UL 797 and USA Standards Institute
C80-3.
2. Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Conduit.
a. Provide in the following locations.
1) In or below slabs on grade.
2) In earth or gravel.
b. Schedule 40 Heavy Wall, 90 degrees Celsius, UL listed for above ground and
underground uses.
c. Conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL-651 standards.
d. UL listed in conformity with Article 347 of the National Electric Code.
e. 1-1/2" and larger shall conform to NEMA Publications No. TC-1-1965.
3. Surface Metal Wireway.
a. Provide surface metal wireway of a dimension permitting the number of conductors and
splices installed. NEMA 1 enclosure.
b. The raceway shall meet all NEC Article 352A requirements and shall be UL listed.
c. Provide with appropriate boxes and fittings by same manufacturer.
Radiant Park 16100-2 March 12, 2012
4. Flexible Metal Conduit.
a. Provide in sufficient lengths for:
1) Make-up of motor or equipment raceway connections.
b. Non-liquidtight type: Steel, galvanized, flexible metallic, same manufacturers as for
rigid.
c. Liquidtight: American Brass Company Sealtite Type VA, General Electric Type UA or
equal.
2.2 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway systems with minimum wire size to be
No. 12, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, wire sizes noted on Drawings are to be extended for the entire
length of a circuit including taps and risers.
B. Conductor Material.
1. Copper conductors shall be high conductivity tin coated annealed copper in accordance with
ASTM B-33.
a. Use copper conductors for all wiring unless otherwise indicated as optional on plans.
C. Insulation.
1. Thermoplastic Insulated, Nylon Sheathed - Use for all branch circuit conductors installed in
conduit.
a. UL Type THWN, suitable for operation at 600 volts in wet or dry locations at conductor
temperatures not to exceed 75oC.
b. Poly-vinyl chloride insulation that is UL defined as heat, abrasion, moisture and oil
resistant.
2.3 WIRE CONNECTORS AND DEVICES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide wire connectors, crimp terminals, splice connectors, mechanical lugs, compression
lugs, pin connectors, split bolt connectors and associated insulating devices for a complete
wiring connection system suitable for specified cables furnished.
2. Connectors shall be in accordance with NEC, state and local requirements for size and color
installed therein.
3. Connectors and devices shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's and UL
standard requirements for tightening torques. Use proper torquing tools to achieve accurate
values.
2.4 JUNCTION BOXES
A. General Requirements.
1. Provide all covers of same gauge metal and include screws.
B. Concealed Junction Boxes.
1. Provide code gauge sheet metal boxes located and sized as required with suitable covers
and trims.
a. Make of material resistant to corrosion or suitably protected, both internally and
externally, by galvanizing.
b. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be UL approved for the purpose.
Radiant Park 16100-3 March 12, 2012
c. Comply with UL Standard 50.
d. Metal boxes to meet NEC construction specifications.
C. Exposed Junction Boxes.
1. Boxes exposed or surface mounted shall be die-cast or permanent-mold cast aluminum body
with threaded external hub and cast cover.
2.5 OUTLET BOXES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide outlet boxes for all wiring devices, receptacles, switches, telephone connections and
clock connections of material construction to suit environmental conditions.
2. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with actual structural
conditions to eliminate obstructions and interference with other work and equipment.
a. Verify final location for all outlets, panels and equipment with Engineer - see
Architectural Drawings.
B. Concealed Boxes.
1. Furnish sheet steel boxes and fittings which shall be made corrosion resistant both internally
and externally by galvanizing.
a. Provide with matching manufactured cover.
C. Surface Boxes.
1. Furnish die-cast or permanent-mold cast aluminum boxes with threaded external hubs.
a. Provide threaded plugs for unused hubs.
2. Boxes shall be of a corrosion-resistant alloy.
3. Boxes shall be deep-body series, single-gang through four-gang with corresponding device
cover plates.
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide wiring devices and device plates as specified below. Provide in the quantities and at
the locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Specification Grade Receptacles.
1. Specification grade receptacles shall be 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding duplex, 20 amp, 125 volts.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Leviton
b. Hubbell
c. Pass & Seymour Legrand
C. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles.
1. GFI receptacles shall be 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding duplex, 20 amp, 125 volts.
2. Ground-fault receptacles shall have NEMA 5-20 configuration with the following
characteristics:
a. 5 milliamp sensitivity to earth leakage current.
b. 1/30th of a second trip time.
c. Local "test" button.
d. Local "reset" button.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Leviton
b. Hubbell
c. Pass & Seymour Legrand
Radiant Park 16100-4 March 12, 2012
D. Switches.
1. Switches shall be heavy duty, AC quiet type, toggle handle, 20 amp, 120-277 volts, corrosion
resistant.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Single-pole
1) Leviton
2) Hubbell
3) Pass & Seymour Legrand
b. Three-way
1) Leviton
2) Hubbell
3) Pass & Seymour Legrand
E. Motion Detector: Ultrasonic sensor for switching restroom lighting.
1. Model: See plans
F. Daylight Sensor:
G. Provide stainless steel wall plates for all receptacles and switches.
H. Materials shall conform and be consistent throughout.
2.7 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be of deadfront construction incorporating switching and protective devices of
the number, rating and type noted herein or indicated on the Drawings.
1. Electrical characteristics, ratings and branch circuit wiring of panelboard shall be in
accordance with panel schedules and elementary drawings.
2. Panelboard circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type.
a. Breakers shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amperes RMS
symmetrical short circuit capacity.
b. Breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make,
quick-break switching mechanism with overload or short circuit tripping being clearly
indicated.
2.8 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
C. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
D. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
E. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Radiant Park 16100-5 March 12, 2012
F. As approved
G. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower
rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses where required, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
H. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower
rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses where required, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
I. Provide with voltage rating for system being applied.
J. Accessories:
K. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
L. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
M. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when specific Class R fuses are
specified.
N. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
O. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
P. SWITCH WITH THERMAL OVERLOAD
Q. Outlet box mounted switch with integral thermal device for all 120 volt, 1-phase motor loads as
shown on the Drawings, including self-protected motors.Size heater at 115% of the full load current
or as otherwise required by the manufacturer
R. Mount on or directly adjacent to the motor load.
S. Equip with device plate to meet requirements of the location.
T. Provide engraved label on switch or engraved device plate defining load served.
U. Switch/Fuse combination units (e.g. SKU) expressly prohibited
V. ENCLOSURES
W. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
X. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1
Y. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R
Z. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
AA. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Radiant Park 16100-6 March 12, 2012
A. Raceways.
1. Layout work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple raceway runs.
2. Securely fasten raceways at intervals and locations required by NEC or the type raceway
employed.
3. Route exposed conduit and surface metal raceways parallel or perpendicular to building
lines with neat right angle turns.
4. Turn conduits with neat symmetrical concentric bends.
B. Wire and Cable.
1. Install wire in approved raceways only after all concrete and plastering work is complete
and all moisture has been swabbed from conduits.
2. All wiring shall be furnished and installed complete from point of service connection to all
receptacles, lighting fixtures, utilization equipment, etc., as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Suitable installation equipment shall be provided to prevent cutting and abrasion of
conductors and conduits during the pulling of feeders and branch circuits. Repeated
bending shall be avoided, and the minimum bending radius for the particular conductor shall
be strictly observed.
4. Ropes used for pulling feeders shall be made of polyethylene.
a. Metallic ropes shall not be used.
5. Wire pulling lubricants shall conform to UL requirements applicable to the several insulation
and raceway materials used.
6. Pulling lines are to be attached to wires and cables by means of either woven basket
grips or pulling eyes.
a. Rope hitcher shall not be used.
7. All cables to be installed in a single conduit shall be installed together.
8. Apply color coding to all three- and four-wire circuits as follows:
120/240/208V Phase 277/480V
Black A Yellow
Red B Brown
Blue C Orange
White Neutral White
Green Ground Green
9. Where home run circuit numbers are indicated on the Drawings, such numbers shall be
followed in connecting circuits to panelboards.
Radiant Park 16100-7 March 12, 2012
C. Wire Connectors and Devices.
1. Any connectors and lugs installed shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended connecting
combinations.
2. Install wire connecting devices to provide a tight mechanical and electrical make-up.
3. Re-check splices and terminations and make tight prior to substantial completion.
D. Junction Boxes.
1. Install junction boxes so that covers are readily accessible after the completion of the
installation.
2. Mount rigidly in place with fronts straight and plumb.
3. Support sheet steel adequately to maintain shape.
4. Secure covers with corrosion resistant screws and bolts.
5. All surface mounted special boxes shall be secured to cement and/or block walls using 1/4"
x 3/4" lead anchors.
E. Outlet Boxes.
1. Except as required otherwise by actual construction conditions, locate outlets as follows (all
dimensions given are from finished floor to centerline of outlet boxes).
a. Wall Switches: 4'-6".
b. Convenience outlets: 1'-0" except over such items as counters, benches, special
equipment where they shall be at a height to service equipment or as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Adjust height so the height of all units will be consistent in one direction.
F. Wiring Devices.
1. Install ground fault interrupting receptacles and isolated ground receptacles at locations
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install specification grade receptacles in all remaining areas as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Install the proper type of device and plate for the particular appliance or equipment.
a. Verify with Engineer.
G. Panelboards.
1. Mount panelboards rigidly in place with fronts straight and plumb.
Radiant Park 16100-8 March 12, 2012
2. Provide complete mounting brackets and hardware as necessary for complete support of
panelboards at locations indicated on Drawings.
3. Provide a typed panel directory for each panelboard; enclose in plastic.
a. Label panel as indicated on one-line diagram. Submit sample of label to Engineer
for approval.
Radiant Park 16410-1 March 12, 2012
SECTION 16410
ELECTRIC SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The electric service includes all conductors and equipment from the point at which the electric
utility delivers the power to the site to the metering equipment and to the line side of the service
disconnecting means.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and coordinate with the local electric utility for
installation of the concrete transformer pad, transformer, metering equipment and the service
conductor terminations inside the transformer.
B. Size of the service entrance conductors, number of conductors, service entrance raceway size
and type, service voltage and associated equipment are indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. National Electric Code.
B. Local Electric Utility Specifications.
C. Local Codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable classes of materials for use in conjunction with the electric service shall be in
accordance with the appropriate reference sections listed below.
1. Basic Materials and Methods, 16100.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the installation of the transformer pads with the local utility. The utility will install the
pad, and the contractor will install the service entrance raceways.
B. The electric utility will furnish and install the padmount transformer. The contractor shall install
the service entrance conductors leaving sufficient length of conductor for terminations inside
the transformer.
1. The electric utility will make all the necessary terminations inside their transformer.
C. The Contractor shall install the service entrance conductors from the padmount transformer
and terminate them at the main disconnecting means.
D. Coordinate underground conduit installations with other work to eliminate conflict and avoid
interference with other underground piping systems.
END OF SECTION
Radiant Park 16450-1 March 12, 2012
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
B. Power system grounding
C. Communications system grounding
D. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product or hardware indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
Radiant Park 16450-2 March 12, 2012
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at
least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions. Contractors may utilize exothermic welding only
with prior experience with the process. Submittal package shall include a list of both firm and
individual previous project(s), date(s) of installation and names individuals qualified for this project.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet.
B. Connector for Building Footing Steel (Ufer) Concrete Encased Ground: Exothermic weld or
compression type providing irreversible, secure connections. Termination products shall be listed
by UL for the specific application.
2.4 GROUNDING HARDWARE
A. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc. as required for a complete,
operating grounding system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No.8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No.
6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Bare Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No.1/0 AWG minimum or
as noted on the Drawings. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders
with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with
alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of
yellow.
D. Building Footing Reinforcing Steel (Ufer) Grounding Electrode: Connect all steel in the building
footing together by wire tie or other method approved by the building Engineer. Minimum
connection length shall be 20 feet. Bend minimum #4 rebar up into a space near the electrical
service equipment that is open or has access after the building construction work is complete.
Extend bar minimum of 16 inches above elevation of finished floor or top of foundation. Where
connection is within finished wall construction, provide properly-sized access panel. Coordinate with
General Contractor or Architect
E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Radiant Park 16450-3 March 12, 2012
4. Connections to Structural Steel and Reinforcing Bars: UL listed irreversible compression
connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits (including lighting and receptacle circuits).
2. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
3. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
4. Flexible raceway runs.
5. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
6. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus
in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on
busway.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and
connected metallic piping.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be
subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Install all wiring grounding conductors in raceways with
phase and grounded conductors. Grounding electrode conductors shall be installed without any
joint or splice.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise
indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install rod(s) spaced at least one-rod length from each other
and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the
service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except
where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances
to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted
clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts
Radiant Park 16450-4 March 12, 2012
of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor
on street side of fitting with a bonding jumper around the fitting. Bond metal grounding
conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff
valve.
E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Bond grounding conductor for all duct
mounted electrical equipment (heaters, air cleaners, etc.) to the metal ductwork. Install bonding
jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test
wells.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation
and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or
seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural
ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method using 600 volt megohm tester according to
IEEE 81 or by use of clamp-on grounding tester.
c. Provide written report of grounding test results prior to project Substantial Completion
B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground for the service exceeds 8.0 ohms, notify
Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 16450
Radiant Park 16500-1 March 12, 2012
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete lighting system as indicated on Drawings and in fixture schedules, all wired,
assembled and in working order.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards.
1. IES minimum standards.
2. UL approved auxiliaries.
3. NEMA.
4. CBM-ETL certified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog cut sheets for all lighting fixture types to the Engineer. These shall include the
following information:
1. Photometric data.
2. Mounting provisions and accessories.
3. Ballast electrical characteristics.
B. Submit the operating temperature rating and the noise level ratings for all ballasts.
1. Report the maximum ambient temperature in degrees Fahrenheit in which the fixture will
function continuously without interruption.
2. Guarantee operation under conditions of this project.
C. Reference supplemental conditions for distribution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Fixtures installed in damp or wet locations shall be suitable for the environment and display
appropriate UL label.
B. All fixtures shall be constructed of adequate gauge steel, including interior barriers, channels, end
caps and reflectors.
C. Ballast case temperatures not to exceed the UL 90oC limit in a 25oC ambient.
2.2 BALLASTS
A. All fluorescent ballasts to conform to the following:
1. UL approved.
2. CBM-ETL certified.
3. High power factor energy saving.
4. Conform to applicable UL designated Class "P" requirements.
5. Operable on nominal applied system voltage with allowable voltage variations.
6. Automatic-resetting type thermal protectors.
7. Sound ratings equal to G.E. "A."
Radiant Park 16500-2 March 12, 2012
B. All HID ballasts shall be designed and constructed to meet the American National Standard
Institute specifications. They shall also comply with UL 1029 and be UL listed.
1. All ballasts shall be encased.
2. All ballasts shall be the high power factor type.
3. Each ballast shall display its ballast data plus wiring connections on an aluminized label on
the case.
2.3 FINISH
A. Furnish ferrous metal surface with protective finish having rust inhibiting properties.
B. Painted Finishes: Minimum of 1.5 mils thick; balance between hardness and bending properties
suitable for the application.
C. White Finishes: 87% minimum reflectance.
2.4 DIFFUSERS
A. Plastic Used for Light Transmission.
1. Acrylic throughout; no styrene permitted.
2. 100% virgin materials.
3. 0.125 inch minimum thickness.
4. No blends or copolymers permitted.
5. ETL certified as light stabilized and non-yellowing.
B. Aging Properties.
1. Guaranteed to conform with minimum standard of IES.
2. SPI-NEMA conformance when installed in interior locations utilizing standards WW or CW
lamp.
2.5 FIXTURES
A. Provide as specified in the fixture schedule.
2.6 LAMPS
A. Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric or Phillips.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set luminaries true and free from light leaks, warps, dents and other defects.
B. Provide fixtures having proper flanges, trim and mounting.
C. Mount outlets at position and height to clear ductwork, piping and obstructions.
D. Install fluorescent lamps aligned for proper lamp contact.
E. Fixture Wiring: conform to NEC.
F. Protect wiring with tape or tubing at points where abrasion is likely to occur.
G. Provide chase nipples where field wiring through knockouts.
H. Install wire in fluorescent fixtures that meets temperature requirements with a minimum rating of
90oC (194oF).
I. Provide special plates, barriers and rings as required to comply with the NEC.
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
2
1
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
A
3
45.00°
30.00°
30.00°
3
A-5
2
A-5
1
A-5
F.O. MASONRY
R 22' - 2"
F.O. MASONRY
R 38' - 8"
10' - 8" 8"
SHELTER AREA
104
EW3
W1
W1
EW3
8" 10' - 8"
8" 3' - 6 1/2"
8' - 4"
W1
103
102
CENTER POINT OF
CONCRETE CIRCLE. RADII
FOR RESTROOM WALLS
ARE MEASURED FROM
THIS POINT.
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
OUTLINE OF ROOF ABOVE
MOP & BROOM HOLDER
MOP SINK
CJ
CJ
STAINLESS STEEL
TOILET (TYP)
STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS -
PAINT (TYP)
STAINLESS STEEL
URINAL
STEEL URINAL SCREEN -
PAINT (TYP)
2
1
A
3
3
A-5
2
A-5
1
A-5
R1
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
FACE OF WALL BELOW
R 20' - 6"
R 40' - 4 1/4"
1' - 4"
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS
PRECAST
CONCRETE CAP
PRECAST
CONCRETE CAP
PREFINISHED METAL
FASCIA
8
A-6
16' - 8"
16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
11' - 2"
11' - 2"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
9
A-6
SOLAR PANELS
RE: ELECTRICAL
7.50°
1'-6" ROOF OVERHANG -
FOLLOW CURVED SEGMENT
1'-6" ROOF
OVERHANG
4" DIAMETER EMT
DOWNSPOUT
11
A-6
1' - 0"
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
LOW END OF ROOF BELOW
R1
R 4' - 0"
2
1
A
3
MEN
101
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
C1
C1
C1
S1
S1
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS - ADD
ALTERNATE #2 CHANGE TO
STAINLESS STEEL
1' - 4"
1' - 6"
7.50°
1' - 6"
SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT
FIXTURES AT THIS LOCATION
RE: ELECTRICAL
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
S2
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS ADD
ALTERNATE #2 CHANGE TO
STAINLESS STEEL
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
GALVANIZED METAL
FASCIA
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
SYNTHETIC STONE
VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
PRECAST
CONCRETE CAP
F
103
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
11' - 2"
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
SYSTEM W/ 1/4" SCRATCH
RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
STAINLESS STEEL WRAP AS
ADD ALT #2
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
GALVANIZED METAL
FASCIA
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCTURAL
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS
F
101
PICNIC TABLES
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6" 14' - 6"
12' - 8"
11' - 2" 11' - 2"
ART IN PUBLIC
PLACES
INSTALLATION BY
OWNER
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
2
MEN
101
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
A-5
5 R1
EW4
F1
SHELTER AREA
104
A-6
6
EW1
AIR BARRIER
NOTE: AIR BARRIER CONSISTS OF CMU
WALLS, ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
POLYCARBONATE GLAZING SYSTEM
AND METAL CEILING SYSTEM
16" ø GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN. WRAP W/ STAINLESS
STEEL AS ADD ALTERNATE
PICNIC TABLE
RE: LANDSCAPE
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
3
A-5
WOMEN
103
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
A-5
6
F1
R1
EW4
EW3
EW3
AIR BARRIER
NOTE: AIR BARRIER CONSISTS OF CMU
WALLS, ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
POLYCARBONATE GLAZING SYSTEM
AND METAL CEILING SYSTEM
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
1
WOMEN
103
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
A-5
1
A
INTERIOR
SYNTHETIC SANDSTONE
VENEER IN DRYSTACK
PATTERN
8" CMU BLOCK
2 1/2" RIGID
INSULATION
CAULK AT DISSIMILAR
MATERIALS
18 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION
AIR INFILTRATION
BARRIER
'Z' FURRING
@ 16" O.C.
METAL LATH
1' - 4"
SYNTHETIC SANDSTONE
VENEER IN DRYSTACK
PATTERN
8" CMU BLOCK
2 1/2" RIGID
INSULATION
AIR INFILTRATION
BARRIER
'Z' FURRING
@ 16" O.C.
METAL LATH
1
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
FIBER CANT STRIP FULL
LENGTH OF WALL. SLOPE
CANT STRIP AWAY FROM
WALL AND TO THE SOUTH.
WRAP ICE & WATER
MEMBRANE OVER CANT
STRIP AND UP WALL MIN. 6"
STEEL ANGLE
RE: STRUCT.
1/4" / 12"
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
DOWEL & EPOXY
@ 24" O.C.
T.O. WALL
EL. 113' - 4"
2"
2 3/8"
1' - 6"
1" TYP.
BOND BEAM RE: STRUCT
CONT. FLEXIBLE MASONRY
MEMBRANE FLASHING
METAL LATH
ATTACHED TO
'Z' FURRING
2' - 10"
MEN
101
D
8' - 8"
7' - 0"
TUBE STEEL TOILET
PARTITION. SECURE AT
BASE AT TOP TO WALL.
PAINT - TYP.
F.V. VENT LOCATION
S.S H.C. GRAB
BARS TYP.
T.P. DISPENSER
OWNER FURNISHED
CONTRACTOR
INSTALLED
STAINLESS STEEL
MIRROR, TYP.
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTER W/
STEEL ANGLE
SUPPORTS
WOMEN
103
2' - 10"
E
8' - 8"
7' - 0"
F.V. VENT
LOCATION
TUBE STEEL TOILET
PARTITION. SECURE AT
BASE AND AT TOP TO
WALL. PAINT - TYP.
S.S. H.C. GRAB
BARS, TYP.
T.P. DISPENSER OWNER
FURNISHED CONTRACTOR
INSTALLED
FLUSH HM DOOR
A
HM FRAME
1
RE: SCHED. 4"
2" RE: SCHED. 2"
HM FRAME
2
2"
RE: MECH.
RE: SCHED. 2"
RE: SCHED.
SHIM
SEALANT
16 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
1 1/2" METAL DECK
STEEL FRAMING RE: STRUCT
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
E-1
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL PLANS
E-2
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
KEY DESCRIPTION CHARACTERISTICS LOCAL LOCAL SCHEDULE
HP KW FLA VOLTAGE PHASE PANEL SWITCH FUSE NOTES
EF-1 EXHAUST FAN #1 1/20 HP 120 1 NEW PANEL L1 STO PROVIDE NEW OCCUPANCY SENSOR
INTERCONNECT TO L-2 120V MOUNTED AT CEILING IN EACH RESTROOM
MOTORIZED DAMPER. SO THAT FAN RUNS UPON OCCUPANCY
IN EITHER RESTROOM SPACE, REGARDLESS
OF DAYLIGHT
EFC-1 ELECTRIC FAN COIL 9 KW 240 1 NEW PANEL L1
EWH-1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 6 KW 25.0 FLA 240 1 NEW PANEL L1 30/2 30A
FRN-R
UH-1 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER 15 KW 36.1 FLA 240 1 NEW PANEL L1 60/2 50A
FRN-R
L-2 LOUVER / MOTORIZED DAMPER 120 1 NEW PANEL L1 INTERLOCKED WITH EF-1
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE
AND SCHEDULES
E-3
PANEL: L1
120/240 VOLT BUS: 225A CU
1 PHASE, 3 W. MAIN: 225A MAIN LUGS ONLY LOCATION: CHASE
Available Fault Current: 10,000
NOTES: FED FROM: EXTERIOR DISCONNECT
* GFCI BREAKER MOUNTING: SURFACE
** TIE HANDLE ON CIRCUITS WITH SHARED NEUTRALS.
ID BREAKER DESCRIPTION V - A CIRCUIT PHASE CIRCUIT V - A DESCRIPTION BREAKER ID
E 60/2 EUH-1 UNIT HEATER 5000 1 A 2 375 BUILDING INTERIOR LIGHTING 20 L
E 5000 3 B 4 SPARE 20 L
+ 20/2 DWH-1 WATER HEATER 1500 5 A 6 SPARE 20 L
+ 1500 7 B 8 50 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 20 L
D 20 SECURITRON POWER SUPPLY 200 9 A 10 2300 HAND DRYER MEN'S 30/1 E
M 20 - SPARE - 11 B 12 2300 HAND DRYER WOMEN'S 30/1 E
G 20 RESTROOM RECEPTACLES 540 13 A 14 540 STORAGE RM. RECEPTACLE 20 G
L 20 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 460 15 B 16 250 BRIDGE LIGHTING 20 * L
L 20 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 180 17 A 18 200 IRRIGATION PUMP CONTROL PANEL 20 D
+ 20 SHELTER RECEPTACLE 360 19 B 20 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 35/2 EFC-1 3000 21 A 22 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 3000 23 B 24 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 20 - SPARE - 25 A 26 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 20 - SPARE - 27 B 28 SOLAR INVERTER 30/2 +
+ 20 - SPARE - 29 A 30 +
101
2
1
A
3
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E-4
LCP 1
LOCATION: ELECTRICAL ROOM
SWITCH LOC 1
CH-4-WH-WH
NO SCALE
DIGITAL OUTDOOR
PHOTOCELL, PCO
PART CIRCUIT L1-14
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
2
1
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
A
3
45.00°
30.00°
30.00°
3
A-5
2
A-5
1
A-5
F.O. MASONRY
R 22' - 2"
F.O. MASONRY
R 38' - 8"
10' - 8" 8"
SHELTER AREA
104
EW3
W1
W1
EW3
8" 10' - 8"
8" 3' - 6 1/2"
8' - 4"
W1
103
102
CENTER POINT OF
CONCRETE CIRCLE. RADII
FOR RESTROOM WALLS
ARE MEASURED FROM
THIS POINT.
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
OUTLINE OF ROOF ABOVE
MOP & BROOM HOLDER
MOP SINK
CJ
CJ
STAINLESS STEEL
TOILET (TYP)
STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS -
PAINT (TYP)
STAINLESS STEEL
URINAL
STEEL URINAL SCREEN -
PAINT (TYP)
2
1
A
3
3
A-5
2
A-5
1
A-5
R1
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
FACE OF WALL BELOW
R 20' - 6"
R 40' - 4 1/4"
1' - 4"
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS
PRECAST
CONCRETE CAP
PRECAST
CONCRETE CAP
PREFINISHED METAL
FASCIA
8
A-6
16' - 8"
16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
11' - 2"
11' - 2"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
9
A-6
SOLAR PANELS
RE: ELECTRICAL
7.50°
1'-6" ROOF OVERHANG -
FOLLOW CURVED SEGMENT
1'-6" ROOF
OVERHANG
4" DIAMETER EMT
DOWNSPOUT
11
A-6
1' - 0"
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
LOW END OF ROOF BELOW
R1
R 4' - 0"
2
1
A
3
MEN
101
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
C1
C1
C1
S1
S1
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS - ADD
ALTERNATE #2 CHANGE TO
STAINLESS STEEL
1' - 4"
1' - 6"
7.50°
1' - 6"
SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT
FIXTURES AT THIS LOCATION
RE: ELECTRICAL
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
S2
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS ADD
ALTERNATE #2 CHANGE TO
STAINLESS STEEL
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
GALVANIZED METAL
FASCIA
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
SYNTHETIC STONE
VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
PRECAST
CONCRETE CAP
F
103
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
11' - 2"
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
SYSTEM W/ 1/4" SCRATCH
RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
STAINLESS STEEL WRAP AS
ADD ALT #2
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
GALVANIZED METAL
FASCIA
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCTURAL
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS
F
101
PICNIC TABLES
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6" 14' - 6"
12' - 8"
11' - 2" 11' - 2"
ART IN PUBLIC
PLACES
INSTALLATION BY
OWNER
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
2
MEN
101
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
A-5
5 R1
EW4
F1
SHELTER AREA
104
A-6
6
EW1
AIR BARRIER
NOTE: AIR BARRIER CONSISTS OF CMU
WALLS, ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
POLYCARBONATE GLAZING SYSTEM
AND METAL CEILING SYSTEM
16" ø GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN. WRAP W/ STAINLESS
STEEL AS ADD ALTERNATE
PICNIC TABLE
RE: LANDSCAPE
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
3
A-5
WOMEN
103
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
A-5
6
F1
R1
EW4
EW3
EW3
AIR BARRIER
NOTE: AIR BARRIER CONSISTS OF CMU
WALLS, ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
POLYCARBONATE GLAZING SYSTEM
AND METAL CEILING SYSTEM
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
1
WOMEN
103
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
A-5
1
A
INTERIOR
SYNTHETIC SANDSTONE
VENEER IN DRYSTACK
PATTERN
8" CMU BLOCK
2 1/2" RIGID
INSULATION
CAULK AT DISSIMILAR
MATERIALS
18 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION
AIR INFILTRATION
BARRIER
'Z' FURRING
@ 16" O.C.
METAL LATH
1' - 4"
SYNTHETIC SANDSTONE
VENEER IN DRYSTACK
PATTERN
8" CMU BLOCK
2 1/2" RIGID
INSULATION
AIR INFILTRATION
BARRIER
'Z' FURRING
@ 16" O.C.
METAL LATH
1
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
FIBER CANT STRIP FULL
LENGTH OF WALL. SLOPE
CANT STRIP AWAY FROM
WALL AND TO THE SOUTH.
WRAP ICE & WATER
MEMBRANE OVER CANT
STRIP AND UP WALL MIN. 6"
STEEL ANGLE
RE: STRUCT.
1/4" / 12"
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
DOWEL & EPOXY
@ 24" O.C.
T.O. WALL
EL. 113' - 4"
2"
2 3/8"
1' - 6"
1" TYP.
BOND BEAM RE: STRUCT
CONT. FLEXIBLE MASONRY
MEMBRANE FLASHING
METAL LATH
ATTACHED TO
'Z' FURRING
2' - 10"
MEN
101
D
8' - 8"
7' - 0"
TUBE STEEL TOILET
PARTITION. SECURE AT
BASE AT TOP TO WALL.
PAINT - TYP.
F.V. VENT LOCATION
S.S H.C. GRAB
BARS TYP.
T.P. DISPENSER
OWNER FURNISHED
CONTRACTOR
INSTALLED
STAINLESS STEEL
MIRROR, TYP.
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTER W/
STEEL ANGLE
SUPPORTS
WOMEN
103
2' - 10"
E
8' - 8"
7' - 0"
F.V. VENT
LOCATION
TUBE STEEL TOILET
PARTITION. SECURE AT
BASE AND AT TOP TO
WALL. PAINT - TYP.
S.S. H.C. GRAB
BARS, TYP.
T.P. DISPENSER OWNER
FURNISHED CONTRACTOR
INSTALLED
FLUSH HM DOOR
A
HM FRAME
1
RE: SCHED. 4"
2" RE: SCHED. 2"
HM FRAME
2
2"
RE: MECH.
RE: SCHED. 2"
RE: SCHED.
SHIM
SEALANT
16 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
1 1/2" METAL DECK
STEEL FRAMING RE: STRUCT
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
E-1
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
CHASE
102
WOMEN
103
MEN
101
SHELTER AREA
104
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL PLANS
E-2
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
KEY DESCRIPTION CHARACTERISTICS LOCAL LOCAL SCHEDULE
HP KW FLA VOLTAGE PHASE PANEL SWITCH FUSE NOTES
EF-1 EXHAUST FAN #1 1/20 HP 120 1 NEW PANEL L1 STO PROVIDE NEW OCCUPANCY SENSOR
INTERCONNECT TO L-2 120V MOUNTED AT CEILING IN EACH RESTROOM
MOTORIZED DAMPER. SO THAT FAN RUNS UPON OCCUPANCY
IN EITHER RESTROOM SPACE, REGARDLESS
OF DAYLIGHT
EFC-1 ELECTRIC FAN COIL 9 KW 240 1 NEW PANEL L1
EWH-1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 6 KW 25.0 FLA 240 1 NEW PANEL L1 30/2 30A
FRN-R
UH-1 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER 15 KW 36.1 FLA 240 1 NEW PANEL L1 60/2 50A
FRN-R
L-2 LOUVER / MOTORIZED DAMPER 120 1 NEW PANEL L1 INTERLOCKED WITH EF-1
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE
AND SCHEDULES
E-3
PANEL: L1
120/240 VOLT BUS: 225A CU
1 PHASE, 3 W. MAIN: 225A MAIN LUGS ONLY LOCATION: CHASE
Available Fault Current: 10,000
NOTES: FED FROM: EXTERIOR DISCONNECT
* GFCI BREAKER MOUNTING: SURFACE
** TIE HANDLE ON CIRCUITS WITH SHARED NEUTRALS.
ID BREAKER DESCRIPTION V - A CIRCUIT PHASE CIRCUIT V - A DESCRIPTION BREAKER ID
E 60/2 EUH-1 UNIT HEATER 5000 1 A 2 375 BUILDING INTERIOR LIGHTING 20 L
E 5000 3 B 4 SPARE 20 L
+ 20/2 DWH-1 WATER HEATER 1500 5 A 6 SPARE 20 L
+ 1500 7 B 8 50 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 20 L
D 20 SECURITRON POWER SUPPLY 200 9 A 10 2300 HAND DRYER MEN'S 30/1 E
M 20 - SPARE - 11 B 12 2300 HAND DRYER WOMEN'S 30/1 E
G 20 RESTROOM RECEPTACLES 540 13 A 14 540 STORAGE RM. RECEPTACLE 20 G
L 20 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 460 15 B 16 250 BRIDGE LIGHTING 20 * L
L 20 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 180 17 A 18 200 IRRIGATION PUMP CONTROL PANEL 20 D
+ 20 SHELTER RECEPTACLE 360 19 B 20 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 35/2 EFC-1 3000 21 A 22 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 3000 23 B 24 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 20 - SPARE - 25 A 26 - SPARE - 20 +
+ 20 - SPARE - 27 B 28 SOLAR INVERTER 30/2 +
+ 20 - SPARE - 29 A 30 +
101
2
1
A
3
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
AS NOTED
1143.06
03/12/2012
RADIANT PARK
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E-4
LCP 1
LOCATION: ELECTRICAL ROOM
SWITCH LOC 1
CH-4-WH-WH
NO SCALE
DIGITAL OUTDOOR
PHOTOCELL, PCO
PART CIRCUIT L1-14
CONNECTED LOAD (Downstream Loads Included) TOTALS LOAD SUMMARY
Phase A 13,835 CATEGORY CONNECTED FACTOR CALCULATED V - A AMPS
Phase B 12,920 LIGHTING 1315 125% 1,644 6.8
GENERAL RECEPTACLE 1080 100% 1,080 4.5
DOWNSTREAM LOADS REMAINING GENERAL REC. 0 50% 0 0.0
DEDICATED RECEPTACLE 400 100% 400 1.7
MOTOR 0 100% 0 0.0
LARGEST MOTOR 0 125% 0 0.0
MISCELANEOUS 9360 100% 9,360 39.0
KITCHEN 0 65% 0 0.0
ELECTRIC HEAT 14600 125% 18,250 76.0
Total Demand: 30,734 128
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
TYPE LAMPS DESCRIPTION FINISH MOUNTING MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT #
B 14W LED
ASSY.
8"x23" SEMI-FLUSH 14W LED FIXTURE, WHITE TRIM HOUSING. WHITE SURFACE KENALL #FS518R-0-PIA-MW-14L40K-120
D 2-32W T8 1X4 FLUORESCENT 2 LAMP STRIP FIXTURE. WHITE CHAIN HUNG TO 7'-0"
AFF COLUMBIA #C-2-32-120-GEB10IS
AA 3W / LF
BRIDGE LIGHTING: LIGHTED LED ROPE LIGHT INSTALLED IN RECESS OF
BRIDGE HANDRAIL. SCREWS NOT ALLOWED FOR CONNECTION. PROVIDE
ADHESIVE FOR CLIP ATTACHMENT.
WHITE
RAILING ALONG
EXTERIOR BRIDGE -
EACH SIDE
BARRON LTG GROUP #FBT-150-WW-12-T
BB 26W LED 6.5" RECESSED CAN, 26 WATT LED LAMPING. 3000K COLOR. WHITE TRIM,
WHITE HOUSING. DAMP LISTED. ALUMINUM RECESSED SOFFIT
KENALL
#HRDL6L-26L30K-DV-SCC-FW-CSS-G
CC 7.4W / LF LINEAR WALL WASH LED FIXTURE MOUNTED HIGH ON WALL AIMED DOWN.
16.5' LENGTH. ALUMINUM WALL UNDER CANOPY IO LIGHTING #0-05-E-3K-5G-101-1-16'6"-3
DD1 6 W LED
IN GRADE FLUSH MOUNTED LED COLOR CHANGING RGB FOR FEATURE
DISPLAY. PROVIDE WITH PROGRAMABLE DMX CONTROLLER SYSTEM.
NARROW MEDIUM BEAM PATTERN.
ALUMINUM FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE LUMASCAPE #LS793LED-RGB-NM-13-W
DD2 6 W LED IN GRADE FLUSH MOUNTED LED COLOR CHANGING RGB FOR FEATURE
DISPLAY. SAME AS TYPE DD1 EXCEPT WIDE BEAM PATTERN ALUMINUM
FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE LUMASCAPE #LS793LED-RGB-W-13-W
FF 3W / LF
ROPELIGHT UPLIGHTING CIRCULAR PATTERN AT TOP OF COLUMN FOR
UPLIGHTING HALO EFFECT AND FOR ILLUMINATING THE ART CIRCLES ON
EXTERIOR WALL. PROVIDE ALL ASSOCIATED CLIPS AND HARDWARE.
UTILIZE ADHESIVE FOR MOUNTING, SCREWS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.
WHITE COLUMN CAP / WALL
ARTWORK BARRON LTG GROUP #FBT-150-WW-12-T
GG 6 W LED SIMILAR TO TYPE 'DD' EXCEPT WITHOUT RGB TECHNOLOGY, INCLUDE
AMBER FILTER.
ALUMINUM /
ORANGE
FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE
LUMASCAPE #LS793LED-3H6-NM-13-0 WITH
ORANGE FILTER
HH 6 W LED SIMILAR TO TYPE 'DD' EXCEPT UNDERWATER RATED FIXTURE WITH BLUE
LAMPING.
ALUMINUM /
BLUE
FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE LUMASCAPE #LS33ANS-LED-6B4-W
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'DD1' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'DD2' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'HH' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'GG' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
LOAD SUMMARY
PANEL 'L1' 30.73 KVA
30.73 KVA
30.73 KVA ( 128 AMPS) ON NEW 200 AMP, 240V SINGLE PHASE SERVICE.
INTERIOR EXTERIOR
1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
BETWEEN WOOD
FURRING STRIPS
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
EXT. SEALANT ON
BACKER ROD
SHIM
8" CMU WALL
STONE VENEER - STOP STONE VENEER
AT FRAME AT JAMBS
BULLNOSE CERAMIC TILE @
SILL AND JAMB
PRESSURE TREATED WOOD
BLOCKING AS REQ'D
SEALANT
8" CMU WALL
SHIM
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
18 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS
BULLNOSE
CERAMIC TILE SILL
AND JAMB
2 1/2" METAL 'ZEE' CHANNEL
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY
METAL CLOSURE STRIP
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
SUPPORT BRACKET
@ 48" O.C.
FINISH TO MATCH
3/8" RADIUS TYP.
CMU WALL
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTER
SPLASH
4"
2' - 0"
2' - 10"
3/8" EXP. BOLTS
3x3x1/4" STEEL ANGLE
BRACKET PAINT
2x3
S.S. GRAB BAR MTD.
TO COUNTER @
CHANGING AREA
PRE-FINISHED 24 GA.
DRIP @ HEAD ONLY
H.M. FRAME - GROUT
SOLID. PAINT.
DOOR
CAULK EACH SIDE
8x8x16 BOND BEAM
INTERIOR EXTERIOR
18 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
METAL CLOSURE STRIP
4" CONC. SLAB
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT
W/ SEALANT
ADA COMPLIANT
THRESHOLD
H.M. DOOR
WEATHERSTRIPPING &
DOOR SWEEP AS REQ'D
PER SPEC.
FOUNDATION WALL
RE: STRUCTURAL
4" CONC. SLAB W/
THICKENED EDGE
2' - 5 1/8"
B
3' - 7 1/4"
CURVED
3
A-7
5
A-7
3' - 7 1/4"
C
4' - 4 5/8"
3
A-7
5
A-7
4
A-7
1' - 7 7/8"
A
2' - 5 1/8"
3
A-7
5
A-7
4
A-7
3' - 7 3/4"
D
3' - 0 1/2"
3
A-7
17
A-7
2' - 11 5/8"
E
2' - 4 7/8"
3
A-7
17
A-7
4' - 3 5/8"
F
1' - 8 3/8"
CURVED
4
A-7
3
A-7
5
A-7
4
A-7
CLR.
MASONRY /
CONC. WALL
STAINLESS STEEL
ANCHOR W/ STEEL
WEDGE MIN. 2 PER
BRACKET, TYP.
1-1/4" DIA.
GRAB BAR
1 1/2"
PLAN
CLEAR FLOOR
SPACE
TOP OF RIM
FLUSH VALVE
ELEVATION
1' - 5" MAX.
3' - 8" MAX.
4' - 0"
2' - 6"
FLUSH VALVE
WHERE 0CCURS
36" GRAB BAR
TOILET
PAPER
42" GRAB BAR
2' - 0"
1' - 0"
2' - 9"
1' - 6"
18" GRAB BAR
3' - 3"
3' - 3"
1' - 6"
SEALANT
8" CMU WALL - PAINT
SHIM
CERAMIC TILE
SILL
MECH CHASE RESTROOM
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH (TYP)
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL SUPPORT
- PRIMED & PAINTED
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL FRAME
- PRIMED & PAINTED
11 GA. SHEET STEEL @ DOOR
(2) SPRING HINGES @ EA. DOOR ATTACH
TO DOOR W/ TAMPER RESISTANT SCREWS
WELD TO FRAME (3 HINGES PER DOOR)
1"1"
1/4"
3/8" BAR STOCK PULL
1" BENT FLAT BAR WELD
TO SUPPORT FOR LATCH
STUD WELDED TO SUPPORT
FOR LATCH PIVOT
1" W FLAT BAR LATCH W/
WELDED STUD FOR HANDLE
1" x2"Wx55" L FLAT BAR DOOR STOP
CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH
PROVIDE ADEQUATE
CLEARANCE FOR DOOR SWING
2"
6"
NOTE: ENTIRE PARTITION AND 2"
HARDWARE TO BE PAINTED
WELD 2x2x0.125 STEEL ANGLES @ 2 PLACES
EA. PARTITION - ANCHOR TO CMU
MASONRY EXP. ANCHORS W/ TAMPER-PROOF
HEADS
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL - PAINT
CONT. WELD, GRIND SMOOTH
11 GA. SHEET STEEL - PAINT
(4) LAG SCREWS W/
TAMPER-PROOF HEADS
4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT.
WELD TO TUBE SEC. -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
2x2x0.125 STEEL TUBE -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT.
WELD TO TUBE SEC. -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
(3"x4" STEEL PLATE @ WALL
CONDITION)
2x2x0.125 STEEL TUBE -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
(4) EXP. ANCHORS W/
TAMPER-PROOF HEADS
4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT.
WELD TO TUBE SEC. -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:41 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
DOOR / WINDOW DETAILS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-7
RADIANT PARK
DOOR SCHEDULE
MARK FROM ROOM TO ROOM WIDTH HEIGHT
DOOR FRAME HDWR
THK MATERIAL TYPE GLASS FINISH MATERIAL TYPE FINISH GROUP COMMENTS
101 MEN EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A - PNT HM 1 PNT A MAGNETIC LOCKS
102 EXTERIOR CHASE 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A - PNT HM 2 PNT B
103 EXTERIOR WOMEN 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A - PNT HM 1 PNT A MAGNETIC LOCKS
A-7 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
1 MEN'S RESTROOM
A-7 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
2 WOMEN'S RESTROOM
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
DOOR TYPES
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 9 A-7
3 WINDOW HEAD DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 10 A-7
4 WINDOW JAMB DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 6 A-5
5 WINDOW SILL DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" RE:
6 TYPICAL COUNTER DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
7 DTL - DOOR HEAD / JAMB SIM.
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
8 DTL - DOOR SILL
A-7 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
14 WINDOW TYPES
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE:
16 GRAB BAR @ CMU WALL
A-7 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
18 ACCESSIBLE URINAL
A-7 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
15 ACCESSIBLE TOILET
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 12 A-7
17 WINDOW SILL DETAIL @ INTERIOR
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
19 TLT PARTITION DTL @ HINGE
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
20 TLT PARTITION DTL @ LATCH
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
21 TLT PARTITION DTL @ WALL
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
22 TLT PARTITION DTL SUPPORT
'Z' FURRING ANCHORED
TO CMU
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE
& WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
CURVED TUBE STEEL
MEMBER BEYOND
RE: STURCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH
ROOF AND SOFFIT.
FASTEN TO DECK BOTH
TOP AND BOTTOM
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL DECKING.
STOP AT EXTERIOR WALLS
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT
INSULATED POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
ATTACH ROOF DECK W/
SCREWS W/ NEOPRENE
WASHERS @ 16" O.C.
EACH WAY
RAISED STEEL EDGE TO
DIVERT RAINWATER
2"
DRIP EDGE, TYP.
C1
6"
2
9
A-6
SPRAY FOAM
INSULATION BETWEEN
METAL DECKING
CURVED TUBE STEEL
BEAM BEYOND RE:
STRUCT
BOND BEAM RE:
STRUCTURAL
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE &
WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
2x2 ANGLE TRIM, TYP.
WHERE CMU MEETS
CEILING
8" CMU BLOCK - PAINT
CAULK AT DISSIMILAR
MATERIALS
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
T.O. WALL
113' - 0"
AIR INFILTRATION
BARRIER
1 1/2" RIGID
INSULATION BETWEEN
WOOD FURRING STRIPS
SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT
FIXTURE RE: ELECTRICAL
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE
& WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
CURVED TUBE STEEL
MEMBER BEYOND
RE: STURCT.
16 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH
ROOF AND SOFFIT.
FASTEN TO DECK BOTH
TOP AND BOTTOM
6"
2"
ATTACH TO ROOF DECK
W/ SCREWS W/
NEOPRENE WASHERS @
16" O.C. EACH WAY
1 1/2" FURRING STRIPS
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
1
F1
CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION
JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
CONT. FLEXIBLE MASONRY
MEMBRANE FLASHING
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
8" CMU BLOCK
AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
STEEL ANGLE RE: STRUCT
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
METAL LATH ATTACHED
TO 'Z' FURRING
'Z' FURRING
ANCHORED TO CMU
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE
& WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL
DECK
TUBE STEEL MEMBER
RE: STURCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
GALVANIZED TUBE STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
20 GA. ROLLED STEEL
ANGLE TO MATCH ROOF
AND SOFFIT. FASTEN TO
METAL DECK AND
COLUMN
ALTERNATE: STAINLESS
STEEL WRAP ON 7/8"
METAL HAT CHANNELS
ROPE LIGHT AROUND
PERIMETER OF COLUMN.
CLIP TO COLUMN AND
ENCLOSURE PLATE
1 1/2" WOOD
FURRING STRIPS
EW2
6"
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP. EPOXY
DOWEL @ 24" O.C. OR 2 PER PIECE
BRAKE METAL FLASHING
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT.
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH ROOF
AND SOFFIT. FASTEN TO DECK
BOTH TOP AND BOTTOM
1"
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE &
WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
8" CMU BLOCK
5
A-6
Sim
BACKER ROD & SEALANT
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT
W/ SEALANT
4" CONC. SLAB W/
THICKENED EDGE
ALTERNATE: STAINLESS STEEL
WRAP ON 7/8" HAT CHANNELS
(6) OVER GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
CAULK AT DISSIMILAR
MATERIALS
SYNTHETIC STONE
VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
FIBER CANT STRIP FULL
LENGTH OF WALL. SLOPE
CANT STRIP AWAY FROM
WALL AND TO THE SOUTH.
WRAP ICE & WATER
MEMBRANE OVER CANT
STRIP AND UP WALL MIN. 6"
STEEL ANGLE
RE: STRUCT.
CONT. FLEXIBLE MASONRY
MEMBRANE FLASHING
METAL LATH
ATTACHED TO
'Z' FURRING
DOWNSPOUT BRACKET
SECURED TO CMU BLOCK
4" DIAMETER EMT
DOWNSPOUT
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH
ROOF AND SOFFIT. FASTEN
TO DECK BOTH TOP AND
BOTTOM
R1
S1
4" DIAMETER EMT DOWNSPOUT
GALVANIZED STEEL DOWNSPOUT
BRACKET ANCHORED TO CMU
BLOCK AT EVERY 3'-0"
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
METAL LATH
8" NOM. LOAD BEARING CMU
PLAN
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:39 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
TYPICAL DETAILS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-6
RADIANT PARK
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
1 DTL - WALL JAMB
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
2 DTL - WING WALL END
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 4 A-5
3 DTL - PARAPET ABOVE ROOF
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 6 A-5
4 DTL - FASCIA @ RAKE
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 5 A-5
5 DTL - ROOF AT STONE WALL
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 2 A-5
6 DTL - FASCIA @ EAVE
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 4 A-5
7 DTL - TYP. FOUNDATION
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
8 DTL - LIGHTING @ COLUMN
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
9 DTL - ROOF @ STONE CAP
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
10 DTL - COLUMN BASE
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
11 DTL - DOWNSPOUT
NOTE: ADD ALTERNATE #2 CHANGE
DOWNSPOUT TO STAINLESS STEEL TUBE
4
EW4
R1
F1
EW1
AIR BARRIER
NOTE: AIR BARRIER CONSISTS OF CMU
WALLS, ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
POLYCARBONATE GLAZING SYSTEM
AND METAL CEILING SYSTEM
S1
1
WOMEN
103
A-6
3
A-6
7
R1
EW4
F1
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
S1
CANT STRIP FULL
LENGTH OF WALL
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL
DECKING. R-49 MIN.
8" NOM. LOAD -BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
HORIZ. REINF. @ 16" O.C.
RE: STRUCT.
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R 13.3 MIN.
FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION
ALL CELLS NOT GROUTED
CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R 12.5 MIN.
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
ART IN PUBLIC PLACES
INSTALLATION
EW1
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
LINE OF AIR BARRIER
CREATED BY ASSEMBLY
C1
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
2
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
F1
MEN
101
A-6
5
R1
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL
DECKING. R-49 MIN.
8" NOM. LOAD -BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
HORIZ. REINF. @ 16" O.C.
RE: STRUCT.
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R 13.3 MIN.
FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION
ALL CELLS NOT GROUTED
CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R-12.5 MIN
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
C1
S1
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT
BOND BEAM RE:
STRUCTURAL
8' - 8"
EW1
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
LINE OF AIR BARRIER
CREATED BY ASSEMBLY
SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT
FIXTURE RE: ELECTRICAL
WOMEN
103
A-6
4
R1
EW4
F1
8' - 8" VARIES
EW3
A-7
5
CURVED TUBE STEEL
BEAM RE: STRUCT.
TUBE STEEL BEAM
BEYOND RE: STRUCT.
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL
DECKING R-49 MIN.
8" NOM. LOAD -BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
HORIZ. REINF. @ 16" O.C.
RE: STRUCT.
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL 'ZEE'
CHANNELS ORIENTATED
VERTICALLY R 13.3 MIN.
20 GA. STEEL PANELS W/
TAMPER RESISTANT
FASTENERS
AIR / VAPOR BARRIER
FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION
ALL CELLS NOT GROUTED
CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
R 12.5 MIN.
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
6"
EXTEND METAL PANELS
6" BELOW GRADE
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
LINE OF AIR BARRIER
CREATED BY ASSEMBLY
PAINT
COLOR 1
PAINT
COLOR 2
S1 C1
11
A-6
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:36 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
BUILDING SECTIONS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-5
RADIANT PARK
A-5 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
2 BUILDING SECTION 2
A-5 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
1 BUILDING SECTION 3
A-5 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
3 BUILDING SECTION 1
A-5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 3 A-5
4 WALL SECTION 1
A-5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 2 A-5
5 WALL SECTION 2
A-5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-5
6 WALL SECTION 3
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM W/
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
STAINLESS STEEL
WRAP FOR CENTER
COLUMN AS ADD ALT
#2
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
APP LIGHTING AND
COORDINATION BY
GC
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
GALVANIZED PREFINISHED
METAL FASCIA
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS AND
TRIM
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
B C
102
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
SYSTEM W/ 1/4" SCRATCH
RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
LOUVER RE: MECH
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
20 GA. STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AND TRIM AS
ADD ALT. #2
STAINLESS STEEL WRAP AS
ADD ALT #2
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
GALVANIZED METAL FASCIA
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
A B C
102
11' - 2"
12' - 8"
14' - 6"
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
LOUVER
RE: MECH
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
SYSTEM W/ 1/4" SCRATCH
RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
SOLAR PANELS RE:ELEC
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
ART IN PUBLIC PLACES
MEDALLIONS INSTALLED
BY OTHERS - GC TO
COORDINATE
APP ELECTRICAL BY GC
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
GALVANIZED METAL FASCIA
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
BOULDERS, TYP.
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
GALVANIZED STEEL
BEAMS RE: STRUCT
FULLY WELD AND CAP
STAINLESS STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
AS ADD ALT. #2 (TYP 6
SHELTER COLUMNS
STAINLESS STEEL
WRAP FOR CENTER
COLUMN AS ADD ALT
#2
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
20 GA. STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AS ADD ALT. #2
LOCATE LIGHTS IN
BOULDERS F.V.
LOCATION
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
1/4" = 1'-0"
3/15/2012 9:01:32 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
BUILDING ELEVATIONS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-4
RADIANT PARK
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
1 EAST ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
2 NORTH ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
3 SOUTH ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
4 WEST ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
5 SHELTER ELEVATION
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
1/4" = 1'-0"
3/15/2012 9:01:25 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
1143.06
03/12/12 A-3
RADIANT PARK
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
SHELTER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
R 10' - 0"
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
1/4" = 1'-0"
3/15/2012 9:01:24 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
ROOF PLAN
1143.06
03/12/12 A-2
RADIANT PARK
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
ROOF PLAN
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
ROOF PLAN - SHELTER
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
GENERAL NOTE:
ALL SPOT ELEVATIONS ARE TO THE TOP OF THE ROOF.
S.S. MIRROR, TYP
FLOOR DRAIN RE: MECH.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
FLOOR W/ INTEGRAL COLOR.
SLOPE FLOOR TO DRAINS
1/8"/FT. - SEAL (TYP)
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE:
STRUCTURAL
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTERTOP (TYP)
STAINLESS STEEL
GRAB BARS (TYP)
A-7
1
A-7
2
101 A-6
2
A-6
1
7
A-7
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
W/ JUG FILLER
OPTION
EW2 EW1
EW2
EW2
EW1
EW2
23' - 4"
23' - 4"
A-7
19
A-7
20
A-7
21
LANDSCAPE AREA
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
RE: LANDSCAPE
SURFACE MOUNT
FIRE EXTINGUISHER HAND DRYER RE: ELEC
HAND DRYER
RE: ELEC
KNOX BOX MOUNTED
6'-0" HIGH TO CENTER
OF OPERATING DOOR
OR AS REQ'D BY
GOVERNING AGENCY
4" DIAMETER EMT
DOWNSPOUT SS TUBE
AS ADD ALT. #2
UPLIGHTING
RE: ELECTRICAL
STAINLESS STEEL WRAP
AS ADD ALTERNATE #2
STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AS ADD
ALTERNATE #2 (TYP.)
STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AS ADD
ALTERNATE #2 (TYP.)
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
OUTLINE OF ROOF ABOVE
BOULDERS TYP.
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
GALVANIZED STEEL COLUMN RE:
STRUCTURAL. STAINLESS STEEL
COLUMN AS ADD ALTERNATE #2
R 10' - 0"
R 4' - 0"
PICNIC TABLE
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
WRAP COLUMN WITH
STAINLESS STEEL AS ADD
ALTERNATE #2
LOCATE LIGHT
FIXTURES IN
BOULDERS
RE:ELECTRICAL
Spot Elevation
Window Type
Drawing Title
Drawing Number
1
A1
Wall Elevation
1
A1
Detail
1
A1
Building Section
1
A1
Wall Section
A
Grid Line
ROOM NAME
?
A
1
A1 1/4" = 1'-0"
DWG TTL
Sheet Number
Scale
Room Name
Room Number
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS
MATERIALS
Dimensional Wood Steel Gypsum Board Batt Insulation
Wood Blocking Cast In Place Conc. Rigid Insulation Precast Concrete
Finish Wood Concrete Masonry Earth Granular Fill
Plywood Brick Stone
PROPOSED BUILDING DESCRIPTION & USE:
RESTROOM - 1 STORY, 520 SQ. FT.
SHELTER - 1 STORY, 802 SQ. FT.
PROPOSED BUILDING:
BUILDING HEIGHT: RESTROOM - 15' - 5" TOP OF ROOF
SHELTER - 20' - 0" TOP OF STRUCTURE
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: TYPE VB
TYPE OF OCCUPANCY: B
FIRE PROTECTION: NA
TOTAL NUMBER OF STORIES: 1
BUILDING AREA:
RESTROOM - FIRST FLOOR: 520 SQ. FT.
SHELTER - FIRST FLOOR - 802 SQ. FT.
TOTAL AREA OF PROPOSED BUILDING:
RESTROOM - 520 SQ. FT.
SHELTER - 802 SQ. FT.
BUILDING SUMMARY
1. DIMENSIONS ARE MEASURED FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FRAMING TO OUTSIDE FACE OF FRAMING,
CMU, OR GRID LINE.
2. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF THE
(FILL IN CODE BEING USED), MECHANICAL CODE AND NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, ALL CURRENT
EDITIONS.
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW THE DRAWINGS, FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND VERIFY
ALL ASPECTS OF THIS PROJECT PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE OF ANY DISCREPANCIES.
4. CLEAN ENTIRE AREA AFFECTED BY CONSTRUCTION.
5. ALL MATERIALS TO BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED.
6. SUBMIT CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING PLAN
7. AIR TIGHTNESS TESTING REQUIRED
8. FLUSH OUT BUILDING CONTINUOUSLY FOR 14 DAYS
GENERAL NOTES:
4 1/2"
LED LIGHT FIXTURE RE: ELEC
CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE
CONCRETE OR GROUT W/
INTEGRAL 'ORANGE' COLOR
GRAVEL
CONDUIT ADAPTER
CONDUIT (PER MANF. CABLE WILL
EXIT LUMINAIRE BODY 90° TO
LEFT OF TARGET DIRECTION)
OPENING IN SLAB FORMED
WITH SONOTUBE
SECTION 6"
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:23 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
1143.06
03/12/12 A-1
RADIANT PARK
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
SHELTER
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
A-1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE:
3 DTL - RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE
CONNECTED LOAD (Downstream Loads Included) TOTALS LOAD SUMMARY
Phase A 13,835 CATEGORY CONNECTED FACTOR CALCULATED V - A AMPS
Phase B 12,920 LIGHTING 1315 125% 1,644 6.8
GENERAL RECEPTACLE 1080 100% 1,080 4.5
DOWNSTREAM LOADS REMAINING GENERAL REC. 0 50% 0 0.0
DEDICATED RECEPTACLE 400 100% 400 1.7
MOTOR 0 100% 0 0.0
LARGEST MOTOR 0 125% 0 0.0
MISCELANEOUS 9360 100% 9,360 39.0
KITCHEN 0 65% 0 0.0
ELECTRIC HEAT 14600 125% 18,250 76.0
Total Demand: 30,734 128
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
TYPE LAMPS DESCRIPTION FINISH MOUNTING MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT #
B 14W LED
ASSY.
8"x23" SEMI-FLUSH 14W LED FIXTURE, WHITE TRIM HOUSING. WHITE SURFACE KENALL #FS518R-0-PIA-MW-14L40K-120
D 2-32W T8 1X4 FLUORESCENT 2 LAMP STRIP FIXTURE. WHITE CHAIN HUNG TO 7'-0"
AFF COLUMBIA #C-2-32-120-GEB10IS
AA 3W / LF
BRIDGE LIGHTING: LIGHTED LED ROPE LIGHT INSTALLED IN RECESS OF
BRIDGE HANDRAIL. SCREWS NOT ALLOWED FOR CONNECTION. PROVIDE
ADHESIVE FOR CLIP ATTACHMENT.
WHITE
RAILING ALONG
EXTERIOR BRIDGE -
EACH SIDE
BARRON LTG GROUP #FBT-150-WW-12-T
BB 26W LED 6.5" RECESSED CAN, 26 WATT LED LAMPING. 3000K COLOR. WHITE TRIM,
WHITE HOUSING. DAMP LISTED. ALUMINUM RECESSED SOFFIT
KENALL
#HRDL6L-26L30K-DV-SCC-FW-CSS-G
CC 7.4W / LF LINEAR WALL WASH LED FIXTURE MOUNTED HIGH ON WALL AIMED DOWN.
16.5' LENGTH. ALUMINUM WALL UNDER CANOPY IO LIGHTING #0-05-E-3K-5G-101-1-16'6"-3
DD1 6 W LED
IN GRADE FLUSH MOUNTED LED COLOR CHANGING RGB FOR FEATURE
DISPLAY. PROVIDE WITH PROGRAMABLE DMX CONTROLLER SYSTEM.
NARROW MEDIUM BEAM PATTERN.
ALUMINUM FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE LUMASCAPE #LS793LED-RGB-NM-13-W
DD2 6 W LED IN GRADE FLUSH MOUNTED LED COLOR CHANGING RGB FOR FEATURE
DISPLAY. SAME AS TYPE DD1 EXCEPT WIDE BEAM PATTERN ALUMINUM
FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE LUMASCAPE #LS793LED-RGB-W-13-W
FF 3W / LF
ROPELIGHT UPLIGHTING CIRCULAR PATTERN AT TOP OF COLUMN FOR
UPLIGHTING HALO EFFECT AND FOR ILLUMINATING THE ART CIRCLES ON
EXTERIOR WALL. PROVIDE ALL ASSOCIATED CLIPS AND HARDWARE.
UTILIZE ADHESIVE FOR MOUNTING, SCREWS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.
WHITE COLUMN CAP / WALL
ARTWORK BARRON LTG GROUP #FBT-150-WW-12-T
GG 6 W LED SIMILAR TO TYPE 'DD' EXCEPT WITHOUT RGB TECHNOLOGY, INCLUDE
AMBER FILTER.
ALUMINUM /
ORANGE
FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE
LUMASCAPE #LS793LED-3H6-NM-13-0 WITH
ORANGE FILTER
HH 6 W LED SIMILAR TO TYPE 'DD' EXCEPT UNDERWATER RATED FIXTURE WITH BLUE
LAMPING.
ALUMINUM /
BLUE
FLUSH IN CONCRETE
GRADE LUMASCAPE #LS33ANS-LED-6B4-W
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'DD1' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'DD2' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'HH' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
PROVIDE 1 ADDITIONAL FIXTURE TYPE 'GG' FOR STOCK REPLACEMENT.
LOAD SUMMARY
PANEL 'L1' 30.73 KVA
30.73 KVA
30.73 KVA ( 128 AMPS) ON NEW 200 AMP, 240V SINGLE PHASE SERVICE.
INTERIOR EXTERIOR
1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
BETWEEN WOOD
FURRING STRIPS
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
EXT. SEALANT ON
BACKER ROD
SHIM
8" CMU WALL
STONE VENEER - STOP STONE VENEER
AT FRAME AT JAMBS
BULLNOSE CERAMIC TILE @
SILL AND JAMB
PRESSURE TREATED WOOD
BLOCKING AS REQ'D
SEALANT
8" CMU WALL
SHIM
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
18 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS
BULLNOSE
CERAMIC TILE SILL
AND JAMB
2 1/2" METAL 'ZEE' CHANNEL
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY
METAL CLOSURE STRIP
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
SUPPORT BRACKET
@ 48" O.C.
FINISH TO MATCH
3/8" RADIUS TYP.
CMU WALL
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTER
SPLASH
4"
2' - 0"
2' - 10"
3/8" EXP. BOLTS
3x3x1/4" STEEL ANGLE
BRACKET PAINT
2x3
S.S. GRAB BAR MTD.
TO COUNTER @
CHANGING AREA
PRE-FINISHED 24 GA.
DRIP @ HEAD ONLY
H.M. FRAME - GROUT
SOLID. PAINT.
DOOR
CAULK EACH SIDE
8x8x16 BOND BEAM
INTERIOR EXTERIOR
18 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
METAL CLOSURE STRIP
4" CONC. SLAB
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT
W/ SEALANT
ADA COMPLIANT
THRESHOLD
H.M. DOOR
WEATHERSTRIPPING &
DOOR SWEEP AS REQ'D
PER SPEC.
FOUNDATION WALL
RE: STRUCTURAL
4" CONC. SLAB W/
THICKENED EDGE
2' - 5 1/8"
B
3' - 7 1/4"
CURVED
3
A-7
5
A-7
3' - 7 1/4"
C
4' - 4 5/8"
3
A-7
5
A-7
4
A-7
1' - 7 7/8"
A
2' - 5 1/8"
3
A-7
5
A-7
4
A-7
3' - 7 3/4"
D
3' - 0 1/2"
3
A-7
17
A-7
2' - 11 5/8"
E
2' - 4 7/8"
3
A-7
17
A-7
4' - 3 5/8"
F
1' - 8 3/8"
CURVED
4
A-7
3
A-7
5
A-7
4
A-7
CLR.
MASONRY /
CONC. WALL
STAINLESS STEEL
ANCHOR W/ STEEL
WEDGE MIN. 2 PER
BRACKET, TYP.
1-1/4" DIA.
GRAB BAR
1 1/2"
PLAN
CLEAR FLOOR
SPACE
TOP OF RIM
FLUSH VALVE
ELEVATION
1' - 5" MAX.
3' - 8" MAX.
4' - 0"
2' - 6"
FLUSH VALVE
WHERE 0CCURS
36" GRAB BAR
TOILET
PAPER
42" GRAB BAR
2' - 0"
1' - 0"
2' - 9"
1' - 6"
18" GRAB BAR
3' - 3"
3' - 3"
1' - 6"
SEALANT
8" CMU WALL - PAINT
SHIM
CERAMIC TILE
SILL
MECH CHASE RESTROOM
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH (TYP)
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL SUPPORT
- PRIMED & PAINTED
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL FRAME
- PRIMED & PAINTED
11 GA. SHEET STEEL @ DOOR
(2) SPRING HINGES @ EA. DOOR ATTACH
TO DOOR W/ TAMPER RESISTANT SCREWS
WELD TO FRAME (3 HINGES PER DOOR)
1"1"
1/4"
3/8" BAR STOCK PULL
1" BENT FLAT BAR WELD
TO SUPPORT FOR LATCH
STUD WELDED TO SUPPORT
FOR LATCH PIVOT
1" W FLAT BAR LATCH W/
WELDED STUD FOR HANDLE
1" x2"Wx55" L FLAT BAR DOOR STOP
CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH
PROVIDE ADEQUATE
CLEARANCE FOR DOOR SWING
2"
6"
NOTE: ENTIRE PARTITION AND 2"
HARDWARE TO BE PAINTED
WELD 2x2x0.125 STEEL ANGLES @ 2 PLACES
EA. PARTITION - ANCHOR TO CMU
MASONRY EXP. ANCHORS W/ TAMPER-PROOF
HEADS
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL - PAINT
CONT. WELD, GRIND SMOOTH
11 GA. SHEET STEEL - PAINT
(4) LAG SCREWS W/
TAMPER-PROOF HEADS
4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT.
WELD TO TUBE SEC. -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
2x2x0.125 STEEL TUBE -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT.
WELD TO TUBE SEC. -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
(3"x4" STEEL PLATE @ WALL
CONDITION)
2x2x0.125 STEEL TUBE -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
(4) EXP. ANCHORS W/
TAMPER-PROOF HEADS
4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT.
WELD TO TUBE SEC. -
PRIMED AND PAINTED
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:41 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
DOOR / WINDOW DETAILS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-7
RADIANT PARK
DOOR SCHEDULE
MARK FROM ROOM TO ROOM WIDTH HEIGHT
DOOR FRAME HDWR
THK MATERIAL TYPE GLASS FINISH MATERIAL TYPE FINISH GROUP COMMENTS
101 MEN EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A - PNT HM 1 PNT A MAGNETIC LOCKS
102 EXTERIOR CHASE 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A - PNT HM 2 PNT B
103 EXTERIOR WOMEN 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A - PNT HM 1 PNT A MAGNETIC LOCKS
A-7 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
1 MEN'S RESTROOM
A-7 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
2 WOMEN'S RESTROOM
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
DOOR TYPES
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 9 A-7
3 WINDOW HEAD DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 10 A-7
4 WINDOW JAMB DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 6 A-5
5 WINDOW SILL DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" RE:
6 TYPICAL COUNTER DETAIL
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
7 DTL - DOOR HEAD / JAMB SIM.
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
8 DTL - DOOR SILL
A-7 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
14 WINDOW TYPES
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE:
16 GRAB BAR @ CMU WALL
A-7 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
18 ACCESSIBLE URINAL
A-7 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
15 ACCESSIBLE TOILET
A-7 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE: 12 A-7
17 WINDOW SILL DETAIL @ INTERIOR
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
19 TLT PARTITION DTL @ HINGE
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
20 TLT PARTITION DTL @ LATCH
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
21 TLT PARTITION DTL @ WALL
A-7 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
22 TLT PARTITION DTL SUPPORT
'Z' FURRING ANCHORED
TO CMU
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE
& WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
CURVED TUBE STEEL
MEMBER BEYOND
RE: STURCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH
ROOF AND SOFFIT.
FASTEN TO DECK BOTH
TOP AND BOTTOM
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL DECKING.
STOP AT EXTERIOR WALLS
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT
INSULATED POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
ATTACH ROOF DECK W/
SCREWS W/ NEOPRENE
WASHERS @ 16" O.C.
EACH WAY
RAISED STEEL EDGE TO
DIVERT RAINWATER
2"
DRIP EDGE, TYP.
C1
6"
2
9
A-6
SPRAY FOAM
INSULATION BETWEEN
METAL DECKING
CURVED TUBE STEEL
BEAM BEYOND RE:
STRUCT
BOND BEAM RE:
STRUCTURAL
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE &
WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
2x2 ANGLE TRIM, TYP.
WHERE CMU MEETS
CEILING
8" CMU BLOCK - PAINT
CAULK AT DISSIMILAR
MATERIALS
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
T.O. WALL
113' - 0"
AIR INFILTRATION
BARRIER
1 1/2" RIGID
INSULATION BETWEEN
WOOD FURRING STRIPS
SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT
FIXTURE RE: ELECTRICAL
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE
& WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
CURVED TUBE STEEL
MEMBER BEYOND
RE: STURCT.
16 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH
ROOF AND SOFFIT.
FASTEN TO DECK BOTH
TOP AND BOTTOM
6"
2"
ATTACH TO ROOF DECK
W/ SCREWS W/
NEOPRENE WASHERS @
16" O.C. EACH WAY
1 1/2" FURRING STRIPS
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
1
F1
CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION
JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
CONT. FLEXIBLE MASONRY
MEMBRANE FLASHING
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
8" CMU BLOCK
AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
STEEL ANGLE RE: STRUCT
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
METAL LATH ATTACHED
TO 'Z' FURRING
'Z' FURRING
ANCHORED TO CMU
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE
& WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL
DECK
TUBE STEEL MEMBER
RE: STURCT.
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
GALVANIZED TUBE STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
20 GA. ROLLED STEEL
ANGLE TO MATCH ROOF
AND SOFFIT. FASTEN TO
METAL DECK AND
COLUMN
ALTERNATE: STAINLESS
STEEL WRAP ON 7/8"
METAL HAT CHANNELS
ROPE LIGHT AROUND
PERIMETER OF COLUMN.
CLIP TO COLUMN AND
ENCLOSURE PLATE
1 1/2" WOOD
FURRING STRIPS
EW2
6"
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP. EPOXY
DOWEL @ 24" O.C. OR 2 PER PIECE
BRAKE METAL FLASHING
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT.
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH ROOF
AND SOFFIT. FASTEN TO DECK
BOTH TOP AND BOTTOM
1"
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS ON ICE &
WATER MEMBRANE
1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
1 1/2" METAL DECK
8" CMU BLOCK
5
A-6
Sim
BACKER ROD & SEALANT
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT
W/ SEALANT
4" CONC. SLAB W/
THICKENED EDGE
ALTERNATE: STAINLESS STEEL
WRAP ON 7/8" HAT CHANNELS
(6) OVER GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
CAULK AT DISSIMILAR
MATERIALS
SYNTHETIC STONE
VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
FIBER CANT STRIP FULL
LENGTH OF WALL. SLOPE
CANT STRIP AWAY FROM
WALL AND TO THE SOUTH.
WRAP ICE & WATER
MEMBRANE OVER CANT
STRIP AND UP WALL MIN. 6"
STEEL ANGLE
RE: STRUCT.
CONT. FLEXIBLE MASONRY
MEMBRANE FLASHING
METAL LATH
ATTACHED TO
'Z' FURRING
DOWNSPOUT BRACKET
SECURED TO CMU BLOCK
4" DIAMETER EMT
DOWNSPOUT
20 GA. STEEL FASCIA
ENCLOSURE TO MATCH
ROOF AND SOFFIT. FASTEN
TO DECK BOTH TOP AND
BOTTOM
R1
S1
4" DIAMETER EMT DOWNSPOUT
GALVANIZED STEEL DOWNSPOUT
BRACKET ANCHORED TO CMU
BLOCK AT EVERY 3'-0"
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
METAL LATH
8" NOM. LOAD BEARING CMU
PLAN
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:39 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
TYPICAL DETAILS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-6
RADIANT PARK
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
1 DTL - WALL JAMB
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
2 DTL - WING WALL END
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 4 A-5
3 DTL - PARAPET ABOVE ROOF
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 6 A-5
4 DTL - FASCIA @ RAKE
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 5 A-5
5 DTL - ROOF AT STONE WALL
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 2 A-5
6 DTL - FASCIA @ EAVE
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 4 A-5
7 DTL - TYP. FOUNDATION
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
8 DTL - LIGHTING @ COLUMN
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
9 DTL - ROOF @ STONE CAP
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
10 DTL - COLUMN BASE
A-6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
11 DTL - DOWNSPOUT
NOTE: ADD ALTERNATE #2 CHANGE
DOWNSPOUT TO STAINLESS STEEL TUBE
4
EW4
R1
F1
EW1
AIR BARRIER
NOTE: AIR BARRIER CONSISTS OF CMU
WALLS, ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
POLYCARBONATE GLAZING SYSTEM
AND METAL CEILING SYSTEM
S1
1
WOMEN
103
A-6
3
A-6
7
R1
EW4
F1
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
S1
CANT STRIP FULL
LENGTH OF WALL
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL
DECKING. R-49 MIN.
8" NOM. LOAD -BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
HORIZ. REINF. @ 16" O.C.
RE: STRUCT.
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R 13.3 MIN.
FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION
ALL CELLS NOT GROUTED
CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R 12.5 MIN.
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
ART IN PUBLIC PLACES
INSTALLATION
EW1
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
LINE OF AIR BARRIER
CREATED BY ASSEMBLY
C1
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
2
EL.
B.O. FOUNDATION
97' - 6"
F1
MEN
101
A-6
5
R1
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL
DECKING. R-49 MIN.
8" NOM. LOAD -BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
HORIZ. REINF. @ 16" O.C.
RE: STRUCT.
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R 13.3 MIN.
FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION
ALL CELLS NOT GROUTED
CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION.
R-12.5 MIN
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
C1
S1
TUBE STEEL BEAM
RE: STRUCT
BOND BEAM RE:
STRUCTURAL
8' - 8"
EW1
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
LINE OF AIR BARRIER
CREATED BY ASSEMBLY
SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT
FIXTURE RE: ELECTRICAL
WOMEN
103
A-6
4
R1
EW4
F1
8' - 8" VARIES
EW3
A-7
5
CURVED TUBE STEEL
BEAM RE: STRUCT.
TUBE STEEL BEAM
BEYOND RE: STRUCT.
SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL
DECKING R-49 MIN.
8" NOM. LOAD -BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
HORIZ. REINF. @ 16" O.C.
RE: STRUCT.
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
BETWEEN METAL 'ZEE'
CHANNELS ORIENTATED
VERTICALLY R 13.3 MIN.
20 GA. STEEL PANELS W/
TAMPER RESISTANT
FASTENERS
AIR / VAPOR BARRIER
FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION
ALL CELLS NOT GROUTED
CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SLAB
OVER FILL RE: STRUCT.
1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - SEAL
2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION
R 12.5 MIN.
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOUNDATION RE: STRUCT
STEEL REINF. RE: STRUCT
6"
EXTEND METAL PANELS
6" BELOW GRADE
C.I.P. CONCRETE
FOOTING RE: STRUCT
LINE OF AIR BARRIER
CREATED BY ASSEMBLY
PAINT
COLOR 1
PAINT
COLOR 2
S1 C1
11
A-6
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:36 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
BUILDING SECTIONS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-5
RADIANT PARK
A-5 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
2 BUILDING SECTION 2
A-5 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
1 BUILDING SECTION 3
A-5 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
3 BUILDING SECTION 1
A-5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 3 A-5
4 WALL SECTION 1
A-5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 2 A-5
5 WALL SECTION 2
A-5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-5
6 WALL SECTION 3
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM W/
1/4" SCRATCH RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE GLAZING BOTH SIDES
STAINLESS STEEL
WRAP FOR CENTER
COLUMN AS ADD ALT
#2
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
APP LIGHTING AND
COORDINATION BY
GC
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
GALVANIZED PREFINISHED
METAL FASCIA
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS AND
TRIM
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER IN
DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
B C
102
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
SYSTEM W/ 1/4" SCRATCH
RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
LOUVER RE: MECH
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
20 GA. STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AND TRIM AS
ADD ALT. #2
STAINLESS STEEL WRAP AS
ADD ALT #2
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
EL.
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
GALVANIZED METAL FASCIA
SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
IN DRYSTACK PATTERN
PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
A B C
102
11' - 2"
12' - 8"
14' - 6"
16' - 8" 16' - 8"
14' - 6"
12' - 8"
LOUVER
RE: MECH
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
SYSTEM W/ 1/4" SCRATCH
RESISTANT INSULATED
POLY CARBONATE
GLAZING BOTH SIDES
SOLAR PANELS RE:ELEC
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
ART IN PUBLIC PLACES
MEDALLIONS INSTALLED
BY OTHERS - GC TO
COORDINATE
APP ELECTRICAL BY GC
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
20 GA. STAINLESS
STEEL PANELS AS ADD
ALT. #2
GALVANIZED METAL FASCIA
20 GA. GALVANIZED
STEEL PANELS
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
BOULDERS, TYP.
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
GALVANIZED STEEL
BEAMS RE: STRUCT
FULLY WELD AND CAP
STAINLESS STEEL
COLUMN RE: STRUCT
AS ADD ALT. #2 (TYP 6
SHELTER COLUMNS
STAINLESS STEEL
WRAP FOR CENTER
COLUMN AS ADD ALT
#2
STAINLESS STEEL METAL
FASCIA AS ADD ALT. #2
20 GA. STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AS ADD ALT. #2
LOCATE LIGHTS IN
BOULDERS F.V.
LOCATION
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
1/4" = 1'-0"
3/15/2012 9:01:32 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
BUILDING ELEVATIONS
1143.06
03/12/12 A-4
RADIANT PARK
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
1 EAST ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
2 NORTH ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
3 SOUTH ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
4 WEST ELEVATION
A-4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE:
5 SHELTER ELEVATION
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
1/4" = 1'-0"
3/15/2012 9:01:25 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
1143.06
03/12/12 A-3
RADIANT PARK
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
SHELTER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
R 10' - 0"
20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL
PANELS IN 4x10 SHEETS W/ MIN.
OVERLAP OF 2". USE ROOFING
CEMENT AT ALL SEAMS
NOTE: INSTALL STEEL PANELS IN
SHINGLE PATTERN FOR
WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION.
LAYOUT SCREW PATTERN FOR
CONSISTANT PATTERN 6" O.C.
EACH WAY
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
1/4" = 1'-0"
3/15/2012 9:01:24 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
ROOF PLAN
1143.06
03/12/12 A-2
RADIANT PARK
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
ROOF PLAN
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
ROOF PLAN - SHELTER
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
GENERAL NOTE:
ALL SPOT ELEVATIONS ARE TO THE TOP OF THE ROOF.
S.S. MIRROR, TYP
FLOOR DRAIN RE: MECH.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
FLOOR W/ INTEGRAL COLOR.
SLOPE FLOOR TO DRAINS
1/8"/FT. - SEAL (TYP)
GALVANIZED STEEL
COLUMN RE:
STRUCTURAL
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTERTOP (TYP)
STAINLESS STEEL
GRAB BARS (TYP)
A-7
1
A-7
2
101 A-6
2
A-6
1
7
A-7
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
W/ JUG FILLER
OPTION
EW2 EW1
EW2
EW2
EW1
EW2
23' - 4"
23' - 4"
A-7
19
A-7
20
A-7
21
LANDSCAPE AREA
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
RE: LANDSCAPE
SURFACE MOUNT
FIRE EXTINGUISHER HAND DRYER RE: ELEC
HAND DRYER
RE: ELEC
KNOX BOX MOUNTED
6'-0" HIGH TO CENTER
OF OPERATING DOOR
OR AS REQ'D BY
GOVERNING AGENCY
4" DIAMETER EMT
DOWNSPOUT SS TUBE
AS ADD ALT. #2
UPLIGHTING
RE: ELECTRICAL
STAINLESS STEEL WRAP
AS ADD ALTERNATE #2
STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AS ADD
ALTERNATE #2 (TYP.)
STAINLESS STEEL
PANELS AS ADD
ALTERNATE #2 (TYP.)
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
OUTLINE OF ROOF ABOVE
BOULDERS TYP.
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
GALVANIZED STEEL COLUMN RE:
STRUCTURAL. STAINLESS STEEL
COLUMN AS ADD ALTERNATE #2
R 10' - 0"
R 4' - 0"
PICNIC TABLE
RE: LANDSCAPE PLAN
WRAP COLUMN WITH
STAINLESS STEEL AS ADD
ALTERNATE #2
LOCATE LIGHT
FIXTURES IN
BOULDERS
RE:ELECTRICAL
Spot Elevation
Window Type
Drawing Title
Drawing Number
1
A1
Wall Elevation
1
A1
Detail
1
A1
Building Section
1
A1
Wall Section
A
Grid Line
ROOM NAME
?
A
1
A1 1/4" = 1'-0"
DWG TTL
Sheet Number
Scale
Room Name
Room Number
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS
MATERIALS
Dimensional Wood Steel Gypsum Board Batt Insulation
Wood Blocking Cast In Place Conc. Rigid Insulation Precast Concrete
Finish Wood Concrete Masonry Earth Granular Fill
Plywood Brick Stone
PROPOSED BUILDING DESCRIPTION & USE:
RESTROOM - 1 STORY, 520 SQ. FT.
SHELTER - 1 STORY, 802 SQ. FT.
PROPOSED BUILDING:
BUILDING HEIGHT: RESTROOM - 15' - 5" TOP OF ROOF
SHELTER - 20' - 0" TOP OF STRUCTURE
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: TYPE VB
TYPE OF OCCUPANCY: B
FIRE PROTECTION: NA
TOTAL NUMBER OF STORIES: 1
BUILDING AREA:
RESTROOM - FIRST FLOOR: 520 SQ. FT.
SHELTER - FIRST FLOOR - 802 SQ. FT.
TOTAL AREA OF PROPOSED BUILDING:
RESTROOM - 520 SQ. FT.
SHELTER - 802 SQ. FT.
BUILDING SUMMARY
1. DIMENSIONS ARE MEASURED FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FRAMING TO OUTSIDE FACE OF FRAMING,
CMU, OR GRID LINE.
2. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF THE
(FILL IN CODE BEING USED), MECHANICAL CODE AND NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, ALL CURRENT
EDITIONS.
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW THE DRAWINGS, FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND VERIFY
ALL ASPECTS OF THIS PROJECT PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE OF ANY DISCREPANCIES.
4. CLEAN ENTIRE AREA AFFECTED BY CONSTRUCTION.
5. ALL MATERIALS TO BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED.
6. SUBMIT CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING PLAN
7. AIR TIGHTNESS TESTING REQUIRED
8. FLUSH OUT BUILDING CONTINUOUSLY FOR 14 DAYS
GENERAL NOTES:
4 1/2"
LED LIGHT FIXTURE RE: ELEC
CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE
CONCRETE OR GROUT W/
INTEGRAL 'ORANGE' COLOR
GRAVEL
CONDUIT ADAPTER
CONDUIT (PER MANF. CABLE WILL
EXIT LUMINAIRE BODY 90° TO
LEFT OF TARGET DIRECTION)
OPENING IN SLAB FORMED
WITH SONOTUBE
SECTION 6"
PRINTED: FILE NAME:
Sheet
Scale
Project
Date
Revision/Issue
Project Name and Address
Firm Name and Address
No. Date
General Notes
Park Planning & Development
215 North Mason Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80522
tel 970 221 6360
fax 970 221 6586
www.fcgov.com/parkplanning/
1. ADD ALTERNATE #2 TO CHANGE EXPOSED GALVANIZED
STEEL COLUMNS, CLADDING, SOFFITS, CEILINGS & FASCIAS
TO # 4 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL. COLUMNS OVER 6" Ø
WILL BE WRAPPED W/ "Z" FURRING AND ROLLED # 4
BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL SHEETS
As indicated
3/15/2012 9:01:23 AM 1143.06 - CFC Radiant Park - CD.rvt
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
1143.06
03/12/12 A-1
RADIANT PARK
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
SCALE:
NORTH
1/4" = 1'-0"
SHELTER
SYSTEM NOTES
MARK NOTES
C1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN WOOD FURRING
STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
EW1 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH ON AIR
INFILTRATION BARRIER OVER 2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS
ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL
NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW2 SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER ON SCRATCH COAT ON GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER 2 1/2"
RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2" METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY AT 24"
O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK OVER SYNTHETIC STONE VENEER
EW3 20 GA. STEEL PANELS ON AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER ON RIGID INSULATION BETWEEN 2 1/2"
METAL 'Z' CHANNELS ORIENTATED VERTICALLY @ 24" O.C. ON 8" CMU BLOCK WALL. FOAM-IN
INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS. FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU W/ PAINT.
EW4 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PANEL ENCLOSURE.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. REFERENCE
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON ICE & WATER MEMBRANE OVER 1/4" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS.
S1 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" WOOD FURRING STRIPS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK.
S2 20 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PANELS ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. PAINT.
A-1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE:
3 DTL - RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE
indicated on the grading plans.
G. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1-2" inch diameter in size.
H. Coordinate grading of subgrade to the following depths: